Omni 6600

Welcome to Omni Flow Computers’

User Manual for Revisions 20/24.71.Each of the selectable buttons allows

for easy access to your area of interest.

Measure the Difference!®Effective April 1998

Basic Operation

System Architectureand Installation

Configuration andAdvanced O peration

Modbus Database Addressesand Index Numbers

Technical Bulletins

Firmware Revisions 20/24.71Liquid: Turbine/PD/ Coriolis Meterswith K Factor Factor/Viscosity Linearization

Volume 5 Compendium of Technical Bulletins

ALL.71+ 04/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. 1

About Our CompanyOmni Flow Computers, Inc. is the world’s leading manufacturer and supplier ofpanel-mount custody transfer flow computers and controllers. Our mission is tocontinue to achieve higher levels of customer and user satisfaction by applyingthe basic company values: our people, our products and productivity.

Our products have become the international flow computing standard. OmniFlow Computers pursues a policy of product development and continuousimprovement. As a result, our flow computers are considered the “brain” and“cash register” of liquid and gas flow metering systems.

Our staff is knowledgeable and professional. They represent the energy,intelligence and strength of our company, adding value to our products andservices. With the customer and user in mind, we are committed to quality ineverything we do, devoting our efforts to deliver workmanship of high caliber.Teamwork with uncompromising integrity is our lifestyle.

Contacting Our Corporate Headquarters

Omni Flow Computers, Inc.10701 Corporate Drive, Suite 300Stafford, Texas 77477 USA

Phone:

Fax:

281-240-6161

281-240-6162

World-wide Web Site:

http://www.omniflow.com

E-mail Addresses:

[email protected]

[email protected]

Getting User SupportTechnical and sales support is available world-wide through our corporate orauthorized representative offices. If you require user support, please contact thelocation nearest you or our corporate offices. Our staff and representatives willenthusiastically work with you to ensure the sound operation of your flowcomputer.

Measure the Difference!

Omni flow computers -Our products are currentlybeing used world-wide at: Offshore oil and gas

production facilities Crude oil, refined

products, LPG, NGL andgas transmission lines

Storage, truck andmarine loading/offloadingterminals

Refineries;petrochemical andcogeneration plants.

Omni 6000/Omni 3000 User Manual Manual Guide

2 OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.ALL.71+ 04/98

About the Flow Computer ApplicationsOmni 6000 and Omni 3000 Flow Computers are integrable into the majority ofliquid and gas flow measurement and control systems. The current applicationrevisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers are:

Revision 20/24.71: Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid FlowMetering Systems (with K Factor Linearization -US/metric units)

Revision 21/25.71: Orifice/Differential Pressure Liquid Flow MeteringSystems (US/metric units)

Revision 22/26.71: Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid Flow MeteringSystems (with Meter Factor Linearization - US/metricunits)

Revision 23/27.71: Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems(US/metric units)

About the User ManualThis manual applies to Versions .71+ application revisions of Omni 6000 andOmni 3000 Flow Computers. It is structured into 5 volumes and is the principalpart of your flow computer documentation.

Target AudienceAs a user’s reference guide, this manual is intended for a sophisticated audiencewith knowledge of liquid and gas flow measurement technology. Different userlevels of technical know-how are considered in this manual. You need not be anexpert to operate the flow computer or use certain portions of this manual.However, some flow computer features require a certain degree of expertiseand/or advanced knowledge of liquid and gas flow instrumentation and electronicmeasurement. In general, each volume is directed towards the following users:

Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation♦ Installers♦ System/Project Managers♦ Engineers/Programmers♦ Advanced Operators♦ Operators

Volume 2. Basic Operation♦ All Users

Volume 3. Configuration and Advanced Operation♦ Engineers/Programmers♦ Advanced Operators

Volume 4. Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers♦ Engineers/Programmers♦ Advanced Operators

Volume 5. Technical Bulletins♦ Users with different levels of expertise.



Manual StructureThe User Manual comprises 5 volumes; each contained in separate binding foreasy manipulation. You will find a detailed table of contents at the beginning ofeach volume.

Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation

Volume 1 is generic to all applications and considers both US and metric units.This volume describes:

Basic hardware/software features Installation practices Calibration procedures Flow computer specifications

Volume 2. Basic Operation

This volume is application specific and is available in four separate versions (onefor each application revision). It covers the essential and routine tasks andprocedures that may be performed by the flow computer operator. Both US andmetric units are considered.

General computer-related features are described, such as:

Overview of keypad functions Adjusting the display Clearing and viewing alarms Computer totalizing Printing and customizing reports

The application-related topics may include:

Batching operations Proving functions PID control functions Audit trail Other application specific functions

Depending on your application, some of these topics may not be included in yourspecific documentation. An index of display variables and corresponding keypress sequences that are specific to your application are listed at the end ofeach version of this volume.

Volume 3. Configuration and Advanced Operation

Volume 3 is intended for the advanced user. It refers to application specifictopics and is available in four separate versions (one for each applicationrevision). This volume covers:

Application overview Flow computer configuration data entry User-programmable functions Modbus Protocol implementation Flow equations and algorithms

User ReferenceDocumentation - The UserManual is structured intofive volumes. Volumes 1and 5 are generic to all flowcomputer applicationrevisions. Volumes 2, 3 and4 are application specific.These have four versionseach, published in separatedocuments; i.e., one perapplication revision pervolume. You will receive theversion that corresponds toyour application revision.The volumes respective toeach application revisionare:Revision 20/24.71:

Volume #s 2a, 3a, 4aRevision 21/25.71:

Volume #s 2b, 3b, 4bRevision 22/26.71:

Volume #s 2c, 3c, 4cRevision 23/27.71:

Volume #s 2d, 3d, 4dFor example, if your flowcomputer applicationrevision is 20/24.71, you willbe supplied with Volumes2a, 3a & 4a, along withVolumes 1 & 5.



Volume 4. Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers

Volume 4 is intended for the system programmer (advanced user). It comprisesa descriptive list of database point assignments in numerical order, within ourfirmware. This volume is application specific, for which there is one version perapplication revision.

Volume 5. Technical Bulletins

Volume 5 includes technical bulletins that contain important complementaryinformation about your flow computer hardware and software. Each bulletincovers a topic that may be generic to all applications or specific to a particularrevision. They include product updates, theoretical descriptions, technicalspecifications, procedures, and other information of interest.

This is the most dynamic and current volume. Technical bulletins may be addedto this volume after its publication. You can view and print these bulletins fromour website.

Conventions Used in this ManualSeveral typographical conventions have been established as standard referenceto highlight information that may be important to the reader. These will allow youto quickly identify distinct types of information.

CONVENTION USED DESCRIPTION

Sidebar Notes / InfoTips

Example:

INFO - Sidebar notes are used tohighlight important information ina concise manner.

Sidebar notes or “InfoTips” consist of conciseinformation of interest which is enclosed in a gray-shaded box placed on the left margin of a page.These refer to topics that are either next to them, oron the same or facing page. It is highlyrecommended that you read them.

Keys / KeypressSequences

Example:

[Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [ n]

Keys on the flow computer keypad are denoted withbrackets and bold face characters (e.g.: the ‘uparrow’ key is denoted as []). The actual function ofthe key as it is labeled on the keypad is whatappears between brackets. Keypress sequencesthat are executed from the flow computer keypad areexpressed in a series of keys separated by a space(as shown in the example).

Screen Displays

Example:

Sample screens that correspond to the flowcomputer display appear surrounded by a dark grayborder with the text in bold face characters andmono-spaced font. The flow computer display isactually 4 lines by 20 characters. Screens that aremore than 4 lines must be scrolled to reveal the textshown in the manual.

Manual Updates andTechnical Bulletins -Volume 5 of the UserManual is a compendium ofTechnical Bulletins. Theycontain updates to the usermanual. You can view andprint updates from ourwebsite:http://www.omniflow.com

TypographicalConventions - These arestandard graphical/textelements used to denotetypes of information. Foryour convenience, a fewconventions whereestablished in the manual’slayout design. Thesehighlight importantinformation of interest to thereader and are easilycaught by the eye.



CONVENTION USED DESCRIPTION

Headings

Example:

2. Chapter Heading

2.3. Section Heading

2.3.1. Subsection Heading

Sequential heading numbering is used to categorizetopics within each volume of the User Manual. Thehighest heading level is a chapter, which is dividedinto sections, which are likewise subdivided intosubsections. Among other benefits, this facilitatesinformation organization and cross-referencing.

Figure Captions

Example:

Fig. 2-3. Figure No. 3 ofChapter 2

Figure captions are numbered in sequence as theyappear in each chapter. The first number identifiesthe chapter, followed by the sequence number andtitle of the illustration.

Page Numbers

Example:

2-8

Page numbering restarts at the beginning of everychapter and technical bulletin. Page numbers arepreceded by the chapter number followed by ahyphen. Technical bulletins only indicate the pagenumber of that bulletin. Page numbers are locatedon the outside margin in the footer of each page.

Application Revision andEffective Publication Date

Examples:

All.71 03/98

20/24.71 03/98

21/25.71 03/98

22/26.71 03/98

23/27.71 03/98

The contents of Volume 1 and Volume 5 arecommon to all application revisions and are denotedas All.71 . Content of Volumes 2, 3 and 4 areapplication specific and are identified with theapplication number. These identifiers are includedon every page in the inside margin of the footer,opposite the page number. The publication/effectivedate of the manual follows the applicationidentification. The date is expressed as month/year(e.g.: March 1998 is 03/98).

Trademark ReferencesThe following are trademarks of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.:

Omni 3000 Omni 6000

OmniCom

Other brand, product and company names that appear in this manual aretrademarks of their respective owners.



Copyright Information and Modifications PolicyThis manual is copyright protected. All rights reserved. No part of this manualmay be used or reproduced in any form, or stored in any database or retrievalsystem, without prior written consent of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Stafford,Texas, USA. Making copies of any part of this manual for any purpose other thanyour own personal use is a violation of United States copyright laws andinternational treaty provisions.

Omni Flow Computers, Inc., in conformance with its policy of productdevelopment and improvement, may make any necessary changes to thisdocument without notice.

Warranty, Licenses and Product RegistrationProduct warranty and licenses for use of Omni Flow Computer Firmware and ofOmniCom Configuration PC Software are included in the first pages of eachVolume of this manual. We require that you read this information before usingyour Omni Flow Computer and the supplied software and documentation.

If you have not done so already, please complete and return to us the productregistration form included with your flow computer. We need this information forwarranty purposes, to render you technical support and serve you in futureupgrades. Registered users will also receive important updates and informationabout their flow computer and metering system.

Copyright 1991-1998 by Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

Important!

Volume 1 System Architecture and Installation

ALL.71+ w 04/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. i

SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ANDINSTALLATION

Contents of Volume 1

Figures of Volume 1 ........................................................................................................ vi

1. Overview of Hardware and Software Features ....................................................... 1-1

1.1. Introduction.............................................................................................................1-1

1.2. Operator’s Panel.....................................................................................................1-2

1.2.1. LCD Display ........................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2.2. Electromechanical Totalizers................................................................................ 1-2

1.2.3. Diagnostic and Program LEDs ............................................................................. 1-2

1.2.4. Active Alarm LED................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2.5. Alpha Shift LED ..................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2.6. Operator Keypad ................................................................................................... 1-2

1.3. Passive Backplane Mother Board .........................................................................1-4

1.4. Back Panel Terminal Module .................................................................................1-6

1.4.1. Back Panel Terminations ...................................................................................... 1-6

1.4.2. Extended Back Panel ............................................................................................ 1-7

1.5. Central Processor Module......................................................................................1-8

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 User Manual Contents of Volume 1

ii OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.ALL.71+ w 04/98

1.6. Input/Output (I/O) Modules..................................................................................... 1-9

1.6.1. Photo-Optical Isolation........................................................................................1-10

1.6.2. Digital I/O Modules...............................................................................................1-11

1.6.3. Serial Communication Modules ..........................................................................1-12RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205.......................................................1-12Dual RS-232-Compatible Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005 ..................................1-15Serial Port Assignments ...........................................................................................1-15

1.6.4. Process I/O Combination Modules .....................................................................1-16

1.7. Operating Power .................................................................................................. 1-17

1.8. Firmware and Software........................................................................................ 1-19

1.8.1. Interrupt-Driven CPU............................................................................................1-19

1.8.2. Cycle Time............................................................................................................1-19

1.8.3. On-line Diagnostics and Calibration...................................................................1-19

1.8.4. PC Communications Interface.............................................................................1-19

1.8.5. OmniCom Configuration PC Software..............................................................1-20

1.8.6. Year 2000 Compliance .........................................................................................1-20

1.9. Initializing Your Flow Computer .......................................................................... 1-21

2. Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup............................................................. 2-1

2.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................ 2-1

2.2. Features of the I/O Combo Modules ..................................................................... 2-1

2.2.1. Setting the Address of the Combo Modules ........................................................2-2

2.2.2. Hardware Analog Configuration Jumpers ............................................................2-2

2.2.3. Process I/O Combo Module Addresses Versus Physical I/O Points..................2-2

2.2.4. Assigning Specific Signal Inputs..........................................................................2-3

2.2.5. Sample Omni Flow Computer Configuration Charts ...........................................2-4

2.3. The A and B Combo I/O Modules .......................................................................... 2-6

2.3.1. A and B Combo Module Non-Selectable or Selectable Address.........................2-7

2.3.2. The A Type Combo I/O Module .............................................................................2-8

2.3.3. The B Type Combo I/O Module ...........................................................................2-10

2.4. The E/D and E Combo Modules........................................................................... 2-11

2.4.1. The E/D Type Combo I/O Module........................................................................2-11

2.4.2. The E Type Combo I/O Module ...........................................................................2-12

2.5. The H Type Combo I/O Module............................................................................ 2-13

2.6. The HV Type Combo I/O Module ......................................................................... 2-15

2.7. The SV Type Combo I/O Module ......................................................................... 2-16


ALL.71+ w 04/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. iii

3. Mounting and Power Options................................................................................... 3-1

3.1. Mechanical Installation...........................................................................................3-1

3.1.1. Panel Mounting...................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.2. Nema 4 / 4X Configurations .................................................................................. 3-2

3.1.3. Nema 7 Specification............................................................................................. 3-2

3.2. Input Power .............................................................................................................3-3

3.2.1. AC Power ............................................................................................................... 3-3

3.2.2. DC Power ............................................................................................................... 3-3

3.2.3. Safety Considerations........................................................................................... 3-3

3.3. Power Terminals .....................................................................................................3-4

3.3.1. CE Equipment Power Terminals........................................................................... 3-4

3.3.2. Extended Back Panel Power Terminals ............................................................... 3-5

3.4. Power Supply Module Switching Regulator..........................................................3-7

4. Connecting to Flowmeters ....................................................................................... 4-1

4.1. Turbine Flowmeter (A or B Combo Module)..........................................................4-1

4.2. Wiring Flowmeter Signals to E Type Combo Modules .........................................4-2

4.3. Faure Herman Turbine Meters (E Combo Module) ............................................4-3

4.4. Pulse Fidelity and Integrity Checking with E Type Combo Modules...................4-4

5. Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters........................................................ 5-1

5.1. Wiring the Input Transducers ................................................................................5-1

5.2. Wiring of a Dry ‘C’ Type Contact ...........................................................................5-2

5.3. Wiring RTD Probes .................................................................................................5-3

5.4. Wiring Densitometers .............................................................................................5-4

5.4.1. Wiring Densitometer Signals to an E/D Type Combo Module ............................ 5-4

5.4.2. Solartron Densitometers .................................................................................... 5-4

5.4.3. Sarasota Densitometers ..................................................................................... 5-6

5.4.4. UGC Densitometers ............................................................................................ 5-8

5.5. Wiring of Honeywell ST3000 Transmitters .......................................................5-10

5.6. Wiring Micro Motion Transmitters.....................................................................5-11

5.6.1. Connecting Micro Motion RFT9739 Transmitter to A Type or E TypeProcess I/O Combination Modules ..................................................................... 5-11

5.6.2. Connecting Micro Motion RFT 9739 via RS-485 Serial Communications...... 5-12

5.6.3. Connecting Micro Motion RFT9739 via Serial RS-232-C to 485 Converter .... 5-13


iv OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.ALL.71+ w 04/98

6. Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers ............... 6-1

6.1. Analog Outputs....................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2. Digital Inputs/Outputs ............................................................................................ 6-2

6.2.1. Wiring a Digital Point as an Input or an Output ...................................................6-2

6.2.2. Connecting Various Digital I/O Devices................................................................6-4

6.3. Provers.................................................................................................................... 6-5

6.3.1. Connecting Pipe Prover Detector Switches .........................................................6-5

6.3.2. Interfacing to a Brooks Compact Prover ...........................................................6-5

6.3.3. Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks Compact Prover.......................6-6

7. Connecting to Serial Devices .................................................................................. 7-1

7.1. Serial Port Connection Options ............................................................................ 7-1

7.2. Connecting to Printers........................................................................................... 7-2

7.2.1. Connecting to a Dedicated Printer (Port 1)...........................................................7-2

7.2.2. Connecting to a Shared Printer (Port 1) ...............................................................7-3

7.2.3. Print Sharing Problems .........................................................................................7-3

7.3. Connecting to a Personal Computer and Modem................................................ 7-4

7.4. Peer-to-Peer Communications and Multi-drop Modes......................................... 7-6

7.4.1. Peer-to-Peer RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop Mode ..................................................7-6

7.4.2. Peer-to-Peer via RS-232-C Communications........................................................7-7

7.4.3. Keying the Modem or Radio Transmitter Carrier in Multi-drop Applications.....7-7

7.4.4. RS-485 Four-wire Multi-drop Mode .......................................................................7-8

7.5. Connecting to a SCADA Device ............................................................................ 7-9

7.6. Interfacing the Fourth Serial Port to an Allen-Bradley KE Module................. 7-10

8. Diagnostic and Calibration Features....................................................................... 8-1

8.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................ 8-1

8.2. Calibrating in the Diagnostic Mode....................................................................... 8-2

8.2.1. Entering The Diagnostic Mode..............................................................................8-2

8.2.2. Display Groups in the Diagnostic Mode...............................................................8-3

8.2.3. Leaving The Diagnostic Mode...............................................................................8-3


ALL.71+ w 04/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. v

8.3. Calibration Instructions..........................................................................................8-4

8.3.1. Calibrating A Voltage or Current Analog Input.................................................... 8-4

8.3.2. Calibrating an RTD Input Channel........................................................................ 8-5

8.3.3. Calibrating a 4 to 20 mA Digital to Analog Output .............................................. 8-7

8.3.4. Verifying the Operation of the Digital I/O Points ................................................. 8-8

9. Flow Computer Specifications ............................................................................... 9-1

9.1. Environmental.........................................................................................................9-1

9.2. Electrical..................................................................................................................9-1

9.3. Microprocessor CPU ..............................................................................................9-1

9.4. Backplane ...............................................................................................................9-2

9.5. Process Input/Output Combo Modules .................................................................9-2

9.6. Flowmeter Pulse Inputs..........................................................................................9-2

9.7. Detector Switch Inputs ...........................................................................................9-3

9.8. Detector Switch Inputs of E Combo Module .........................................................9-3

9.9. Analog Inputs ..........................................................................................................9-3

9.10. RTD Inputs ............................................................................................................9-3

9.11. Analog Outputs .....................................................................................................9-4

9.12. Control Outputs/Status Inputs .............................................................................9-4

9.13. Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface................................................................................9-5

9.13.1. RS-232 Compatible .............................................................................................. 9-5

9.13.2. RS-485 .................................................................................................................. 9-5

9.14. Operator Keypad ..................................................................................................9-5

9.15. LCD Display...........................................................................................................9-5

9.16. Electromechanical Counters................................................................................9-6

9.17. Operating Mode Indicator LEDs...........................................................................9-6

9.18. Security .................................................................................................................9-6


vi OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.ALL.71+ w 04/98

Figures of Volume 1Fig. 1-1. Features of the Operator Front Panel ....................................................................................1-3

Fig. 1-2. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 3000 .........................................................................1-4

Fig. 1-3. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 6000 .........................................................................1-5

Fig. 1-4. Back Panel Terminations Omni 6000 and Omni 3000............................................................1-6

Fig. 1-5. Extended Back Panel - Omni 6000 (left); Omni 3000 (right) ..................................................1-7

Fig. 1-6. Central Processor Module - Jumper Settings .........................................................................1-8

Fig. 1-7. Matching the I/O Modules to the Back Panel Terminations ....................................................1-9

Fig. 1-8. Photo-optical Isolation - How It Works .................................................................................1-10

Fig. 1-9. Digital I/O Module Model # 6011 - Jumper Settings .............................................................1-11

Fig. 1-10. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 Showing Selection Jumpers and LED Indicators.................1-12

Fig. 1-11. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats....................................................1-13

Fig. 1-12. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232/485 Module #68-6205....................................................1-14

Fig. 1-13. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model - Jumper Settings...................................................1-15

Fig. 1-14. Power Supply Module Model # 68-6118.............................................................................1-18

Fig. 2-1. Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 3000..................................................................2-4

Fig. 2-2. Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 6000..................................................................2-5

Fig. 2-3. The A and B Combo I/O Module - Configuration Jumpers .....................................................2-6

Fig. 2-4. A and B Combo Module - Non-Selectable / Selectable Address.............................................2-7

Fig. 2-5. A Type Combo Module - Flow Pulse Jumper Settings (Channel 3 or Channel 4) ...................2-8

Fig. 2-6. A Type Combo Module - Analog Input Jumper Settings.........................................................2-9

Fig. 2-7. B Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings - Frequency Densitometer Setup ........................2-10

Fig. 2-8. E/D Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ........................................................................2-11

Fig. 2-9. E Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ...........................................................................2-12

Fig. 2-10. H Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings .........................................................................2-13

Fig. 2-11. HV Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings .......................................................................2-15

Fig. 2-12. Omni Multivariable Interface (SV Type Combo) Module Model 68-6203 - Jumper Settings2-16

Fig. 3-1. Panel Mounting - Omni 6000 (upper), Omni 3000 (lower) ......................................................3-1

Fig. 3-2. Input Power Terminals - Omni 3000 (upper), Omni 6000 (lower) ...........................................3-4

Fig. 3-3. Input Power Terminals - Extended Back Panel (Omni 6000 only) ..........................................3-5

Fig. 3-4. Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 6000)....................................................3-6

Fig. 3-5. Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 3000)....................................................3-6

Fig. 3-6. Power Supply Module Model 68-6118....................................................................................3-7


ALL.71+ w 04/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. vii

Fig. 4-1. Connecting to a Turbine Pre-amp (A or B Combo Modules) .................................................. 4-1

Fig. 4-2. Wiring to Turbine Pre-Amps (E Type Combo Modules Only)................................................. 4-2

Fig. 4-3. Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using Omni 24 VDC......................................................... 4-3

Fig. 4-4. Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using External 24 VDC ................................................. 4-3

Fig. 4-5. Connecting Dual Coil Turbines for Pulse Fidelity Checking ................................................... 4-4

Fig. 5-1. Wiring the 4-20 mA Inputs (Input Channels 1 & 2 shown)...................................................... 5-1

Fig. 5-2. Wiring for Dry C Type Contact .............................................................................................. 5-2

Fig. 5-3. Wiring a 4-Wire RTD Temperature Probe ............................................................................. 5-3

Fig. 5-4. Wiring a Solartron Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module ...... 5-4

Fig. 5-5. Wiring a Solartron Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module . 5-5

Fig. 5-6. Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module....... 5-6

Fig. 5-7. Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module.. 5-7

Fig. 5-8. Wiring a UGC Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module............. 5-8

Fig. 5-9. Wiring a UGC Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module........ 5-9

Fig. 5-10. Wiring of a Honeywell Smart Transmitter ....................................................................... 5-10

Fig. 5-11. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter .............. 5-11

Fig. 5-12. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter ViaTwo-wire RS-485 Communications (Serial I/O Module #68-6205) ...................................... 5-12

Fig. 5-13. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter Via SerialRS-485 Converter.............................................................................................................. 5-13

Fig. 6-1. Wiring Devices to the Flow Computer’s Analog Outputs........................................................ 6-1

Fig. 6-2. Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Input ................................................................................ 6-2

Fig. 6-3. Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Output.............................................................................. 6-3

Fig. 6-4. Connecting Digital I/O Devices to the Flow Computer ........................................................... 6-4

Fig. 6-5. Wiring to a Brooks Compact Prover ................................................................................... 6-5

Fig. 6-6. Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks Compact Prover ........................................... 6-6


viii OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.ALL.71+ w 04/98

Fig. 7-1. Connecting a Printer to Serial Port #1 of the Flow Computer .................................................7-2

Fig. 7-2. Connecting Several Flow Computers to a Shared Printer ......................................................7-3

Fig. 7-3. Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB25 Female Connector (Using Port #2 as anexample)................................................................................................................................7-4

Fig. 7-4. Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB9 Female Connector .........................................7-5

Fig. 7-5. Connecting Port #2 to a Modem ............................................................................................7-5

Fig. 7-6. Wiring of Several Flow Computers using the Peer-to-Peer Feature via RS-485Communications in Two-wire Multi-drop Mode.......................................................................7-6

Fig. 7-7. Wiring of Several Flow Computers in the Peer-to-Peer Mode using RS-232-CCommunications. ...................................................................................................................7-7

Fig. 7-8. Wiring of Multiple Flow Computers to a PLC Device Via RS-485 Communications inFour-wire Multi-drop Mode .....................................................................................................7-8

Fig. 7-9. Typical Wiring of Port #3 to a SCADA Device via Modem .....................................................7-9

Fig. 7-10. Wiring Serial Port #4 to Allen-Bradley KE Communications Module................................7-10

Fig. 8-1. Figure Showing Calibration of RTD Input Channel.................................................................8-6


ALL.71+ w 04/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. 1-1

1. Overview of Hardware and SoftwareFeatures

1.1. IntroductionOmni 3000 and Omni 6000 Flow Computers are reliable, easy to use,uniquely versatile measurement instruments. They are factory-programmed forsingle or multiple meter run configurations to measure crude oils, refinedproducts, NGLs, LPGs, ethylene, propylene, natural gas, and specialty gases.Measurement of other flowing products can also be provided.

Extensive communications capability enables the Omni 6000 to be used in avariety of Master/Slave configurations for high-speed data transfer applications,and as a large communication submaster. The flow computer can also behardware configured as a medium-size Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) withsignificant digital I/O capability.

Your Omni Flow Computer connects to various sensors monitoring pipeline flowin your transmission, petrochemical or process measurement application. Itcalculates, displays and prints data that will be used for operational or billingfunctions.

The computer is configured to match your piping system requirements. Its non-restrictive bus design permits any combination of inputs and outputs to meetmost metering, flow and valve control, and communication requirements.

Plug-in modules furnish the input and output channels as needed and providean assurance of maximum product life by higher accuracy measurementtechnologies such as meter pulse fidelity checking, and Rosemount andHoneywell digital transmitter interface modules. Up to 4 serial ports in somemodels are available for printing reports and other communications tasks. AllI/O modules are quality tested and temperature trimmed to optimize the 14-bitanalog resolution, and burned-in before shipment for field installation.

BASIC FEATURES - Omniflow computers areapplicable to liquid and gasflow measurement, controland communication systems,and custody transferoperations. It’s basic featuresare:q 32-bit processing with

math co-processor forfast, multi-taskingexecution

q 500 msec calculationcycle

q Plug-in, assignable digital,serial and combination I/Omodules

q Point-to-point digitaltransmitter interface

q 14-bit A/Ds, temperaturetrimmed

q No I/O multiplexers, nopotentiometers

q Photo-optical Isolation ofeach I/O point

q Meter pulse fidelitychecking

q Optional Honeywell andRosemount digitaltransmitter interfacemodules

q Dual LEDs indicateactive/fused digital I/O

q Selectable digital I/O,individually fused

q Standard, field-provenfirmware no need forcustom programming

q User-configurable controllogic

q Up to 4 flow/pressurecontrol loops

q User-configurablevariables for displays andreports

(Continues…)

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 User Manual For Your Information

1-2 OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.ALL.71+ w 04/98

1.2. Operator’s PanelThe operator’s panel shown (Fig. 1-1) is standard for all applications and isused to display and enter all data. All data can also be accessed via any of theserial ports.

1.2.1. LCD DisplayThe 4-line by 20-alpha-numeric character, back-lit Liquid Crystal Display isupdated every 200 ms. It displays all messages and system variables in Englishlanguage engineering units. Backlighting and display viewing angle areadjustable from the keypad (press [Setup] then [Display] and follow thedisplayed instructions).

1.2.2. Electromechanical TotalizersThree non-resetable, 6-digit electromechanical counters are included on thefront panel for non-volatile backup totalizing. They can be programmed to countgross, net, mass or energy units at any rate up to 10 counts per second.

1.2.3. Diagnostic and Program LEDsThese dual-color LEDs indicate when the user is in the Diagnostic Modecalibrating the I/O modules, or when in the Program Mode changing theconfiguration of the computer. The LEDs change from green to red after a validpassword is requested and entered. The computer is in the normal DisplayMode when neither of these LEDs are on.

1.2.4. Active Alarm LEDNew unacknowledged alarms cause this LED to glow red. This changes togreen as soon as the alarm is acknowledged by pressing the [Cancel/Ack] keyon the keypad.

1.2.5. Alpha Shift LEDThis LED glows green to show that the next key only will be shifted. A red LEDindicates that the shift lock is on.

1.2.6. Operator KeypadControl of the flow computer is via the 34-button alphanumeric membranekeypad, with tactile domes and audio feedback. Through the keypad you havethe capability to configure your system, access and modify calibration data on-line, and view or print process data. Configuration data can also be enteredremotely by serial port and is stored in battery backed-up CMOS SRAMmemory. Passwords and an internal program inhibit switch provide tamper-proof security.

BASIC FEATURES -(Continued)q Data archive and report

storageq Modbus peer-to-peer

communications to38.4kbps for PLC/DCS

q Real-time dial-up fordiagnostics

q International testingq Includes OmniCom

configuration softwareq Three year warranty

INFO - Pressing the [AlphaShift] key twice will put theshift lock on. The shift lock iscanceled by pressing onemore time or automaticallyafter the [Display/Enter] keyis pressed.

Help System - Thesecomputers are equipped witha powerful context-sensitivehelp system. Press the[Help] key (bottom right)twice to activate the helpdisplays. Cancel the helpscreens by pressing the[Prog] key.



DIAGNOSTIC LEDGlows green when in theDiagnostic Mode. Glows

red when a validpassword is entered.

PROGRAM LEDGlows green when in the

Program Mode. Glows redwhen a valid password is

entered.

DIAG/PROG KEY

Used to accessDiagnostic and Program

Modes.

ARROW KEYS

Used to move the cursorand scroll displays. Alsoused as software ‘zero’

and as span controlduring calibration.

OPERATOR KEYPAD

Has 34 keys, domedmembrane with tactile

and audio feedback.

SPACE/CLEAR /CANCEL/ACK KEY

Used to clear data andinsert spaces in the

Program Mode. It is alsoused to cancel key press

sequences and, in theDisplay Mode,

acknowledge alarms.

Flowrate BBL/HrFT-101 1550.5Cumulative BBLSFT-101 234510

000682 009456 023975

Total A Total B Total C

DiagDiagProgProg

AlphaAlphaShiftShift

Gross

AA&

Net

BB%

Mass

CC77

Energy

DD88

SG/API

EE99

Control

FF/

Temp

GG#

Press

HH$

Density

II44

D.P.

JJ55

Orifice

KK66

Meter

LL

*

Time

MM:

Counts

NN“

Factor

OO11

Preset

PP22

Batch

QQ33

Analysis

RR=

Print

SS;

Prove

TT,

Status

UU00

Alarms

VV..Product

WW--

Setup

XX+

Cancel / Ack

SpaceSpaceClearClear

Input

YY(

Output

ZZ)

Help

Display

EnterEnter

Diagnostic

Program

Active Alarm

Alpha Shift

LCD DISPLAY

Is 4 lines by 20characters. Backlight andviewing angle areadjustable via the keypad.

THREE 6-DIGIT,ELECTROMECHANICALCOUNTERS

These non-resetablecounters are assigned viathe keypad.

ACTIVE ALARM LEDGlows red when a newalarm occurs. Glowsgreen when anacknowledged alarmexists.

ALPHA SHIFT LEDGlows green for a singlecharacter shift. Glows redwhen the shift lock is on.

THREE-FUNCTION KEYS

These activate processvariable or alpha-numericcharacter functions.

DISPLAY/ENTER / HELPKEY

Used to enter a key presssequence and to accessthe Help System.

Fig. 1-1. Features of the Operator Front Panel



1.3. Passive Backplane Mother BoardMounted on the passive backplane are DIN standard connectors which arebussed in two sections. The front section is a high performance, 16-bit buswhich accepts the Central Processor Module. The Omni 6000 computer has 3other connectors available in this section to accept memory expansion andfuture product enhancements.

The rear 8-bit I/O bus section comprises 10 connectors on the Omni 6000 and 4on the Omni 3000, which can accept any type of optically isolated I/O modulemanufactured by Omni. The rearmost connector on both computers accepts thesystem AC/DC power supply module. Dual ribbon cable assemblies (Omni6000) and a single ribbon cable (Omni 3000) connect the I/O connectors on thebackplane to the back panel terminals. (See Fig. 1-2 below and Fig. 1-3 onfacing page.)

INFO - Passive backplanesimply means that no activecircuitry is contained on it.The active circuitry iscontained on the modulesthat plug into it.

CAUTION!

These units have an integralcabinet latching mechanismwhich first must bedisengaged by lifting thebezel upwards, beforewithdrawing the unit from thecase.

Fig. 1-2. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 3000



CAUTION!

These units have an integralcabinet latching mechanismwhich first must bedisengaged by lifting thebezel upwards, beforewithdrawing the unit from thecase.

Fig. 1-3. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 6000



1.4. Back Panel Terminal ModuleThe AC receptacle of the Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 back panel is a power linefilter with a separate AC fuse holder. The AC power is contained on a separatefour-conductor cable which plugs into the power supply. The power supply usedwith this version is a Model 68-6118; no physical fuses (see 1.7. OperatingPower).

1.4.1. Back Panel TerminationsThe Omni 6000 terminal blocks are identified TB1 through TB10 with terminalsmarked 1 through 12 for each block. These provide 120 circuit paths to thepassive backplane. The DC terminals are on TB11.

The Omni 3000 terminal blocks are identified as TB1 through TB4, withterminals marked 1 through 12 for each block. These provide 48 circuit paths tothe passive backplane. The DC terminal is on TB5.

Back Panel Fuses - All DCfuses are 3 amp fast-blowmanufactured by Littlefuse,Model 225.003. All AC fusesare ½ amp slow-blowmanufactured by Littlefuse,Model 229.500.

Fig. 1-4. Back Panel Terminations Omni 6000 and Omni 3000



1.4.2. Extended Back PanelSeveral flow computer mounting options are available with the extended backpanel. Screw type terminals are provided for AC and DC power. Extended 64-conductor ribbon cables and the AC cables are provided with a standard lengthof 5 feet.

For the Omni 6000 (dimensions: 3” x 18”), this panel incorporates all theterminal blocks TB1 through TB10, with terminals marked 1 through 12. Inaddition to the terminal blocks, extra DC (fused), return and shield terminals areprovided for TB1 through TB8.

The Omni 3000 extended back panel (dimensions: 3” x 8½”) also incorporatesall the terminal blocks TB1 through TB4, with terminals marked 1 through 12. Inaddition to the terminal blocks, extra DC (fused), return and shield terminals areprovided for TB1 and TB2.

Extended Back PanelAC/DC Fuses - All DC fusesare ¼ amp fast-blowmanufactured by Littlefuse,Model 225.250. The AC fuseis ½ amp slow-blowmanufactured by Littlefuse,Model 239.500. The fuse forthe back panel’s ACreceptacle is a 5x20mm, ½amp slow-blow.

Fig. 1-5. Extended Back Panel - Omni 6000 (left); Omni 3000 (right)



1.5. Central Processor ModuleThis module contains the Motorola 16/32-bit microprocessor operating at 16MHz, a maximum of 512 kbytes of SRAM memory, 1 Mbyte of EPROMprogram memory, math coprocessor and time of day clock. Positions U3 andU4 on the Central Processor Module contain the program EPROMs. Thehardware real-time clock will continue to operate even when power loss to thecomputer occurs. Time of power failure is logged and printed when the power isrestored.

CAUTION!

POTENTIAL FOR DATALOSS!

RAM Battery Backup -Omni flow computers leavethe factory with a fullycharged Ni-Cd battery asRAM power backup. RAMdata, including userconfiguration and I/Ocalibration data, may be lostif the flow computer isdisconnected from externalpower for more than 30 days.Observe caution whenstoring the flow computerwithout power being appliedfor extended periods of time.The RAM back-up battery isrechargeable and will be fullycharged after power hasbeen applied for 24 hours.

EPROM Size1 OR 4 Meg BitSelect 4 Meg

As Shown

System WatchdogJ3 In = Enabled

J3 Out = Disabled(Always Enabled)

BackupBatttery

MathProcessor Central

ProcessorProgramEPROM

ProgramRAM

ArchiveRAM

J1 J2J3

Fig. 1-6. Central Processor Module - Jumper Settings



1.6. Input/Output (I/O) ModulesOmni flow computers utilize an I/O bus system. All I/O is modular and plug-infor easy field maintenance and replacement. I/O circuitry is also photo-opticallyisolated from all field wiring which makes it relatively immune to electrical noiseand prevents damage to the electronics.

Your Omni Flow Computer has a combination of 3 types of I/O modules:

o Digital I/O Moduleso Serial I/O Moduleso Process I/O Combo Modules

♦ A and B Type Combo Modules♦ E and E/D Type Combo Modules♦ H Type Combo Modules

Almost any combination of I/O mix can be accommodated in the flow computer.The only limitations are the number of I/O connectors (4 on Omni 3000, 10 onOmni 6000) and the number of wires connecting them to the back panel fieldwiring terminals (48 for Omni 3000, 120 for Omni 6000).

Your Omni Flow Computer has a standard order in which the modules areplugged-in (Fig. 1-7; also see Fig. 1-2 and Fig. 1-3). This provides a standardtermination layout.

INFO - Mother boardconnectors do not have aspecific address. These arepre-established at thefactory. Each Omni FlowComputer will be suppliedwith a termination diagramindicating these settings.

Dig

ital

I/O

1 -

12

Dig

ital

I/O

1 -

12

Ser

ial I

/O 1

& 2

Ser

ial I

/O 1

& 2

Ser

ial I

/O 3

& 4

Ser

ial I

/O 3

& 4

Co

mb

o I/

O #

1 C

om

bo

I/O

# 1

Co

mb

o I/

O #

2 C

om

bo

I/O

# 2

Co

mb

o I/

O #

3 C

om

bo

I/O

# 3

Co

mb

o I/

O #

4 C

om

bo

I/O

# 4

Co

mb

o I/

O #

5 C

om

bo

I/O

# 5

Co

mb

o I/

O #

6 C

om

bo

I/O

# 6

Omni 6000Omni 6000TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 TB5

1

1213

24

Dig

ital

I/O

13-

24D

igit

al I/

O 1

3-24

TB6 TB7 TB8 TB9 TB10

Ser

ial I

/O 1

& 2

Ser

ial I

/O 1

& 2

Co

mb

o I/

O #

1 C

om

bo

I/O

# 1

Co

mb

o I/

O #

2 C

om

bo

I/O

# 2

Omni 3000Omni 3000TB1 TB2

1

1213

24

Dig

ital

I/O

1-1

2D

igit

al I/

O 1

-12

TB3 TB4

Fig. 1-7. Matching the I/O Modules to the Back Panel Terminations



1.6.1. Photo-Optical IsolationThe microprocessor circuitry is isolated via photo-optical devices from all fieldwiring to prevent accidental damage to the electronics, including that caused bystatic electricity. Photo-optical isolation also inhibits electrical noise frominducing measurement errors. Independent isolation of each process inputprovides high common-mode rejection, allowing the user greater freedom whenwiring transmitter loops. Furthermore, it minimizes ground loop effects andisolates and protects your flow computer from pipeline EMI and transients.

Photo-Optical Isolation -Transducer signals areconverted by the LED intohigh frequency pulses oflight. These are sensed bythe photo-transistor whichpasses the signal to the flowcomputer.Note that no electricalconnection exists betweenthe transducers and thecomputer circuits.

LED PhotoTransistor

Opto Coupler ICPipelineTransducerSignals ThatMay Pass On

DamagingTransient

Noise

IsolatedTransducer

Signals Passed OnTo SensitiveComputerCircuits

Fig. 1-8. Photo-optical Isolation - How It Works



1.6.2. Digital I/O ModulesInputs and outputs are provided for control of prover functions, remotetotalizing, sampler operation, tube control or injection pump control. A digital I/Omodule is used, providing a total of 12 digital I/O points. Each point can beconfigured independently as an input or output. It is individually fused andincludes LEDs indicating that the point is active or if the fuse is blown.

Sequence and control is provided by assigning outputs to user programmableBoolean variables using simple logic statements involving internal and externalevents, including delay-on timers and delay-off timers. The digital I/O modulenormally occupies I/O Slots 1 and 2 on the Omni 6000 backplane, and I/O Slot1 on Omni 3000.

INFO - Only 1 digital I/Omodule can be used on theOmni 3000 and a maximumof 2 on the Omni 6000.

I/O Point LEDs - Each digitalI/O point has 2 LEDs (greenand red) which indicate itsstatus. A solid glowing greenLED means that the digitalpoint is assigned as an inputand is receiving a signal. Ablinking green LED indicatesit is assigned as an outputand that it is activelycommunicating. A solidglowing red LED denotes thatthe fuse for that I/O point isblown.

Module AddressJumper

Individual Fusesfor Each I/O Point

Interrupt RequestSelect Jumpers for

Pipe Prover Detector

LEDs Indicate PointActive and Fuse Blown

I/O Point#01

#12

Select D2

A5

Select D1

A5

JP1 In = Dig. 1 Rising Edge TriggerJP2 In = Dig. 1 Falling Edge TriggerJP3 In = Dig. 2 Rising Edge TriggerJP4 In = Dig. 2 Falling Edge Trigger

NOTE: If “D2” remove all jumpers

JP1JP2JP3JP4

F3 F2 F1

F6 F5 F4

F8F9 F7

F12 F11 F10

Fig. 1-9. Digital I/O Module Model # 6011 - Jumper Settings



1.6.3. Serial Communication Modules

RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205

Serial I/O Module # 68-6205 is capable of handling two communications portsEach serial communication port is individually optically isolated for maximumcommon-mode and noise rejection. Although providing RS-232C signal levels,the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one serial link.Communication parameters such as baud rate, stop bits and parity settings aresoftware selectable.

In addition to RS-232, jumper selections have been provided on each port toallow selection of RS-485 format. With this option, a total of two RS-485 portsare available on each module.

INFO - Up to 12 flowcomputers and/or othercompatible serial devices canbe multi-dropped usingOmni’s proprietary RS-232-Cserial port. Thirty-twodevices may be connectedwhen using the RS-485mode. Typically, one serialI/O module is used on theOmni 3000, providing twoports. A maximum of twoserial modules can beinstalled in the Omni 6000,providing four ports.

Multivariable TransmittingDevices - In addition to theSerial I/O Module # 68-6205,the flow computer must alsohave an SV Module tocommunicate withmultivariable transmitters.This serial module isjumpered to IRQ 3 whenused in combination with anSV Module. Without an SVModule, the jumper is placedat IRQ 2. The SV Modulecan only be used with thisserial module (68-6205) andis not compatible with theSerial I/O Module # 68-6005.For more information, seeTechnical Bulletin # TB-980303.

Address SelectionJumpers

Address S1Selected

Address S2Selected

IRQ 2 Selected

LED Indicators

Port #2Jumpers

Port #1Jumpers

Fig. 1-10. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 Showing Selection Jumpers andLED Indicators



The RS-232/485 Module has been designed so that RS-232 or RS-485communications standards can be selected by placement of 16-pin resistornetworks into the correct blocks. The following diagrams show the locations ofblocks JB1, JB2, JB3 for Port #1, and JB4, JB5, JB6 for Port #2 for eachformat.

Terminated/Non-terminated RS-485 - TheRS-485 devices located ateach extreme end of an RS-485 run should beterminated. Note that thedevice located at an extremeend may or may not be anOmni Flow Computer.

RS-232 JB1 or JB4 JB3 or JB6 JB2 or JB5

RS-485 RS-485 2-WIRE

RS-485TERMINATED

JB3 or JB6 JB2 or JB5

RS-232

RS-485 2-WIRE

RS-485TERMINATED

JB1 or JB4

RS-485 4-WIRE NON-TERMINATED JB3 or JB6 JB2 or JB5

RS-232

RS-485 2-WIRERS-232/485

NON-TERMINATED

JB1 or JB4

RS-485 4-WIRE TERMINATED


RS-232 RS-232/485 4-WIRE RS-485TERMINATED

JB1 or JB4


RS-232 RS-232/485 4-WIRE

RS-232/485NON-TERMINATED

JB1 or JB4


Fig. 1-11. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats



Omni 6000(Omni 3000)

TerminalTB3 (TB2) RS-232-C RS-485

2-WireRS-4854-Wire

1 TX B TX-B

2 TERM

3 RX RX-A

4 GND GND GND

5 RTS A TX-A

6 RDY RX-B

7 TX B TX-B

8 TERM

9 RX RX-A

10 GND GND GND

11 RTS A TX-A

12 RDY RX-B

Fig. 1-12. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232/485 Module #68-6205

Note: Users of MicroMotion RFT 9739 devicesconnected the peer-to-peerport (Port #2) of the Omni,please note that the resistornetworks should bepositioned for 2-wire RS-485and that Terminal (A) fromthe RFT 9739 should bewired to Omni 7 and (B) fromthe RFT must be wired toTerminal 11.

FirstSerialPort

SecondSerialPort



Dual RS-232-Compatible Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005

Dual channel serial communication modules can be installed providing two RS-232-C ports. Each serial communication port is individually optically isolated formaximum common-mode and noise rejection. Although providing RS-232Csignal levels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to shareone RS-232 device. Communication parameters such as baud rate, stop bitsand parity settings are software selectable.

Serial Port Assignments

The first port can be configured as a Modbus protocol port. It can also beconfigured as a printer port. The printer can be shared between multiple flowcomputers. Reports can be printed on a daily, batch end, timed interval or ondemand basis. A reprint function provides backup should you experience printerproblems at any time. Customized report templates are input using theOmniCom Configuration PC Software.

The second, third, and fourth ports are independent Modbus protocol channels.The complete database of the flow computer is available for upload anddownload. The OmniCom configuration program provided by Omni can use anyof these ports.

The fourth RS-232C can also be set up to communicate with Allen-Bradley PLCdevices.

INFO - Up to 12 flowcomputers can be multi-dropped to one RS-232Cserial device. Typically, oneserial I/O module is used onthe Omni 3000, providing twoports. A maximum of twoserial modules can beinstalled in the Omni 6000,providing four ports.

Serial Ports 1 & 2Use the S1 ModuleSetting

Serial Ports 3 & 4Use the S0 ModuleSetting

RTS Out

TX OutChan. B

RTS Out

TX OutChan. A

RX In

RDY InChan. A

RX In

RDY InChan. B

S1

S1

S0

S0

LED Indicators

Fig. 1-13. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model - Jumper Settings



1.6.4. Process I/O Combination ModulesMeter runs utilize plug-in modules which include all necessary analog/digital(A/D) converters and control circuitry. User selection of process I/O is availablewith “combo” cards that can be a mix of meter pulse, frequency densitometer,4-20 mA, 4-wire 100 ohm RTD inputs, and 4-20 mA outputs.

All process measurements such as temperature, pressure, density, and flow areinput via these process I/O combo modules. Each module will handle 4 inputsof a variety of signal types and provides one or two 4-20 mA analog outputs(except the SV Module which has six 4-20 mA outputs).

Seven types of combo I/O modules are available: A, B, E, E/D, H, HV and SV.All modules accept analog and pulse frequency type inputs, except for the Hand HV Modules which interface digitally with Honeywell Smart Transmitters,and the SV Module which interfaces serially with RS-485 compatiblemultivariable transmitters.

The A and B Types use identical I/O boards. Likewise, the E and E/D Modulesare also identical, except for the position of a configuration jumper whichselects the type and address of each module.

Each of the combo modules installed must have a different identity i.e., youcannot have two or more modules of the same type and address. Valid ID’s are:A1 through A6, B1 through B6, E/D-1 through E/D-6, E1 through E6, H1 throughH6, and SV1 through SV2. Only one HV Module can be installed.

Modules are plugged into DIN type connectors on the passive backplane. Eachbackplane connector has 12 circuits which connect to the back panel terminalstrips via ribbon cables. Combo I/O modules are plugged into the backplanestarting at I/O Position #5 (Omni 6000) or I/O Position #3 (Omni 3000) andworking towards Position #10 (Omni 6000) or Position #4 (Omni 3000). Thepreferred order is lowest number A Type to highest number H Type, them SVand HV Modules.

The following chapter deals in more detail with process I/O combo modules andincludes illustrations and jumper settings. (See Chapter 2 “Process I/O ComboModule Setup”.)

INFO - The flow computerallocates the physical I/Opoint numbers according tothe module ID’s, not theposition occupied on thebackplane.



1.7. Operating PowerOmni flow computers can be AC or DC powered.

When AC powered, 120 VAC 50 Watts is applied to the AC plug. For poweringtransmitter loops when AC powered, approximately 500 mA at 24 VDC isavailable from the DC terminal block. The flow computer can be special orderedfor operation on 220-250 VAC supplies. This requires a modified power supplyunit and a different cord set. AC power to the unit is fused by a 0.5 Amp (5x20mm) slow-blow fuse located in the AC power receptacle.

To DC power the flow computer, apply 18 to 30 VDC, 50 Watts to the DCterminal block. DC power into or out of the back panel DC power terminals isfused by a 3 Amp, 2 AG fast-blow fuse located on the back panel next to theDC power terminals.

All analog and digital circuits within the flow computer are powered from a 5-volt switching regulator located on the power supply module. This is located inthe rear most connector on the computer backplane. The DC power whichsupplies the switching regulator either comes directly from the DC terminals onthe back panel of the flow computer (18-30 VDC) or by rectifying the output ofthe integral 120 VAC (240 VAC) to 20 VAC transformer. Regulated 5-volt poweris monitored by a 3-4 second shutdown circuit located on the power supplymodule. When power is applied to the computer there will be a delay of 3 to 4seconds before the unit powers up.

A recommended maximum of 500 mA of transducer loop power is availablewith a fully loaded Omni system of 6 combo I/O modules, 2 digital I/O modulesand 2 dual serial I/O modules. The Omni must be DC powered if this 500 mAlimit is to be exceeded.

The maximum system configuration of the Omni is 24 process inputs, 12process outputs, 24 digital I/O points, and 4 serial I/O channels dissipatesapproximately 24 Watts. This causes an internal temperature of 15ºF (8.33°C)over the ambient. The unit should not be mounted in a cabinet or panel wherethe ambient inside the cabinet will exceed 110ºF (43.33°C).

Operating Power - Theindicated power is maximumand includes the power usedby transmitter loops, etc. Itwill vary depending on thenumber of modules installed,the number of current loopsand any digital output loadsconnected.

CAUTION!





CAUTION

The Power Low and +5 vAdjust are factoryadjustments that require theuse of special equipment.DO NOT attempt to adjust.

AC Connector

Fig. 1-14. Power Supply Module Model # 68-6118



1.8. Firmware and SoftwareOmni flow computers are supplied with pre-programmed firmware and PCconfiguration software which permit a single unit to perform a great diversity ofcombined flow measurement tasks, such as:

o Multiple Meter Run Totalizing, Batching, Proving, and Data Archivingo Flow and Sampler Controlo Direct Interface to Gas Chromatographs and Smart/Multivariable

Transmitterso Selectable Communications Protocols to Directly Interface to DCS, PLC

and SCADA Host Systems

The flow computer database numbers thousands of data points and providesthe tightest communications coupling yet between SCADA and the meteringsystem.

1.8.1. Interrupt-Driven CPUThis is a very important aspect to firmware. It provides for a multi-taskingenvironment in which priority tasks can be undertaken concurrently withunrelated activity. This provides for high-speed digital signals to be output at thesame time as measurement computations and serial communications to aprinter or host computer, without degradation in speed or tasking.

All custody transfer measurement programs are stored in EPROM or FlashMemory. This prevents damage due to electrical noise, or tampering with theintegrity of calculation specifications. SRAM programming can also beaccommodated.

1.8.2. Cycle TimeAll time-critical measurement functions are performed by the flow computerevery 500 msec. This provides greater accuracy of measurement calculationsand permits a faster response by pipeline operations in critical control functions,such as opening or closing valves.

1.8.3. On-line Diagnostics and CalibrationExtensive diagnostic software is built into the system which allows thetechnician to locally or remotely debug a possible problem without interruptingon-line measurement. Calibration of analog signals is performed through thekeypad and software. The system has only two potentiometers, both of whichare on the power supply and are factory set and need no adjustment.

1.8.4. PC Communications InterfaceThe wide use of PCs and video display units makes it possible to providesoftware for off-line/on-line access to measurement, configuration andcalibration data. Collection of historical reports, including alarms, intervalreports of any time sequence, liquid batch and prove reports, and full remotetechnical intervention capabilities are also provided.



1.8.5. OmniCom Configuration PC SoftwareOn-line or off-line configuration of your Omni Flow Computer is possible usingan IBM PC compatible running the OmniCom program supplied with your flowcomputer. This powerful software allows you to copy, modify and save to diskentire configurations. The program also allows you to print customized reportsby inputting report templates that are uploaded to the flow computer.

1.8.6. Year 2000 ComplianceOmni flow computer firmware has been tested in conformance to Year 2000requirements. It will accurately process time- and date-related data afterDecember 31st, 1999. Software and hardware designed to be used before,during and after the calendar year 2000 will operate appropriately relating todate information. All calculating and logic of time-related data will produce theexpected results for all valid date values within the application.

INFO - Full details about theOmniCom configurationprogram are documented inAppendix C.

INFO - The current firmwarehas been fully tested andassured to be inconformance to Year 2000requirements. For moreinformation, please contactour technical support staff.



1.9. Initializing Your Flow ComputerA processor reset signal is automatically generated when:

1) Power is applied.2) The processor reset switch at the rear of the front panel is toggled.3) The watchdog timer fails to be reset by firmware every 100 milliseconds.

The flow computer will perform a diagnostic check of all program and random-access memory whenever any of the above events occur.

The program is stored with a checksum in Non-volatile Read-only Memory. Theprogram alarms if the calculated checksum differs from the stored checksum.The most obvious cause of such a problem would be a bent pin on a programmemory chip. The validity of all data stored in RAM memory is checked next.This data includes totalizers, configuration data and historical data. Anyproblems here will cause the computer to initialize the RAM and display thefollowing message:

RAM Data InvalidReconfigure SystemUsing “OMNI” asInitial Password

If due to the RAM area in the computer not agreeing with the checksum area,the computer will display the following message:

RAM & Calibrate DataInvalid, Reconfigure& Re-calibrate Using“OMNI” as Password

Assuming that the EPROM memory and RAM memory are valid, the flowcomputer then checks the software configuration against the installed I/Omodules and displays a screen similar to the following:

Module S-Ware H-WareA-1 Y YB-1 Y ND-1 Y YS-1 N YRevision No. 023.70EPROM Checksum 1B36

A ‘N’ in the hardware column indicates that a module has been removed sincethe software was configured. A ‘N’ in the software column indicates that amodule has been added. In either case you should make the columns agree byadding or removing modules or re-configuring the software.

CAUTION!



INFO - For information onadjusting moduleconfiguration settings, seeVolume 3.



2. Process Input/Output Combination ModuleSetup

2.1. IntroductionAll process measurement signals are input via the process I/O combination (or“combo”) modules plugged into the backplane of the computer. There currentlyare 7 types of combo modules available: A, B, E, E/D, H, HV, and SV Types.The 7 types of modules are actually manufactured using only 4 types of printedcircuit modules. The first can be configured as either an A or B Module; thesecond is used for an E or E/D Module; the third printed circuit is used for an Hor HV Type Module; and the fourth for an SV Module.

2.2. Features of the I/O Combo ModulesEach combo module (except the SV Module) will handle 4 inputs of a variety ofsignal types and provides one or two 4-20 mA analog outputs. The SV Modulehas two ports and six 4-20 mA analog outputs. Only the E Combo Module hasLevel A pulse fidelity checking and double chronometry proving capabilities.The input/output capabilities and some of the features of the combo modulesare expressed in the following table.

INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES AND FEATURES OF EACH I/O COMBO MODULE TYPE

TYPE INPUT #1 INPUT #2 INPUT #3 INPUT #4ANALOGOUTPUTS

LEVEL AFIDELITY

DOUBLECHRONO-

METRYPROVING

A 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD 1-5v; 4-20mA; Flow PulsesTwo

4-20mA No No

B 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD1-5v; 4-20mA

Flow PulseFrequency

DensityOne

4-20mA No No

E/D 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD Frequency DensityTwo

4-20mA No No

E 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD Flow PulsesTwo

4-20mA Yes Yes

H Honeywell DE ProtocolTwo

4-20mA No No

HV Honeywell Multivariable DE ProtocolTwo

4-20mA No No

PORT #1 PORT #2

SV RS-485 Multi-drop to Various Multivariable TransmittersSix

4-20mA No No

INFO - User selection ofprocess I/O is available with“combo” cards that can be amix of meter pulse, frequencydensitometer, 4-20mA, 4-wire 100 ohm RTD inputs,and fused 4-20mA outputs.

Combo Module InputFeatures - The inputcharacteristics of eachcombo module are as follows(see table on right):A Type: Each input can be

1-5v; 4-20mA. Inputs #1and #2 also accept RTD.Inputs #3 and #4 alsoaccept flow pulse signals.

B Type: Inputs #1, #2 & #3can be 1-5v; 4-20mA.Inputs #1 and #2 alsoaccept RTD. Input #3 alsoaccepts flow pulses andInput #4 is fixed as afrequency density input.

E/D Type: Inputs #1 and #2can be 1-5v; 4-20mA andRTD. Inputs #3 and #4are frequency density.

E Type: Inputs #1 and #2can be 1-5v; 4-20mA andRTD. Inputs #3 and #4accept flow pulses.

H Type: All inputs areHoneywell DE Protocol.

HV Type: All inputs areHoneywell MultivariableDE Protocol.

SV Type: Each port (#1 and#2) is capable of RS-485multi-drop to variousmultivariable transmitters.

Chapter 2 Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup


2.2.1. Setting the Address of the Combo ModulesJumpers are provided on each combo module which allow the user to select theaddress needed to access the module. Changing the software functions of themodule is also done by moving the appropriate jumper; i.e., A or B Type, E orE/D Type.

2.2.2. Hardware Analog Configuration JumpersOther jumpers are provided on each module which select the correct hardwareanalog configuration for the type of signal that each input channel will accept.This allows the same basic hardware module to accept signals such as 4-20mA, 1-5 VDC, 100 ohm RTD probes and voltage or current pulses from aturbine, PD meter or digital densitometer.

2.2.3. Process I/O Combo Module Addresses VersusPhysical I/O Points

A flow computer will usually have several combo modules installed dependingon the number of flowmeter runs to be measured. If for example, 2 A Type, 2 BType, 1 E/D Type and 1 E Type Modules were installed, they would normally benumbered A1, A2, B1, B2, E/D1 and E1. Other address combinations areacceptable (e.g.: A2, A3, B1, B4, E/D2 & E2 ) as long as each has a uniqueidentity. In the above example where 6 modules (A1, A2, B1, B2, E/D1 & E1)are installed, the physical I/O points are mapped as follows. (Note that E/Dmodules come before the E modules!)

To standardize, Omni recommends that combo modules should always beinstalled starting with the lowest number A Type Module in I/O Slot #5 (Slot #3in Omni 3000) as shown, with additional modules being installed in ascendingorder towards Slot #10 (Slot #4 in Omni 3000).

PROCESS I/O COMBO MODULE ADDRESSES VERSUS PHYSICAL I/O POINTS

MODULE IDENTITY INPUTS OUTPUTS BACKPLANE POSITION PHYSICAL TERMINALS

A1 1-4 1 & 2 Slot 5 TB5 1-12

A2 5-8 3 & 4 Slot 6 TB6 1-12

B1 9-12 5 Slot 7 TB7 1-12

B2 13-16 6 Slot 8 TB8 1-12

E/D1 17-20 7 & 8 Slot 9 TB9 1-12

E1 21-24 9 & 10 Slot 10 TB10 1-12

IMPORTANT!

Combo I/O modules aresorted alphabetically and bylow- to-high address. Addingor removing cards maychange the existing sort if the‘Check I/O’ function isexecuted.



2.2.4. Assigning Specific Signal InputsThe Omni factory pre-assigns the physical I/O points of each flow computerbased on information supplied at time of order. This configuration information isstored in battery backed-up static CMOS RAM. If you wish to change or add tothese assignments, refer to the section ‘Program Setup’ in Volume 3, Chapter2 “Flow Computer Configuration” and follow these basic rules:

1) Digital densitometer signals can only be assigned to the fourth channel ofeach B Type Combo Module, or the third and fourth channel of each E/DModule.

2) RTD signals can only be assigned to the first or second channel of eachA, B, E/D or E combo module. Whenever possible, avoid using thesecond RTD excitation current source of an A Type Combo Module asthis makes the second 4-20 mA output on that module inaccessable.

3) Pulse signals from flowmeters can be assigned only to the 3rd channel ofeach combo module and/or the 4th channel of each A Combo Module andE Combo Module (E/D Combo Modules excepted).

4) Pulse signals to be used for ‘Pulse Fidelity Checking’ must be connectedto the 3rd and 4th channel of an E Combo Module with the third channelassigned as the flow input.

5) Use the 3rd and 4th input channels of an E Combo Module for doublechronometry proving.

6) Physical I/O points may be assigned to more than one variable (i.e.,common temperature or pressure sensors) but variable types cannot bemixed (i.e., the same physical point cannot be assigned to temperatureand pressure, for example).

INFO - The message ‘I/O’Type Mismatch’ isdisplayed if you try to assignthe same physical I/O pointto more than one type ofvariable.



2.2.5. Sample Omni Flow Computer ConfigurationCharts

The charts (below and facing page) are examples of the configuration chartsupplied with your flow computer. It shows the type of combo modules installed,the assigned process variables, the I/O point numbers and the jumper settingsfor each input channel. To avoid confusion, we recommend that you plan anychanges to the physical I/O setup on such a chart before making any changes.

Fig. 2-1. Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 3000



CUSTOMER________________________ P.O.#____________S.O.#_______SOFTWARE________________________ COMPUTERS/N__________________MODEL #_________________________TAG#__________________________

Fig. 2-2. Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 6000



2.3. The A and B Combo I/O ModulesAll I/O signals of the combo module are converted to the form of high frequencypulse trains (0 to 25 kHz). These pulse trains are passed through opto-couplersproviding electrical isolation.

All 4 process inputs can accept analog input voltages which are first bufferedwith a 1 megohm input buffer and then converted to pulse frequencies usingprecision voltage-to-frequency converters. With 2 averaged 500 millisecondsamples, analog conversion resolution is 14 binary bits. Linearity is typically±0.01% and the temperature coefficient is trimmed to better than ±15 PPM/°F.Current inputs such as 4-20 mA are converted to 1-5 VDC by jumpering-in a250 ohm shunt resistor.

The conversion gain of Input Channels 1 and 2 can also be increased by afactor of 10, allowing low level RTD signals (0.20 - 0.55 VDC) to be accepted.

Input Channels 3 and 4 can also be jumpered to accept pulse signals (0-12kHz). In this case, the input stage is configured as Schmitt Trigger, whosethreshold is 3.5 VDC and hysteresis ±0.5 VDC. The voltage-to-frequencyconverter is bypassed in this mode. Input Channel 4 can also be jumpered forAC coupling and a 1-volt trigger threshold, making it suitable for interfacing toSolartron type densitometers.

Analog Outputs #1 and #2 are obtained in the reverse fashion. A software-controlled pulse train (100 Hz to 5.0 kHz) is passed through opto-couplers andconverted to a current using precision frequency-to-current converters.Resolution of these outputs is approximately 12 binary bits. The second analogoutput is not available when the module is jumpered as a B Type.

Channel #4 PulseInput Threshold

Input Type Select Jumpers

Input Channel #1

Input Channel #2

Input Channel #3

Input Channel #4

AC / DC CouplingChannel # 4 InputA/B Module Type

Select Jumper

Module AddressJumpers

2nd. RTD Excitation Sourceor

2nd Digital-Analog Output

Fig. 2-3. The A and B Combo I/O Module - Configuration Jumpers



Two RTD excitation current sources (3.45 mA) are available on the combomodule. The second RTD excitation source will not be available if the second 4-20 mA analog output is in use (see setting of JP12). This is a function of thenumber of circuits available from the back panel terminal to each combomodule. On a B Type module the second analog output is not available,therefore this second RTD excitation source is always available.

2.3.1. A and B Combo Module Non-Selectable orSelectable Address

The Combo Type A or B Module can either have a non-selectable address or aselectable Address.

The non-selectable address type is featured in older versions of the Omni FlowComputer. The address is programmed into the Programmable Array Logic(PAL) integrated circuit and is factory set. The module address can only bechanged by replacing the PAL chip.

The selectable type address is featured in current versions of the Omni.Normally, it is preset at the factory, however it allows the user to change theaddress simply by selecting the correct type and address on the selectionjumpers.

Non-Selectable Address

Selectable Address

TYPE B SELECT ONLY

COMBO ADDRESS SELECT(A0 SHOWN)

Fig. 2-4. A and B Combo Module - Non-Selectable / Selectable Address



2.3.2. The A Type Combo I/O ModuleThe A Type Module is the most common configuration. It accepts 4 processinputs and provides two 4-20 mA analog outputs. Each module is connected tothe back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actualterminal block used depends upon which backplane connector (?) the module isplugged into.

A Combo Module Back Panel Terminal AssignmentsTB? Terminal 1 Input Channel #1 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)TB? Terminal 2 Input Channel #1 (Isolated Signal Return)TB? Terminal 3 Input Channel #2 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)TB? Terminal 4 Input Channel #2 (Isolated Signal Return)TB? Terminal 5 Input Channel #3 (1-5v, 4-20mA, Flowmeter Pulses)TB? Terminal 6 Input Channel #3 (Isolated Signal Return)TB? Terminal 7 Input Channel #4 (1-5v, 4-20mA, Flowmeter Pulses)TB? Terminal 8 Input Channel #4 (Isolated Signal Return)TB? Terminal 9 RTD Excitation Current Source #1

TB? Terminal 10 Signal Return Terminals 9, 11 & 12 (Internally connected to DC power return)TB? Terminal 11 Analog Output #1 (4-20mA)TB? Terminal 12 Analog Output #2 (4-20mA) or RTD Excitation Current Source #2 (See

JP12 Setting)

INFO - The second analogoutput is not available incases where JP12 is used toselect the second RTDexcitation current source.You may be able to avoidusing the second RTDexcitation source and savelosing an analog output byusing an unused excitationsource on another combomodule.

Address Select(Address #2 Shown)

Module A0 A1 A2#1 Out Out Out#2 In Out Out#3 Out In Out#4 In In Out#5 Out Out In#6 In Out In

JP12 In D/A2Position

JP13 In DCCoupled Position

Chan 4 ThresholdJP11 In = 3.5 VDC

JP11

4-20mA Jumper Out(Pulse Type Input)

JP12

RTD2 D/A2

Select Module TypeJPB Out = A Type

Select ‘P’(Pulse Type

Input - Channel3 or 4)

JP11

Fig. 2-5. A Type Combo Module - Flow Pulse Jumper Settings (Channel 3or Channel 4)



JP13 In DC CoupledPosition for PreampTurbine Meter Input

(Channel 4)

JP11

Configured for1-5 VDC Input

Configured forRTD Input

Configured for4-20 mA Input

Select ‘A’(Analog Type)

Input

4-20 mA Jumper In(Remove for

1-5VDC Input)

JP11

Fig. 2-6. A Type Combo Module - Analog Input Jumper Settings



2.3.3. The B Type Combo I/O ModuleThe B Type Combo Module also handles 4 process inputs but Input Channel 4is now used to measure the periodic time of a digital densitometer. The modulealways has Input Channel 4 jumpered as a frequency input. Signal coupling canbe AC or DC with trigger threshold adjustable for 1.5 or 3.5 Vpp sensitivity.Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on theribbon cables. The actual terminal block used depends upon which backplaneconnector (?) the module is plugged into.

B Combo Module Back Panel Terminal AssignmentsTB? Terminal 1 Input Channel #1 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)TB? Terminal 2 Input Channel #1 (Isolated Signal Return)TB? Terminal 3 Input Channel #2 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)TB? Terminal 4 Input Channel #2 (Isolated Signal Return)TB? Terminal 5 Input Channel #3 (1-5v, 4-20mA, DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses)TB? Terminal 6 Input Channel #3 (Isolated Signal Return)TB? Terminal 7 Input Channel #4 (AC Coupled Densitometer Frequency)TB? Terminal 8 Input Channel #4 (Isolated Signal Return)TB? Terminal 9 RTD Excitation Current Source #1

TB? Terminal 10 Signal Return Terminals 9, 11 & 12 (Internally connected to DC power return)TB? Terminal 11 Analog Output #1 (4-20mA)TB? Terminal 12 RTD Excitation Current Source #2

INFO - You will need either aB Type Combo Module orE/D Type Combo Modulewhen using digitaldensitometers connected tothe flow computer.With a B Type ComboModule, Analog Output #2 isnever available because theperiodic time function usesthe internal timer counter thatis normally used to generatethe second analog output.



JP12 In RTD2Position

Pulse (Frequency) TypeDensitometer Requires AC

Coupling - Channel 4

Channel 4 ThresholdJP11 Out = Solartron

& SarasotaJP11 In = UGC

JP11

Select Module TypeJPB Out = A Type

Select ‘P’(Pulse Type

Input)

JP11

JP12

RTD2 D/A2

Fig. 2-7. B Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings - FrequencyDensitometer Setup



2.4. The E/D and E Combo ModulesThe hardware of E/D and E Combo Modules are similar to that of the A and BModules (discussed previously) except that these modules provide 2 analoginput channels which can be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20 mA or 4-wire RTDs, and 2 pulse input channels which can be used to input flowmeterpulses or densitometer frequency signals. Two 4-20 mA analog outputs arealways available on these modules. The module hardware can also beconfigured by the application software to provide “Level A Pulse FidelityChecking” on the two pulse input channels.

2.4.1. The E/D Type Combo I/O ModuleThe E/D Type Combo Module is simply an E Combo Module with the JPDjumper in place. Input Channels 1 and 2 are analog input channels which canbe configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20 mA, or 4-wire RTDs. Input Channels3 and 4 are always configured to measure periodic time and accept pulsesignals from digital densitometers. Each module is connected to the back panelterminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbersused depend upon which backplane connector (?) the module is plugged into.

E/D Combo Module Back Panel Terminal AssignmentsTB? Terminal 1 Input Channel #1 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)TB? Terminal 2 Input Channel #1 (Isolated Signal Return)TB? Terminal 3 Input Channel #2 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)TB? Terminal 4 Input Channel #2 (Isolated Signal Return)TB? Terminal 5 Input Channel #3 (AC or DC Coupled Digital Densitometer Pulses) *TB? Terminal 6 Input Channel #4 (AC or DC Coupled Digital Densitometer Pulses) *TB? Terminal 7 êêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêê Not Used êêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêê

TB? Terminal 8 RTD Excitation Current Source #2 *


TB? Terminal 10 Signal Return for signals marked (*) (Internally connected to DC power return)TB? Terminal 11 Analog Output #1 (4-20mA) *TB? Terminal 12 Analog Output #2 (4-20mA) *

Select Module TypeJPD In = E/D Module

JP8 THRESJP1 THRES

JP2

AC DC ACINPUT 4

JP7

AC DC ACINPUT 3

DC CouplingSelect

AC CouplingSelect

RTD 4-20INPUT 2

JP5 JP6

4-20 mASelected

RTD 4-20INPUT 2

JP5 JP6

JP3 JP4

RTD 4-20INPUT 1

RTD 4-20INPUT 1

JP5 JP6



JP2

AC DC ACINPUT 4

JP7

AC DC ACINPUT 3

Input Threshold SelectJP8 In = +1.2 Volt DC

JP* Out = +3.2 Volt DC JP8 THRES

Fig. 2-8. E/D Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings



2.4.2. The E Type Combo I/O ModuleThe E Type Combo Module is simply an E/D Combo Module with the JPDjumper out. Double chronometry timers are provided in this moduleconfiguration, allowing either pulse train to be proved. Input Channels 1 and 2are analog input channels which can be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20mA, or 4-wire RTDs. Input Channels 3 and 4 are always configured to acceptflowmeter pulses. Both RTD excitation current sources are also alwaysavailable. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend uponwhich backplane connector (?) the module is plugged into.

E COMBO MODULE BACK PANEL TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS

TB? Terminal 1 Input Channel #1 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)TB? Terminal 2 Input Channel #1 (Isolated Signal Return)TB? Terminal 3 Input Channel #2 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)TB? Terminal 4 Input Channel #2 (Isolated Signal Return)TB? Terminal 5 Input Channel #3 (AC or DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses) *TB? Terminal 6 Input Channel #4 (AC or DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses) *TB? Terminal 7 Double Chronometry Detector Switch In (Active Low) *TB? Terminal 8 RTD Excitation Current Source #2 *


TB? Terminal 10 Signal Return for signals marked (*) (Internally connected to DC powerreturn)

TB? Terminal 11 Analog Output #1 (4-20mA) *TB? Terminal 12 Analog Output #2 (4-20mA) *

Select Module TypeJPD Out = E Module

JP8 THRESJP1 THRES

JP2

AC DC ACINPUT 4

JP7

AC DC ACINPUT 3

DC CouplingSelect

AC CouplingSelect

RTD 4-20INPUT 2

JP5 JP6

4-20 mASelected

RTD 4-20INPUT 2

JP5 JP6

JP3 JP4

RTD 4-20INPUT 1

RTD 4-20INPUT 1

JP5 JP6



JP2

AC DC ACINPUT 4

JP7

AC DC ACINPUT 3

Input Threshold SelectJP8 In = +1.2 Volt DC

JP* Out = +3.2 Volt DC JP8 THRES

Fig. 2-9. E Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings



2.5. The H Type Combo I/O ModuleThe H Type Combo Module is a special module which is used to communicateusing the Honeywell ‘DE Protocol’ with 4 Honeywell Smart Transmitters. Itoperates on a point-to-point basis. Honeywell Model ST3000 temperature,pressure and differential pressure transmitters can be used. Transmittersoperating in the ‘analog mode’ are automatically given a ‘wake-up pulse’ andswitched into the ‘DE’ Mode, as soon as they are connected and assigned ameter run function. Two analog outputs are always available on this module.Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on theribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplaneconnector (?) the module is plugged into.

H Combo Module Back Panel Terminal AssignmentsTB? Terminal 1 Input Channel #1 (Transmitter Positive Terminal)TB? Terminal 2 Input Channel #1 (Transmitter Negative Terminal)TB? Terminal 3 Input Channel #2 (Transmitter Positive Terminal)TB? Terminal 4 Input Channel #2 (Transmitter Negative Terminal)TB? Terminal 5 Input Channel #3 (Transmitter Positive Terminal)TB? Terminal 6 Input Channel #3 (Transmitter Negative Terminal)TB? Terminal 7 Input Channel #4 (Transmitter Positive Terminal)TB? Terminal 8 Input Channel #4 (Transmitter Negative Terminal)TB? Terminal 9 êêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêê Not Used êêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêê




Green LEDIndicates Any

Activity

Red LED IndicatesOMNI is

Transmitting

Transmitter LoopStatus LEDs

Fig. 2-10. H Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings



Four sets of LED indicators show the status of each transmitter loop. The redLED flashes when the flow computer is transmitting data to the transmitter, suchas a change of range, etc. The green LED shows that data is being received bya channel. Note that each communication channel uses 2 wires and operates inthe half duplex/simplex mode which means that the green LED shows the flowcomputer’s transmissions also. Each transducer is operated in the 6-bytebroadcast mode. In this mode, the process variable is updated approximatelyevery 300 msec. The database of the transducer is compared against the flowcomputer’s database every 1 or 2 minutes, depending on the type of transducer.

Any changes to the transducer database which will affect the integrity of themeasured variable must be made via the flow computer.

These entries are:

o Transducer Zero (Lower Range Value)o Transducer Full Scale (Upper Range Value)o Transducer Damping Code (Filter Time Constant)o Transducer Tag Name

The flow computer will not allow any other devices to alter these variables.Should they be altered, by the Honeywell Smart Field Communicator (SFC) forexample, they will be restored to their original value as shown in the flowcomputer (transducer tag name excepted).



2.6. The HV Type Combo I/O ModuleThe HV Type Combo Module is simply an H Module with the JP1, JP2 and JP3address jumpers in the right-most setting (Address 15). The HV Combo Moduleis used to communicate with Honeywell SMV3000 multivariable transmittersvia the DE Protocol. Operation of the LEDs is similar to the normal H Module.Since only one multivariable transmitter is needed per meter run and sincethere are a maximum of four meter runs, there will never be a need for morethen one HV Combo I/O Module.

Two analog outputs are always available on this module. Each module isconnected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables.The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplane connector (?)the module is plugged into.

HV Combo Module Back Panel Terminal AssignmentsTB? Terminal 1 Input Channel #1 (Transmitter Positive Terminal)TB? Terminal 2 Input Channel #1 (Transmitter Negative Terminal)TB? Terminal 3 Input Channel #2 (Transmitter Positive Terminal)TB? Terminal 4 Input Channel #2 (Transmitter Negative Terminal)TB? Terminal 5 Input Channel #3 (Transmitter Positive Terminal)TB? Terminal 6 Input Channel #3 (Transmitter Negative Terminal)TB? Terminal 7 Input Channel #4 (Transmitter Positive Terminal)TB? Terminal 8 Input Channel #4 (Transmitter Negative Terminal)TB? Terminal 9 êêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêê Not Used êêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêêê




Green LEDIndicates Any

Activity

Red LED IndicatesOMNI is

Transmitting

Transmitter LoopStatus LEDs

Fig. 2-11. HV Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings



2.7. The SV Type Combo I/O ModuleThe SV I/O Combo Module has two RS-485 serial ports which are used tocommunicate with devices such as Rosemount 3095 multivariabletransmitters via the Modbus Protocol. Dual LEDs on each port provide status ofthe communications. The module also has six 4-20 mA outputs.

SV Combo Module Back Panel Terminal AssignmentsTB? Terminal 1 Port #1 B (RS-485)TB? Terminal 2 Port #1 A (RS-485)TB? Terminal 3 Port #2 B (RS-485)TB? Terminal 4 Port #2 A (RS-485)TB? Terminal 5 Signal Return for D/A Outputs signals marked (*)

TB? Terminal 6 Signal Return for D/A Outputs signals marked (*)

TB? Terminal 7 Analog Output #5 (4-20mA) *TB? Terminal 8 Analog Output #6 (4-20mA) *TB? Terminal 9 Analog Output #3 (4-20mA) *TB? Terminal 10 Analog Output #4 (4-20mA) *TB? Terminal 11 Analog Output #1 (4-20mA) *TB? Terminal 12 Analog Output #2 (4-20mA) *

SV Modules and OtherCombo Module Types -The flow computer canhandle only two SV Modulesand three other A, B, E/D, Eor H I/O Combo Modules. AnHV module can also beinstalled in lieu of one ofthese I/O combo modules.

MV AddressSelection Jumpers

MV RS-485Termination Jumpers

LED Indicators

IRQ 2 Always Selected

Jumper In = 1st MV ModuleJumper Out = 2nd MV Module

Both Jumpers In = Port TerminatedBoth Jumpers Out = Port Unterminated

RTS Always Selected

PORT 1 (3)

PORT 2 (4)

Transmitting (TX)/Ready-to-Send (RTS) LEDs RedReceiving LEDs Green

Fig. 2-12. Omni Multivariable Interface (SV Type Combo) Module Model68-6203 - Jumper Settings



3. Mounting and Power Options

3.1. Mechanical InstallationOmni offers a variety of enclosure options which can all be customized basedon customer specified requirements:

q Panel Mountingq NEMA 4/4Xq NEMA 7

3.1.1. Panel MountingA panel with the correct size cut out as dimensioned below is required. Panelsshould be a minimum of 1/8 inch thick. Use the two keyed nuts and clampingbars provided to mount the flow computer to the panel.

Panel Mounting - Panelsless than 1/8 inch thick canbe used but will require thatthe rear of the computer besupported.

CAUTION!

These units have an integrallatching mechanism whichfirst must be disengaged bylifting the bezel upwardsbefore withdrawing the unitfrom the case.

IMPORTANT!

The maximum length of theribbon cable that connectsthe keypad to the CPUmodule is 18 inches. Theoperation of the CentralProcessor Module (CPU) willbe significantly affected ifthis length is exceeded.

Fig. 3-1. Panel Mounting - Omni 6000 (upper), Omni 3000 (lower)

Chapter 3 Mounting and Power Options


3.1.2. Nema 4 / 4X ConfigurationsBoth the NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X are weather-proof enclosures. The NEMA 4 isa standard steel enclosure, whereas the NEMA 4X is a stainless steelenclosure. Both Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 flow computers can be mountedinside the NEMAs on a sturdy swing frame. The NEMAs also include a 5’ x 3”viewing window with a ¼” lexan plate to allow easy viewing. Custom enclosuresare available.

NEMA 4 / 4X FOR OMNI 6000 / 3000

Dimensions Weight Compliance

24 in x 24 in x 12 in

(610 mm x 610 mm x 305mm)

80 lbs

(36 kg)

q NEMA 4, -12 & -13q UL 50, Type 4q CSA Enclosure 4q IEC 529, IP66

3.1.3. Nema 7 SpecificationThe NEMA 7 is an explosion-proof enclosure which allows switch or pushbuttonoptions for manipulating the contained flow computer. The viewing window issustained by a 3” circular glass ½” thick. Both the Omni 6000 and Omni 3000flow computers can be mounted in the NEMA 7 with minimal specificationvariances. Custom enclosures are available.

NEMA 7 FOR OMNI 6000


12 in x 18 in x 9 in

(305 mm x 457 mm x 203mm)

120 lbs(54 kg)

q NEC

♦ Division 1 & 2♦ Class I; Groups B, C & D♦ Class II; Groups E, F & G♦ Class III

q IEC

♦ Zone 0 & 1♦ Groups IIC, IIB & IIA

NEMA 7 FOR OMNI 3000


12 in x 12 in x 8 in(305 mm x 305 mm x 203

mm)

110 lbs(50 kg)

q NEC

♦ Division 1 & 2♦ Class I; Groups B, C & D♦ Class II; Groups E, F & G♦ Class III

q IEC

♦ Zone 0 & 1♦ Groups IIC, IIB & IIA



3.2. Input PowerThe Omni Flow Computer can be AC or DC powered.

3.2.1. AC PowerWhen AC powered, 120 VAC, 50 Watts is applied to the AC terminal block.Approximately 500 mA at 24 VDC is always available from the DC terminalblock to drive transducer loops, pre-amplifiers, and digital I/O loads when theunit is powered by AC.

The flow computer can be special ordered for operation on 220-250 VACsupplies. This requires a modified power supply unit and a different cord set.

3.2.2. DC PowerWhen DC powered, 18 to 30 volts at 24 Watts is applied to the DC terminalblock (this wattage figure does not include power sourced from the digital outputterminals).

3.2.3. Safety ConsiderationsTo ensure continued protection against fire, the AC fuse must always bereplaced with a 0.5 amp (5x20 mm) slow blow fuse. The DC fuse must bereplaced by a 3 amp, 2 AG fast blow.

Power should be connected via a suitable power disconnect switch certified asbeing safe for the area (for grounding requirements, see sidebar note on facingpage).

INFO - A recommendedmaximum of 500mA oftransducer loop power isavailable with a fully loadedsystem of 6 combo I/Omodules, 2 digital I/Omodules and 2 dual serialI/O modules. The computermust be DC powered if this500 mA limit is to beexceeded.

CAUTION!



ENVIRONMENTAL - Themaximum systemconfiguration of 24 processinputs, 12 process outputs,24 digital I/O points and 4serial I/O channels dissipatesapproximately 24 Watts. Thiscauses an internaltemperature rise of 15ºF overthe ambient. The unit shouldnot be mounted in a cabinetor panel where the ambientinside the cabinet will exceed110ºF.



3.3. Power Terminals

3.3.1. CE Equipment Power TerminalsIn this current version of the Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 back panel the ACreceptacle is a power line filter with a separate AC fuse holder. The AC power isconnected via a separate 4-wire conductor cable which plugs into the powersupply. The DC terminal is on TB 11 (for Omni 6000) and on TB5 (for Omni3000).

The power supply used with this version is a Model 68-6118; no fuses.

Back Panel Fuses - All DCfuses are 3 amp, fast-blowModel 225.003,manufactured by Littlefuse.All AC fuses are ½ amp,slow-blow Model 229.500,manufactured by Littlefuse

Earth GroundRequirements -To minimizethe effects of electricaltransients, the outer case ofthe flow computer should beconnected to a high qualityearth ground using thegrounding stud located onthe back of the unit (see Fig.3-2).Connect the shields of allwiring to the same groundingstud. To eliminate earth loopcurrents, shields should beleft unconnected and tapedback at the other end.

Fig. 3-2. Input Power Terminals - Omni 3000 (upper), Omni 6000 (lower)



3.3.2. Extended Back Panel Power TerminalsSeveral mounting options are now available with the Omni 6000 flow computerby requesting the Extended Back Panel Termination option. This panelincorporates all the terminal blocks of Versions 2 and 3, TB1 through TB10 withterminals marked 1 through 12. Screw type terminals are provided for AC andDC power. In addition to TB1 through TB10, extra DC (fused), return and shieldterminals are provided for TB1 through TB8. Extended 64-conductor ribboncables and the AC cables are provided with a standard length of 5 feet.

Extended Back PanelFuses - All DC fuses are ¼amp fast-blow manufacturedby Littlefuse, Model 225.250.The main DC fuse is 3 amp.The AC fuse is ½ amp slow-blow manufactured byLittlefuse, Model 239.500.The fuse for the back panel’sAC receptacle is a 5x20mm,½ amp slow-blow.

¼ Amp

3 Amp

½ amp

Fig. 3-3. Input Power Terminals - Extended Back Panel (Omni 6000 only)



Fig. 3-4. Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 6000)

Fig. 3-5. Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 3000)



3.4. Power Supply Module SwitchingRegulator

All analog and digital circuits within the flow computer are powered from a 5-volt switching regulator located on the power supply module. This is located inthe rear most connector on the computer backplane.

The DC power which supplies the switching regulator either comes directly fromthe DC terminals on the back panel of the flow computer (18-30 VDC) or byrectifying the output of the integral 120 VAC (240 VAC) to 20 VAC transformer.DC power into or out of the back panel DC power terminals is fused by a 3Amp, 2 AG fuse located on the back panel next to the DC power terminals.

Regulated 5-volt power is monitored by a 3 to 4 second shutdown circuit locatedon the power supply module. When power is applied to the computer there willbe a delay of 3 to 4 seconds before the unit powers up.

CAUTION

The Power Low and +5 vAdjust on the Power SupplyModule are factoryadjustments that require theuse of special equipment.DO NOT attempt to adjust

Fig. 3-6. Power Supply Module Model 68-6118



4. Connecting to Flowmeters

4.1. Turbine Flowmeter (A or B ComboModule)

Input Channels 3 and 4 can be independently jumpered to accept pulse signals.Channel 3 on the A and B Combo Modules and Channel 4 on the A ComboModule can be used to input turbine or positive displacement flowmeters. Theinput threshold is 3.5 volts; hysteresis ± 1/2 volt.

Fig. 4-1. Connecting to a Turbine Pre-amp (A or B Combo Modules)

Chapter 4 Connecting to Flowmeters


4.2. Wiring Flowmeter Signals to E TypeCombo Modules

Input Channels 3 and 4 of each E Type Combo Module are used to inputsignals from turbine or PD flowmeters. Both channels share a common signalreturn at the Omni terminals. Input threshold can be jumpered for +1 or +3.5volt. Input coupling can be AC or DC (see Chapter 2). Hysteresis isapproximately 0.5 volt.

Fig. 4-2. Wiring to Turbine Pre-Amps (E Type Combo Modules Only)



4.3. Faure Herman Turbine Meters(E Combo Module)

Faure Herman Turbine Meters are used in liquid applications only. For theseflowmeters, high threshold jumpers JP1 and JP8 on the E Type Combo Modulemust be installed.

Fig. 4-3. Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using Omni 24 VDC

Fig. 4-4. Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using External 24 VDC

Chapter 4 Connecting to Flowmeters


4.4. Pulse Fidelity and Integrity Checkingwith E Type Combo Modules

A flowmeter with dual channel out-of-phase outputs can be connected asshown. The flow computer can be configured to continuously compare thesignals for frequency and sequence on a pulse-to-pulse basis, and alarm andlog any differences. (See Volume 5, Technical Bulletin TB-970901 for moreinformation on Pulse Fidelity Checking.)

Fig. 4-5. Connecting Dual Coil Turbines for Pulse Fidelity Checking



5. Connecting to Transducers andTransmitters

5.1. Wiring the Input TransducersBecause of the high density of connections on the back panel terminal, it isrecommended that wiring to the terminals be made with 18-22 gauge wirewherever possible. Transducers should be wired using twisted pairs of 18 gaugeshielded wire. The shields should be connected together and grounded at theflow computer end. To prevent ground loops, shields should be taped back andinsulated at the transducer end.

Each of the 4-20 mA process input channels are individually optically isolated.The transducer may be connected in series with either the power or return lineof the transducer current loop. The figure shown below shows a transducerwired in the power leg of the loop.

Fig. 5-1. Wiring the 4-20 mA Inputs (Input Channels 1 & 2 shown)

Chapter 5 Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters


5.2. Wiring of a Dry ‘C’ Type ContactCertain types of flowmeter photo-pulsers produce a low frequency contact pulseoutput (typical 1 pulse per barrel). To accommodate these low frequencies, theycan be wired to any pulse input on A or E Type Combo Modules, as shownbelow.

Fig. 5-2. Wiring for Dry C Type Contact



5.3. Wiring RTD ProbesChannels 1 and 2 of each combo I/O module can be jumpered to accept asignal from a 100 ohm RTD probe. The flow computer can be configured for theDIN 43-760 curve (α= 0.00385) or the American curve (α=0.00392). The probeis wired in a 4-wire configuration as shown below.

INFO - Each A or B TypeCombo Module always has 1RTD excitation currentsource available at Terminal9. A second source is alwaysavailable on B Types atTerminal 12.

TIP - The excitation currentsource for an RTD need notcome from the same combomodule from which the signalis input. You will need torecalibrate the input channelif you choose to use anexcitation source fromanother combo module.

Fig. 5-3. Wiring a 4-Wire RTD Temperature Probe



5.4. Wiring Densitometers

5.4.1. Wiring Densitometer Signals to an E/D TypeCombo Module

Two independent densitometers with RTD probes can be wired directly to anE/D type combo module. For example, Solartron and UGC densitometerscan be wired to the same E/D Type Module.

5.4.2. Solartron DensitometersConnecting to a Solartron Digital Densitometer actually involves two devices:the densitometer current pulse signal and the densitometer 4-wire RTD probeattached to the vibrating tube. The pulse signal is connected to Channel 4 of aB Type Combo Module. The RTD is connected to Channel 1 or Channel 2. Thedevice can be connected with or without safety barriers, depending on theneeds of the application.

INFO - Because the densitypulse signal can be a smallAC signal with a large DCoffset, you must select ACcoupling and low triggerthreshold for the combomodule channel used; i.e.: onthe B Type Combo Modules,JP13 in the AC position andJP11 out; on E/D ComboModules, JP2 and JP7 in theAC positions and JP1 andJP8 out.Input impedance will be10kohms; 1.5Vpp is requiredfrom the densitometer toreliably trigger the input.

INFO - When configuring theflow computer, select theDIN curve for this RTDtemperature point.

Fig. 5-4. Wiring a Solartron Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’Type I/O Combo Module



NOTICE!

Diagrams shown are basedon published manufacturers’,data. Omni accepts noresponsibility for wiring orinstallation of equipment in ahazardous area. Equipmentmust always be installed incompliance with local andnational safety standards.

Fig. 5-5. Wiring a Solartron Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module



5.4.3. Sarasota Densitometers

The Sarasota Densitometer provides a voltage pulse signal representingdensity and also a 4-wire 100 ohm RTD probe monitoring the temperature ofthe device. The pulse signal is connected to Channel 4 of a B Type ComboModule. The RTD is connected to Channel 1 or Channel 2 of any module. Thedevice can be connected with or without safety barriers, depending on theneeds of the application.

INFO - Because the densitypulse signal can be a smallAC signal with a large DCoffset, you must select ACcoupling and low triggerthreshold for the combomodule channel used; i.e.: onthe B Type Combo Modules,JP13 in the AC position andJP11 out; on E/D ComboModules, JP2 and JP7 in theAC positions and JP1 andJP8 out.Input impedance will be10kohms; 1.5Vpp is requiredfrom the densitometer toreliably trigger the input.

INFO - When configuring theflow computer, select theDIN curve for this RTDtemperature point.

Fig. 5-6. Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’Type I/O Combo Module



NOTICE!


Fig. 5-7. Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module



5.4.4. UGC DensitometersThe UGC Densitometer output provides an open collector transistor thatrequires an external pull-up resistor to 24 volts DC. The densitometer providesa 24 volt DC pulse output in the range of 1 to 2 kHz. The pulse signal isconnected to Channel 4 of a B Type Combo Module and can be connected withor without safety barriers, depending on the application requirements.

INFO - Because the densitypulse signal is a large DCpulse signal with little or noDC offset, you must selectDC coupling with normaltrigger threshold for thecombo module channel used;i.e.: on the B Type ComboModules, JP13 in the DCposition and JP11 in; on E/DCombo Modules, JP2 andJP7 in the DC positions andJP1 and JP8 in.Input impedance will be1Mohms; <3.0Vfor low leveland >4V.0 for high level isrequired from thedensitometer to reliablytrigger the input.

Fig. 5-8. Wiring a UGC Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ TypeI/O Combo Module



NOTICE!


Fig. 5-9. Wiring a UGC Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’Type I/O Combo Module



5.5. Wiring of Honeywell ST3000Transmitters

Up to four Honeywell Smart Transmitters can be wired to each H Type ComboI/O Module. Loop power is provided by the combo module. No external power isrequired.

Fig. 5-10. Wiring of a Honeywell Smart Transmitter



5.6. Wiring Micro Motion Transmitters

5.6.1. Connecting Micro Motion RFT9739 Transmitterto A Type or E Type Process I/O CombinationModules

The frequency/pulse output that represents the volume flow from the RFT9739Transmitter can be wired directly into either Frequency Channel 3 or 4 on AType or E Type Combo Modules. (See Technical Bulletin TB-980401.)

Fig. 5-11. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter



5.6.2. Connecting Micro Motion RFT 9739 via RS-485Serial Communications

Serial communication via RS-485 can be accomplished using the Peer-to-PeerMode via Omni Serial Port #2 of the RS-232-C/485 Serial Module # 68-6205,with selection jumpers in the RS-485 position. (See Technical Bulletin TB-980401.)

7 (B)

8

9

10

11 (A)

OMNI BACK PANEL TERMINALSSERIAL PORT #2 (PEER-TO-PEER)

RS-485 MODE SELECTED

Fig. 5-12. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof)Transmitter Via Two-wire RS-485 Communications (Serial I/O Module #68-6205)



5.6.3. Connecting Micro Motion RFT9739 via SerialRS-232-C to 485 Converter

Serial communication via RS-485 can also be accomplished utilizing the Peer-to-Peer Mode via RS-232-C. (See Technical Bulletin TB-980401.)

Fig. 5-13. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof)Transmitter Via Serial RS-485 Converter



6. Connecting Analog Outputs andMiscellaneous I/O Including Provers

6.1. Analog OutputsAnalog outputs are available for remote terminal units, flow controllers, andrecording devices. The analog outputs source 4-20 mA into a load wired to theDC power return. Maximum load resistance is 1000 ohms at 25 VDC. Digital-to-Analog conversion is accomplished with a 12-bit binary resolution.

Two outputs are available on each A Type Combo Module. One output isavailable on each B Type Combo Module.

To calibrate, each of the outputs is set to 4.00 and 20.00 mA and the softwarezero and span adjusted while in the Diagnostic Mode (described later). Anyvalue between 2.5 and 23.0 mA may be output.

Each output is assigned via the keypad or serial link to one of the manyvariables available (see Volume 3).

Fig. 6-1. Wiring Devices to the Flow Computer’s Analog Outputs

Chapter 6 Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers


6.2. Digital Inputs/Outputs

6.2.1. Wiring a Digital Point as an Input or an OutputDigital I/O modules handle 12 digital points. Each point can be independentlyconfigured as either an input or output via the keypad or via a serial port.

The power and returns for all digital I/O signals are common with the DC powerterminals. Digital output loads are connected between the I/O terminal and DCpower return. An approximate total load of 500 mA per module (per 12 points) isallowed although an individual point can handle 200 mA. Voltages applied toI/O points used as inputs must not exceed the DC supply voltage at the DCterminal, or the protective fuse for that point on the digital I/O module mayblow.

Fig. 6-2. Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Input



Fig. 6-3. Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Output



6.2.2. Connecting Various Digital I/O DevicesOn the Omni 6000, Digital I/O Module #1, handling points 1 through 12, isplugged into the backplane connector marked ‘I/O Module #1’. This in turn isconnected to Terminal Strip TB1-1 through 12. Digital I/O Module #2, handlingpoints 13 through 24, is plugged into the backplane connector marked ‘I/OModule #2’ which is connected to Terminal Strip TB2-1 through 12. The Omni3000 has only one digital I/O module which is connected to Terminal TB1-1through 12 on the back panel.

The diagram below shows the typical wiring required to interface to otherdevices, such as: switches, relays, provers, programmable logic controllers,among other devices.

Fig. 6-4. Connecting Digital I/O Devices to the Flow Computer



6.3. Provers

6.3.1. Connecting Pipe Prover Detector SwitchesPipe prover detector switches are the only I/O signal that must be connected toa specific I/O point. They must be wired as shown in Fig. 6-4 to Digital I/OPoint #1, and the point assigned to Boolean 1700 in the software configuration(see Volume 3). This is because Digital I/O Point #1 is internally jumpered tocause a high priority interrupt of the computer used to start and stop provercounting. Digital I/O Point #1 can still be used as a normal I/O point if pipeproving is not needed.

6.3.2. Interfacing to a Brooks Compact Prover

The Omni Flow Computer interfaces to the basic Brooks Compact ProverSkid Electronics (the Brooks Control Box is not used). The control interfaceinvolves one digital output to control the piston launch, a digital input point tomonitor the position of the piston, and a detector switch signal shared betweeneach meter run to be proved.

Compact provers use the ‘Pulse Interpolation Method’ of measuring theflowmeter counts between the detector switches. The interpolation methodrequires that the detector switches activate high speed hardware timers on theOmni’s combo I/O module. The detector switch signals called ‘first and finalpickoff’ by Brooks are connected to the ‘Detector Switch’ input of each E TypeCombo Module installed in the flow computer.

The following diagram shows the complete installation, including 4-20 mAsignals representing the temperature and pressure of the prover tube as well asthe nitrogen plenum chamber. The 12-volt DC power supply is user supplied.

INFO - The prover detectorswitch signal activates aninterrupt request into thecomputer. Jumpers JP1 andJP2 on the digital I/O module(Fig. 1-5) control which edgeof the signal will cause theinterrupt. Pulse countingshould start when the spherefirst activates the detectorswitch. Install JP1 in caseswhere the detector switch’snormally opened contacts areused (Fig. 1-9). Install JP2 incases where the detectorswitch’s normally closedcontacts are used.

Note: When using doublechronometry proving, thedetector switch input is onTerminal 7 of an E TypeCombo I/O Module.

Fig. 6-5. Wiring to a Brooks Compact Prover



6.3.3. Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a BrooksCompact Prover

The plenum chamber pressure is used as a spring to close the poppet valve ofthe piston and cause the piston to be moved forward by the flowing liquid. Thepressure required to close the poppet valve varies with pipeline pressure. Toohigh a plenum pressure causes the piston to be pushed downstream by thisexcess pressure and can lead to inaccurate provings.

The Omni Flow Computer can monitor the plenum pressure and line pressure,and automatically charge or vent nitrogen from the plenum chamber.

Before commencing a proving run, the Omni Flow Computer checks theplenum pressure versus the required pressure and activates either the ‘charge’or ‘vent’ solenoid valve. The pressures will be matched within some userentered deadband percent. The Omni activates the solenoids via low voltagerelays (not shown).

An additional enhancement shown is a pressure switch signaling low nitrogenbottle pressure. In this case, the prove attempt would be aborted if it becameimpossible to achieve the correct plenum pressure.

Fig. 6-6. Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks Compact Prover



7. Connecting to Serial Devices

7.1. Serial Port Connection OptionsThe total number of serial communication ports depends on the number of dualport serial I/O modules installed. The Omni 6000 accepts 2 serial I/O modules;the Omni 3000 accepts 1. Two optional serial communication I/O modules areavailable with your flow computer (see Chapter 1): the RS-232-C (compatible)Model #68-6005, and the RS-232-C/485 Model #68-6205. The older Model #68-6005 is only capable of RS-232 compatible serial communications. The newerModel #68-6205 is capable of either RS-232 or RS-485 communications via aselection jumper.

When jumpered for RS-232, the characteristics and functionality of this moduleis identical to that of the older RS-232-C module, providing 2 optically isolatedRS-232-C serial ports which can operate from 0.3 to 38.4 kbps. These ports areused for printers, personal computers, and SCADA devices. Although the outputvoltage levels are compatible with the RS-232 standard, the output is actuallytristated when not sending data. This allows the transmit output from multipleflow computers to be bussed. A terminating resistor is provided at the backpanel connections to pull down the transmitter signal to a mark (-9V). Hence, ashort jumper is required in many cases from TX (Out) to Term.

RS-485 communications allows interconnecting multiple flow computers,programmable logic controllers, multivariable transmitters, and other serialdevices in either four-wire multi-drop mode or peer-to-peer two-wire multi-dropmode.

INFO - Up to 12 flowcomputers and/or othercompatible serial devices canbe multi-dropped usingOmni’s proprietary RS-232-Cserial port. Thirty-twodevices may be connectedwhen using the RS-485mode. Typically, one serialI/O module is used on theOmni 3000, providing twoports. A maximum of twoserial modules can beinstalled in the Omni 6000,providing four ports.

RS-485 Communicationswith an RS-232-C Serial I/OModule #68-6005 - Whenconnecting to RS-485 serialdevices using Serial I/OModule #68-6005, a RS-232-to-485 Converter device mustbe used.

Multivariable TransmittingDevices - In addition to theSerial I/O Module # 68-6205,the flow computer must alsohave an SV Module tocommunicate with RS-485compatible multivariabletransmitters. This serialmodule must be jumpered toIRQ 3 when used incombination with an SVModule. Without an SVModule, the jumper must beplaced at IRQ 2. The SVModule can only be used withthis serial module (68-6205)and is not compatible withthe Serial I/O Module # 68-6005. For more information,see Technical Bulletin # TB-980303.

Chapter 7 Connecting to Serial Devices


7.2. Connecting to Printers

7.2.1. Connecting to a Dedicated Printer (Port 1)The following diagram shows the Omni Flow Computer connected to adedicated printer. The hardware handshake wire connected to Pin 20 of theDB25 connector is optional, as the computer can be made to insert nullcharacters after each carriage return to match the computer data transmissionrate to the printer speed.

INFO - The speed that datacan be accepted by theprinter depends on the sizeof the input buffer (if any)and the print mode (draft ornear letter quality). Typicalprinters provide about 120printed characters/second.

TIP - Most printers default tothe draft mode. Leave it therefor maximum performance.Because of impact printerlimitations, no speedimprovement is obtained byselecting baud rates over2.4kbps.

Fig. 7-1. Connecting a Printer to Serial Port #1 of the Flow Computer



7.2.2. Connecting to a Shared Printer (Port 1)Up to 12 Omni flow computers can share a printer. They are connected asshown. One flow computer is assigned as the master and manages all traffic tothe printer. Each computer monitors the data transmitted to the printer byhaving its TX terminal jumpered to its RX terminal. Resident firmware ensuresthat only one computer will attempt to access the printer at any one time.

7.2.3. Print Sharing ProblemsMost problems associated with printer sharing show up as garbled reports orlocked up printers. This is usually caused by one or more computers sendingdata to the printer at the same time. Check your wiring to the figure above andconsult the following checklist if you experience problems:

1) Check that all computers are set to the same baud rate, stop bits, andparity settings as the printer.

2) All computers must have the ‘Transmitter Key Delay’ set to ‘zero’ (0).

3) One and only one computer must have its ‘Printer Priority Number’ set to‘1’. All computers must have a different priority number.

4) Some printers provide jumpers or switches which set the polarity of the‘Printer Ready’ signal on Pin 20. This signal must be positive when theprinter is ready.

5) When not using the ‘Printer Ready’ signal (Pin 20), ensure that you haveentered enough NULs to prevent overrunning the printer buffer.

INFO - Note that only 1terminating pull-down resistoris jumpered in place.

Fig. 7-2. Connecting Several Flow Computers to a Shared Printer

Note: Refer to Volume 3,Chapter 2 for PrinterSettings.



7.3. Connecting to a Personal Computer andModem

Ports #1 and #2 (Ports #3 and #4* of an Omni 6000) can provide access to thecomputer’s database using a Modbus protocol interface. This port is usuallyconnected to a PC running the OmniCom configuration software. Up to 12Omni flow computers can be connected to 1 PC. The Modbus protocol includesan address field which ensures that only 1 unit will transmit at a time.


Note:

* Depending upon whethera printer or Allen-BradleyPLC is used.

Fig. 7-3. Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB25 FemaleConnector (Using Port #2 as an example)



Fig. 7-4. Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB9 FemaleConnector

Fig. 7-5. Connecting Port #2 to a Modem




7.4. Peer-to-Peer Communications and Multi-drop Modes

Serial Port #2 can also be configured by the application software to act as apeer-to-peer Modbus master port. This is a half duplex/simplex link whichallows any Omni Flow Computer to communicate with any other flow computeror Modbus slave device. That data link can operate at up to 38.4 kbps and usesa proprietary token passing scheme. Interconnecting multiple flow computersand or multiple serial devices can be accomplished via RS-232-Compatible orRS-485 communications.

7.4.1. Peer-to-Peer RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop ModeThe diagram below shows the wiring requirements for multi-dropping two ormore flow computers via RS-485 in two-wire mode. This option is available onlywith the Omni Serial I/O Module #68-6205. (See Technical Bulletin #TB-980401.)

Peer-to-PeerCommunications - Thepeer-to-peer communicationfeature allows you to multi-drop up to 32 flow computersand other devices in RS-485serial communications mode,and up to 12 using RS-232-Ccommunications.

Peer-to-Peer RedundancySchemes - Redundancyschemes allows foruninterrupted measurementand control functionality byinterconnecting twoidentically equipped andconfigured flow computers(see Technical Bulletin TB-980402).

OmniCom® and Peer-to-Peer - The OmniComConfiguration PC Softwarepackage supplied with yourOmni Flow Computer cannotbe used on Serial Port #2when it is being used as apeer-to-peer link.

UP TO 32 FLOW COMPUTERS

B

GND

A

RS-485 TWO-WIRETERMINATED

RS-485 TWO-WIRENON-TERMINATED



Fig. 7-6. Wiring of Several Flow Computers using the Peer-to-PeerFeature via RS-485 Communications in Two-wire Multi-dropMode



7.4.2. Peer-to-Peer via RS-232-C CommunicationsThe diagram below shows the wiring requirements for multi-dropping two ormore flow computers in RS-232 C (compatible) mode. When multi-dropping twoor more flow computers with other serial devices via the RS-232-C mode, anRS-232-to-RS-485 standard converter may be required. (See TechnicalBulletin #TB-980401.)

7.4.3. Keying the Modem or Radio Transmitter Carrierin Multi-drop Applications

Use the RTS signal to key the modem or radio transmitter carrier in a multi-dropapplication. A delay between activating the RTS signal and actually sendingdata is provided to allow for carrier acquisition at the remote end. This delaycan be selected as 0.0 msec, 50 msec, 100 msec, or 150 msec.

Fig. 7-7. Wiring of Several Flow Computers in the Peer-to-Peer Modeusing RS-232-C Communications.

Note: Refer to Volume 3,Chapter 2 “Flow ComputerConfiguration”.



7.4.4. RS-485 Four-wire Multi-drop ModeThe diagram below shows the wiring requirements for multi-dropping two ormore flow computers via RS-485 in four-wire mode to a third party PLC typedevice. Note that in the wiring example shown below, the PLC acts as a masterand can communicate with either flow computer. A four-wire wiring system doesnot allow communications between slaves; i.e., data can only be transferredbetween master and slaves. The RS-485 option is available only with the OmniSerial I/O Module #68-6205.

UP TO 32 RS-485 DEVICES

TX-B

GND

TX-A

RS-485 FOUR-WIRETERMINATED

RX-A

RX-B

SLAVE

RS-485 FOUR-WIRENON-TERMINATED

SLAVE

A

B

RX

A

B

TX

RS-485TERMINATED

MASTERPLC DEVICE

Fig. 7-8. Wiring of Multiple Flow Computers to a PLC Device Via RS-485Communications in Four-wire Multi-drop Mode



7.5. Connecting to a SCADA DeviceWhen using an Omni 6000 with 2 serial I/O modules installed, a secondModbus port (Physical Port #3 used as an example) can provide access to thecomputer’s database. This port can also be connected to a PC or any SCADAdevice either directly, via modem, or via radio link.

Fig. 7-9. Typical Wiring of Port #3 to a SCADA Device via Modem



7.6. Interfacing the Fourth Serial Port to anAllen-Bradley KE Module

Port #4 is available on Omni flow computers with the second serial modulefitted. This port can be selected to communicate with Allen-Bradley devicesusing DF1 full duplex or half duplex protocol, or set up for Modbus devices. Theexample below assumes that the Allen-Bradley Protocol has been selected.

Fig. 7-10. Wiring Serial Port #4 to Allen-Bradley KE CommunicationsModule



8. Diagnostic and Calibration Features

8.1. IntroductionIn the diagnostic mode you can verify that the I/O modules and transducers areworking and are calibrated to specification.

The actual process transducers used may provide a variety of signal types,ranging from voltage or current pulses of various levels, to linear analog signalssuch as 4-20 mA., 1-5V, 0-1V or RTD elements. In the case of pulse inputs, theinput module provides amplification and/or level shifting, Schmitt triggering andopto-isolation.

When analog signals are used the input module provides all signal conditioning,opto-isolation, and converts the analog signal to a high frequency pulse train, inthe range of 0 - 20 kHz. By using a precision voltage to frequency converter,typical linearity of +/-0.01 % is obtained.

Certain diagnostic displays are always available while in the Display Mode. Forexample pressing [Input] then [Display] will display the raw frequency inputfrom each process input point. The up/down arrow keys can be used to scrollthrough all inputs. A typical display shows:

Input % Freq/Period#1 2530Input % /Freq/Period#2 3021

Pressing [Output] [Status] [Display] shows the current percentage output foreach of the digital to analog 4-20 mA outputs.

Analog Output %#1 55.79Analog Output %#2 34.10

INFO - When viewing ananalog input point, thefrequency displayedapproximates 1000Hz/mA.When viewing a turbine orphoto pulsar signal, thedisplay is the actual inputfrequency.

INFO - 0.0% corresponds to4mA. 100.0% corresponds to20mA.

Chapter 8 Diagnostic and Calibration Features


Important timing information is available by pressing [Time] then [Display] andthen scrolling down using the down arrow. The displays are as follows:

Power AppliedTime: 09:10:30Date: 01/21/91

Power Last LostTime: 10:25:21Date: 01/20/91

The previous two displays of power lost and power applied allow the user toestimate the amount of product flow which may be unaccounted for in the eventof a power failure.

Scrolling down further displays:

Main Task Timing-Sec20 mS Task 00.0050 mS Task 00.00100mS Task 00.01500mS Task 00.04Background 00.02

This timing information refers to various main application tasks that run withinthe computer. The information may be useful to Omni in the event of aproblem.

8.2. Calibrating in the Diagnostic ModeIn the Diagnostic Mode the user selects a specific process variable to calibrateor view. The display shows the input channel and combo module used for thevariable. Calibration override values can be input and the input signals can beviewed simultaneously as engineering values % span, input voltage andcurrent. Analog outputs and digital I/O points can also be viewed andmanipulated.

8.2.1. Entering The Diagnostic ModeTo enter the diagnostic mode proceed as follows press the [Alpha Shift] key,then the [Diag] key.

The front panel diagnostic LED will glow green and the following will bedisplayed on the first three lines of the LCD Display:

Select Input/Outputto Calibrate,Press "Diag" to Exit

INFO - The Diagnostic LEDglows red after a validpassword has been asked forand entered.

INFO - The ‘SelectInput/Output’ screen mustbe displayed when making anew selection while in theDiagnostic Mode. Return tothis screen by pressing the[Diag] key once.



The fourth line of the display is used to show the user’s selection. The user canchoose to calibrate or view any analog input or output, or manipulate any set ofdigital I/O points.

8.2.2. Display Groups in the Diagnostic ModeTo display an input or output variable to calibrate, select from the followingdisplay groups and associated key presses or select the I/O number if known,(usually supplied on a separate sheet).

DISPLAY VARIABLES VALID KEY PRESSES

All of the following key presses are valid in the Diagnostic Mode. To enterthe Diagnostic Mode, these key presses must be preceded by the [AlphaShift] [Diag] keys.

Input Channels (n = 1 through 24) [Input] or [Input] [n]

Meter Temperature (n = 1 through 4) [Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [n]

Meter Pressure (n = 1 through 4) [Press] or [Press] [Meter] [n]

Meter Density (n = 1 through 4) [Density] or [Dens] [Meter] [n]

Meter Density Temp (n = 1 through 4) [Density][Temp] or [Density][Temp][Meter][n]

Meter Dens Pressure (n = 1 through 4) [Density][Press] or [Density][Press][Meter][n]

Prover Temperature (Left, Right) [Prove [Temp]

Prover Pressure (Left, Right) [Prove [Temp]

Output Channels (n = 1 through 24) [Output] [n]

Digital I/O (n = 1 or 2) [Status] [n]

8.2.3. Leaving The Diagnostic ModeOnce you are done viewing and/or modifying the calibration settings, press[Diag] to return to the selection screen below:


Press the [Diag] key again to return to the Display Mode (Diagnostic LED willturn off).

INFO - Each input channel ofeach combo module has hadits temperature coefficienttrimmed to ±10 ppm/°F. Toavoid temperature gradienteffects and for best results,always allow the internaltemperature of the computerto stabilize before makingyour final calibrationadjustments.



8.3. Calibration Instructions

8.3.1. Calibrating A Voltage or Current Analog InputWhile the above display is shown select the input variable to calibrate. Forexample to calibrate Meter Run #1 Temperature, press [Meter] [1] [Temp] (orthe input # if known). The display shows:

Select Input/Outputto Calibrate,Press "Diag" to ExitMeter 1 Temp

Other key press combinations work. [Temp] [Meter] [1] means the same to thecomputer as [Meter] [1] [Temp]. Pressing [Temp] without a meter numberallows all of the temperatures to be scrolled through and calibrated.

Now enter the selection by pressing [Display] and the following is displayed:

Temperature #1Input# & Module 1-a1Override 60.0Calibrate Input ? _

The display shows the process variable name, the input channel number andcombo module used. This example shows Temperature Meter Run #1connected to Channel 1 of Combo Module A1.

Before calibrating an input the user should enter a Cal Override value to beused in all calculations in place of the live value.

Answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Input ?' question and the following is displayed:

Meter 1 27.5% Value 50.00Input Volts 3.000mA Value 12.00

Note: You can also calibratethe input and output of yourchoice by entering thenumber of that input oroutput; e.g.: Press [Input][1] [Enter]; press [Output][4] [Enter]. With this methodyou can calibrate the inputsand outputs to the computerwithout having themassigned to any I/O pointnumbers.

INFO - Unless previouslyentered, a request for a validpassword is made at thispoint.The calibrate override valueentered will be substituted forall process variablesassigned to this physical I/Opoint when the user answers[Y] to ‘Calibrate Input ?’. It isautomatically removed whenthe user presses the [Diag]key to exit or make a newselection.


ALL.71+ 04/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. 8-5

To calibrate the input channel follow these instructions:

1) Disconnect the transducer signal and replace it with a stable current orvoltage source capable of inputting 4.000 to 20.000 mA or 1.000 to 5.000V signal.

2) Set the input signal to 4.000 mA or 1.000 V as applicable.

3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads4.000 mA / 1.000 V.

4) Set the input signal to 20.000 mA or 5.000 V as applicable.

5) Using the Left/Right arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads20.000 mA / 5.000 V.

6) Recheck step 2) No further adjustment is normally needed if the Zero isadjusted at exactly 4.0 mA.

7) Disconnect the calibrator signal and reconnect the transducer signal.

8) Press the [Diag] key to return to the selection screen.

8.3.2. Calibrating an RTD Input ChannelWhile the above screen is being displayed select a process variable which isassigned as an RTD probe input. For example, assuming a pulse typedensitometer is installed, pressing [Meter] [1] [Density] [Temp] (or the input # ifknown), selects the input channel used to process Meter Run #1's Densitometerintegral RTD. Other key press combinations will work, and [Density] [Meter] [1][Temp] all mean the same. Pressing [Density] [Temp] allows the user to scrollthrough all density temperature channels.

Now enter the selection by pressing [Display] and the following is displayed:

! "#$

%! &'('

) *

INFO - Each input channelof each combo module hashad its temperaturecoefficient trimmed to 10ppm/F. To avoidtemperature gradient effectsand for best results, alwaysallow the internaltemperature of thecomputer to stabilize beforemaking your final calibrationadjustments.

INFO - The []/[] keysare used as a software‘Zero’ potentiometer.Adjustments made whenthe Shift LED is on areapproximately ten timesmore sensitive.Holding the arrow keyslonger than two secondsspeeds up the rate ofadjustment.

TIP - The Span adjustmenthas no effect at 4mA or 1v.Always adjust the ‘Zero’ firstat exactly 4mA or 1v.

Leaving the DiagnosticMode - In the ‘SelectInput/Output’ screen, pressthe [Diag] key to return tothe Display Mode(Diagnostic LED will turnoff).



Enter the Calibrate Override value and answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Input ?'question and a screen similar to the following is displayed:

Dens#1 Deg.F 65.0% Value 60.00Resistance ValueOhms 100.00

To Calibrate an RTD input channel proceed as follows :

1) Disconnect the RTD probe and connect precision decade resistance box.capable of inputting 25.00 to 150.00 Ohms as shown below.

2) Set the decade box to 25.00 Ohms.

3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads25.00 Ohms.

4) Set the decade box to 150.00 Ohms.

5) Using the Left/Right arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads150.00 Ohms.

6) Recheck step 2). No further adjustment is normally needed if the Zero isadjusted at exactly 25 Ohms.

7) Disconnect the decade box and reconnect the RTD probe.



INFO - Each input channel ofeach combo module has hadits temperature coefficienttrimmed to ±10 ppm/°F. Toavoid temperature gradienteffects and for best results,always allow the internaltemperature of the computerto stabilize before makingyour final calibrationadjustments.

INFO - Installing the decadebox at the actual RTD probelocation provides maximumaccuracy, but can beinconvenient. The errorsintroduced by installing thedecade box at the back panelterminals of the flowcomputer are approximately0.01% per 100 ohms of fieldwiring resistance.

TIP - The Span adjustmenthas no effect at 4mA or 1v.Always adjust the ‘Zero’ firstat exactly 4mA or 1v.

Leaving the DiagnosticMode - In the ‘SelectInput/Output’ screen, pressthe [Diag] key to return to theDisplay Mode (DiagnosticLED will turn off).

Fig. 8-1. Figure Showing Calibration of RTD Input Channel



8.3.3. Calibrating a 4 to 20 mA Digital to Analog OutputEach of the analog outputs can be calibrated by monitoring the loop current withan accurate milliamp meter and setting the output current to 4.00 mA and 20.00mA. For example to calibrate Analog Output #1 proceed as follows:

While the 'Select Input/Output' screen is displayed, press [Output] [1][Display]. The display shows:

Analog Output #10%=4mA, 100%=20mAOverride % 0.00Calibrate Output ? _

Answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Output ?' question and the display shows:

Analog Output #10%=4mA, 100%=20mAOverride % 0.00Override Now Active

To calibrate the output channel follow these steps:

1) Connect an accurate milliamp meter in series with the load.

2) Input 0.00 % (4.00 mA) as the output override.

3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the output current until the milliampmeter indicates 4.00 mA.

4) Input 100.00 % (20.00 mA) as the output override.

5) Using the Left/Right arrow key adjust the output current until the milliampmeter indicates 20.00 mA.

6) Repeat steps 2) through 5) until no further improvement can be obtained.

7) Remove the milliamp meter and reconnect the load.



CAUTION!

At this point, the analogoutput reflects the value ofthe currently displayedoverride, not the assignedvariable. The user mustensure that any equipmentusing the output signal willnot cause an unsafecondition to arise or causeerroneous results to begenerated.

Leaving the DiagnosticMode - In the ‘SelectInput/Output’ screen, pressthe [Diag] key to return to the'Display Mode' (DiagnosticLED will turn off).



8.3.4. Verifying the Operation of the Digital I/O PointsThe digital I/O points can be manipulated as a group by pressing [Status] [1]for digital points 1 through 12 or [Status] [2] for digital points 13 through 24.Pressing [Status] will allow the user to scroll to either group. Press [Display]and a screen similar to the following is displayed:

Digital#1 I/O PointsInput 001011001011Overide 101010101010Force To Output ? _

The second line shows the status of the I/O points frozen at the time that thescreen was displayed. The points are numbered left to right (1 to 12) with a '0'indicating that a point is off and a '1' indicating that a point is on. The third lineshows the override bit values that will be forced to the output port when the useranswers [Y] to the 'Force To Output ?' question. A screen similar to thefollowing is displayed:

Digital#1 I/O PointsInput 101110001101Overide 101010101010Override Now Active

The override '1's and '0's can be changed at any time while the 'Override NowActive' line is displayed. The input status displayed on the second line shouldalways agree with the green LEDs on the edge of the digital I/O module. RedLEDs lit indicate blown fuses on the digital I/O module.

Outputs on this I/O module that are assigned as totalizer outputs will stopcounting while the 'Override Now Active' line is displayed. Pulses to be outputare accumulated and are output at the maximum allowed rate as soon as the[Diag] key is pressed.

Press [Diag] to return to the selection screen below:


CAUTION!

After answering [Y], thedigital outputs will reflect thevalue of the currentlydisplayed override, not theassigned variable. The usermust ensure that anyequipment using the outputsignal will not cause anunsafe condition to arise orcause erroneous results tobe generated.

INFO - To avoid a hardwareconflict, only points that havebeen assigned as outputs willaccept an override of ‘1’; i.e.,entering a ‘1’ at an inputposition will be ignored anddisplayed as a ‘0’.

Leaving the DiagnosticMode - In the ‘SelectInput/Output’ screen, pressthe [Diag] key to return to theDisplay Mode (DiagnosticLED will turn off).



9. Flow Computer Specifications

9.1. EnvironmentalOperating Temperature : q -15°C to +65°C

Storage Temperature : q -20°C to +75°CRelative Humidity : q 80% non-condensing maximum

9.2. ElectricalSupply Voltage : q 120 VAC, 50-500 Hz; or 18-30 VDC, 10-20

Watts (excluding transducer loops)q Optional: 220-250 VAC, 50-500 Hz; or 18-

30 VDC, 10-20 Watts (excluding transducerloops)

Transducer Output Power : q 24 VDC at 400 mA+ for mostconfigurations (when AC powered)

Isolation : q All analog inputs and outputs are opticallyisolated from computer logic supply

q Maximum common mode voltage on anyinput or output is ± 250 VDC to chassisground.

9.3. Microprocessor CPUType : q Motorola MC68HC000FN16

q Clock Speed: 16 MHz, 0 wait state;Throughput 4,000,000 instructions/sec

Coprocessor : q Motorola MC68HC881/82FN16Bq Clock Speed: 16 MHz; Throughput 50,000

floating point operations/secEPROM Memory : q 1 Mbyte. expandable to 2 Mbytes max.

RAM Memory : q 512 bytes standard; Expandable to 1Mbytes max.

Real Time Clock : q Battery backed-up, time of day;programmable interval down to 1 msec

q Maintains time during power lossq Reports downtime on power-up

Logic Voltage : q 5 VDCOver-voltage Protection : q Crowbar on power supply fires at 6.25 VDC

approx.Transient Protection : q Transorbs on power supply module

RAM Memory Battery Backup : q 3.6 VDC Ni-Cad; rechargeableTypical Memory Backup Period : q 30-60 days (with power removed)

NOTICE!

Omni Flow Computers, Inc.,pursuant to a policy ofproduct development andimprovement, may make anynecessary changes to thesespecifications without notice.

Chapter 9 Flow Computer Specifications


9.4. BackplaneType : q Passive; configured with plug-in DIN

connectorsNumber of I/O Module Slots : q Omni 3000: 4 slots

q Omni 6000: 10 slots

9.5. Process Input/Output Combo Modules

TYPE INPUT #1 INPUT #2 INPUT #3 INPUT #4ANALOGOUTPUTS

ADDITIONALFEATURES

A 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD 1-5v; 4-20mA; Flow PulsesTwo

4-20mA • Pipe Proving

B 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD1-5v; 4-20mA

Flow PulseFrequency

DensityOne

4-20mA • Pipe Proving

E/D 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD Frequency DensityTwo

4-20mA

E 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD Flow PulsesTwo

4-20mA

• Pipe Proving• Double Chron. Proving• Level A Pulse Fidelity

H Honeywell DE ProtocolTwo

4-20mA

HV Honeywell Multivariable DE ProtocolTwo

4-20mA

PORT #1 PORT #2

SV RS-485 Multi-drop to Various Multivariable TransmittersSix

4-20mA

9.6. Flowmeter Pulse InputsInput Frequency : q DC to 15 kHz.

Positive Going Trigger Threshold : q +4.0 VoltsNegative Going Trigger Threshold : q +2.0 Volts

Input impedance : q 1 M OhmConfiguration : q Differential input (E module inputs are

single ended referenced to DC ret.)Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 VDC to chassis ground

Pulse Fidelity Check : q Channels are continuously compared forfrequency and sequence.

E Module Only : q Complete failure of either A or B channelwill not effect totalizing

q Simultaneous noise pulses are rejectedwith 85% certainty

NOTICE!




9.7. Detector Switch Inputs(Non-Double Chronometry)

Input Type : q VoltageGating Transition : q Application of voltage starts and stops

proves.Minimum Time Pulse High : q 1 msecMinimum Time Pulse Low : q 2 seconds

Input Impedance : q 4.7 k OhmsInput On Voltage : q >10 V On, <4 VDC+ Off (referenced to DC

Power Return)Debounce : q 2 sec in Software

Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 VDC to chassis ground

9.8. Detector Switch Inputs of E ComboModule

(Double Chronometry)

q Driven by open collector transistor or Normally Openswitch.

q Debounce capacitor may be needed with switch typedetectors.

9.9. Analog InputsInput Type : q 4 - 20 mA or 1-5 V

Input Impedance : q 1 MegOhm (250 Ohms) (4-20 mA rangeselected by installing shunt resistor)

Resolution : q 14 Binary Bits, w/ 500 msec sampleLinearity : q ±0.020% F.S. typical ± 1 Digit

Temperature Drift : q Less than ±15 ppm/OFCommon Mode Voltage : q ±250 VDC to chassis ground

9.10. RTD InputsRTD Configuration : q 4-wire Bridge

RTD Resistance : q 100 Ohm @ 32°FExcitation Current : q 3.45 mA Nominal

Maximum Field Wiring Resistance : q 1k Ohm per wireResolution : q 0.008 Ohms

Temperature Drift : q Less than ±15 ppm/°FLinearity : q ±0.020% F.S. typical ± 1 Digit

Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 VDC to chassis ground

NOTICE!




9.11. Analog OutputsResolution : q 12 Binary Bits

Output : q Current source 4-20 mA (referenced totransducer power return terminal)

Common Mode : q ±250 Volts to chassis groundMax./Min. Working Loop Voltage : q 30 VDC to 18 VDC

Loop Resistance : q 900 Ohm with 24 VDC Powerq 1.2 k Ohm with 30 VDC Power

Update Rate : q Each 500 milliseconds

9.12. Control Outputs/Status Inputs(12 per module)

Configuration : q Open emitter Darlington transistor source(Referenced to transducer power returnterminal)

Current Capacity : q 100 mA max., 500 mA per moduleOutput Voltage : q +DC - 1 V NominalCommon Mode : q ±250 Volts to chassis ground

Input Impedance : q 4.7 k Ohms in series with 2 LEDsInput Voltage : q Input voltages > 8 to < DC voltage at back

panel DC terminal block, typically 24 VDC,will be recognized as on

q Input voltages < +2 V will be recognized asoff

LEDs : q Operating and Fuse Indicators on eachchannel

Scan Rate : q Outputs may be pulsed at 50Hz Maximum

NOTICE!




9.13. Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface

9.13.1. RS-232 Compatible(2 per Module)

Serial Data Output Voltage : q ±7.5 Volts typicalRecommended Load Impedance : q 1.5 k Ohm

Short Circuit Current : q 10 mA limitedInput Low Threshold : q Vl = -3.0 VoltsInput High Threshold : q Vh = +3.0 Volts

Baud Rate : q Software selectableq Range 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 k bps

Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 Volts to chassis groundLEDs : q Indicator LEDs for each channel input,

output and handshaking signals

9.13.2. RS-485(2 per Module)

Serial Data Output Voltage : q 5 Volts differential driverRecommended Load Impedance : q 120 Ohm

Short Circuit Current : q 20 mAInput Low Threshold : q 0.8 Volts

Baud Rate : q Software selectableq Range 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 k bps

Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 Volts to chassis groundLEDs : q Indicator LEDs for each channel input,

output and handshaking signals

9.14. Operator KeypadKeypad Characteristics : q 34-key, domed membrane, with tactile and

audio feedbackMaterial : q Autotex 2 Hard coat Polyester Film

Data Entry Lockout : q Internal switch and software passwordsKey Debounce : q Software controlled

9.15. LCD DisplayDisplay : q 4 lines of 20 Characters

q 5 x 8 Dot MatrixCharacter Height : q 4.75 mm

Display Data : q Alphanumeric, 80 charactersBacklight : q Green/Yellow LED

q Viewing angle, contrast and backlightcontrolled from keypad



9.16. Electromechanical CountersQuantity : q Three, with programmable functionDisplay : q 6-digit, non-resetable

Character Height : q 5 mmMaximum Count Rate : q 10 counts per second

9.17. Operating Mode Indicator LEDsQuantity : q Four

Dual Color : q Red/GreenIndication : q Active Alarm LED

♦ Green: to indicate acknowledged existingalarm

♦ Red: to indicate new, unacknowledged,existing alarm

q Diagnostic LED

♦ Green: to indicate Diagnostic orCalibration Mode is active

♦ Red: to indicate password is activeq Program LED

♦ Green: to indicate Program orConfiguration Mode is active

♦ Red: to indicate password is activeq Alpha Shift LED

♦ Green: to indicate Alpha Shift LockMode is active

♦ Red: to indicate alpha shift next key only

9.18. SecurityHardware : q Optional lock on housing and internal

keyboard program lockoutSoftware : q Multi-level password control

NOTICE!



Firmware Revisions 20.71/24.71

Turbine/Positive Displacement/CoriolisLiquid Flow Metering Systems

with K Factor Linearization

Volume 2a Basic Operation

20/24.71+ w 04/98OMNI Flow Computer, Inc. i

BASIC OPERATION


Figures of Volume 2 ........................................................................................................ iii

1. Basic Operating Features......................................................................................... 1-1

1.1. Overview of the Keypad Functions .......................................................................1-1

1.2. Operating Modes ....................................................................................................1-21.2.1. Display Mode ......................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2.2. Keypad Program Mode.......................................................................................... 1-2

1.2.3. Diagnostic and Calibration Mode ......................................................................... 1-2

1.2.4. Field Entry Mode ................................................................................................... 1-2

1.3. Special Keys ...........................................................................................................1-41.3.1. Display/Enter (Help) Key ....................................................................................... 1-4

1.3.2. Up/Down Arrow Keys [áá]/[ââ] ............................................................................... 1-4

1.3.3. Left/Right Arrow Keys [ßß]/[àà] ............................................................................. 1-4

1.3.4. Alpha Shift Key and LED....................................................................................... 1-4

1.3.5. Program/Diagnostic Key [Prog/Diag] ................................................................... 1-5

1.3.6. Space/Clear (Cancel/Ack) Key............................................................................... 1-5

1.4. Adjusting the Display..............................................................................................1-5

1.5. Clearing and Viewing Alarms.................................................................................1-61.5.1. Acknowledging (Clearing) Alarms........................................................................ 1-6

1.5.2. Viewing Active and Historical Alarms .................................................................. 1-6

1.5.3. Alarm Conditions Caused by Static Discharges.................................................. 1-6

1.6. Computer Totalizing ...............................................................................................1-6


ii OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.20/24.71+ w 04/98

2. PID Control Functions .............................................................................................. 2-1

2.1. Overview of PID Control Functions....................................................................... 2-1

2.2. PID Control Displays .............................................................................................. 2-2

2.3. Changing the PID Control Operating Mode .......................................................... 2-32.3.1. Manual Valve Control.............................................................................................2-3

2.3.2. Automatic Valve Control........................................................................................2-3

2.3.3. Local Setpoint Select.............................................................................................2-4

2.3.4. Remote Setpoint Select .........................................................................................2-4

2.3.5. Changing the Secondary Variable Setpoint .........................................................2-4

2.4. PID Control Remote Setpoint ................................................................................ 2-4

2.5. Using the PID Startup and Shutdown Ramping Functions.................................. 2-5

2.6. Startup Ramp/Shutdown Ramp/Minimum Output Percent .................................. 2-5

2.7. PID Control Tuning................................................................................................. 2-62.7.1. Estimating The Required Controller Gain For Each Process Loop ....................2-6

2.7.2. Estimating The Repeats / Minutes And Fine Tuning The Gain ...........................2-7

3. Computer Batching Operations............................................................................... 3-1

3.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................ 3-1

3.2. Batch Status ........................................................................................................... 3-1

3.3. Batch Schedule Stack............................................................................................ 3-23.3.1. Empty Batch Schedule Stacks ..............................................................................3-2

3.3.2. Manually Editing the Batch Schedule Stack.........................................................3-2

3.4. Ending a Batch ....................................................................................................... 3-33.4.1. Using the Product Change Strobes to End a Batch.............................................3-3

3.4.2. Manually Ending a Batch from the Keypad ..........................................................3-3

3.5. Recalculate and Reprint a Previous Batch Ticket ............................................... 3-4

3.6. Batch Preset Counters........................................................................................... 3-53.6.1. Batch Preset Flags.................................................................................................3-5

3.6.2. Batch Warning Flags .............................................................................................3-5

3.7. Adjusting the Size of a Batch ................................................................................ 3-5

3.8. Automatic Batch Changes Based on Product Interface Detection..................... 3-6

4. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change................................................................ 4-1

4.1. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change Alarm Flag........................................... 4-1

4.2. Delayed Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change Alarm Flag ............................ 4-1

4.3. Determining the Gravity Rate of Change Limits................................................... 4-2


20/24.71+ w 04/98OMNI Flow Computer, Inc. iii

5. Meter Factors............................................................................................................. 5-1

5.1. Changing Meter Factors.........................................................................................5-1

5.2. Changing Meter Factors for the Running Product ...............................................5-2

5.3. Previous Meter Factor Saved data ........................................................................5-2

6. Proving Functions..................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1. Auto-Prove Mode ....................................................................................................6-16.1.1. Repeated Prove Aborts While in the Auto-Prove Mode....................................... 6-1

6.2. Full Sized Provers (Unidirectional and Bi-directional) .........................................6-2

6.3. Brooks Compact Prover.........................................................................................6-36.3.1. Proving Reports for Brooks Compact Provers ................................................... 6-4

6.4. Other Proving Reports ...........................................................................................6-4

7. Printed Reports ......................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1. Fixed Format Reports.............................................................................................7-1

7.2. Default Report Templates and Custom Reports...................................................7-2

7.3. Printing Reports......................................................................................................7-2

7.4. Audit Trail ................................................................................................................7-37.4.1. Audit Trail Report .................................................................................................. 7-3

7.4.2. Modbus Port Passwords and the Audit Trail Report ........................................ 7-3

8. Index of Display Variables........................................................................................ 8-1

Figures of Volume 2Fig. 1-1. Flow Computer Front Panel Keypad ..................................................................................... 1-1

Fig. 1-2. Block Diagram Showing the Keypad and Display Modes....................................................... 1-3

Fig. 2-1. Typical PID Control Application - Single Loop....................................................................... 2-1


20/24.71+ w 04/98OMNI Flow Computer, Inc. 1-1

1. Basic Operating Features

1.1. Overview of the Keypad FunctionsThirty-four keys are available. Eight special function keys and twenty-sixdedicated to the alphanumeric characters A through Z, 0 through 9 and variouspunctuation and math symbols.

The [Display/Enter] key, located at the bottom right, deserves special mention.This key is always used to execute a sequence of key presses. It is not unlikethat the ‘Enter’ key of a personal computer. Except when entering numbers in afield, the maximum number of keys that can be used in a key press sequence isfour (not counting the [Display/Enter] key).

INFO - Within the documentthe following convention isused to describe various keypress sequences: Individualkeys are shown in boldenclosed in brackets andseparated by a space.Although not alwaysindicated, it is assumed forthe rest of this document thatthe [Display/Enter] key isused at the end of every keypress sequence to enter acommand.

Fig. 1-1. Flow Computer Front Panel Keypad

Chapter 1 Basic Operating Features

1-2 20/24.71+ 04/98

Key words such as ‘Density ’, ‘Mass ’ and ‘Temp ’ appear over each of thealphanumeric keys. These key words indicate what data will be accessed whenincluded in a key press sequence. Pressing [Net] [Meter] [1] for instance willdisplay net flow rates and total accumulations for Meter Run #1. Pressing the[Net] key causes net flow rates and total accumulations for all active meter runsto be displayed. In many instances, the computer attempts to recognize similarkey press sequences as meaning the same thing; i.e., [Net] [1] , [Meter] [1][Net] and [Net] [Meter] [1] all cause the net volume data for Meter Run #1 to bedisplayed. In most cases, more data is available on a subject then can bedisplayed on four lines. The []/[] (up/down) arrow keys allow you to scrollthrough multiple screens.

1.2. Operating ModesKeyboard operation and data displayed in the LCD display depends on which ofthe 3 major display and entry modes are selected.

1.2.1. Display ModeThis is the normal mode of operation. Live meter run data is displayed andupdated every 200 msec. Data cannot be changed while in this mode.

1.2.2. Keypad Program ModeConfiguration data needed by the flow computer can be viewed and changed viathe keypad while in this mode. When the Program Mode is entered by pressingthe [Prog] key, the Program LED glows green . This changes to red when avalid password is requested and entered.

1.2.3. Diagnostic and Calibration ModeThe diagnostic and calibration features of the computer are accessed bypressing the [Diag] key ([Alpha Shift] then [Prog] . This mode allows you tocheck and adjust the calibration of each input and output point. The DiagnosticLED glows green until a valid password is requested and entered.

1.2.4. Field Entry ModeYou are in this mode whenever the data entry cursor is visible, which is anytimethe user is entering a number or password while in the Program Mode orDiagnostic Mode.



Fig. 1-2. Block Diagram Showing the Keypad and Display Modes


1-4 OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.20/24.71+ 04/98

1.3. Special Keys

1.3.1. Display/Enter (Help) KeyThis key is located bottom-right on the keypad.

Pressing once while in the Field Entry Mode will store the data entered in thefield to memory. Pressing twice within one second will cause the context-sensitive Help to be displayed. The Help displays contain useful informationregarding available variable assignments and selections.

When in other modes, use it at the end of a key press sequence to enter thecommand.

1.3.2. Up/Down Arrow Keys [ ]/[]These keys are located top-center on the keypad.

When in the Display Mode, the []/[] keys are used to scroll through datarelevant to a particular selection.

When in the Program Mode, they are used to scroll through data and position thecursor on data to be viewed or changed.

In the Diagnostic Mode, The up/down arrow keys are initially used to position thecursor within the field of data being changed. Once you select an input or outputto calibrate or adjust, the up/down arrow keys are used as a software ‘zero’potentiometer.

1.3.3. Left/Right Arrow Keys [ ]/[]These keys are located top-center on the keypad; to the left and rightrespectively of the Up/Down Arrow Keys.

The []/[] keys have no effect while in the Display Mode. When in ProgramMode, they are used to position the cursor within a data field.

In the Diagnostic Mode, they are initially used to position the cursor within thefield of data to be changed. Once you select an input or output to calibrate oradjust, the left/right arrow keys are used as software ‘span’ potentiometer.

1.3.4. Alpha Shift Key and LEDThis key is located top-right on the keypad.

Pressing the [Alpha Shift] key while in the Field Entry Mode causes the AlphaShift LED above the key to glow green , indicating that the next valid key presswill be interpreted as its shifted value. The Alpha Shift LED is then turned offautomatically when the next valid key is pressed.

Pressing the [Alpha Shift] key twice causes the Alpha Shift LED to glow redand the shift lock to be active. All valid keys are interpreted as their shifted valueuntil the [Alpha Shift] key is pressed or the [Display/Enter] key is pressed.

When in the Calibrate Mode, zero and span adjustments made via the arrow keysare approximately ten times more sensitive when the Alpha Shift LED is on.



1.3.5. Program/Diagnostic Key [Prog/Diag]This key is located top-left on the keypad.

While in the Display Mode, pressing this key changes the operating mode toeither the Program or Diagnostic Mode, depending on whether the Alpha ShiftLED is on. When in other modes, it cancels the current entry and goes backone menu level, eventually returning to the Display Mode.

1.3.6. Space/Clear (Cancel/Ack) KeyThis key is located bottom-left on the keypad.

Pressing this key while in the Display Mode acknowledges any new alarms thatoccur. The Active Alarm LED will also change from red to green indicating analarm condition exists but has been acknowledged.

When in the Field Entry Mode, unshifted, it causes the current variable fieldbeing changed to be cleared, leaving the cursor at the beginning of the fieldawaiting new data to be entered. With the Alpha Shift LED illuminated, itcauses the key to be interpreted as a space or blank.

When in all other modes, it cancels the current key press sequence by flushingthe key input buffer.

1.4. Adjusting the DisplayOnce the computer is mounted in its panel you may need to adjust the viewingangle and backlight intensity of the LCD display for optimum performance. Youmay need to re-adjust the brightness setting of the display should the computerbe subjected to transient electrical interference.

While in the Display Mode (Program LED and Diagnostic LED off), press[Setup] [Display] and follow the displayed instructions:

Use Up/Down ArrowsTo Adjust Contrast;Left, Right ArrowsTo Adjust Backlight

Static Discharges - It hasbeen found that applicationsof electrostatic dischargesmay cause the Active AlarmLED to glow red. Pressingthe [Space/Clear] key willacknowledge the alarm andturn off the red alarm light.



1.5. Clearing and Viewing Alarms

1.5.1. Acknowledging (Clearing) AlarmsNew alarms cause the Active Alarm LED to glow red . Pressing the[Cancel/Ack] key (bottom left), or setting Boolean Point 1712 via a digital I/Opoint or via a Modbus command, will acknowledge the alarm and cause theActive Alarm LED to change to green . The LED will go off when the alarmcondition clears.

1.5.2. Viewing Active and Historical AlarmsTo view all active alarms, press [Alarms] [Display] and use the []/[] arrowkeys to scroll through all active alarms.

The last 500 time-tagged alarms that have occurred are always available forprinting (see Historical Alarm Snapshot Report in this chapter).

1.5.3. Alarm Conditions Caused by Static DischargesIt has been found that applications of electrostatic discharges may cause theActive Alarm LED to glow red. Pressing the [Space/Clear] key will acknowledgethe alarm and turn off the red alarm light.

1.6. Computer TotalizingTwo types of totalizers are provided: 1) Three front panel electromechanical andnon-resetable; and 2) Software totalizers maintained in computer memory. Theelectromechanical totalizers can be programmed to count in any units via theMiscellaneous Setup Menu (Volume 3 ). The software totalizers provide batchand daily based totals, and are automatically printed, saved and reset at the endof each batch or the beginning of each contract day. Daily flow or time weightedaverages are also printed, saved and reset at the end of each day. Batch flowweighted averages are also available in liquid application flow computers.Software cumulative totalizers are also provided and can only be reset via thePassword Maintenance Menu (Volume 3 ). View the software totalizers bypressing [Gross] , [Net] or [Mass] . Pressing [Meter] [ n] [Gross] , [Net] or[Mass] will display the software for Meter Run ‘n’.

TIP - Alarm flags arelatched while the red LED ison. To avoid missingintermittent alarms, alwayspress [Alarms] [Display] toview alarms before pressing[Cancel/Ack] .



2. PID Control Functions

2.1. Overview of PID Control FunctionsFour independent control loops are available. Each loop is capable ofcontrolling a primary variable (usually flow rate) with a secondary overridevariable (usually meter back pressure or delivery pressure).

The primary and secondary set points can be adjusted locally via the keypadand remotely via a communication link. In addition, the primary set point can beadjusted via an analog input to the computer.

Contact closures can be used to initiate the startup and shutdown ramp functionwhich limits the control output slew rate during startup and shutdown conditions.

A high or low 'error select' function causes automatic override control by thesecondary variable in cases where it is necessary either to maintain a minimumsecondary process value or limit the secondary process maximum value.

Local manual control of the control output and bumpless transfer betweenautomatic and manual control is incorporated.

Fig. 2-1. Typical PID Control Application - Single Loop

Chapter 2 PID Control Functions

2-2 OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.20/24.71+ w 04/98

2.2. PID Control DisplaysWhile in the Display Mode press [Control] [n] [Display]. Press the Up/Downarrow keys to display the following screens:

Screen #1

PID #1 VALVE STATUSOpen 50.00Auto/Manual AutoPrimary Controlling

Screen #2

PID #1 PRIMARYMeasurement 20.00

Setpoint 20.00

Screen #3

PID #1 SECONDARYMeasurement 20.00

Setpoint 20.00

Screen #4

PID #1 SET POINTSource is LocalRemote S.P. InputValue is 20.00

INFO - Select PID Loop 1through 4 by entering ‘n’ as1, 2, 3 or 4.

Indicates which parameter isbeing controlled; primary or

secondary

Shows actual primary setpoint being used inengineering units

Shows actual secondary setpoint being used inengineering units

INFO - Data such as setpoints or operating modecannot be changed while inthe Display Mode.



2.3. Changing the PID Control OperatingMode

Press [Prog] [Control] [n] to display the following screen:

PID#1 OPERATING MODEManual Valve(Y/N) NLocal Set.Pt(Y/N) NSec Set.Pt 750.0

2.3.1. Manual Valve ControlTo change to manual valve control enter [Y] at the 'Manual Valve (Y/N)' promptand the following screen is displayed:

PID #1 MANUAL VALVEUp/Down Arrow to AdjMeasurement 20.00Open % 50.00

The switch from Auto to Manual is bumpless. Use the Up/Down arrow keys toopen or close the valve. Press [Prog] once to return to the previous screen.

PID#1 OPERATING MODEManual Valve (Y/N) YLocal Set.Pt(Y/N) NSec Set.Pt 750.0

2.3.2. Automatic Valve ControlTo change from manual to automatic valve control, enter [N] at the 'ManualValve (Y/N)' prompt. The switch to automatic is bumpless if local setpoint isselected.

INFO - Select PID Loop 1through 4 by entering ‘n’ as1, 2, 3 or 4.To access the next twoscreens you must enter the[Y] to select Manual Valve orLocal Setpoint even if a ‘Y’ isalready displayed.To cancel the Manual Modeor Local Setpoint Mode, enter[N].

Primary Variable(Measurement in engineering

units)

Notice you are now in ManualValve Control



2.3.3. Local Setpoint SelectEnter [Y] at the 'Local Set. Pt. (Y/N)' prompt and the following screen isdisplayed:

PID#1 LOCAL SETPOINTUp/Down Arrow to AdjMeasurement 20.00Setpoint 20.00

The switch from Remote to Local is bumpless. Use the Up/Down arrow keys toincrease or decrease the setpoint. Press [Prog] once to return to the previousscreen.

PID#1 OPERATING MODEManual Valve(Y/N) NLocal Set.Pt(Y/N) YSec Set.Pt 750.0

2.3.4. Remote Setpoint SelectTo change from local setpoint to remote setpoint, enter [N] at the 'Local Set.Pt.(Y/N)' prompt. The switch to remote setpoint may not be bumpless,depending upon the remote set point source.

2.3.5. Changing the Secondary Variable SetpointMove the cursor to the bottom line of the above display, press [Clear] and thenenter the new setpoint.

2.4. PID Control Remote SetpointAs described above, the PID control loop can be configured to accept either alocal setpoint or a remote setpoint value for the primary variable. The remotesetpoint is derived from an analog input (usually 4-20 mA). This input is scaledin engineering units and would usually come from another device such as anRTU. High/Low limits are applied to the remote setpoint signal to eliminatepossible problems of over or under speeding a turbine meter (see Volume 1,Chapter 8 for more details).

Primary Variable(Measurement in engineering

units)

Notice you are now inAutomatic with Local Valve

Control

Change the setpoint of thesecondary variable here

IMPORTANT!

You must assign a remotesetpoint input even if one willnot be used. The 4-20mAscaling of this inputdetermines the scaling of theprimary controlled variable.



2.5. Using the PID Startup and ShutdownRamping Functions

These functions are enabled when a startup and/or shutdown ramp ratebetween 0 and 99 percent is entered (see section ‘PID Setup’ in Volume 3).

Commands are provided to ‘Start’ the valve ramping open, ‘Shutdown’ to theminimum percent open valve or ‘Stop’ the flow by closing the valveimmediately once it has been ramped to the minimum percent open.

These commands are accessed using the keypad by pressing [Prog] [Batch][Meter] [n], which will display the following:

Mtr1 Batch Start Y ?Shutdown to Min% ?Batch Stop ?Print & Reset ?

2.6. Startup Ramp/Shutdown Ramp/MinimumOutput Percent

Inputs are provided for startup/shutdown ramp rates and minimum output %settings. When these startup/shutdown ramp rates are applied the controloutput, movements will be limited to the stated % movement per ½ second (seeVolume 3). On receipt of a shutdown signal, the output will ramp to theminimum output % for topoff purposes.



2.7. PID Control TuningIndividual control of gain and integral action are provided for both the primaryand secondary control loops. Tune the primary variable loop first by setting thesecondary setpoint high or low enough to stop the secondary control loop fromtaking control. Adjust the primary gain and integral repeats per minutes forstable control. Reset the primary and secondary set points to allow control onthe secondary variable without interference from the primary variable. Adjustthe secondary gain and integral repeats per minute for stable control of thesecondary variable.

2.7.1. Estimating The Required Controller Gain ForEach Process Loop

Each process loop will exhibit a gain function. A change in control valve outputwill produce a corresponding change in each of the process variables. The ratioof these changes represents the gain of the loop (For example: If a 10 %change in control output causes a 10% change in the process variable, the loopgain is 1.0. If a 10 % change in control output causes a 20 % change in processvariable, the loop gain is 2.0). To provide stable control the gain of each loopwith the controller included must be less than 1.0. In practice the controller gainis usually adjusted so that the total loop gain is between 0.6 and 0.9.Unfortunately the gain of each loop can vary with operating conditions. Forexample: A butterfly control valve may have a higher gain when almost closedto when it is almost fully open. This means that in many cases the controllergain must be set low so that stable control is achieved over the required rangeof control.

To estimate the gain of each loop proceed as follows for the required range ofoperating conditions:

(1) In manual, adjust the control output for required flowing conditions andnote process variable values.

(2) Make a known percentage step change of output (i.e., from 20% to 22%equals a 10% change).

(3) Note the percentage change of each process variable (i.e., 100 m3/hr to110 m3/hr equals a 10% change).

(4) Primary Gain Estimate = 0.75 / (Primary Loop Gain).

(5) Secondary Gain = 0.75 / (Secondary Loop Gain x Primary GainEstimate).

IMPORTANT!

PID Control Tuning - Theprimary variable must betuned first. When tuning theprimary variable loop, youmust set the secondarysetpoint high or low enoughto the point where it will nottake control. Otherwise, thePID loop will become veryunstable and virtuallyimpossible to tune. Adjust theprimary gain and integralrepeats per minute until youachieve stable control.Likewise, when tuning thesecondary setpoint, theprimary must be set so itcannot interfere. Once youhave achieved stable controlof both loops, you can thenenter the setpointsestablished for each loop atnormal operating conditions.

INFO - The primary gaininteracts with the secondarygain. The actual secondarygain factor is the product ofthe primary gain andsecondary gain factors.



2.7.2. Estimating The Repeats / Minutes And FineTuning The Gain

(1) Set the 'repeats / minute' to 40 for both primary and secondary loops.

(2) Adjust set points so that only the primary (sec) loop is trying to control.

(3) While controlling the primary (sec) variable, increase the primary (sec)gain until some controlled oscillation is observed.

(4) Set the primary (sec) 'repeats/minute' to equal 0.75 / (Period of theoscillation in minutes).

(5) Set the primary (sec) gain to 75% of the value needed to make the looposcillate.

(6) Repeat (2) through (5) for the secondary variable loop.



3. Computer Batching Operations

3.1. IntroductionA complete set of software batch totalizers and flow weighted averages are alsoprovided in addition to the daily and cumulative totalizers. These totalizers andaverages can be printed, saved and reset automatically, based on the numberof barrels or cubic meters delivered, change of product or on demand. TheOmni flow computer can keep track of 4 independent meter runs running anycombination of 16 different products. Flowmeter runs can be combined andtreated as a station. The batch totalizers and batch flow weighted averages areprinted, saved and reset at the end of each batch. The next batch startsautomatically when the pulses from the flowmeter exceed the meter activethreshold frequency. Pulses received up to that point which do not exceed thethreshold frequency are still included in the new batch, but the batch start timeand date are not captured until the threshold is exceeded.

3.2. Batch StatusThe batch status appears on the Status Report and is defined as either:

o In Progress ------- Batch is in progress with the meter active.o Suspended ------- Batch is in progress with the meter not active.o Batch Ended ----- Batch End has been received, meter not active.

Chapter 3 Computer Batching Operations


3.3. Batch Schedule StackWhen running independent products on each meter run, each flowmeter run hasa batch schedule stack which stores the setup information for up to 5 futurebatches. The setup information is popped off the appropriate stack by thecomputer at the beginning of each batch. When all meter runs are running thesame product, the individual meter run batch schedule stacks are combined andorganized to store up to the next 23 future station batches.

3.3.1. Empty Batch Schedule StacksThe flow computer will use the batch setup data for the batch last completed ifthe meters batch schedule stack is empty at the beginning of a new next batch.

3.3.2. Manually Editing the Batch Schedule StackPressing [Prog] [Batch] [Setup] or [Prog] [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Setup]displays the screen similar to that shown below. The screen shows informationregarding the current running batch. The 16 character batch ID number appearson all reports and can be edited at any time during a batch. The starting size ofthe batch in net barrels is used to determine the value of the batch presetcounter. It can be changed at any time during a batch and the batch presetcounter will be adjusted accordingly.

MTR #1 CURRENT BATCHID: Butane 5010Running Product 1Size BBl 100

By using the [áá]/[ââ] keys you can scroll through and modify any one of the 6batch setups (in Independent Batch Stack) and 24 (in Common Batch Stack) inthe Batch Schedule Stack.

M1:1 I=Ins D=Del ?ID: EP-001-021-BUTProduct to Run? 0Size BBl 0

The number on the left on Line 1 is the flowmeter run number and stackposition; i.e., M2:1 will be the next batch setup run for Meter #2, M2:2 the nextand so on. Batch setups can be inserted before the displayed position or thedisplayed setup and can be deleted by entering ‘I’ or ‘D” on Line 1. Press[Prog] twice to return to the Display Mode.

TIP - When ending a batchwith flow occurring,remember that the next batchwill start immediately afteryou end the current one. Youshould check that the batchschedule contains the correctsetup information for thatbatch.



3.4. Ending a BatchA batch in progress is ended by setting the appropriate “End Batch Flag’ in thecomputer’s database. This can be done manually from the keypad, on a timedbasis, through a digital I/O point or via a Modbus command.

3.4.1. Using the Product Change Strobes to End aBatch

Batches can be ended and products changed by using the ‘Product ChangeStrobes’ (Boolean 1707 and 1747 through 1750). Setting any of these Booleancommands, either through a digital input or writing it through a Modbus port,will cause the flow computer to:

(1) End the batch in progress and print a batch report.

(2) Determine what the next product to run will be by decoding the binarycoded ’Product Select Input’ flags (Booleans 1743 through 1746).

(3) Write the number of the selected product into the next batch stackposition.

(4) Pop the batch setup off the stack and start a new batch.

3.4.2. Manually Ending a Batch from the KeypadPress the [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] or [Prog] [Meter] [n] [Batch] keys and ascreen similar to the following will be displayed:

METER #1 BATCHPrint & Reset ?

Pressing [Prog] [Batch] and [Enter] (i.e., not specifying a meter run) willdisplay the following:

STATION BATCHPrint & Reset ?

Enter [Y] to the ’Print & Reset ?’ question and enter your password whenrequested. The batch will be ended immediately and a Batch Report printed out.

The above displays will vary if the PID ramping functions are enabled (see thefollowing section).



3.5. Recalculate and Reprint a PreviousBatch Ticket

To recalculate and reprint a previous batch, you must do the following:

(1) Press [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = meter run number).The Omni LCD screen will display:

METER #1 BATCHPrint & Reset ?Select Prev# Batch 1Enter API60 .0Enter SG60 .0000Enter %S&W .00Recalculate&Print?

(2) Select which previous batch you wish to recalculate. The Omni storesthe last 4 completed batches numbered as:

1 = last batch completedto4 = oldest batch completed.

(3) Press [↓↓] to scroll down to “Select Prev # Batch” and enter a numberbetween 1 and 4, depending upon which batch is to be recalculated. Theflow computer moves the selected previous batch data to the ‘previousbatch’ data points within the database (see explanation in TechnicalBulletin TB-980202)

(4) Enter Password when requested. Scroll to either “Enter API60” or“Enter SG60”. Type in a valid value and press [Enter].

(5) Scroll to “Recalculate & Print?”. Press [Y] and then [Enter].

At this time the flow computer will recalculate the batch data and send thereport to the printer and the ‘Historical Batch Report Buffer’ in RAM memory.The default batch report shows the batch number as XXXXXX-XX where thenumber ahead of the ‘-‘ is the batch number and the number after the ‘-‘ is thenumber of times that the batch has been recalculated.

Recalculating a PreviousBatch - For more informationon this topic, see TechnicalBulletin TB-980202“Recalculating a PreviousBatch within the FlowComputer” included inVolume 5.



3.6. Batch Preset CountersIndependent batch preset counters are provided for each meter run when in theIndependent Batch Stack Mode. Each batch preset counter is pre-loaded withthe batch size taken from the appropriate batch schedule stack. The counter isautomatically reduced by the meter runs net flow. Press [Batch] [Preset][Meter] [n] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Preset] to see the current value of thecounter for a particular meter run:

Meter#1 Batch Presetbarrels 49978Mtr#1 Preset Warningbarrels 100

3.6.1. Batch Preset FlagsThe batch preset flags are Boolean variables within the database which areautomatically set whenever the appropriate batch preset counter reaches zero.They are available for use in programmable Boolean equations and digital I/Ofunctions.

3.6.2. Batch Warning FlagsThe batch warning flags are Boolean variables within the database which isautomatically set whenever the appropriate batch preset counter is equal or lessthan the programmed batch warning value. It is available for use inprogrammable Boolean equations and digital I/O functions.

3.7. Adjusting the Size of a BatchThe size of a running batch may change several times during the progress ofthe batch. This is usually due to product take-off or injection upstream of themetering station. While in the Display Mode, press [Prog] and then [Batch][Preset] [Meter] [n] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Preset]. This will show thefollowing screen.

ADJUST #1 BATCH SIZEEnter Amount toAdjust 0Size Now 100000

Press [Clear] and enter the number of barrels/cubic meters (lbs or kgs) that youwish to add to the size of the batch. Enter a minus number to reduce the size ofthe batch.

INFO - In order to activatethe batch preset counter youmust have entered a batchsize other than zero beforethe batch started (i.e.,starting with a batch size ofzero disables the presetcounter feature). Batchpresets can be selected forgross, net or mass units (seeVolume 3; 2.7. Configuringthe Meter Station).

INFO - The batch presetcounter can be selected forgross, net or mass units (seeVolume 3; 2.7. Configuringthe Meter Station).



3.8. Automatic Batch Changes Based onProduct Interface Detection

Automatic batch changes can be made by the computer by monitoring the rateof change of the product’s specific gravity/density during the final moments of abatch. For example, a Boolean point can be programmed to be active wheneverthe specific gravity rate of change flag is set and the batch warning flag is set.A digital output can then be assigned to this ‘interface detected’ Boolean flagand can be used to cause a ‘batch end’ command. Specific gravity disturbanceswhich may occur during the batch will be alarmed but will not be used to end abatch unless the batch warning flag has been reached.



4. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change

4.1. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of ChangeAlarm Flag

The specific gravity/density rate of change alarm flag is a flag within thedatabase which is set whenever the rate of change of the station gravity/densitywith respect to flow (∆SG or ∆Dens see sidebar) exceeds the preset limit. It isused to detect a change in flowing product and is available for use inprogrammable Boolean equations and digital I/O functions.

4.2. Delayed Specific Gravity/Density Rate ofChange Alarm Flag

In many cases the densitometer or gravitometer used to detect the productinterface is mounted many Bbls (m3 or liter3) ahead of the valve manifold usedto cut the product and end the batch. A second gravity/density rate of changeflag which is delayed by the amount of line pack Bbls or m3 provides anaccurate indication of when the interface reaches the actual valve manifold.

Next Interface DueBarrels 156

The 'Next Interface Due' counter shows the number of Bbls or m3 of line packremaining before the leading edge of the product interface reaches the valvemanifold. A minus number indicates that the leading edge has passed. Up tothree interfaces can be tracked between the interface detector and the valvemanifold.

∆∆SG & ∆∆Dens - DeltaSpecific Gravity (∆SG) refersto U.S. customary units andis measured per barrel. DeltaDensity (∆Dens) refers tometric units and is measuredin kilograms per cubic meter.The ∆SG (or ∆Dens) functionis the smallest difference inspecific gravity (or density)between two products thatwill form the productinterface.

Chapter 4 Specific Gravity Rate of Change


4.3. Determining the Gravity Rate of ChangeLimits

To accurately detect the product interface it is important to set the ‘gravity’ rateof change limits correctly. This limit is expressed as change in Specific Gravityper Net Bbl or m3 (∆SG/Bbl or ∆Dens/m3 see sidebar) and as such is flow rateindependent. Too small a limit will cause minor disturbances to be detected andtoo large will cause the interface to be missed.

For example: A pipeline runs ISO-Butane (0.565), N-Butane (0.585) andPropane (0.507). The smallest ∆SG in this case is 0.585 minus 0.565, whichequals 0.020 SG units. It was observed that once an interface was detected, 33Bbls passed before the specific gravity stabilized at the new gravity. The actualgravity rate of change limit for this example is calculated as:

0.20 / 33 = 0.0006 (∆∆SG/Bbl)

To ensure that we reliably detect the gravity rate of change, we set the rate ofchange limits to one third of the actual expected rate of change (i.e., 0.0006/2)which is 0.0002. To enter this value, press [Prog] [Meter] [Enter]. Scroll downto 'Grav Change' and enter 0.0006.

Meter StationGrav Change .0006Line Pack 250

∆∆SG & ∆∆Dens - DeltaSpecific Gravity (∆SG) refersto U.S. customary units andis measured per barrel. DeltaDensity (∆Dens) refers tometric units and is measuredper cubic meter. The ∆SG(or ∆Dens) function is thesmallest difference inspecific gravity (or density)between two products thatwill form the productinterface.



5. Meter Factors

5.1. Changing Meter FactorsTo do this you must edit the product file information by pressing [Prog]. Thenpress [Product] [Enter] to scroll through all 16 sets of product data. Pressing[Product] [n] [Enter], where ‘n’ is 1-16, will allow you to go directly to data for aspecific product number. A display similar to the following can be scrolledthrough:

PRODUCT #5Name PROPANETable Select 2Override API 150.9Override Dens 5010M.F. #1 1.0099M.F. #2 1.0034M.F. #3 1.0023M.F. #4 .9995

Move the cursor to the appropriate meter factor, press [Clear] and re-enter therequired meter factor. Note that only numbers greater than 0.8000 and less than1.2001 are allowed. The ‘Retroactive Barrels’ question will not be promptedunless the meter factor you want to modify is being used at the time.

Chapter 5 Meter Factors


5.2. Changing Meter Factors for the RunningProduct

Enter the Program Mode by pressing [Prog]. Then press [Factor] [Enter]; thiswill allow you to scroll through all meter factors; or press [Meter] [n] [Factor][Enter] to go directly to the meter factor for Flowmeter ’n’ (n = 1, 2, 3 or 4).

Flowmeter #1Meter Factor 1.0000

Press [Clear] and then enter the required meter factor. You will be prompted toenter the number of retroactive gross barrels (or cubic meters) that the newmeter factor will be applied to.

Flow Meter #1Meter Factor 1.0050

Retro Bbls ? 1000

Note that only numbers greater than 0.8000 and less then 1.2001 are allowedas meter factors. The meter factor will automatically replace the previous meterfactor in the appropriate product information file.

5.3. Previous Meter Factor Saved dataWhenever a flowmeter is proved, the new meter factor is compared against thecurrent meter factor. Additional data such as the flow rate and a time tag isneeded in order for this data to be meaningful. This ‘Previous Meter Factor’data is saved with the meter factor automatically whenever a meter factor isimplemented after a prove or entered manually while it is being used.



6. Proving Functions

6.1. Auto-Prove ModeThe auto prove mode requires that a prover is available on a continuous basiswith motorized actuators on the appropriate valves. Flowmeters can beautomatically proved whenever the flow rate varies more than a certain amountfrom the flow rate that existed when the flowmeter was last proved or when themeter factor was manually entered. Flowmeters can also be proved whenever acertain amount of flow has been measured without a proving, or after a meterhas been shut-in for more than a certain period of time and flow has beenstarted.

Entries are provided in the [Prog] [Prove] [Setup] menu to:

q Enter the percentage change in flow rate which will trigger an auto-proverequest.

q Enter a minimum number of Bbls (or m3)/hr flow rate change to trigger anauto-prove request (needed at the lower flow rates where the percentagechange would be a very small volume change).

q Specify the period of time that the flow must remain at the new changedrate before a prove sequence is started.

q Specify the period of time that a meter must be shut in before the needfor a prove sequence is flagged.

q Specify the maximum amount of flow between proves.

An additional entry in the [Prog] [Meter] [n] menu is required to activate or puta meter run into the Auto-prove Mode.

6.1.1. Repeated Prove Aborts While in the Auto-ProveMode

If 10 consecutive prove aborts occur when trying to ‘auto-prove’ a specificmeter, ‘auto-prove’ for that meter will be disabled (each prove abort reason willalso be logged into the historical alarm stack). If during the Auto-prove Mode, aprove is completed and the meter factor is not implemented because of anunexpected meter factor shift. The computer will wait the allowed time(‘Inactive Timer’ under Prove Setup) before trying another prove run. If thesecond completed run cannot implement the meter factor, then the Auto-proveMode for that meter will be disabled.

Chapter 6 Proving Functions


6.2. Full Sized Provers (Unidirectional andBi-directional)

Proving functions are accessed via the Program Mode. Press [Prog] [Prove][Enter] and the following selection menu is displayed:

* Prover Operation *Trial Report (Y/N)Trial Prove Mtr"n" _Prove Meter "n"Abort Prove ? (Y)

For a single 'Trial Prove', enter the meter number to be proved on the 2nd line.To disable a trial prove report, enter [Y] on line one. For a prove sequenceenter the number of the meter to be proved on the 3rd line. To abort a prove inprogress enter [Y] on the 4th line. After making your entry the flow computer willautomatically return you to the Display Mode and select the 'Prove CountsDisplay':

Counts 0Prove Run 1Meter Selected 2Check Temp Stability

The bottom line of this display shows the current status of the prover. As theprove sequence proceeds the 4th line is updated with the current status:

Ball Launched Fwd.1st Detector SwitchIn Flight Forward2nd Detector SwitchOver Travel ForwardBall LaunchedReverse1st Detector SwitchIn Flight Reverse2nd Detector SwitchOver Travel Reverse

The 'Prove Run' number on line 2 increments as each run is completed.Assuming a successful prove the 4th line indicates:

Prove Completed



When the required number of consecutive runs within the run deviation limitsare accumulated. The run data are averaged and the prove calculations areperformed. The resultant meter factor is compared against the current meterfactor and if it is within acceptable limits can be automatically stored in theappropriate product file and implemented retroactively for the current batch.

6.3. Brooks Compact ProverProving functions are accessed the same as with full sized provers; via theProgram Mode. Press [Prog] [Prove] [Enter] and the following selection menuis displayed:

*PROVER OPERATION*Invar Rod Deg.F 75.5Trial Report (Y/N)Trial Prove Mtr"n"Prove Meter "n"Abort Prove ? (Y)

An additional entry is included for a Brooks prover (Invar Rod temperature). Theinvar rod is part of the detector switch mechanism of the prover and is usuallyclose to ambient temperature. Enter the correct temperature to enable thecomputer to correct for any thermal expansion.

For a single 'Trial Prove' enter the meter number to be proved on the 3rd line.For a prove sequence enter the number of the meter to be proved on the 4th

line. To abort a prove in progress press the down arrow and enter [Y] on the 5th

line.

After making your entry the flow computer will automatically return you to theDisplay Mode and select the 'Prove Counts Display' :

Counts 0Prove Run 1Meter Selected 2Check Temp Stability

As with the full sized prover the bottom line of this display shows the currentstatus of the prover. Two additional status states will appear.

Check Plenum Press

While the computer is checking for temperature stability it is also checking andadjusting the plenum chamber pressure. The status line above will only show ifthe plenum pressure is still not within the selected dead band by the time thetemperature is stable.

Piston Downstream

Chapter 6 Proving Functions


This status display occurs while the prover is returning the piston to theupstream position ready to launch.

Use the arrow keys to scroll down the display. A second screen is relevant tothe pulse interpolation method of accumulating prove pulse counts.

Prove Counts 1034Tdvol 2.234122Tdfmp 2.202312Piston Downstream

The 1st line shows the integer counts. Tdvol is the time between detectors andTdfmp is the time between the 1st flowmeter pulse after each of the detectors.

A pass report is printed at the end of each set of passes.

6.3.1. Proving Reports for Brooks Compact ProversAs the compact prove sequence progresses the flow computer will print thePass Summary Report. This report is printed for each sequence of passes thatcomprise a prove run. The number of passes made per run is selectable from 1to 25 (see Prover Setup in Volume 3. Note: an entry of 1 will disable thisreport).

On completion of a successful prove a Meter Proving Report will be printed.This report is user configurable via the OmniCom configuration program.

6.4. Other Proving ReportsThe following reports are also available with this application:

o Prove Abort Reporto Meter Proving Report For Master Meter Methodo Mass Proving Report



7. Printed Reports-

7.1. Fixed Format ReportsSeveral reports use a ‘fixed format’ (i.e., cannot be changed by the user). Theseare described below:

q Status Report Shows general information on current activeflowmeters, batch status (In progress /Suspended / Ended), current runningproducts, batch ID string, current alarms andfuture batch information.

q Historical Alarm Report Date and time tags of the last 500 alarms,when they occurred and are cleared. Meterrun specific alarms also snapshot the grossvolume and mass totalizers. Meter factorchanges are also recorded here.

q Audit Trail Report Date and time tags of up to the last 150changes to the flow computer database madevia the local keypad. Changes made viaeither Modbus port will also be recorded if thepassword feature is being used on that port.

q Product File Report Shows information related to the productsetup of the flow computer. For turbine/PDliquid flow computers, this data includesproduct name, meter factors, overridegravities/densities and the equation orstandard to be used for each product. Gasflow computers print product name, fluid type,calculations standard, component analysis,viscosity and isentropic overrides, SG andheating value overrides for each product.

q Config Data Report Lists most configuration settings currently inthe flow computer.

Chapter 7 Printed Reports


7.2. Default Report Templates and CustomReports

The following reports are user-configurable via the OmniCom configurationprogram.

q Snapshot Reportq Batch Reportq Daily Reportq Prove Report

7.3. Printing ReportsA Snapshot Report can be printed by pressing [Print] [Enter] and can also beprinted automatically on timed intervals (see 9. “Print Setup” in Chapter 9).

Other printed reports are accessed from the Program Mode. Press [Prog][Print] [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed:

*PRINT REPORT MENU*Snapshot Report ?Previous Snapshot?Status Report ?(Y)Prev. Batch (1-8)Prev. Ticket ?Prev. Daily (1-8)Prev. Prove (1-8)Hist Alarm ?Audit Trail ? (Y) **Arch Starts **# of Arc DaysProduct File ?(Y)Config Report ?(Y)

Move the cursor to the report required and enter [Y] or the number of thehistorical report you wish to print ([1] refers to the latest, [2] refers to the next tolatest etc). Press [Prog] twice to return to the Display Mode.

INFO - Entering a numberbetween 1 and 500 at the‘Hist Alarm ?’ line will causemany previous alarms to beprinted. When requestingreports, such as previousdaily, batch or prover reports,you must enter a numberbetween 1 and 8; 1 refers tothe last report generated and8 refers to the oldest report.Up to 150 previous data entrychanges can be printed whenthe ‘Audit Trail’ isrequested.Note: ** These entries onlyshow up when the archiveram is installed.



7.4. Audit Trail

7.4.1. Audit Trail ReportA fixed format report provides an audit trail of changes made to the flowcomputer database. The number of changes that can be reported depends onthe type of changes made. The last 150 items are recorded. Each recordconsists of a unique event number, time & date tag, database index number forthe variable changed and the new and old value of the variable, The startingindex number and the number of points changed is recorded when changes aremade remotely via a Modbus port, using OmniCom for instance.

7.4.2. Modbus Port Passwords and the Audit TrailReport

The Audit Trail Report is stored within the flow computer and is used todocument and time and date stamp changes made to the flow computerdatabase, either via the local keypad or via password protected serial portaccess. The report is formatted in columns as shown above:

PASSWORD CODES

100Privileged Level Password entered at thekeypad 300

Level A Password entered via Serial Port#3

101Level 1 Password entered at local keypad

301Level B Password entered via Serial Port#3

102Level 2 Password entered at local keypad

302Level C Password entered via Serial Port#3

103Serial Port #2 Level A Password enteredat local keypad 400



Level B Password entered via Serial Port#4


Level C Password entered via Serial Port#4

108Level 1A Password entered at localkeypad 500


200Level A Password entered via Serial Port#2 501

Level B Password entered via Serial Port#1

201Level B Password entered via Serial Port#2 502

Level C Password entered via Serial Port#1

202Level C Password entered via Serial Port#2 503

Serial Port #1 Level A Password enteredat local keypad

PIPELINE COMPANY NAME

Audit Trail Report Page: 1 Date: xx/xx/xx Time: xx:xx:xx Computer ID: REV2271

Event Time Date Index Old Value/ New Value/

No. Number1 # of Points Serial Port xxx xx:xx:xx xx/xx/xx xxxxx x.xxxxxxxxxxx x.xxxxxxxxxxx

Note1: Password entries arerecorded in this field. A three-digit code signifies thepassword source and level ofthe password entered. Thesecodes are as follows:



8. Index of Display Variables


Flow Rates and TotalizersBatch Totalizers are displayed by including the [Batch] key before the key pressesshown below:

Daily & Cumulative Uncorrected Gross (IV) [Gross] or [Gross] [Meter] [n]

Batch Uncorrected Gross (IV) [Batch] [Gross] or [Batch] [Gross] [Meter] [n]

Daily & Cumulative Corrected Net (GSV) [Net] or [Net] [Meter] [n]

Daily & Cumul. S&W Corrected Net (NSV) [Net] [Net] [Meter] [n] or [Meter] [n] [Net] [Net]

Batch Corrected Net [Batch] [Net] or [Batch] [Net] [Meter] [n]

Batch S&W Corrected Net (NSV) [Net] [Net] [Batch] or [Batch] [Net] [Net]

Daily & Cumulative Mass [Mass] or [Mass] [Meter] [n]

Batch Mass [Batch] [Mass] or [Batch] [Mass] [Meter] [n]

Daily & Cumulative Energy [Energy] or [Energy] [Meter] [n]

Total @ Second Reference Temperature [Net] or [Net] [Meter] [n]

Current Instantaneous ValuesBatch Totalizers are displayed by including the [Batch] key before the key pressesshown below:

Meter Temperatures [Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [n]

Meter Pressures [Press] or [Press] [Meter] [n]

Density [Density] or [Density] [Meter] [n]

Unfactored Density [Density] [Meter] [n]

API Gravity & API @ Reference [SG/API] or [SG/API] [Meter] [n]

Specific Gravity & SG @ Reference [SG/API] or [SG/API] [Meter] [n]

Densitometer Temperatures [Density] [Temp] or [Density] [Temp] [Meter] [n]

Densitometer Pressures [Density] [Press] or [Density] [Press] [Meter] [n]

Prover Temperatures [Prove] [Temp]

Prove Pressures & Plenum Pressure [Prove] [Press]

Prover Density [Prove] [Density]

Prover Density Temperature [Prove] [Density] [Temp]

Prover Density Pressure [Prove] [Density] [Press]

Auxiliary Inputs 1-4 [Analysis] [Input]

Index of Display Variables-These lists contain variablegroups and correspondingkey press sequences neededto display them. In mostcases, the sequence can bereversed (i.e.: [Temp][Meter] [n] is the same as[Meter] [n] [Temp]). In allcases, the [Display/Enter]key (keypad bottom right)must be pressed to enter thecommand. Some variablesmay not be displayed basedon the application or thephysical I/O assignments.

Chapter 8 Index of Display Variables



Calculation FactorsBatch Totalizers are displayed by including the [Batch] key before the key pressesshown below.

Volume Correction Factors (VCF) [Temp] [Factor] or [Temp] [Factor] [Meter] [n]

Pressure Correction Factors (Cpl) [Press] [Factor] or [Press] [Factor] [Meter] [n]

Batch FWA Meter Factors [Batch] [Meter] [n] [Factor]

Other Factors and Intermediate Calculation factors

Meter Factors & K Factors [Factor] or [Meter] [n] [Factor]

Pycnometer Factors [Density] [Factor] or [Density][Factor] [Meter] [n]

Solartron / Sarasota / UGC Factors [Density] [Factor] or [Density][Factor] [Meter] [n]

Equilibrium Pressure / A, B & F Factors [Press] [Factor] [Meter] [n]

Linearizing Factor / Daily FWA LCF [Factor]

Alarm Information

Active Alarms [Alarms]

Transducer High/Low Alarm Limits [Meter] or [Meter] [n]

Product Information

Product Number and NameOverride API & SG GravityMeter Factors Calculation Mode

[Product] or [Product] [n]

Note: n = 1-16

Prover Sequence Information

Prove Counts & Run NumberMeter Selected to ProveCurrent Prover StatusTdvol & Tdfmp Timers [Counts] or [Prove] [Counts]

Batch Schedule Stack & Presets

Batch ID Character StringRunning Product Number [Batch] [Setup] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Setup]

Batch Preset Counters &Interface Due Line Pack Counter [Batch] [Preset] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Preset]

Miscellaneous Displays

Current Time & DatePower Last Applied Time & DatePower Last Lost Time & DateTask Timing Display [Time]

Display of Raw Input Signals [Input]

Display of Raw Output Signals [Output] [Status]

Hardware Inventory / Software Version [Status]

Honeywell Module Status [Input] [Status]




PID Control Displays

Primary Setpoint Source Local/RemoteRemote Setpoint ValuePrimary Measurement & SetpointSecondary Measurement & SetpointValve Open % & Auto/Manual Status [Control] [n]

User DisplaysUp to eight additional displays can be programmed by the user (See Volume 3 formore details).

Volume 3 Configuration and Advanced Operation

20/24.71 w 04/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. i

CONFIGURATION AND ADVANCEDOPERATION


Figures of Volume 3 ....................................................................................................... ix

1. Overview of Firmware Revisions 20.71/24.71 ......................................................... 1-1

1.1. Number of Meter Runs - Type of Flowmeters .......................................................1-1

1.2. Product Configuration............................................................................................1-1

1.3. Configurable Sensors per Meter Run....................................................................1-2

1.4. Configurable Sensors per Prover..........................................................................1-2

1.5. Temperature............................................................................................................1-2

1.6. Densitometers.........................................................................................................1-2

1.7. Station Capability....................................................................................................1-2

1.8. Auxiliary Inputs .......................................................................................................1-2

1.9. Number of products - Information Stored/Product...............................................1-2

1.10. Type of Products Measured.................................................................................1-2

1.11. Batching and Interface Detection ........................................................................1-3

1.12. Auto Proving Features..........................................................................................1-3

1.13. Retroactive Meter Factors and Override Gravity................................................1-3

1.14. Retroactive Density Correction Factor................................................................1-3

1.15. Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearizing...........................................................................1-3

1.16. PID Control Functions ..........................................................................................1-4

1.17. Flow Weighted Averages......................................................................................1-4


ii OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.20/24.71 w 04/98

1.18. User-Programmable Digital I/O............................................................................ 1-4

1.19. User-Programmable Logic Functions ................................................................. 1-4

1.20. User-Programmable Alarm Functions................................................................. 1-4

1.21. User-Programmable Variables ............................................................................ 1-4

1.22. User Display Setups............................................................................................. 1-4

1.23. User Report Templates ........................................................................................ 1-5

1.24. Serial Communication Links................................................................................ 1-5

1.25. Peer-to-Peer Communications ............................................................................ 1-5

1.26. Archive Data ......................................................................................................... 1-5

1.27. OmniCom Software Communications Package .............................................. 1-5

1.28. OmniView Software Communications Package .............................................. 1-5

2. Flow Computer Configuration................................................................................... 2-1

2.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................ 2-1

2.2. Configuring with the Keypad in Program Mode ................................................... 2-1

2.2.1. Entering the Program Mode ..................................................................................2-1

2.2.2. Changing Data........................................................................................................2-1

2.2.3. Menu Selection Method .........................................................................................2-2

2.2.4. Random Access Method........................................................................................2-2Example:....................................................................................................................2-2

2.2.5. Passwords..............................................................................................................2-3Local Keypad Access .................................................................................................2-3Changing Passwords at the Keypad............................................................................2-4

2.3. Getting Help............................................................................................................ 2-4

2.4. Program Inhibit Switch........................................................................................... 2-4

2.5. Configuring the Physical Inputs / Outputs ........................................................... 2-6

2.5.1. Miscellaneous Configuration (Misc. Setup Menu) ...............................................2-6

2.5.2. Physical I/O Points not Available for Configuration ............................................2-7

2.5.3. Password Maintenance Settings...........................................................................2-7

2.5.4. Entries Requiring a Valid Privileged Password ...................................................2-8

2.5.5. Module Settings .....................................................................................................2-8

2.5.6. Meter Station Settings ...........................................................................................2-9Auxiliary Input Assignment .......................................................................................2-10

2.5.7. Meter Run Settings ..............................................................................................2-10

2.5.8. Prover Settings ....................................................................................................2-12


20/24.71 w 04/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. iii

2.5.9. PID Control Settings............................................................................................ 2-14

2.5.10. Digital / Analog Output Settings....................................................................... 2-16

2.5.11. Front Panel Counter Settings ........................................................................... 2-17

2.5.12. Programmable Boolean Statements................................................................. 2-18

2.5.13. Programmable Variable Statements ................................................................. 2-20

2.5.14. User Display Settings........................................................................................ 2-22User Display #1........................................................................................................ 2-22User Display #2........................................................................................................ 2-22User Display #3........................................................................................................ 2-22User Display #4........................................................................................................ 2-23User Display #5........................................................................................................ 2-23User Display #6........................................................................................................ 2-23User Display #7........................................................................................................ 2-23User Display #8........................................................................................................ 2-23

2.5.15. Digital I/O Point Settings ...................................................................................... 2-24

2.5.16. Serial Input / Output Settings .......................................................................... 2-26

2.5.17. Peer-to- Peer Communications Settings.......................................................... 2-27

2.5.18. Custom Modbus Data Packet Settings .......................................................... 2-31Custom Modbus Data Packet #1 (Addressed at 001)................................................ 2-31Custom Modbus Data Packet #2 (Addressed at 201)................................................ 2-31Custom Modbus Data Packet #3 (Addressed at 401)................................................ 2-31

2.5.19. Programmable Logic Controller Setup............................................................. 2-32

2.5.20. Archive File Setup ............................................................................................. 2-32

2.6. Setting Up the Time and Date ..............................................................................2-33

2.6.1. Accessing the Time/Date Setup Submenu......................................................... 2-33

2.6.2. Time and Date Settings....................................................................................... 2-33

2.7. Configuring the Meter Station..............................................................................2-34

2.7.1. Accessing the Station Setup Submenu.............................................................. 2-34

2.7.2. Meter Station Settings......................................................................................... 2-34Auxiliary Inputs ........................................................................................................ 2-36

2.8. Configuring Meter Runs .......................................................................................2-37

2.8.1. Accessing the Meter Run Setup Submenu ........................................................ 2-37

2.8.2. Meter Run Settings.............................................................................................. 2-37Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearization Settings ............................................................... 2-38K-Factor Linearization Settings ................................................................................ 2-39More Meter Run Settings ......................................................................................... 2-40

2.9. Configuring Meter / Prover Temperature ............................................................2-41

2.9.1. Accessing the Temperature Setup Submenu .................................................... 2-41


iv OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.20/24.71 w 04/98

2.9.2. Meter Temperature Settings ................................................................................2-41

2.9.3. Meter Density Temperature Settings ..................................................................2-42

2.9.4. Prover Temperature Settings ..............................................................................2-42

2.9.5. Prover Density Temperature Settings.................................................................2-43

2.10. Configuring Meter Pressure .............................................................................. 2-44

2.10.1. Accessing the Pressure Setup Submenu .........................................................2-44

2.10.2. Meter Pressure Settings ....................................................................................2-44

2.10.3. Meter Density Pressure Settings.......................................................................2-45

2.10.4. Prover Pressure Settings...................................................................................2-45

2.10.5. Prover Density Pressure Settings .....................................................................2-47

2.11. Configuring Meter Specific Gravity / API Density ............................................ 2-48

2.11.1. Accessing the Gravity/Density Setup Submenu ..............................................2-48

2.11.2. Meter Specific Gravity / Density Settings .........................................................2-48Specific Gravity, API or Density ...............................................................................2-48Digital Densitometers ...............................................................................................2-49

2.12. Configuring PID Control Outputs ...................................................................... 2-51

2.12.1. Accessing the PID Control Setup Submenu.....................................................2-51

2.12.2. PID Control Output Settings..............................................................................2-51Operating Mode........................................................................................................2-51Tuning Adjustments..................................................................................................2-51Remote Setpoint ......................................................................................................2-52Secondary Variable ..................................................................................................2-53

2.13. Configuring Provers........................................................................................... 2-54

2.13.1. Accessing the Prover Setup Submenu .............................................................2-54

2.13.2. Prover Settings...................................................................................................2-54

2.14. Configuring Products......................................................................................... 2-58

2.14.1. Accessing the Product Setup Submenu...........................................................2-58

2.14.2. Product Settings ................................................................................................2-58Product #1................................................................................................................2-58Product #2................................................................................................................2-60Product #3................................................................................................................2-60Product #4................................................................................................................2-61Product #5................................................................................................................2-61Product #6................................................................................................................2-62Product #7................................................................................................................2-62Product #8................................................................................................................2-63Product #9................................................................................................................2-63Product #10..............................................................................................................2-64


20/24.71 w 04/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. v

Product #11 ............................................................................................................. 2-64Product #12 ............................................................................................................. 2-65Product #13 ............................................................................................................. 2-65Product #14 ............................................................................................................. 2-66Product #15 ............................................................................................................. 2-66Product #16 ............................................................................................................. 2-67

2.15. Configuring Batches...........................................................................................2-67

2.16. Configuring Miscellaneous Factors...................................................................2-68

2.16.1. Accessing the Factor Setup Submenu............................................................. 2-68

2.16.2. Factor Settings .................................................................................................. 2-68Totalizer Decimal Place Resolution.......................................................................... 2-69Decimal Places for Correction Factors Appearing on Batch and Prove Reports ....... 2-69

2.17. Configuring Printers...........................................................................................2-70

2.17.1. Accessing the Printer Setup Submenu ............................................................ 2-70

2.17.2. Printer Settings.................................................................................................. 2-70

3. User-Programmable Functions ................................................................................ 3-1

3.1. Introduction.............................................................................................................3-1

3.2. User Programmable Boolean Flags and Statements ...........................................3-1

3.2.1. What is a Boolean? ............................................................................................... 3-1

Physical Digital I/O Points (1001 → 1024).................................................................. 3-2Programmable Boolean Points (1025 → 1088)........................................................... 3-2Programmable Accumulator Points (1089 → 1099).................................................... 3-2One-Shot Boolean Points (1501 → 1650)................................................................... 3-3Scratch Pad Boolean Points (1650 → 1699)............................................................... 3-3

3.2.2. Sign (+, -) of Analog or Calculated Variables (6001 →→ 8999).............................. 3-3

3.2.3. Boolean Statements and Functions ..................................................................... 3-3Example 1: Meter Failure Alarm for Two-Meter Run Application ................................ 3-5Example 2: Automatic Run Switching for 4-Meter Run Application'............................. 3-6

3.2.4. How the Digital I/O Assignments are Configured................................................ 3-8

3.2.5. Meter Run Boolean Points (1100 through 1499) ................................................ 3-10Meter Run Status and Alarm Points ......................................................................... 3-10Micro Motion Alarm Status Points.......................................................................... 3-13More Meter Run Status and Alarm Points ................................................................ 3-13

3.2.6. Command and Status Boolean Points (1700 through 1799) .......................... 3-14

3.2.7. Station Boolean Flags (1800 through 1899)....................................................... 3-18

3.2.8. Prover Boolean Points (1900 through 1999) ...................................................... 3-21

3.2.9. Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags........................................................................... 3-24


vi OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.20/24.71 w 04/98

3.2.10. Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status Points....................................3-25

3.2.11. Commands Which Cause Custom Data Packets to be Transmitted Withouta Poll ...................................................................................................................3-25

3.2.12. Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant Flow Computer System ...3-26

3.2.13. Commands to Recalculate and Print Selected Batch ......................................3-26

3.2.14. Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags.......................................................................3-26

3.2.15. Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags .....................................................3-27

3.2.16. Status Booleans Relating to Redundant Flow Computer Systems.................3-29

3.2.17. More Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags............................................3-29

3.3. User Programmable Variables and Statements ................................................. 3-30

3.3.1. Variable Statements and Mathematical Operators Allowed...............................3-30Example 1: ...............................................................................................................3-31Example 2: ...............................................................................................................3-31Example 3: ...............................................................................................................3-31Example 4: ...............................................................................................................3-32

3.3.2. Using Boolean Variables in Variable Statements...............................................3-32Example:..................................................................................................................3-32

3.3.3. Entering Values Directly into the User Variables ...............................................3-33

3.3.4. Using the Variable Expression as a Prompt.......................................................3-33

3.3.5. Password Level Needed to Change the Value of a User Variable .....................3-33

3.3.6. Using Variables in Boolean Expressions ...........................................................3-34Example:..................................................................................................................3-34

3.4. User Configurable Display Screens .................................................................... 3-35Example:..................................................................................................................3-37

4. Modbus Protocol Implementation......................................................................... 4-1

4.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................ 4-1

4.2. Modes of Transmission.......................................................................................... 4-1

4.2.1. ASCII Framing and Message Format ....................................................................4-2

4.2.2. Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) Framing and Message Format...............................4-2

4.3. Message Fields....................................................................................................... 4-2

4.3.1. Address Field .........................................................................................................4-2

4.3.2. Function Code Field ..............................................................................................4-3

4.3.3. Data Field................................................................................................................4-3

4.3.4. Error Check Field ...................................................................................................4-3The LRC Mode...........................................................................................................4-3The CRC Mode ..........................................................................................................4-4


20/24.71 w 04/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. vii

4.4. Exception Response ..............................................................................................4-4

4.5. Function Codes.......................................................................................................4-5

4.5.1. Function Code 01 (Read Boolean Status) ............................................................ 4-5

4.5.2. Function Code 03 (Read 16-Bit Register Sets)..................................................... 4-7

4.5.3. Function Code 05 (Write Single Boolean)........................................................... 4-8

4.5.4. Function Code 06 (Write Single 16-Bit Integer) .................................................. 4-9

4.5.5. Function Code 15 (Write Multiple Boolean ) ...................................................... 4-10

4.5.6. Function Code 16 (Write 16-Bit Register Sets) ................................................. 4-11

4.5.7. Function Code 65 (Read ASCII Text Buffer)....................................................... 4-12

4.5.8. Function Code 66 (Write ASCII Text Buffer)....................................................... 4-13

4.6. Custom Data Packets ...........................................................................................4-14

4.7. Peer-to-Peer on the Modbus Link .....................................................................4-15

4.8. Half Duplex Wiring Configuration Required........................................................4-15

4.9. Active Master.........................................................................................................4-15

4.10. Error Recovery....................................................................................................4-15

5. Flow Equations and Algorithms............................................................................... 5-1

5.1. Flow Equations and Algorithms for Revision 20 (U.S. Units)...............................5-1

5.1.1. Flow Rate At Flowing Conditions: Bbls/Hr .......................................................... 5-1When Linearization Correction Factor is Selected:..................................................... 5-1

5.1.2. Net Flowrate At Base Conditions: Bbls/hr (Except Propylene)........................... 5-1

5.1.3. Mass Flowrate: KLbs/hr (Except Propylene)....................................................... 5-1

5.1.4. Equivalencies ........................................................................................................ 5-2Table 6A, 23A Product Type: Crude Oil ..................................................................... 5-2Table 6B, 23B Product Type: Fuel Oil ........................................................................ 5-2Table 6B, 23B Product Type: Jet Group..................................................................... 5-2Table 6B, 23B Product Type: Gasolines..................................................................... 5-2Table 6B, 23B Product Type: Between Jet and Gasoline............................................ 5-3For Propylene ............................................................................................................ 5-3Density of Ethane/Propane C3+ Mixes....................................................................... 5-3Density and other physical properties of Ethylene (IUPAC) ........................................ 5-3Density of Ethylene (NIST)......................................................................................... 5-3Density of Ethylene (API)........................................................................................... 5-4

5.1.5. Prove Gross Flowrate (Uni- and Bi-Directional) .................................................. 5-4

5.1.6. Prove Gross Flowrate (Compact) .......................................................................... 5-4

5.1.7. Prove Meter Factor ................................................................................................ 5-4


viii OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.20/24.71 w 04/98

5.1.8. Equivalencies.........................................................................................................5-4For Uni- or Bi-Directional Prover ................................................................................5-4For Compact Prover...................................................................................................5-4When Using Pulse Interpolation Method.....................................................................5-5When Proving Propylene Product...............................................................................5-5When Proving Ethylene Product.................................................................................5-5

5.1.9. PID Control .............................................................................................................5-5

5.1.10. Solartron Density gm/cc ...................................................................................5-6Uncompensated Density.............................................................................................5-6Temperature Compensated Density ...........................................................................5-6Temperature & Pressure Compensated Density .........................................................5-6Additional Equation for Velocity of Sound Effects (Solartron Only)...........................5-6

5.1.11. Sarasota Density gm/cc .......................................................................................5-7

5.1.12. UGC Density gm/cc..............................................................................................5-8

5.1.13. Densitometer Calibration Constants...................................................................5-8

5.1.14. Linearzing Coefficients........................................................................................5-8

5.2. Flow Equations and Algorithms for Revision 24 (Metric Units)........................... 5-9

5.2.1. Flowrate At Flowing Conditions: m3/hr ................................................................5-9

5.2.2. Net Flowrate At Base Conditions: Nm3/hr (Except Propylene)............................5-9

5.2.3. Mass Flowrate: ton/hr (Except Propylene) ...........................................................5-9

5.2.4. Equivalencies.........................................................................................................5-9

5.2.5. Calculations For Liquid Flows When Mass Pulses is Selected ........................5-10Table 54A Product Type: Crude Oil ..........................................................................5-10Table 54B, Product Type: Fuel Oil............................................................................5-10Table 54B Product Type: Jet Group..........................................................................5-10Table 54B Product Type: Gasolines .........................................................................5-10Table 54B Product Type: Between Jet and Gasoline ................................................5-10For Propylene:..........................................................................................................5-11

5.2.6. Density of Ethane/Propane C3+ Mixes................................................................5-11

5.2.7. Density and other physical properties of Ethylene (IUPAC)..............................5-11Density of Ethylene (NIST) .......................................................................................5-11Density of Ethylene (API) .........................................................................................5-11

5.2.8. Prove Gross Flowrate (Uni- and Bi-Directional) .................................................5-12

5.2.9. Prove Gross Flowrate (Compact).........................................................................5-12

5.2.10. Prove Meter Factor.............................................................................................5-12


20/24.71 w 04/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. ix

5.2.11. Equivalencies..................................................................................................... 5-12For Uni- or Bi-Directional Prover .............................................................................. 5-12For Compact Prover ................................................................................................ 5-12When Using Pulse Interpolation Method .................................................................. 5-13When Proving Propylene Product ............................................................................ 5-13When Proving Ethylene Product .............................................................................. 5-13

5.2.12. Proving with Mass Pulses................................................................................. 5-13

5.2.13. If no Prover Densitometer is used:................................................................... 5-13

5.2.14. PID Control......................................................................................................... 5-13

5.2.15. Solartron Density kg/m3.................................................................................. 5-15Uncompensated Density .......................................................................................... 5-15Temperature Compensated Density......................................................................... 5-15Temperature & Pressure Compensated Density....................................................... 5-15Additional Equation for Velocity of Sound Effects (Solartron Only) ........................ 5-15

5.2.16. Sarasota Density kg/m3 ..................................................................................... 5-16

5.2.17. UGC Density kg/m3 ............................................................................................ 5-17

5.2.18. Densitometer Calibration Constants ................................................................ 5-17

Figures of Volume 3Fig. 1-1. Typical Configuration Using Helical Turbine, Positive Displacement and Coriolis Flowmeters1-1

Fig. 2-1. Figure Showing Program Inhibit Switch ................................................................................ 2-5

Fig. 3-1. Figure Showing Automatic Four-Meter Flow Zone Thresholds .............................................. 3-6

Fig. 3-2. Figure Showing Four-Meter Run Valve Switching ................................................................. 3-7

Fig. 3-3. Keypad Layout - A through Z Keys ..................................................................................... 3-36


20/24.71 w 04/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. 1-1

1. Overview of Firmware Revisions 20.71/24.71

Turbine / Positive Displacement / CoriolisLiquid Flow Metering Systems


1.1. Number of Meter Runs - Type ofFlowmeters

Minimum 1 run, Maximum 4 runs - Turbine, Positive Displacement Flow Metersor Mass Flow Meters. 'Level A' dual channel 'Pulse Fidelity' checking can beperformed on all 4 meter runs.

1.2. Product ConfigurationParallel runs measuring the same product or independent runs with differentproducts.

Fig. 1-1. Typical Configuration Using Helical Turbine, PositiveDisplacement and Coriolis Flowmeters

Chapter 1 Overview of Firmware Revision 20.71/24.71

1-2 OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.20/24.71 w 04/98

1.3. Configurable Sensors per Meter RunMeter Pulses, meter temperature and pressure, meter density, densitytemperature and pressure.

1.4. Configurable Sensors per ProverProver inlet and outlet temperature and pressure, prover densitometer any type(analog or digital pulse type such as Solartron, Sarasota or UGC ).

1.5. TemperatureEach temperature sensor can be individually selected to be a 4-20mA, 4-wireDIN curve RTD or 4-wire American curve RTD.

1.6. DensitometersCan be configured for any combination or mix of individual or shareddensitometers of any type (analog or digital pulse type such as Solartron,Sarasota or UGC ) the maximum number that can be connected is five. Eachanalog density can be specified as flowing or reference conditions. For massproving a densitometer can be configured on the prover.

1.7. Station CapabilityMeter runs may be combined or subtracted in any mode to provide station flowrates and totalizers.

1.8. Auxiliary InputsFour auxiliary inputs are provided for miscellaneous sensors (for example:BS&W, Viscosity monitors, etc.) and can be individually selected to be a 4-20mA, 4-wire DIN curve RTD or 4-wire American curve RTD.

1.9. Number of products - InformationStored/Product

Sixteen. - Product name, factors for each meter, gravity/density override,calculation mode to be used when running the product.

1.10. Type of Products MeasuredCrude oil, refined products, NGL’s using API 2540, LPG’s using GPA TP16 andpropylene using API 11.3.3.2. Ethylene using NIST 1045, API 2565, or IUPACequations. Mass measurement mode is also standard. ASTM D1550,D1555,1952 Table 23,24 are also provided.



1.11. Batching and Interface DetectionSix batch setups per meter run can be programmed with alphanumeric batch IDtag, product number to run and expected size of batch.

Individual meter run batch preset down counters provide 'batch end warning'and 'batch end reached' alarms.

Batches can be ended manually or automatically on size of batch, change ofproduct, beginning of new day, day of the week or day of the month.

Product interface detection is achieved using a station interface detectordensitometer mounted ahead of the meter runs. Line pack count down countersallow up to three product interfaces to be tracked between the interface detectorgravitometer and the valve manifold allowing pre-emptive product cuts.

1.12. Auto Proving FeaturesFully automated proving to API chapter 12. User configured for Uni-, Bi-directional and compact provers with optional inlet and outlet temperature andpressure sensors. Both up-stream and downstream water draw volume inputsare available. Plenum chamber pressure on a Brooks prover is also input as ananalog and controlled by the computer. Master meter proving is also featured.Provings can be triggered on change of flow rate versus last known prove foreach meter or on the amount of flow which has occurred since the last prove.Proves can also be triggered by a meter being shut in for more than a specifiedamount of time.

1.13. Retroactive Meter Factors and OverrideGravity

Meter factors and override product gravity can be applied retroactively for aselectable number of barrels at any time during a batch. Meter factorsdetermined by a prove can be automatically implemented from that point orretroactively to the beginning of the batch.

1.14. Retroactive Density Correction FactorDensity correction factors can be applied retroactively for a selectable numberof barrels at any time during a batch.

1.15. Flow Rate/Viscosity LinearizingViscosity/Flow Rate Linearizing of Helical Turbine/Positive Displacementmeters can be accomplished by apply a linearization correction factor (LCF) tothe incoming flowmeter pulses. The LCF is calculated in real time by monitoringa live viscosity input signal which is input via the auxiliary inputs.

Chapter 1 Overview of Firmware Revision 20.71/24.71


1.16. PID Control FunctionsFour independent control loops are provided for control of a primary variablewith either high or low override control by a secondary variable. Contact closureinputs are activated to provide a startup and shutdown ramp function for eachcontrol loop if needed. Primary setpoint can be adjusted via an analog input, akeypad entry or communication link. Control loops are not dedicated and maybe cascaded. Data is processed every 500 msec.

1.17. Flow Weighted AveragesFlow weighted averages are calculated for all input variables and correctionfactors based on hourly, daily totals and running batch totals.

1.18. User-Programmable Digital I/OEach I/O point is individually configurable as either an input or output withvariable 'Delay On' and 'Delay Off'. Pulse widths are adjustable when used asauxiliary totalizer outputs or sampler outputs.

1.19. User-Programmable Logic FunctionsSixty-four logic statements can be user programmed to control meter runswitching, prover loop and provide user auxiliary control functions.

1.20. User-Programmable Alarm FunctionsSixteen of the programmable logic statements described above can be used tocontain custom text messages which can be displayed, logged and printed.

1.21. User-Programmable VariablesSixty-four user variables can be programmed to manipulate data for display andprinting or remote access via a communication port. Typical uses include,special units conversions, customer averaging algorithms for leak detection,special limit checking and control functions. The programmable variablestatements can also be used to type cast data of one type to another (i.e.,change a floating point variable to an integer type so that a PLC or DCS systemcan make use of it).

1.22. User Display SetupsThe user may specify eight key press combinations which recall displayscreens. Each user display screen can show four variables each with adescriptive tag defined by the user.



1.23. User Report TemplatesUsing OmniCom the user can generate custom report templates or edit existingtemplates. These are uploaded into the flow computer. Custom templates forthe snapshot, batch end, daily and prove reports can be defined.

1.24. Serial Communication LinksUp to four serial data links are available for communications with other devicessuch as printers, SCADA systems, PLC’s and other Omni Flow Computers.Ports communicate using a superset of the Modbus protocol (ASCII or RTU).Printer data is ASCII data.

1.25. Peer-to-Peer CommunicationsOmni flow computers can be user configured to communicate with each otheras equal peers. Groups of data variables can be exchanged or broadcastbetween other flow computers. Multiple flow computers can share resourcessuch as a PLC.

1.26. Archive DataTwo types of data archiving are possible in the flow computer. 1) FormattedASCII text using custom report templates, 2) Raw Data using archive recordsand files.

1.27. OmniCom Software CommunicationsPackage

OmniCom software is provided with each flow computer, and allows the userto configure the computer on-line or off-line using a personal computer.

1.28. OmniView Software CommunicationsPackage

A Man-Machine Interface package for the Omni Flow Computer is alsoavailable as an option.



2. Flow Computer Configuration

2.1. IntroductionConfiguration data is stored in the computer's battery backed-up RAM memorywhich will retain its data for at least 1 to 2 months with no power applied.Configuration data can be entered using one of three methods:

1) Configure off-line using the OmniCom PC configuration program andthen uploading all data at once.

2) Configure on-line using the OmniCom PC configuration program whichuploads each change as it is entered.

3) Enter configuration data via the front panel keypad using the ProgramMode.

Methods 1) and 2) require an IBM compatible PC running the OmniComConfiguration Software and are described in Volume 5 and in OmniCom Help.Method 3) is described here.

2.2. Configuring with the Keypad in ProgramMode

2.2.1. Entering the Program ModeWhile in the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The front panel Program LEDabove the key will glow green and the following selection menu will bedisplayed on the first three lines of the LCD display.

Press Keys to SelectGroup Entry, orPress "Prog" to Exit

2.2.2. Changing DataData can be accessed using a sequential list of menu prompts or in a randomaccess manner by going directly to a specific group of entries.

INFO - Key presses aredenoted in bold face betweenbrackets; e.g.: the enter keyappears in this manual as[Enter].

The 4th line of the display isused to show the user keypresses.

Chapter 2 Flow Computer Configuration

2-2 OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.20/24.71 04/98

2.2.3. Menu Selection Method

!

"

#$

#$ %

&

Use the []/[] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to the appropriateentry and press [Enter] to access a particular submenu. The first menu, 'MiscConfiguration', should always be completed first as these entries specify thenumber and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer;i.e., the menus following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask forconfiguration data unless a transducer has been defined.

2.2.4. Random Access MethodIn addition to the Setup Menu, the data is also presented in related groups suchas Temperature, Pressure, Meter, etc. You press the group key of your choice toget to a data area. By specifying a meter run before or after a group you godirectly to the data for that group and that group only.

Once a group is selected use the 'Up/Down' arrow keys to step to a specific dataentry within the group. You can view data and, assuming a valid password hasbeen entered, change its value as required. If an error is made, press [Clear] ,re-enter the correct data and press [Enter] to enter the new value. The cursorwill automatically step to the next data item in that group unless that would causea total change of screen (i.e., you can always verify your entry). A list of datagroups and associated key presses is listed later in this chapter.

Example:

Pressing [Temp] will allow you access to temperature data for all meter runs.Pressing [Meter] [1] [Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [1] will allow access to onlyMeter Run #1 temperature data. For example, pressing [Meter] [1] [Temp] willdisplay the following until the [Enter] key is pressed.

'

INFO - Characters in ‘[ ] ’refer to key presses.

TIP - It is best to use themenu selection methodwhen programming anapplication for the first timeas every possible optionand variable will beprompted. Once a computeris in operation and youbecome familiar with theapplication you can decideto use the faster RandomAccess Method describedon the facing page.While in the Program Mode(program LED on) press[Setup] [Enter] . A menusimilar to the following willbe displayed.

The 4th line of the display isused to show the user keypresses.


20/24.71 04/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. 2-3

Pressing the [Enter] key will display a screen similar to this:

2.2.5. PasswordsExcept when changing transducer high/low alarm limits, a password is usuallyasked for when changing the configuration data within the computer.

The flow computer has independent password protection of the following:

Local Keypad Access / Modbus Port #1 (selectable)(Physical Serial Port #1)

Modbus Port #2 - (Physical Serial Port #2) Modbus Port #3 - (Physical Serial Port #3) Modbus Port #4 - (Physical Serial Port #4)

Local Keypad Access

Three password levels are provided:

Privileged Level Allows complete access to all entries within the flowcomputer including keypad passwords 1, 1A and 2below. The initial privileged password for each Modbusport is selected via this password level.

Level 1 This level allows technician access to most entrieswithin the flow computer with the exception of I/OPoints assignments, programmable variables andBoolean statements and passwords other than‘Keypad Level 1’.

Level 1A This level allows technician access to the followingentries only:

♦ Meter Factors♦ K Factors♦ Densitometer Correction Factors (Pycnometer

Factor)

Level 2 Allows access to the operator type entries. Theseentries include:

♦ Transducer Manual Overrides♦ Product Gravity Overrides♦ Prover Operations♦ Batching Operations

INFO - Most entry groupsoccupy multiple screens sobe sure to use the []/[]to scroll and see all data.



Changing Passwords at the Keypad

1) At the keypad press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter].

2) With the cursor blinking on 'Misc Configuration', press [Enter].

3) With the cursor blinking on 'Password Main?', press [Enter].

4) Enter the Privileged Level Password (up to 6 Characters) and press[Enter].

5) The Level 1, 1A and Level 2 passwords can now be viewed and changedif required.

6) Scroll down to access each of the Modbus serial port 'Level A'passwords. These are labeled ‘Serial 1’ (if Modbus Protocol is selected),'Serial 2', Serial 3', and 'Serial 4' corresponding to the physical portnumbering for Modbus Ports 1, 2, 3 and 4.

2.3. Getting HelpContext sensitive help is available for most data entries. Help is summoned bypressing the [Display/Enter] key twice ([Help] key) with the cursor on the datafield in question. Help screens are frequently more than 1 full screen so alwaysuse the [áá]/[ââ] keys to scroll in case there is more. Press [Prog] or [Enter]once to exit the help system and return to your original screen.

2.4. Program Inhibit SwitchA 'Program Inhibit Switch' mounted behind the front panel preventsunauthorized changing of data when in the 'Inhibit' position. Most data can beviewed while the switch is in the program inhibit position, but any attempt toalter data will be ignored and cause 'PROGRAM LOCKOUT' to be displayed onthe bottom line of the LCD display.

The inner enclosure of the flow computer can be locked or sealed within theouter enclosure blocking access to the 'Program Inhibit Switch'.

INFO - Characters in ‘[ ]’refer to key presses.

INFO - See TechnicalBulletin TB-960701 inVolume 5 for setting Level Band Level C passwords usingOmniCom.

Note: Level B and Level Cpasswords for each Modbusport cannot be viewed orchanged from the keypad.

INFO - The Help System isnot limited to just theProgram Mode. Contextsensitive help is available inall modes of operation.



CAUTION!

These units have an integrallatching mechanism whichfirst must be disengaged bylifting the bezel upwardsbefore withdrawing the unitfrom the case.

Fig. 2-1. Figure Showing Program Inhibit Switch



2.5. Configuring the Physical Inputs /Outputs

The Omni Flow Computer can accept many I/O modules and be configured tomatch just about any combination of measurement transmitters. Configuring thephysical I/O means setting up the number of meter runs, what types oftransducers are to be used and to which physical I/O points they are connected.

2.5.1. Miscellaneous Configuration (Misc. Setup Menu)The physical I/O configuration of the flow computer is changed by entering the‘Misc. Setup’ menu while the 'Select Group Entry' screen is displayed (see9.2.1. “Entering the Program Mode”).

Press Keys to SelectGroup Entry, orPress "Prog" to ExitSetup

Press [Setup] then [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed:

*** SETUP MENU ***Misc Configuration _Time/Date SetupStation Setup

The cursor automatically appears at the ‘Misc Configuration’ option. Press[Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed:

*** Misc. Setup ***Password Maint?(Y)Check Modules ?(Y)Config Station?(Y)Config Meter “n”Config Prove ? (Y)Config PID ? “n”Config D/A Out“n”Front Pnl CountersProgram Booleans ?Program Variables?User Display ? “n”Config Digital“n”Serial I/O “n”Peer/Peer Comm(Y)?Custom Packet “n”Archive File “n”PLC Group “n”SCROLL UP FOR MORE

Tip - It is best to use theMenu Selection Method (see9.2.3) when programming anapplication for the first timeas every possible option andvariable will be prompted.Once a computer is inoperation and you becomefamiliar with the applicationyou can decide to use thefaster Random AccessMethod (see 9.2.4).

INFO - Characters in ‘[ ]’refer to key presses.

INFO - The first menu, 'MiscConfiguration', should alwaysbe completed first as theseentries specify the numberand type of input and outputdevices connected to the flowcomputer. You are advise tocomplete all entries underthis menu before proceeding.Only transducers that havebeen assigned to physicalI/O points will be available forfurther configuration (i.e., themenus following the 'MiscConfiguration' menu do notask for or acceptconfiguration data unless atransducer has beendefined). (See 9.5.2.)



2.5.2. Physical I/O Points not Available forConfiguration

Configuration parameter groups are only prompted as needed. Meter runs andtransducers which are not assigned to a physical I/O point will not be availablefor configuration. In these cases the following message will be displayed:

Variable Selected isNot Assigned to aPhysical I/O Point

2.5.3. Password Maintenance SettingsEnter [Y] at ‘Password Maint ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open thefollowing entries:

PL Privileged _______________Enter the privileged password to allow you to view and change all configuration data includingother passwords.

PL Level 1 _______________Enter the Level 1 password to allow entry of all configuration data except entries which determinethe physical I/O personality of the computer.

PL Level 1A _______________Enter the Level 1A password to allow entry of Meter factors K Factors and Density CorrectionFactors only.

PL Level 2 _______________Enter the Level 2 password which is required for operator type entries such as gravity overridesand meter factors.

PL Ser1 Passwd _______________Enter the Serial Port password. All data in the Modbus database except passwords can be readvia the serial ports. These passwords allow writes to the Modbus database. Password protectioncan be disabled by entering a blank field as a password.

PL Lockout SW Active? N _______________Enter [N] for the lockout switch to be inactive for this serial port.

Enter [Y] for the lockout switch to be active for this serial port.

PL Ser2 Passwd _______________Enter the Serial Port #2 Password.

PL Lockout SW Active? N _______________

PL Ser3 Passwd _______________


PL Ser4 Passwd _______________


If this message is displayedcheck the I/O pointassignment for the variable.

INFO - Characters in ’ ’refer to password levels.Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to keypresses.

TIP - Use the blank linesprovided next to eachconfiguration option to writedown the correspondingsettings you entered in theflow computer.Some of these entries maynot appear on the display orin OmniCom. Depending onthe various configurationsettings of your specificmetering system, only thoseconfiguration options whichare applicable will bedisplayed.

Note: In the privilegedpassword area all passwordsare legible upon entering thecorrect privileged password.In all other cases whenrequested for a password,upon entering the password,the Omni will display allentered characters asasterisk.



2.5.4. Entries Requiring a Valid Privileged PasswordThe following entries display only when a Valid Privileged Password is entered:

PL Model # (0=3000, 1=6000) _______________This entry is used by the OmniCom configuration software to determine the maximum I/Ocapability of the computer.

PL Re-configure Archive _______________Enter [Y] to re-configure archive records definition. Enter [N] when finished.

PL Archive Run (Y/N) _______________Enter [Y] to start the archive running.

PL Reset All Totalizers ? (Y/N) _______________Reset All Ram and Reset Totalizers will only display after the privileged password has beenentered. will clear to zero all internal totalizers. You can change totalizer decimal place settingsafter entering [Y]. The three electromechanical totalizers on the front of the computer cannot bezeroed.

PL Reset All Ram ? (Y/N) _______________Resetting all Ram will clear all configuration data, calibration data and totalizers. This means thatall configuration data will have to be re-entered.

PL Input Calibrate Default ? _______________Entering a [Y] here will set all the analog input calibration constants used to scale zero and spansettings to the default value. This will require you to re calibrate all the inputs. You can also dothis on a channel by channel basis by entering the input channel number.

PL D/A Calibrate Default ? _______________Entering a [Y] here will set all the analog output calibration constants used to scale zero and spansettings to the default value. This will require you to re-calibrate all the outputs. You can also dothis on a channel by channel basis by entering the output channel number.

2.5.5. Module SettingsEnter [Y] at ‘Check Modules ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu and a screen similarto the following will display:

MODULE S-WARE H-WAREA-1 Y YB-1 Y YE/D-1 Y YE-1 Y YH-1 Y YD-2 Y YS-2 Y YUpdate S-Ware ?

PL Update S-Ware ? (Y) _______________A table is displayed showing all of the physically installed I/O modules verses the I/O modulesrecognized by the software (see display example above). You must answer the 'Update Software'question entering [Y] whenever you change the number or type of installed modules. The availableI/O point numbers are allocated to each module at this time according to the type and number ofeach module (see Chapter 2 for more information).



CAUTION!

If you change the number ortype of installed I/O modules,you must perform the ‘CheckModules’ Function to informthe computer that you wish touse the new hardwareconfiguration.



2.5.6. Meter Station SettingsEnter [Y] at ‘Config Station ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the followingentries:

PL Station Configured As: _______________Station Totals and Flows Defined As: Define which meter runs will be included in the station flowrates and totalizers. Meter data can be added or subtracted.

Example: Entering [1] [+] [2] [-] [3] [-] [4] defines the station flows and totals as the result ofMeter Runs #1 and #2 added together, subtracted by the flows of Meters #3 and #4.

Enter [0] for no station totalizers.

PL Density I/O Point _______________Enter the I/O point number that corresponds to the station density or gravity input used as theproduct interface detector. Digital densitometers can be corrected for temperature and pressureeffects using the station pressure and temperature points. Digital pulse densitometers can only beassigned I/O point numbers corresponding to the 4th input channel of a B Type Combo Module, orChannels 3 or 4 of an E/D Type Combo Module.

Density Tag _______________Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density transducer on the LCD display.

Enter Density Type _______________Enter the densitometer type: 1=4-20 API linear, 2=4-20 SG linear, 3=4-20 density linear,4=Solartron pulse, 5=Sarasota pulse, 6=UGC pulse.

PL Temp I/O Point _______________Enter the I/O point number to which the temperature sensor used to compensate the stationdensitometer is connected.

When a digital densitometer is used as the station transducer, it can be corrected for temperatureeffects by assigning a temperature I/O point.

For the station product interface densitometer, enter a meter run temperature sensor in caseswhere a separate temperature transmitter is not available.

RTD probes should be assigned to the 1st channel on any type of combo module. RTD probes canalso be assigned to the 2nd channel of B Type combo modules.

Density T Tag _______________Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density temperature transducer on the LCDdisplay.

0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20 _______________Enter the densitometer temperature transmitter type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=American RTD, HoneywellSmart Transmitter or 2=4-20mA linear output.

PL Press I/O Point _______________Enter the I/O point number to which the pressure transmitter used to compensate the stationdigital densitometers is connected.

When a digital densitometer is used as the product interface detector, it can be corrected forpressure effects by assigning a station pressure point.

If a separate pressure transmitter is not available, enter a meter pressure transmitter I/O point.

Dens P Tag _______________Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density pressure transducer on the LCDdisplay.

INFO - The number ofprocess variable I/O pointsavailable depends on thenumber of combo modulesinstalled (see Chapter 2 inVolume 1 for moreinformation). Point numbersrange from 01 through 24.Assign [0] to ‘invalidate theassigning of a variable.

I/O Type Mismatch - Thecomputer will not let youassign the same I/O point #to incompatible transducertypes; i.e., an I/O pointcannot be assigned as atemperature input for MeterRun #1 and a pressure inputfor Meter Run #2. If the ‘I/OType Mismatch’ message isdisplayed, recheck the I/O.

Shared Transducers -Enter the same I/O point toshare transducers betweenmeter runs.

Correcting a Mistake -Enter an I/O point # of [0] tocancel an incorrectly enteredI/O point #, then enter thecorrect number.

Assigning I/O Point #99 -This indicates that theassociated variable will beavailable for display and beused in all calculations, butwill not be obtained via a liveinput. The variable value isusually downloaded into theflow computer database via acommunication port or via auser variable statement.



Auxiliary Input Assignment

PL Auxiliary Input #1 I/O _______________Enter the physical I/O point number to which this auxiliary input is connected. Auxiliary Inputs canbe used to enter S&W, viscosity and other miscellaneous variables.

Aux #1 Tag _______________Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this transducer on the LCD display.

0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20 _______________Enter the Auxiliary Input Type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=American RTD, 2=Honeywell Smart Transmitter or4-20mA.

PL Auxiliary Input #2 I/O _______________

Aux #2 Tag _______________

0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20 _______________


Aux #3 Tag _______________

0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20 _______________


Aux #4 Tag _______________

0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20 _______________

2.5.7. Meter Run SettingsEnter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at ‘Config Meter "n"’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to openthe following entries:

Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4

PL Flow I/O Point _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the number of the I/O point used to input the flow signal for each meter run. Flowmeterpulse inputs can only be assigned to the 3rd input channel of any combo module and 4th inputchannel of A Type combo modules. When working with compact provers using pulse interpolation,you must assign each of the flowmeter pulse signals to the 3rd or 4th channel of an E Type combomodule.

Flow Tag _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this flowmeter on the LCD display.

PL Dual Pulse ? (Y/N) _______ _______ _______ _______Enter [Y] to enable 'Level A' pulse fidelity and security checking for this meter run (API MPMSChapter 5, Section 5). The 'Flow I/O Point' entered above must correspond to the 3rd input channelof an E Combo Module. The flowmeter pulses are physically wired to Input Channels 3 and 4 ofthe E Combo Module.

PL Select Mass Pulse? _______ _______ _______ _______Enter [Y] if the flowmeter used for this meter run produces mass pulses (i.e., pulses per massunit). A coriolis mass meter usually provides this type of output signal.

PL Temp I/O Point _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the I/O point number used to input the temperature signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/Oassignments are allowed when a sensor is shared by more than one meter run.



INFO - The number ofprocess variable I/O pointsavailable depends on thenumber of combo modulesinstalled (see Chapter 2 inVolume 1 for moreinformation). Point numbersrange from 01 through 24.Assign [0] to ‘invalidate theassigning of a variable.






Temp Tag _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this temperature transducer on the LCD display.

0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20 _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the Temperature Transmitter Type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=AMER RTD, 2=4-20mA.

PL Press I/O Point _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the I/O point number used to input the pressure signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/Oassignments are allowed when a sensor is shared by more than one meter run.

Press Tag _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this pressure transducer on the LCD display.

PL Density I/O Point # _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the I/O point number used to input the density signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/Oassignments are allowed when a densitometer is shared by more than one meter run. Digital pulsedensitometers can only be assigned I/O point numbers corresponding to the 4th input channel of a'B' Type Combo Module or the 3rd and 4th input channels of an E/D Combo Module.

Density Tag _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density transducer on the LCD display.

Enter Density Type _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the Densitometer Type: 1=4-20 API linear, 2=4-20 SG linear, 3=4-20 Density linear,4=Solartron pulse, 5=Sarasota pulse, 6=UGC pulse.

0=Flowing, 1=Ref _______ _______ _______ _______This entry is applies only if you selected a 4-20mA type densitometer in the previous entry Specifyif the density transducer signal represents density at: 0=flowing temperature and pressure,1=reference temperature and pressure.


PL Dens T I/O Point _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the I/O point number used to input the signal applied to compensate for temperature effectsat the densitometer for each meter run.

If the densitometer has no temperature sensor fitted, enter the same I/O point assignment as themeter run temperature sensor.

Density T Tag _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density temperature transducer on the LCDdisplay.

0=DIN, 1=AM, 2-4-20 _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the Densitometer Temperature Transmitter Type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=AMER RTD, 2=4-20mA.

PL Dens P I/O Point _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the I/O point number used to input the signal applied to compensate for pressure effects atthe densitometer for each meter run.

If the densitometer has no pressure sensor fitted, enter the same I/O point assignment as themeter run pressure sensor.

Dens P Tag _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density pressure transducer on the LCDdisplay.

Config Meter Runs -Physical I/O information forup to 4 meter runs can beentered. Transducers thatare not assigned an I/O pointwill not be available fordisplay or furtherconfiguration.




2.5.8. Prover SettingsEnter [Y] at ‘Config Prove ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the followingentries:

Inlet Outlet

PL Prover Temperature I/O Point __________ __________Enter the I/O point number used to input the prover inlet/outlet temperature signal. Inlet and outlettemperature sensor readings are averaged to determine the actual prover temperature.

To use the meter run temperature, enter [0] for both inlet and outlet.

If there is only one temperature sensor, enter [0] for outlet or enter the same number for bothprover inlet and outlet.

Inlet/Outlet T Tag __________ __________Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this temperature transducer on the LCD display.

0=DIN, 1=AM, 2-4-20 __________ __________Enter the Prover Temperature Transmitter Type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=AMER RTD, 2=4-20mA.

PL Prover Pressure I/O Point __________ __________Enter the I/O point number used to input the prover inlet/outlet pressure signal. Inlet and outletpressure sensor readings are averaged to determine the actual prover pressure.

To use the meter run pressure, enter [0] for both inlet and outlet.

If there is only one pressure sensor, enter [0] for outlet or enter the same number for both proverinlet and outlet.

Inlet/Outlet P Tag __________ __________Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this pressure transducer on the LCD display.

PL Prover Plenum I/O Point _______________Applies only when a Brooks compact prover is specified. Enter the I/O point number used to inputthe compact prover plenum pressure sensor input.

Plenum Tag _______________Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this plenum pressure transducer on the LCDdisplay.

PL Prover Density I/O Point _______________Enter the I/O point number used to input the density signal for the prover. The prover density I/Opoint is used to calculate the mass of liquid in the prover during a mass proving run (i.e., coriolismeter proving). Digital pulse densitometers can be corrected for temperature and pressure effectsusing the station pressure and temperature points. Digital pulse densitometers must be assignedto the 4th channel of a 'B' type module or the 3rd or 4th channel of an E/D module.

Density Tag _______________Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density transducer on the LCD display.

Enter Density Type _______________Enter the Prover Densitometer Type: 1=4-20 API linear, 2=4-20 SG linear, 3=4-20 density linear,4=Solartron pulse, 5=Sarasota pulse, 6=UGC pulse.



Configuring the Prover -When an input and outputtransducer signal is available,the computer uses theaverage of both signals.Otherwise, it uses the signalfrom the available transducer.The pressure or temperatureof the meter run being provedwill be used to compensatethe prover if neither left orright transducer is assignedto an I/O point #.



PL Prover Dens T I/O Point _______________Enter the I/O point number to which the temperature sensor used to compensate the proverdensitometer is connected.

When a digital densitometer is used as the prover transducer, it can be corrected for temperatureeffects by assigning a temperature I/O point.

For the prover densitometer, enter the same I/O points as the prover inlet/outlet temperaturesensor in cases where a separate temperature transmitter is not part of the densitometer.

RTD probes should be assigned to the 1st channel on any type of combo module. RTD probes canalso be assigned to the 2nd channel of B Type combo modules.

Dens T Tag _______________Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density temperature transducer on the LCDdisplay.

0=DIN, 1=AM, 2=2-40 _______________Enter the Prover Temperature Transmitter Type: 0=DIN RTD, 1=AMER RTD, 2=4-20mA.

PL Prover Dens P I/O Point _______________Enter the I/O point number to which the pressure transmitter used to compensate the prover digitaldensitometer is connected.

Enter the same I/O point as the prover inlet pressure sensor in cases where a separate pressuretransmitter is not available.

Dens P Tag _______________Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density pressure transducer on the LCDdisplay.

INFO - The number ofprocess variable I/O pointsavailable depends on thenumber of combo modulesinstalled (see Volume I;Chapter 2 for moreinformation). Point numbersrange from 01 through 24.Assign [0] to ‘invalidate theassigning of a variable.







2.5.9. PID Control SettingsEnter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at ‘Config PID ? "n"’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to openthe following entries:

Loop #1 Loop #2 Loop #3 Loop #4

PL Assign Pri. _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the database index number of the primary variable in the PID loop (see the sidebar).

Rmk ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of eachvariable assignment.

PL Pri. Action (F/R) _______ _______ _______ _______Enter [F] (forward action) if the value of the primary variable increases as the controller output %increases.

Enter [R] (reverse action) if the value of the primary variable decreases as the controller output %increases.

PL Remote S.P. Pt# _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the I/O point number that the remote set point analog signal is connected to (01-24).

Assign this point to 99 in cases where the set point will be downloaded via a communication port.

Enter [0] if you will not be using a remote setpoint.

PL Assign Sec. _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the database index number of the secondary variable in the PID loop (see the sidebar).

Rmk ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of eachvariable assignment.

PL Sec. Action (F/R) _______ _______ _______ _______Enter [F] (forward action) if the value of the primary variable increases as the controller output %increases.

Enter [R] (reverse action) if the value of the primary variable decreases as the controller output %increases.

Proportional IntegralDerivative (PID) -- Forpractical reasons we refer toPID Control Loops in thismanual. However, your flowcomputer actually performsthe Proportional Integral (PI)function and does not applythe derivative term. Theaddition of the derivative termwould greatly complicatetuning of the control loop andbesides is not normallyapplicable to the types of flowand pressure control used inpipelines.

Valid Assignments - Any32-bit integer or floating pointvariable within the databasecan be assigned to be theprimary or secondarycontrolled variable (seeVolume 4 for a completelisting of database addressesand index numbers).




PL Error Select (L/H) _______ _______ _______ _______This entry is used to determine under what circumstances the primary or secondary variableis to be controlled. There are two modes of low/high error select:

Mode #1: The controller will attempt to control the primary variable but will switch tocontrolling the secondary variable, should the controller be trying to drive thesecondary variable ABOVE its setpoint. An example of this mode would becontrolling flow rate (primary) while not exceeding a MAXIMUM deliverypressure (secondary).

Mode #2: The controller will attempt to control primary variable but will switch tocontrolling the secondary variable, should the controller be trying to drive thesecondary variable BELOW its setpoint. An example of this mode would becontrolling flow rate (primary) while not dropping below a MINIMUM pressurevalue (secondary).

Considering these modes, select your entry according to the following flow diagram.

MODE #1 MODE #2

Are both primary andsecondary actions

forward?

Are both primary andsecondary actions

forward?

yes no yes noEnter [L]

(Low ErrorSelect)

yes

Is secondaryaction forward?

Enter [H](High Error

Select)

yes

Is secondaryaction forward?

no

no

Enter [H](High Error

Select)

Enter [L](Low Error

Select)

PL Startup Mode (L/M) _______ _______ _______ _______This entry determines how the computer handles a system reset such as a momentary loss ofpower.

Enter [L] (Last) to cause the PID loop to stay in the operating mode it was last in before thesystem reset.

Enter [M] (Manual) to cause the PID loop to startup with the PID loop in manual control modeand with the valve open % as it was before the system reset.

PL PID Tag _______ _______ _______ _______Enter an 8-character tag name used to identify the PID controller output % signal on the LCDdisplay.

INFO - Characters in ’ ’refer to password levels.Characters in ‘[ ] ’ refer tokey presses.




2.5.10. Digital / Analog Output SettingsPress [n] [Enter] at ‘Config D/A Out "n"’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open thefollowing entries (n = D/A Output #):

Assign at 4mA at 20mA

L1 Analog Output #1 __________ __________ __________Under ‘Assign’, enter the database index number of the variable that will be assigned to thedigital-to-analog output points.

Under ‘at 4mA’ and ‘at 20mA’, enter the required scaling parameters in engineering units at 4mAand 20mA (e.g.: For Meter #1 Net Flow Rate assign 7102. Typical scaling might be 4mA=0.0bbls/hr and 20mA=1000.0 bbls/hr).

Rmk _______________Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of eachdigital-to-analog output.

L1 Analog Output #2 __________ __________ __________

Rmk _______________

L1 Analog Output #3 __________ __________ __________

Rmk _______________

L1 Analog Output #4 __________ __________ __________

Rmk _______________

L1 Analog Output #5 __________ __________ __________

Rmk _______________

L1 Analog Output #6 __________ __________ __________

Rmk _______________

L1 Analog Output #7 __________ __________ __________

Rmk _______________

L1 Analog Output #8 __________ __________ __________

Rmk _______________

L1 Analog Output #9 __________ __________ __________

Rmk _______________

L1 Analog Output #10 __________ __________ __________

Rmk _______________

L1 Analog Output #11 __________ __________ __________

Rmk _______________

L1 Analog Output #12 __________ __________ __________

Rmk _______________





2.5.11. Front Panel Counter SettingsEnter [Y] at ‘Front Pnl Counters’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open thefollowing entries:

Counter A Counter B Counter C

L1 Front Panel Counter __________ __________ __________Enter the database index number of the accumulator variable that will be output to thiselectromechanical counter.

The unit of measure is the same as that shown on the LCD for the totalizer (i.e., barrels, klbs, m3,etc.) The maximum count rate is limited to 10 counts per second. Count rates higher than 10pulses per second will cause the computer to remember how many counts did not get output andcontinue to output after the flow stops until all buffered counts are output.

Rmk ____________ ____________ ____________Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of each frontpanel counter.

Pulses/Unit __________ __________ __________Enter the number of pulses per unit (volume, mass, energy).



2.5.12. Programmable Boolean StatementsEnter [Y] at ‘Program Booleans ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open thefollowing entries:

Boolean Point 10xx Equation or Statement Rmk (Comment or Remark)

25: _______________________ _______________________

26: _______________________ _______________________

27: _______________________ _______________________

28: _______________________ _______________________

29: _______________________ _______________________

30: _______________________ _______________________

31: _______________________ _______________________

32: _______________________ _______________________

33: _______________________ _______________________

34: _______________________ _______________________

35: _______________________ _______________________

36: _______________________ _______________________

37: _______________________ _______________________

38: _______________________ _______________________

39: _______________________ _______________________

40: _______________________ _______________________

41: _______________________ _______________________

42: _______________________ _______________________

43: _______________________ _______________________

44: _______________________ _______________________

45: _______________________ _______________________

46: _______________________ _______________________

47: _______________________ _______________________

48: _______________________ _______________________

49: _______________________ _______________________

50: _______________________ _______________________

51: _______________________ _______________________

52: _______________________ _______________________

53: _______________________ _______________________

54: _______________________ _______________________

55: _______________________ _______________________

Program Booleans - These64 Boolean statements areevaluated every 100 msecstarting at Point 1025continuing through 1088.Each statement can containup to 3 Boolean variables,optionally preceded by theslash (/) denoting the NOTFunction and separated by avalid Boolean operator:

Operator SymbolNOT /AND &OR +

EXOR *EQUAL =

IF )GOTO GMOVE :

COMPARE %INDIRECT “

E.g.: 1025:1002&/1003Boolean 1025 is true whenpoint 1002 is true AND point1003 is NOT true.Note: Points 1002 and 1003in this example reflect thestatus of Physical I/O Points2 and 3.There are no limitations as towhat Boolean points can beused in a statement.Statements can contain theresults from otherstatements.E.g.: 1026: /1025+1105Boolean 1026 is true whenBoolean 1025 is NOT trueOR Point 1105 is true.Using the ‘=’ operator, theresult of a statement caninitiate a command.E.g.: 1027: 1719=1026Request a ‘Snapshot Report’when Boolean 1026 is true.

Note: See Volume 4 fordetailed list of Booleans andStatus Commands.



Boolean Point 10xx Equation or Statement Comment or Remark

56: _______________________ _______________________

57: _______________________ _______________________

58: _______________________ _______________________

59: _______________________ _______________________

60: _______________________ _______________________

61: _______________________ _______________________

62: _______________________ _______________________

63: _______________________ _______________________

64: _______________________ _______________________

65: _______________________ _______________________

66: _______________________ _______________________

67: _______________________ _______________________

68: _______________________ _______________________

69: _______________________ _______________________

70: _______________________ _______________________

71: _______________________ _______________________

72: _______________________ _______________________

73: _______________________ _______________________

74: _______________________ _______________________

75: _______________________ _______________________

76: _______________________ _______________________

77: _______________________ _______________________

78: _______________________ _______________________

79: _______________________ _______________________

80: _______________________ _______________________

81: _______________________ _______________________

82: _______________________ _______________________

83: _______________________ _______________________

84: _______________________ _______________________

85: _______________________ _______________________

86: _______________________ _______________________

87: _______________________ _______________________

88: _______________________ _______________________

TIP - Use the blank linesprovided next to eachconfiguration option to writedown the correspondingsettings you entered in theflow computer.

Program Booleans - These64 Boolean statements areevaluated every 100 msecstarting at Point 1025continuing through 1088.Each statement can containup to 3 Boolean variables,optionally preceded by theslash (/) denoting the NOTFunction and separated by avalid Boolean operator:

Operator SymbolNOT /AND &OR +

EXOR *EQUAL =

IF )GOTO GMOVE :


E.g.: 1025:1002&/1003Boolean 1025 is true whenpoint 1002 is true AND point1003 is NOT true.Note: Points 1002 and 1003in this example reflect thestatus of Physical I/O Points2 and 3.There are no limitations as towhat Boolean points can beused in a statement.Statements can contain theresults from otherstatements.E.g.: 1026: /1025+1105Boolean 1026 is true whenBoolean 1025 is NOT trueOR Point 1105 is true.Using the ‘=’ operator, theresult of a statement caninitiate a command.E.g.: 1027: 1719=1026Request a ‘Snapshot Report’when Boolean 1026 is true.



2.5.13. Programmable Variable StatementsEnter [Y] at ‘Program Variables ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open thefollowing entries:

Prog Variable 70xx Equation or Statement Comment or Remark

25: _______________________ _______________________

26: _______________________ _______________________

27: _______________________ _______________________

28: _______________________ _______________________

29: _______________________ _______________________

30: _______________________ _______________________

31: _______________________ _______________________

32: _______________________ _______________________

33: _______________________ _______________________

34: _______________________ _______________________

35: _______________________ _______________________

36: _______________________ _______________________

37: _______________________ _______________________

38: _______________________ _______________________

39: _______________________ _______________________

40: _______________________ _______________________

41: _______________________ _______________________

42: _______________________ _______________________

43: _______________________ _______________________

44: _______________________ _______________________

45: _______________________ _______________________

46: _______________________ _______________________

47: _______________________ _______________________

48: _______________________ _______________________

49: _______________________ _______________________

50: _______________________ _______________________

51: _______________________ _______________________

52: _______________________ _______________________

53: _______________________ _______________________

54: _______________________ _______________________

55: _______________________ _______________________

Programmable Variables -These 64 variable statementsare evaluated every 500msec starting at thestatement that determinesthe value of Points 7025through 7088. Eachstatement can contain up to 3variables or constants.Variables can be optionallypreceded by the ‘$’ symboldenoting the ABSOLUTEvalue of the variable is to beused. Constants areidentified by placing a ’#’symbol ahead of the number.These and other operatorsare:

Operator SymbolABSOLUTE $CONSTANT #

POWER &MULTIPLY *

DIVIDE /ADD +

SUBTRACT -EQUAL =

IF )GOTO GMOVE :


The order of precedence is:1) ABSOLUTE2) POWER3) MULTIPLY/DIVIDE4) ADD/SUBTRACTIn cases where operatorshave the same precedence,statements are evaluated leftto right.E.g.: The value of floatingpoint variable 7035 is definedas:

35:7027&#5*7026The power operator isevaluated first (the value ofPoint 7035 is set equal to thesquare root of the numbercontained in Point 7027) andthe result is multiplied by thenumber stored in variable7026. Note that statementscan contain the results ofother statements. (SeeOmniCom Help for moreinformation by pressing [F1]on your PC keyboard in the“Configure VariableStatement’ menu.)



Prog Variable 70xx Equation or Statement Comment or Remark

56: _______________________ _______________________

57: _______________________ _______________________

58: _______________________ _______________________

59: _______________________ _______________________

60: _______________________ _______________________

61: _______________________ _______________________

62: _______________________ _______________________

63: _______________________ _______________________

64: _______________________ _______________________

65: _______________________ _______________________

66: _______________________ _______________________

67: _______________________ _______________________

68: _______________________ _______________________

69: _______________________ _______________________

70: _______________________ _______________________

71: _______________________ _______________________

72: _______________________ _______________________

73: _______________________ _______________________

74: _______________________ _______________________

75: _______________________ _______________________

76: _______________________ _______________________

77: _______________________ _______________________

78: _______________________ _______________________

79: _______________________ _______________________

80: _______________________ _______________________

81: _______________________ _______________________

82: _______________________ _______________________

83: _______________________ _______________________

84: _______________________ _______________________

85: _______________________ _______________________

86: _______________________ _______________________

87: _______________________ _______________________

88: _______________________ _______________________

TIP - Use the blank linesprovided next to eachconfiguration option to writedown the correspondingsettings you enter in the flowcomputer.

Note: See Volume 4 fordetailed list of Booleans andStatus Commands

Valid Numeric Variables -These are any long integer orfloating point number withinthe database (Points 5000-8999), including Booleanvariables. For the purposeof evaluation, Booleanvariables have the value of1.0 if they are True and 0.0 ifthey are False.



2.5.14. User Display SettingsEnter 1 through 8 for the selected user display at ‘User Display ? “n”’ of the‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries:

User Display #1

Key Press _______________Using the keys marked A through Z, enter the sequence of key presses needed to recall theselected user display (see the side bar for details). A maximum of 4 keys are allowed. User keypress sequences take priority over any existing resident key press sequences.

Var #1 Tag _______________Enter an 8-character tag name used to identify the display variable on the LCD display.

Var #1 Index _______________Enter the database index number of the variable that you want to appear on the LCD display. Eachvariable within the flow computer database is assigned an index number or address. Any Booleaninteger or floating point variable within the database can be displayed.

Var #1 Dec. _______________Enter the number of digits to the right of the decimal point for the variable. Valid entries are 0though 7. The computer will display each variable using the display resolution that you haveselected, except in cases where the number is too large or too small. In either case, the flowcomputer will adjust the decimal position or default to scientific display mode.

Tag Index # Decimal Pos.

Var #2 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #3 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #4 ____________ ________ ____________

User Display #2

Key Press _______________Tag Index # Decimal Pos.

Var #1 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #2 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #3 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #4 ____________ ________ ____________

User Display #3


Var #1 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #2 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #3 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #4 ____________ ________ ____________

Valid Index NumberAssignments - Any 32-bitinteger or floating pointvariable within the databasecan be assigned to be viewedvia a user display (seeVolume 4 for a completelisting).

Valid Key PressSequences - You may selecta sequence of up to 4 keypresses to recall eachdisplay. This does not countthe [Display/Enter] keypress which must be used tosignal the end of thesequence. Each key isidentified by the red Athrough Z character on eachvalid key.Valid keys are listed below[A] - also labeled [Gross][B] - also labeled [Net][C] - also labeled [Mass][D] - also labeled [Energy][E] - also labeled [S.G./API][F] - also labeled [Control][G] - also labeled [Temp][H] - also labeled [Press][I] - also labeled [Density][J] - also labeled [D.P.][K] - also labeled [Orifice][L] - also labeled [Meter][M] - also labeled [Time][N] - also labeled [Counts][O] - also labeled [Factor][P] - also labeled [Preset][Q] - also labeled [Batch][R] - also labeled [Analysis][S] - also labeled [Print][T] - also labeled [Prove][U] - also labeled [Status][V] - also labeled [Alarms][W] - also labeled [Product][X] - also labeled [Setup][Y] - also labeled [Input][Z] - also labeled [Output]The [↑↑]/[↓↓]/[←←]/[→→] (Up/Down/Left/Right arrow) keysand the [Prog], [AlphaShift] and [Clear] keyscannot be used in a keypress sequence.



User Display #4


Var #1 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #2 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #3 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #4 ____________ ________ ____________

User Display #5


Var #1 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #2 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #3 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #4 ____________ ________ ____________

User Display #6


Var #1 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #2 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #3 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #4 ____________ ________ ____________

User Display #7


Var #1 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #2 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #3 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #4 ____________ ________ ____________

User Display #8


Var #1 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #2 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #3 ____________ ________ ____________

Var #4 ____________ ________ ____________

Valid Index NumberAssignments - Any 32-bitinteger or floating pointvariable within the databasecan be assigned to be viewedvia a user display (seeVolume 4 for a completelisting).

Valid Key PressSequences - You may selecta sequence of up to 4 keypresses to recall eachdisplay. This does not countthe [Display/Enter] keypress which must be used tosignal the end of thesequence. Each key isidentified by the red Athrough Z character on eachvalid key.Valid keys are listed below[A] - also labeled [Gross][B] - also labeled [Net][C] - also labeled [Mass][D] - also labeled [Energy][E] - also labeled [S.G./API][F] - also labeled [Control][G] - also labeled [Temp][H] - also labeled [Press][I] - also labeled [Density][J] - also labeled [D.P.][K] - also labeled [Orifice][L] - also labeled [Meter][M] - also labeled [Time][N] - also labeled [Counts][O] - also labeled [Factor][P] - also labeled [Preset][Q] - also labeled [Batch][R] - also labeled [Analysis][S] - also labeled [Print][T] - also labeled [Prove][U] - also labeled [Status][V] - also labeled [Alarms][W] - also labeled [Product][X] - also labeled [Setup][Y] - also labeled [Input][Z] - also labeled [Output]The [↑↑]/[↓↓]/[←←]/[→→] (Up/Down/Left/Right arrow) keysand the [Prog], [AlphaShift] and [Clear] keyscannot be used in a keypress sequence.



2.5.15. Digital I/O Point SettingsEnter 1 through 24 for the selected digital I/O Point at ‘Config Digital “n”’ ofthe ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries:

Assign Pulse Width Pulse/Unit or Delay On Delay Off

Digital #1 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #2 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #3 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #4 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #5 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #6 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #7 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #8 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #9 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #10 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #11 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #12 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________


Config Digital ”n” - Assigneach physical I/O point to aModbus address of aBoolean variable. There areno limitations as to whatBoolean points can beassigned to physical I/Opoints. Enter [0] (zero) forModbus control.

Assigning as PulseOutputs - Meter and StationAccumulators may be outputin the form of pulses.

Pulse Width - Pulse width ismeasured using 10msecticks; i.e., 100 = 1 second.

Pulse per Unit - Pulse perunit entry can be used toprovide unit conversion (e.g.:entering 4.2 pulses per barrelwill give 1 pulse every 10gallons as there are 42gallons in a barrel). The unitsof volume, mass and energyflow are the same as isdisplayed on the LCD.

Assigning as ControlOutput - Any internal alarmor Boolean can be output.



Assign Pulse Width Pulse/Unit or Delay On Delay Off

Digital #13 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #14 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #15 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #16 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #17 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #18 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #19 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #20 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #21 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #22 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #23 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Digital #24 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Rmk _______________

Delay On/Off - Used to delayor stretch a control output.The delay is measured using100msec ticks; i.e., 10 = 1second.

Assigning as Status orCommand Inputs -Switches, etc., can be usedto trigger events within theflow computer, such as end abatch or start a provesequence (see the facingpage for more details).

1700 Dummy Boolean -Assign all physical I/O pointswhich will be used only inBoolean statements forsequencing or control to1700. This sets up the pointsas an input only.

Note: See Volume 4 forvalid assignments.



2.5.16. Serial Input / Output SettingsEnter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at ‘Serial I/O “n”’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open thefollowing entries:

Port #1 Port #2 Port #3 Port #4

L1 Baud Rate _______ _______ _______ _______

L1 Number of Data Bit _______ _______ _______ _______

L1 Number of Stop Bit _______ _______ _______ _______

L1 Parity Bit (E/O/N) _______ _______ _______ _______

L1 Xmit Key Delay _______ _______ _______ _______You must enter [0] for Transmitter Key Delay for any port that will be used with a shared printer.

L1 Printer = 0, Modbus = 1 _______This entry corresponds to Serial Port #1 only.

L1 Protocol Type _______This entry corresponds to Serial Port #4 only. Enter the type of protocol to be used on this port:0=Modbus RTU, 1=Modbus ASCII, 2=Modbus RTU (modem), 3=Allen Bradley Full Duplex,4=Allen Bradley Half Duplex.

L1 Modbus ID _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the Modbus slave ID number that this serial port will respond to (1 through 247 acceptable).This entry will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port type.

L1 Modbus Type _______ _______ _______This entry does not apply to Serial Port #4. Enter the Modbus Protocol Type: 0=Modbus RTUbinary protocol, 1=Modbus ASCII protocol, 2=Modbus RTU (Modem). Make sure that you haveentered the correct number of Data Bits; 8 for RTU or 7 for ASCII.

L1 Modicon Compatible (Y/N) _______ _______ _______ _______Enter [Y] to configure these Modbus ports to be compatible with Modicon PLC equipment (e.g.:984 series fitted with the Enhanced Executive Cartridge) and DCS systems (e.g.: HoneywellTDC3000 systems using the Advanced Process Manager APM-SI). This entry will be disabled forSerial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port type.

In this mode the point number indexes requested and transmitted while using the Modbus RTUmodes are actually one less than the index number documented in this manual. ASCII modetransmissions use the address documented in this manual. Data is counted in numbers of 16 bitregisters rather than points. i.e., To request two 4 byte IEEE floating point variables, indexnumbers 7101 and 7102, would require the host to ask for 4 registers starting at index 7100.

IEEE Floating Point data bytes are transmitted in swapped format:

NORMAL IEEE FLOAT FORMAT ORDER TRANSMITTED

Byte #1 Byte #2 Byte #3 Byte #4 Byte #1 Byte #2 Byte #3 Byte #4Biased

ExponentMS

Mantissa MantissaLS

Mantissa MantissaLS

MantissaBiased

ExponentMS

Mantissa



Baud Rates Available -300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,9600, 19200, 38400.

Data Bits - 7 or 8 - 7 forASCII Modbus, 8 for RTUModbus.

Stop Bits - 0, 1 or 2.

Parity Bit - Odd, Even,None.

Transmitter Carrier KeyDelay - Delays areapproximate only. 0=msec,1=50msec, 2=100msec,3=150msec.

Modbus Type - Select theprotocol type which matchesthe Modbus master device. Ifthe master can support eitherASCII or RTU, choose RTUprotocol as it is approximatelytwice as efficient as theASCII protocol.

Modicon Compatible -OmniCom will not operate ifdownloading configurationwith this entry set to ‘Y’.



L1 CRC Enabled _______ _______ _______ _______Many protocols use either a CRC, LCR or BCC error check to ensure that data received is notcorrupted. The flow computer can be configured to ignore the eror checking on incomimgmessages. This allows software developers an easy means of debugging communicationssoftware. Error checking should only be disabled temporarily when debugging the masterslave communication link.

Enter [Y] to perform error checking on incoming messages. For maximum data integrity alwaysenter [Y] during normal running conditions.

Enter [N] to disable error checking on incoming messages.

This entry will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port type.

2.5.17. Peer-to- Peer Communications SettingsSerial Port #2 of the flow computer can be configured to act as a simpleModbus slave port or as a peer-to-peer communication link. Using the peer-to-peer link allows multiple flow computers to be interconnected and share data.

Enter [Y] at ‘Peer / Peer Comm (Y) ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open thefollowing submenu:

L1 Activate Redundancy _______________The active redundancy feature allows two flow computers to operate as a pair. Each flow computerreceives the same process signals and performs the same calculations; i.e., in “redundancy”.

Enter [Y] to allow both flow computers to manage the peer-to-peer link between them andautomatically switch between being the master or slave computer. Important data such as meterfactors and PID control settings can be continually exchanged between flow computers ensuringthat at any time, should a failure occur to one, the other unit would be able to assume control of thePID and ticketing functions.

The redundancy mode requires that four digital I/O ports be cross-connected to sense watchdogfailure modes using the following points 2714=Input master status, 2864=Output Master status,2713 Input watchdog status, 2863 = Output of watchdog status. (See Technical Bulletin TB-980402 in Volume 5.)

L1 Next Master _______________Enter the slave number of the next flow computer in sequence in the peer-to-peer communicationsequence to pass over control. After the flow computer completes all of it's transactions it willattempt to pass over master control of the Modbus link to this Modbus ID.

Enter the Modbus ID of this flow computer if there are no other peers in sequence on thecommunication link.

Enter [0] to disable the peer-to-peer feature and use Serial Port #2 as a standard Modbusslave port.

L1 Last ID # Master in Sequence _______________Enter the slave number of the last Omni (the highest Modbus ID number) in the peer-to-peercommunication sequence. This is required for error recovery. Should this flow computer be unableto hand over control to the 'next master in sequence' (see previous entry), it will attempt toestablish communications with a Modbus slave with a higher Modbus ID. It will keep trying untilthe ID number exceeds this entry. At that point the flow computer will start at Modbus ID #1.

Enter the Modbus ID of this flow computer if it is the only master on the link.

L1 Retry Timer _______________Should any slave device fail to respond to a communication request, the master device will retry toestablish communications several times. Enter the number of 50 millisecond ticks that the flowcomputer should wait for a response from the slave device. To ensure fast recovery fromcommunication failures, set this entry to as low a number as possible. Enter [3] for peer-to-peerlinks involving only Omni flow computers. Other Modbus devices may require more time torespond.

Skip CRC/LCR Check - Ifyou have disabled the errorchecking on incomingmessages, you mustsubstitute dummy bytes inthe message string.Outgoing messages willalways include the errorchecking bytes.

TIP - For maximumefficiency, always startModbus ID numbers from 1.



L1 #1 Slave ID _______________Each transfer of data is called a transaction. Enter the Modbus ID # of the other slave involved inthe transaction. Modbus ID ‘0’ can be used to broadcast write to all Modbus slave devicesconnected to the peer-to-peer link. Other valid IDs range from 1-247.

Read/Write _______________Enter [R] if data will be read from the slave. Enter [W] if data will be written to the slave.

Source _______________Enter the database index number or address of the Modbus point where the data is to be obtained,corresponding to the first data point of the transaction. This is the slave’s database index numberwhen the transaction is a ‘read’, and the master’s database index number when the transaction isa ‘write’. Refer to Volume 4 for a list of available database addresses or index numbers.

Points _______________Enter the number of contiguous points to transfer. Each transaction can transfer multiple datapoints that can be any valid data type recognized by the Omni. The maximum number of pointsthat can be transferred depends on the type of data. IEEE floats (4bytes each)=63 max; 32-bitIntegers (4 bytes each)=63 max; 16-bit integers (2 bytes each)=127 max; packed coils or status (8to a byte)=2040 max.

The Omni automatically knows what Modbus function to use and what data types are involved bythe Modbus index number of the data within the flow computer database. The destination indexnumber determines the data type when the transactions is a ‘read’. The source index numberdetermines the data type when the transaction is a ‘write’.

Dest Indx _______________Enter the database index number or address of where the data is to be stored (destination index oraddress). If the transaction is a ‘read’, this will be the index number within the master Omni’sdatabase. If the transaction is a ‘write’, this will be the register number within the remote slave’sdatabase.

L1 #2-Slave ID _______________

Read/Write _______________

Source _______________

Points _______________

Dest Indx _______________

L1 #3 Slave ID _______________

Read/Write _______________

Source _______________

Points _______________

Dest Indx _______________

L1 #4 Slave ID _______________

Read/Write _______________

Source _______________

Points _______________

Dest Indx _______________


INFO - The Omni FlowComputer determines whatModbus function code andwhat data type is involved bythe Modbus index number ofthe data within the Omni’sdatabase. The Source Indexdetermines the data type fora ‘write’. The DestinationIndex determines the datatype for a ‘read’.Function codes used are:

01=Read Multiple Booleans15=Write Multiple Booleans03=Read Multiple Variables16=Write Multiple Variables



L1 #5 Slave ID _______________

Read/Write _______________

Source _______________

Points _______________

Dest Indx _______________

L1 #6 Slave ID _______________

Read/Write _______________

Source _______________

Points _______________

Dest Indx _______________

L1 #7 Slave ID _______________

Read/Write _______________

Source _______________

Points _______________

Dest Indx _______________

L1 #8 Slave ID _______________

Read/Write _______________

Source _______________

Points _______________

Dest Indx _______________

L1 #9 Slave ID _______________

Read/Write _______________

Source _______________

Points _______________

Dest Indx _______________

L1 #10- Slave ID _______________

Read/Write _______________

Source _______________

Points _______________

Dest Indx _______________




L1 #11 Slave ID _______________

Read/Write _______________

Source _______________

Points _______________

Dest Indx _______________

L1 #12 Slave ID _______________

Read/Write _______________

Source _______________

Points _______________

Dest Indx _______________

L1 #13 Slave ID _______________

Read/Write _______________

Source _______________

Points _______________

Dest Indx _______________

L1 #14 Slave ID _______________

Read/Write _______________

Source _______________

Points _______________

Dest Indx _______________

L1 #15 Slave ID _______________

Read/Write _______________

Source _______________

Points _______________

Dest Indx _______________

L1 #16 Slave ID _______________

Read/Write _______________

Source _______________

Points _______________

Dest Indx _______________



INFO - The Omni FlowComputer determines whatModbus function code andwhat data type is involved bythe Modbus index number ofthe data within the Omni’sdatabase. The Source Indexdetermines the data type fora ‘write’. The DestinationIndex determines the datatype for a ‘read’.Function codes used are:

01=Read Multiple Booleans15=Write Multiple Booleans03=Read Multiple Variables16=Write Multiple Variables



2.5.18. Custom Modbus Data Packet SettingsCustom Modbus Data Packets are provided to reduce the number of pollsneeded to read multiple variables which may be in different areas of thedatabase. Groups of data points of any type of data can be concatenated intoone packet by entering each data group starting index numbers 001, 201 and401. The number of data bytes in a custom packet in non-Modicon compatiblemode cannot exceed 250 (RTU mode) or 500 (ASCII mode). When Modiconcompatible is selected, the number of data bytes in a custom packet cannotexceed 400 (RTU mode) or 800 (ASCII mode).

Enter [1], [2] or [3] to select a data packet at ‘Custom Packet “n”’ of the ‘MiscSetup’ menu to open the entries below. Under Index #, enter the databaseaddress or Modbus index number for each data point of each group. UnderPoints, emter the number of consecutive data points to include in each datagroup.

Custom Modbus Data Packet #1 (Addressed at 001)

Index # / Points Index # / Points Index # / Points Index # / Points

#1_______/_____ #2_______/_____ #3_______/_____ #4_______/_____

#5_______/_____ #6_______/_____ #7_______/_____ #8_______/_____

#9_______/_____ #10_______/_____ #11_______/_____ #12_______/_____

#13_______/_____ #14_______/_____ #15_______/_____ #16_______/_____

#17_______/_____ #18_______/_____ #19_______/_____ #20_______/_____



#1_______/_____ #2_______/_____ #3_______/_____ #4_______/_____

#5_______/_____ #6_______/_____ #7_______/_____ #8_______/_____



#1_______/_____ #2_______/_____ #3_______/_____ #4_______/_____

#5_______/_____ #6_______/_____ #7_______/_____ #8_______/_____

#9_______/_____ #10_______/_____ #11_______/_____ #12_______/_____

#13_______/_____ #14_______/_____ #15_______/_____ #16_______/_____

#17_______/_____ #18_______/_____ #19_______/_____ #20_______/_____

INFO - Packets defined areusually read-only and mustalways be retrieved as apacket. When Modicon 984is selected these packetsetup entries are used todefine a logical array ofvariables which can be reador written in any grouping.The number of data points isalways input in terms ofOmni “logical” elements; i.e.,an IEEE floating piontnumber comprises two 16-bitwords but is considered onelogical element.



2.5.19. Programmable Logic Controller SetupNote: See Technical Bulletin TB-960702 “Communicating with Allen-

Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers” in Volume 5 forinformation on the ‘PLC Group “n”’ submenu.

2.5.20. Archive File SetupNote: See Technical Bulletin TB-960703 “Storing Archive Data within the

Flow Computer” in Volume 5 for information on the ‘Archive File “n”’submenu.





2.6. Setting Up the Time and Date

2.6.1. Accessing the Time/Date Setup SubmenuApplying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry ’screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to thefollowing will be displayed:

Use the []/[] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Time/Date Setup ’and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.6.2. Time and Date Settings

L1 Time : ____ :____:____Enter Current Time using the correct method 'hh:mm:ss'. To change only the hour, minutes orseconds, move cursor to the respective position and enter the new setting.

L1 Date : ____ /____/____Enter Current Date using the correct method 'mm/dd/yy' or’dd/mm/yy’. To change only themonth, day or year, move cursor to the respective position and enter the new setting.

L1 Select mm/dd/yy ? _____________Select date format required by entering [Y] or [N] : Y= Month/day/year, N=Day/Month/Year).

INFO - The first menu, 'MiscConfiguration', shouldalways be completed firstas these entries specify thenumber and type of inputand output devicesconnected to the flowcomputer; i.e., the menusfollowing the 'MiscConfiguration' menu do notask for configuration dataunless a transducer hasbeen defined.

Flow ComputerConfiguration via theMenu Selection Method -It is best to use this methodwhen programming anapplication for the first timeas every possible optionand variable will beprompted. Once acomputer is in operationand you become familiarwith the application you candecide to use the fasterRandom Access Methoddescribed below.Once you have finishedentering data in a setupsubmenu, press the [Prog]key to return to the ‘SelectGroup Entry ’ screen.Proceed as described inthis manual for each setupoption.

Time and Date Setup viathe Random AccessMethod - Setup entriesrequire that you be in theProgram Mode. In theDisplay Mode press the[Prog] key. The ProgramLED will glow green and the‘Select Group Entry ’screen will appear. Thenpress [Time] [Enter] anduse [] / [] keys to scroll.



2.7. Configuring the Meter Station

2.7.1. Accessing the Station Setup SubmenuApplying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry ’screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to thefollowing will be displayed:

Use the []/[] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Station Setup ’ andpress [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.7.2. Meter Station Settings

L1 Station ID _______________Enter 8 alphanumeric characters maximum. This string variable usually appears in usercustom reports (Modbus database point 4815).

Flow Low _______________Enter the flow rate below which the Station Low Flow Alarm activates (Modbus database point1810). Flow rates 5% below this value activate the Low Low Alarm (Modbus database point1809).

Flow High _______________Enter the flow rate above which the Station High Flow Alarm activates (Modbus databasepoint 1811). Flow rates 5% above this value activate the High High Alarm (Modbus databasepoint 1812).

L1 G FullScal _______________Enter the gross flow rate at full-scale for the meter station. Sixteen-bit integer variablesrepresenting station gross and net flow rate are included in the database at 3802 and 3804.These variables are scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with aresolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 999 = 0% to 99.9%)

L1 M FullScal _______________Enter the mass flow rate at full-scale for the meter station. A 16-bit integer variablerepresenting station mass flow rate is included in the database at 3806. This variable isscaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0to 1000 = 0% to 100.0%)

Flag #1 Flag #2 Flag #3

L1 Thre Lo ____________ ____________ ____________Enter the flow rate Low Threshold value which resets each Station Run Switching Flag whenthe station gross flow rate falls below this limit (see sidebar).

L1 Thre Hi ____________ ____________ ____________Enter the flow rate High Threshold value which sets each Station Run Switching Flag whenthe station gross flow rate exceeds this limit (see sidebar).

Meter Station Setup viathe Random AccessMethod - Setup entriesrequire that you be in theProgram Mode. In theDisplay Mode press the[Prog] key. The ProgramLED will glow green and‘Select Group Entry ’screen will appear. Thenpress [Meter] [Enter] anduse [] / [] keys to scroll.

Meter Station RunSwitching Flow RateThresholds - The Omniflow computer has 3Boolean flags which are setor reset depending on thestation flow rate: Run Switching Flag #1 at

Modbus database point1824.

Run Switching Flag #2 atModbus database point1825.

Run Switching Flag #3 atModbus database point1826.

Each of these flags has alow threshold and highthreshold flow rate. Eachflag is set when the stationflow rate exceeds thecorresponding highthreshold value. These flagsreset when the station flowrate falls below therespective low thresholdlimit.See Chapter 3 for moreinformation on how toinclude these flags inBoolean statements toautomatically switch meterruns depending on flowrates.



L1 Common Batch Stack _______________Enter [Y] to set up the flow computer to use a common product on all four meter runs; i.e., to runthe same product at the same time on all 4 meter runs.

Enter [N] to run different products at the same time on each meter run.

L1 Batch Warning _______________Enter the quantity of barrels for the Batch Preset Warning. This entry displays only when CommonBatch Stack is selected. The Batch preset counters are activated when a non-zero number isentered for batch size on the batch sequence stack (see previous chapter on BatchingOperations). The batch preset reached flag (database point 1819) will be activated whenever thebatch preset counter counts down to zero. The batch warning flag (database point 1818) will beactivated when the batch preset counter is equal or less than this entry.

L1 Batch Preset Unit _______________Enter the selected Batch Preset Counter Units: 0=Net (standard) volume units, 1=Gross (actual)volume units, 2=Mass units.

L1 Grv Change _______________This entry represents the Specific Gravity Rate of Change and displays only when a StationDensity I/O Point has been assigned. It is used to detect product changes in the pipeline (productinterface).

Enter the Gravity Rate of Change in specific gravity units per barrel or m3 for this limit. The GravityRate of Change Flag (database point 1813) is activated if the flowing gravity measured by thestation densitometer exceeds this preset rate of change.

L1 Line Pack _______________This entry represents the Line Pack Delay and displays only when a Station Density I/O Point hasbeen assigned. In many cases, the station densitometer that detects the product interfaces isinstalled many net barrels (or net m3) in advance of the metering skid to provide prior warning of aproduct change.

Enter the Line Pack Delay as the quantity of net barrels or net m3 between the product interfacedetector densitometer or gravitometer and the valve manifold used to end the batch. A DelayedGravity Rate of Change Flag (database point 1814) is set when this number of barrels or m3 hasbeen measured after the Product Interface Flag (database point 1813) is activated; i.e., a line packdelay is counted down to zero when a product interface is detected.

L1 Grav Sample Sec _______________This entry represents the Gravity Sample Time and displays only when a Station Density I/O Pointhas been assigned. It is used with the previous entry to determine the gravity rate of change.

Estimate the minimum amount of time (in seconds) it takes for a product change to be completeand set this timer by entering approximately 1/4 to 1/3 of that time. False triggering of the productinterface detection flag can be eliminated by ensuring that any density change must exist for atleast this many seconds.



INFO - See the previouschapter for a description ofbatching features of theOmni flow computer.



Auxiliary Inputs

Input #1 Input #2 Input #3 Input#4

Low Limit _______ _______ _______ _______Enter thhe auxiliary input signal value below which the Low Alarm activates. The TransducerFailed Low Alarm activates when the auxiliary input signal falls 5% below this limit.

High Limit _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the auxiliary input signal value above which the High Alarm activates. The TransducerFailed High Alarm activates when the auxiliary input signal rises 5% above this limit.

L2 Override _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the value (in engineering units) which will be substituted for the transducer valuedepending, on the override code selected. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicatesthat the override value is substituted.

L2 Override Code _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the Override Code which represents the strategy used regarding each auxiliary inputoverride value: 0=Never use override code, 1=Always use override code, 2=Use override codeon transmitter failure, 3=On transmitter failures use last hour's average.

L1 at 4mA* _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the value (in engineering units) that produces a transmitter output of 4mA or 1vol, orLRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters t.

L1 at 20mA* _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the value (in engineering units) that produces a transmitter output of 20mA or 5 Volts, orURV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

L1 Damping Code _______ _______ _______ _______This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combomodule. The process variable (I.e., temperature/pressure) is filtered by the transmitter beforebeing sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.

For Differential Pressure/Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec,1=0.16 sec, 2= 0.32 sec, 3=0.48 sec, 4=1.00 sec, 5=2.00 sec, 6=4.00 sec, 7=8.00 sec,8=16.00 sec, 9=32.00 sec.

For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec, 1=0.3 sec, 2=0.7sec, 3=1.5 sec, 4=3.1 sec, 5=6.3 sec, 6=12.7 sec, 7-25.5 sec, 8=51.5 sec, 9=102.5 sec.

INFO - Characters in ’ ’refer to password levels.Characters in ‘[ ] ’ refer tokey presses.


Auxiliary Input Setup viathe Random AccessMethod - Setup entriesrequire that you be in theProgram Mode. In theDisplay Mode press the[Prog] key. The ProgramLED will glow green and‘Select Group Entry ’screen will appear. Thenpress [Analysis] [Input][Enter] or [Analysis][Input] [ n] [Enter] (n =Auxiliary Input # 1, 2, 3 or4). Use [] / [] keys toscroll.

Note:

* Not Valid when a RTDProbe is specified.



2.8. Configuring Meter Runs

2.8.1. Accessing the Meter Run Setup SubmenuApplying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry ’screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to thefollowing will be displayed:

Use the []/[] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Meter Run Setup ’and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.8.2. Meter Run Settings


L1 Meter ID ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the ID of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters) for each meter run. This IDusually appears on reports.

Flow Low ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the flow rate for each meter run below which the Flow Low Alarm (database point 1n21)activates. The Low Low Alarm (database point 1n20) activates when the flow rate falls 5%below this limit.

Flow High ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the flow rate for each meter run above which the Flow High Alarm (database point1n22) activates. The High High Alarm (database point 1n23) activates when the flow raterises 5% below this limit.

L1 G Fullscal ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the gross flow rate at full-scale for each meter run. Sixteen-bit integer variablesrepresenting meter run gross and net flow rate are included in the database at 3n42 and 3n40respectively. These variables are scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of fullscale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0% to 100.0%)

L1 M Fullscal ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the mass flow rate at full-scale for each meter run. A 16-bit integer variable representingmeter run mass flow rate is included in the database at 3n44. This variable is scaled usingthis entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0%to 100.0%)

L1 Active Freq. ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the Active Frequency Threshold for each meter run. Flow meter pulse frequencies equalor greater than this threshold will cause the Meter Active Flag (1n05) to be set.

By using any Boolean statement you can use this flag bit to enable and disable totalizing bycontrolling the Disable Meter Run Flags (Modbus database points 1736, 1737, 1738 & 1739).

Example: 1030:1736=/1105 Turn off Meter #1 flow if not greater than Active Frequency.



Meter Run Setup via theRandom Access Method -Setup entries require thatyou be in the ProgramMode. In the Display Modepress the [Prog] key. TheProgram LED will glowgreen and the ‘SelectGroup Entry ’ screen willappear. Then press[Meter] [ n] [Enter] (n =Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4).Use [] / [] keys to scroll.

Alternate Access to MeterRun Settings from MeterStation Setup - Afterentering the Meter StationSettings, without exiting,press the [] key and youwill scroll down througheach Meter Run setupentry.




L1 ErrThreshold ________ ________ ________ ________This entry will display only when ‘Dual Pulse’ is selected under ‘Config Meter Runs’ (Misc Setup).It applies only when a 'E' combo module is fitted and 'Pulse Fidelity Checking' is enabled.

Enter the Pulse Fidelity Error Check Threshold (in Hz) for each meter run. To eliminate bogusalarms and error count accumulations, the dual pulse error checking functions are disabled untilthe sum of both pulse trains exceeds the pulses per seconds entered for this setting.

Example: Entering 50 for this threshold means that the dual pulse error checking will be disableduntil both A and B channels of the flowmeter pick-offs are providing 25 pulses per second each.

L1 ErrCounts ________ ________ ________ ________This entry will display only when ‘Dual Pulse’ is selected under ‘Config Meter Runs’ (Misc Setup).It applies only when a 'E' combo module is fitted and 'Pulse Fidelity Checking' is enabled.

Enter the maximum number of error pulses allowed in one transaction for each meter run. Thealarm points are:

q 1n48 A/B Comparitor Error Detectedq 1n49 A Channel Failedq 1n50 B Channel Failedq 1n51 A and B Channels not equal

The dual pulse A/B Comparitor Error Alarm (1n48) is activated when the accumulated errorcounts between the flowmeter channels exceeds this count threshold. Accumulated error countsare cleared for every batch.

Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearization Settings

L1A K-Factor ________ ________ ________ ________This entry applies when Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearization is selected (see sidebar and ‘ViscosityLinear’ entry below). Enter the K Factor for each meter run. In this case, only one K Factor isentered per flow meter. Linearization is accomplished by applying a Linearization Correction Factor(LCF) to incoming flow pulses. The LCF is calculated in real-time by monitoring a live viscositysignal.

The coefficient entries below are used to calculate the LCF for helical turbine or positivedisplacement (PD) flowmeters with the following equations:

LCF(HELICAL) = a + b/x + c/x2 + d/x3 + e/x4 + f/x5 + g/x6

LCF(PD) = a + [(xC)/b]

Enter the corresponding polynomial or equation coefficients of the linearizing algorithms used tocalculate the LCF for each meter run:

Coeff. a ________ ________ ________ ________

Coeff. b ________ ________ ________ ________

Coeff. c ________ ________ ________ ________

Coeff. d ________ ________ ________ ________

Coeff. e ________ ________ ________ ________

Coeff. f ________ ________ ________ ________

Coeff. g ________ ________ ________ ________



K-Factor LinearizationSettings - Turbine andpositive displacementflowmeters produce pulsesproportional to the flow. TheK factor is the quantity ofpulses per unit volume(barrels or m3) or mass (lb orkg) that each meterproduces. These settings areused to calculate the grossflow rate and volume.

TIP - Enter the viscositylinearization setting first andthen return to configure the KFactor linearization.



K-Factor Linearization Settings


L1A K-Factor #1 ________ ________ ________ ________This entry applies for simple flow-based linearization of K Factor; i.e., when “none” is selectedfor Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearization (see sidebar and ‘Viscosity Linear’ entry below). Enterthe K Factors for each meter run. In this case, up to 12 K Factors and the associatedflowmeter pulse frequencies are entered per meter run to define the K Factor Curve. The flowcomputer will continuously monitor the flowmeter pulse frequency and calculate gross flowbased on and interpolated K Factor derived from the entered data points. Use only K Factor#1 in cases where flowmeter linearizing is not required.

Freq Point 1 ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the flowmeter pulse frequency associated with the corresponding K Factor. Thefrequency points must be entered lowest to highest (Hz).

K-Factor #2 ________ ________ ________ ________

Freq Point 2 ________ ________ ________ ________

K-Factor #3 ________ ________ ________ ________

Freq Point 3 ________ ________ ________ ________

K-Factor #4 ________ ________ ________ ________

Freq Point 4 ________ ________ ________ ________

K-Factor #5 ________ ________ ________ ________

Freq Point 5 ________ ________ ________ ________

K-Factor #6 ________ ________ ________ ________

Freq Point 6 ________ ________ ________ ________

K-Factor #7 ________ ________ ________ ________

Freq Point 7 ________ ________ ________ ________

K-Factor #8 ________ ________ ________ ________

Freq Point 8 ________ ________ ________ ________

K-Factor #9 ________ ________ ________ ________

Freq Point 9 ________ ________ ________ ________

K-Factor #10 ________ ________ ________ ________

Freq Point 10 ________ ________ ________ ________

K-Factor #11 ________ ________ ________ ________

Freq Point 11 ________ ________ ________ ________

K-Factor #12 ________ ________ ________ ________

Freq Point 12 ________ ________ ________ ________

Meter Run Setup via theRandom Access Method -Setup entries require thatyou be in the ProgramMode. In the Display Modepress the [Prog] key. TheProgram LED will glowgreen and the ‘SelectGroup Entry ’ screen willappear. Then press[Meter] [ n] [Enter] (n =Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4).Use [] / [] keys to scroll.



More Meter Run Settings


L1 Auto Prove ? (Y) ________ ________ ________ ________Enter [Y] to enable the auto-proving feature. Enter [N] to disable auto-proving. Enabling the auto-prove function will cause the flowmeter to be automatically proved on flow rate changes and after ameter has been out of service. The auto-prove enable is cancelled whenever a meter fails anautomatic prove on 10 consecutive attempts.

L1 Use MF in Net ? (Y) ________ ________ ________ ________Enter [Y] to apply the meter factor in the net and mass flow equations. Enter [N] to ignore themeter factor in flow calculations; nonetheless, it will still appear on all reports.

L1 Use LCF in Gross ? ________ ________ ________ ________This entry applies when Flow Rate/Viscosity Linearization is selected (see ‘Viscosity Linear’ entrybelow). Enter [Y] to apply the Linearization Correction Factor (LCF) to gross flow rate and grosstotals. Enter [N] if the LCF is not to be applied. The calculation of the gross indicated volume foreach option is as follows:

q If “Yes” is selected ð Gross = (Flowmeter Pulses/ Flowmeter K Factor) x LCFq If “No” is selected ð Gross = Flowmeter Pulses/ Flowmeter K Factor

L1 Temp Compensated ? ________ ________ ________ ________In some cases, the flowmeter may be fitted with a mechanical or electronic temperaturecompensator. Enter [Y] for the Omni Flow Computer to set the temperature correction (VCF) to1.0000 in all equations. Enter [N] if the meter provides gross uncompensated pulses.

L1 S&W as Aux “n” ________ ________ ________ ________Select the auxiliary input or other source to be used to input the S&W % for each meter run:0=None, 1=Use Auxiliary Input #1, 2= Use Auxiliary Input #2, 3= Use Auxiliary Input #3, 4= UseAuxiliary Input #1; 5=Modbus Direct. The flow computer will use this input to determine NetStandard Volume (S&W corrected volume).

L1 Viscosity Linear ________ ________ ________ ________Select the source of the viscosity value for the LCF for each meter run: 0=None, 1=Use AuxiliaryInput #1, 2= Use Auxiliary Input #2, 3= Use Auxiliary Input #3, 4= Use Auxiliary Input #1;5=Modbus Direct.

L1 Select Helical ? ________ ________ ________ ________Enter [Y] to select a Helical Turbine Flowmeter. Enter [N] to select a Positive Displacement (PD)Flowmeter. The algorithm used to linearize the flowmeter for flow and viscosity effects is differentdepending on whether the flowmeter is a helical turbine type or a PD type.

L1 Meter Model ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the model number of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry usuallyappears on the prove report.

L1 Meter Size ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the size of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry usually appears onthe prove report.

L1 Serial No. ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the serial number of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters). This entry usuallyappears on the prove report.



TIP - Enter the viscositylinearization setting first andthen return to configure the KFactor linearization.



2.9. Configuring Meter / Prover Temperature

2.9.1. Accessing the Temperature Setup SubmenuApplying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry ’screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to thefollowing will be displayed:

Use the []/[] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘TemperatureSetup ’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.9.2. Meter Temperature Settings

Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4

Low Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the temperature below which the flowmeter low alarm activates. Transducer values 5%below this entry fail to low.

High Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the temperature above which the flowmeter high alarm activates. Transducer values 5%above this entry fail to high.

L2 Override ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the temperature value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on theoverride code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value issubstituted.

L2 Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the Override Code strategy: 0=Never use override code, 1=Always use override code,2=Use override code on transmitter failure, 3=On transmitter failures use last hour's average.

L1 at 4mA * ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the temperature engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRVof Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

L1 at 20mA * ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the temperature engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts, orURV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

L1 Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combomodule. The process variable (I.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before beingsent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.




Meter Temperature Setupvia the Random AccessMethod - Setup entriesrequire that you be in theProgram Mode. In theDisplay Mode press the[Prog] key. The ProgramLED will glow green and the‘Select Group Entry ’screen will appear. Thenpress [Temp] [Enter] , or[Temp] [Meter] [ n] [Enter]or [Meter] [ n] [Temp][Enter] (n = Meter Run # 1,2, 3 or 4). Use [] / []keys to scroll.

Note:




2.9.3. Meter Density Temperature Settings


Low Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the temperature below which the densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer values5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.

High Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the temperature above which the densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer values5% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.

L2 Override ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the temperature value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on theoverride code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value issubstituted.


L1 at 4mA * ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV ofHoneywell Smart Transmitters.

L1 at 20mA * ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt, or URVof Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

L1 Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combomodule. The process variable (I.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before beingsent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.


2.9.4. Prover Temperature Settings

Inlet Outlet

Low Limit ___________ ___________Enter the temperature below which the prover low alarm activates. Transducer values 5%below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.

High Limit ___________ ___________Enter the temperature above which the prover high alarm activates Transducer values 5%above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.

L2 Override ___________ ___________Enter the temperature value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on theoverride code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value issubstituted.

L2 Override Code ___________ ___________Enter the Override Code strategy: 0=Never use override code, 1=Always use override code,2=Use override code on transmitter failure, 3=On transmitter failures use last hour's average.

Meter DensityTemperature Setup via theRandom Access Method -To access these settings, inthe Program Mode press[Density] [Temp] [Enter].

INFO - The DensityTemperature sensor is usedto compensate fortemperature expansioneffects which effect theperiodic time of oscillationof the densitometer. It isalso used when desired tocalculate the density of theliquid to referencetemperature using API2540; Table 23, 23A or 23B.

Note:


Prover Temperature Setupvia the Random AccessMethod - Setup entriesrequire that you be in theProgram Mode. In theDisplay Mode press the[Prog] key. The ProgramLED will glow green and the‘Select Group Entry ’screen will appear. Thenpress [Prove] [Temp][Enter] or [Temp] [Prove][Enter] . Use [] / [] keysto scroll.



Inlet Outlet

L1 @ 4mA* ___________ ___________Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV ofHoneywell Smart Transmitters.

L1 @ 20mA* ___________ ___________Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt, or URV ofHoneywell Smart Transmitters.

L1 Damping Code ___________ ___________This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module.The process variable (I.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flowcomputer. The time constant used depends on this entry.

For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec, 1=0.3 sec, 2=0.7 sec,3=1.5 sec, 4=3.1 sec, 5=6.3 sec, 6=12.7 sec, 7-25.5 sec, 8=51.5 sec, 9=102.5 sec.

2.9.5. Prover Density Temperature Settings

Low Limit ___________ ___________Enter the temperature below which the prover low alarm activates. Transducer values 5% belowthis entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.

High Limit ___________ ___________Enter the temperature above which the prover high alarm activates. Transducer values 5% abovethis entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.

L2 Override ___________ ___________Enter the temperature value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on theoverride code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value issubstituted.


L1 at 4mA* ___________ ___________Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV ofHoneywell Smart Transmitters.

L1 at 20mA* ___________ ___________Enter the temperature engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt, or URV ofHoneywell Smart Transmitters.

L1 Damping Code ___________ ___________This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module.The process variable (I.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flowcomputer. The time constant used depends on this entry.

For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec, 1=0.3 sec, 2=0.7 sec,3=1.5 sec, 4=3.1 sec, 5=6.3 sec, 6=12.7 sec, 7-25.5 sec, 8=51.5 sec, 9=102.5 sec.

INFO - Characters in ’ ’refer to password levels.




2.10. Configuring Meter Pressure

2.10.1. Accessing the Pressure Setup SubmenuApplying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry ’screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to thefollowing will be displayed:

Use the []/[] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Pressure Setup ’and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.10.2. Meter Pressure Settings


Low Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the pressure below which the flowmeter low alarm activates. Transducer values 5%below this entry fail to low.

High Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the pressure above which the flowmeter high alarm activates. Transducer values 5%above this entry fail to high.

L2 Override ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the pressure value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on theoverride code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value issubstituted.


L1 at 4mA * ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the pressure engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV ofHoneywell Smart Transmitters.

L1 at 20mA * ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the pressure engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts, or URVof Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

L1 Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combomodule. The process variable (I.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent tothe flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.

For Differential Pressure/Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec,1=0.16 sec, 2= 0.32 sec, 3=0.48 sec, 4=1.00 sec, 5=2.00 sec, 6=4.00 sec, 7=8.00 sec,8=16.00 sec, 9=32.00 sec.



Meter Pressure Setup viathe Random AccessMethod - Setup entriesrequire that you be in theProgram Mode. In theDisplay Mode press the[Prog] key. The ProgramLED will glow green and the‘Select Group Entry ’screen will appear. Thenpress [Press] [Enter] , or[Press] [Meter] [ n] [Enter]or [Meter] [ n] [Press][Enter] (n = Meter Run # 1,2, 3 or 4). Use [] / []keys to scroll.



2.10.3. Meter Density Pressure Settings


Low Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the pressure below which the densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer values 5%below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.

High Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the pressure above which the densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer values 5%above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.

L2 Override ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the pressure value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the overridecode. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.


L1 at 4mA* ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV ofHoneywell Smart Transmitters.

L1 at 20mA* ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt, or URV ofHoneywell Smart Transmitters.

L1 Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module.The process variable (I.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flowcomputer. The time constant used depends on this entry.

For Differential Pressure/Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code: 0=0 sec,1=0.16 sec, 2= 0.32 sec, 3=0.48 sec, 4=1.00 sec, 5=2.00 sec, 6=4.00 sec, 7=8.00 sec, 8=16.00sec, 9=32.00 sec.

2.10.4. Prover Pressure Settings

Inlet Outlet

Low Limit ___________ ___________Enter the pressure below which the prover low alarm activates. Transducer values 5% below thisentry activate the transducer fail low alarm.

High Limit ___________ ___________Enter the pressure above which the prover high alarm activates Transducer values 5% above thisentry activate the transducer fail high alarm.

L2 Override ___________ ___________Enter the pressure value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the overridecode. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.




Meter Density PressureSetup via the RandomAccess Method - To accessthese settings, in theProgram Mode press[Density] [Press] [Enter].

INFO - The Density Pressuresensor is used tocompensate for pressureeffects which effect theperiodic time of oscillation ofthe densitometer. It is alsoused when desired tocalculate the density of theliquid at the densitometer toequilibrium pressure usingAPI 2540 MPMS 11.2.1 or11.2.2.

Note:


Prover Pressure Setup viathe Random AccessMethod - Setup entriesrequire that you be in theProgram Mode. In theDisplay Mode press the[Prog] key. The ProgramLED will glow green and the‘Select Group Entry’ screenwill appear. Then press[Prove] [Press] [Enter] or[Press] [Prove] [Enter].



L1 at 4mA ___________ ___________Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or LRV ofHoneywell Smart Transmitters.

L1 at 20mA* ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt, or URV ofHoneywell Smart Transmitters.

L1 Damping Code ___________ ___________This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module.The process variable (I.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flowcomputer. The time constant used depends on this entry.


L1 Plenum Pressure at 4mA ___________Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt or LRV of Honeywell SmartTransmitters. The plenum pressure applies only to Brooks compact provers.

L1 Plenum Pressure at 20mA ___________Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts or URV of Honeywell SmartTransmitters. The plenum pressure applies only to Brooks compact provers.

L1 Damping Code ___________This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module.The process variable (I.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flowcomputer. The time constant used depends on this entry.




2.10.5. Prover Density Pressure Settings

Inlet Outlet

Low Limit ___________ ___________Enter the pressure below which the prover densitometer low alarm activates. Transducer values5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.

High Limit ___________ ___________Enter the pressure above which the prover densitometer high alarm activates. Transducer values5% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.

L2 Override ___________ ___________Enter the pressure value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the overridecode. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is substituted.


L1 at 4mA* ___________ ___________Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt or LRV ofHoneywell Smart Transmitters.

L1 at 20mA* ___________ ___________Enter the pressure engineering units that the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5volt or URV ofHoneywell Smart Transmitters.

L1 Damping Code ___________ ___________This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an H Type combo module.The process variable (I.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to the flowcomputer. The time constant used depends on this entry.




Prover Density PressureSetup via the RandomAccess Method - To accessthese settings, in theProgram Mode press[Prove] [Density] [Press][Enter].

INFO - The Density Pressuresensor is used tocompensate for pressureeffects which effect theperiodic time of oscillation ofthe densitometer. It is alsoused when desired tocalculate the density of theliquid at the densitometer toequilibrium pressure usingAPI 2540 MPMS 11.2.1 or11.2.2.

Note:




2.11. Configuring Meter Specific Gravity / APIDensity

2.11.1. Accessing the Gravity/Density Setup SubmenuApplying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry ’screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to thefollowing will be displayed:

Use the []/[] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Grav/DensitySetup ’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.11.2. Meter Specific Gravity / Density Settings

Specific Gravity, API or Density


L1A Cor Factor ________ ________ ________ ________ ________These entries apply if an analog gravitometer or densitometer is specified during the 'ConfigMeter Run ' in 'Misc. Setup '. They are not available when using API or Specific Gravitygravitometers. Enter the Pycnometer Density correction factor (Limit: 0.8 to 1.2). (Usually veryclose to 1.0000).

Low Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the gravity/density below which the prover densitometer low alarm activates. Transducervalues 5% below this entry activate the transducer fail low alarm.

High Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the gravity/density above which the prover densitometer high alarm activates.Transducer values 5% above this entry activate the transducer fail high alarm.

L2 Override ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the gravity/density value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending onthe override code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value issubstituted.

L2 Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________Enter the Override Code strategy: 0=Never use override code, 1=Always use override code,2=Use override code on transmitter failure, 3=On transmitter failures use last hour's average,4=On transmitter failure use Station transducer value, 5=On transmitter failure use absolutevalue of override SG/API of the running product.

L1 at 4 mA ________ ________ ________ ________ ________These entries apply if an analog gravitometer or densitometer is specified during the 'ConfigMeter Run ' in 'Misc. Setup '. Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, orLRV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.





L1 at 20 mA ________ ________ ________ ________ ________These entries apply if an analog gravitometer or densitometer is specified during the 'ConfigMeter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts, orURV of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.

Digital Densitometers

The following entries are required if a digital densitometer is specified duringthe 'Config Meter Run' in the 'Misc. Setup' menu. There are three selectionswhich refer to digital densitometers: 4 = Solartron, 5 = Sarasota, 6 = UGC. (L1Password Level required, except for the Correction Factor.)

Solartron Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4 Station

Correction Factor A________ ________ ________ ________ ________Pycnometer Density correction factor (usually very close to 1.0000). An A and B factor areprovided to cover differing products (limit: 0.8 to 1.2). Meter Station only applies Factor A.

Correction Factor B________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K0 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K1 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K2 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K18 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K19 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K20A ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K20B ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K21A ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K21B ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

KR ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

KJ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Sarasota Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4 Station

Correction Factor A________ ________ ________ ________ ________Pycnometer Density correction factor (usually very close to 1.0000). An A and B factor areprovided to cover differing products (limit: 0.8 to 1.2).


D0 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

T0 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Tcoef ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Tcal ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Pcoef ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Pcal ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Meter SpecificGravity/Density Setup viathe Random AccessMethod - Setup entriesrequire that you be in theProgram Mode. In theDisplay Mode press the[Prog] key. The ProgramLED will glow green and the‘Select Group Entry’ screenwill appear. Then enter thekey press sequence thatcorresponds to the optionsyou want to configure:Specific Gravity/API:To access these settings,press [S.G./API] [Enter] or[S.G./API] [Meter] [n][Enter] or [Meter] [n][S.G./API] [Enter].Density:To access these settings,press [Density] [Enter] or[Density] [Meter] [n][Enter] or [Meter] [n][Density] [Enter].Digital Densitometers:To access these settings,press [Factor] [Density][Meter] [n] [Enter] or[Density] [Factor] [Meter][n] [Enter].(“n” represents the meter run# 1, 2, 3 or 4).Note: Digital densitometerscan only be configured viathe Random Access Method.

INFO - Densitometerconstants are usually on acalibration certificatesupplied by the densitometermanufacturer. Usually theyare based on SI or metricunits. For US customaryapplications you must ensurethat the constants enteredare based on gr/cc, °F andPSIG. Constants are alwaysdisplayed using scientificnotation; e.g.:K0=-1.490205E+00 (gr/cc)To enter K0, press [Clear]and press [-1.490205][Alpha Shift] [E] [+00][Enter].



UGC Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4 Station

Correction Factor A________ ________ ________ ________ ________Pycnometer Density correction factor (usually very close to 1.0000). An A and B factor areprovided to cover differing products (limit: 0.8 to 1.2).


K0 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K1 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

K2 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

TC ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kt1 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kt2 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kt3 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Pc ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kp1 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kp2 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Kp3 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________



Digital Densitometer Setupvia the Random AccessMethod - To access thesesettings, in the ProgramMode press [Factor][Density] [Meter] [n][Enter] or [Density][Factor] [Meter] [n] [Enter](n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or4).



2.12. Configuring PID Control Outputs

2.12.1. Accessing the PID Control Setup SubmenuApplying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry ’screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to thefollowing will be displayed:

Use the []/[] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘PID ControlSetup ’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.12.2. PID Control Output Settings


Operating Mode

Manual Valve (Y/N) _______ _______ _______ _______Enter [Y] to adjust the valve open % and adjust using the []/[] keys. Enter [N] to changeto AUTO mode.

Local Set.Pt (Y/N) _______ _______ _______ _______Enter [Y] to use a local set point and adjust using the []/[] keys. Enter [N] for REMOTEset point mode.

Sec Set.Pt _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the value in engineering units for the set point of the secondary variable. The primaryvariable will be the controlled variable until the secondary variable reaches this set point. Thesecondary variable will not be allowed to drop below or rise above this set point, depending onthe "Error Select" entry in the ‘Config PID’ menu.

Tuning Adjustments

L1 Primary Gain _______ _______ _______ _______Enter a value between 0.01 to 99.99 for the Primary Gain Factor (Gain=1/Proportional Band).

L1 Pri. Rpts/Min _______ _______ _______ _______Enter a value between 0.0 and 40.00 for the Primary Integral Factor (Rpts/Min=1/IntegralFactor the reciprocal of the reset period).

L1 Sec. Gain _______ _______ _______ _______Enter a value between 0.01 to 99.99 for the Secondary Gain Factor (Gain=1/ProportionalBand).

The actual controller gain factor used when controlling the secondary variable is the productof this entry and the 'Primary Gain Factor'. Tune the primary control variable first and then usethis entry to adjust for stable control of the secondary variable.



PID Control Output Setupvia the Random AccessMethod - Setup entriesrequire that you be in theProgram Mode. In theDisplay Mode press the[Prog] key. The ProgramLED will glow green and the‘Select Group Entry ’screen will appear. Thenpress [Control] [ n] [Enter](n = PID Control Loop # 1,2, 3 or 4). Use [] / []keys to scroll.




L1 Sec. Rpts/Min _______ _______ _______ _______Enter a value between 0.0 and 40.00 for the Secondary Integral Factor (Rpts/Min=1/IntegralFactor ð the reciprocal of the reset period).

L1 Deadband % _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the dead band percent range. PID Control will only compensate for setpoint deviations out ofthis range. The control output will not change as long as the process input and the setpoint error(deviation) is within this dead band percentage limit range.

L1 Start Up Ramp _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the maximum percentage to which the valve movement is limited per 500 msec at start-up.The control output is clamped at 0% until the 1st PID Permissive (PID #1-#4 ð database points1722-1725) is set true. The control output % is then allowed to increase at the start-up ramp rate.

L1 Shutdown Ramp _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the maximum percentage to which the valve movement is limited per 500 msec at shutdown.When the 1st PID Permissive is lost, the control output will ramp-down towards 0% at theshutdown ramp rate.

During the ramp-down phase, a 2nd PID Permissive (PID #1-#4 ð database points 1752-1755) isused to provide a “ramp hold” function. If this 2nd permissive is true, 100 msec before entering theramp-down phase, the control output % will ramp-down and be held at the minimum ramp-downlimit % (see the following entry) until it goes false. The control output will then immediately go to0% (see sidebar).

L1 Min Output % _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the minimum percentage that the control output will be allowed to ramp down to. In manycases, it is important to deliver a precise amount of product. This requires that the control outputbe ramped to some minimum % and held there until the required delivery is complete. The controloutput is then immediately set to 0%.

Remote Setpoint

L1 Low Limit _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the engineering unit value below which the primary setpoint variable is not allowed to dropwhile in the remote setpoint mode.

L1 High Limit _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the engineering unit value above which the primary setpoint variable is not allowed to risewhile in the remote setpoint mode.

L1 S.P. at 4mA _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the engineering unit value of the remote setpoint at 4 mA (1 volt) input. You must set thisand the following entry even if you do not intend to use a remote setpoint. They are used todetermine the scaling of the primary controlled variable.

L1 S.P. at 20mA _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the engineering unit value of the remote setpoint at 20mA (5 volt) input. You must set thisand the previous entry even if you do not intend to use a remote setpoint. They are used todetermine the scaling of the primary controlled variable, which is usually 2 times the normaloperating setpoint setting.



PID Startup, Stop andShutdown RampCommand Points - Thesehave been added to eliminatethe need to manipulate thePID permissives directly.Using these command pointsgreatly simplifies operation ofthe PID ramping functions.(See database points 1727-1730, 1788-1791, 1792-1795respectively.)



Secondary Variable

L1 Zero Value _______ _______ _______ _______If a secondary controlled variable is used, enter the value in engineering units of the variable whichwill represent zero.

L1 F.S. Value _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the value in engineering units of the secondary variable at controller full scale, which isusually 2 times the normal operating setpoint setting.



2.13. Configuring Provers

2.13.1. Accessing the Prover Setup SubmenuApplying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry ’screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to thefollowing will be displayed:

Use the []/[] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Prover Setup ’ andpress [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.13.2. Prover Settings

L2 # of Runs to Average _______________Enter the number of consecutive runs required to be considered a complete prove sequenceThis number must be between 2 and 10.

L2 Maximum # Runs _______________Enter the maximum number of runs that will be attempted to achieve a complete provesequence. This number must be between 2 and 99.

L1 Prover Type _______________Enter the type of prover in use: 0=Unidirectional Pipe Prover, 1=Bi-directional Pipe Prover,2=Unidirectional Compact Prover, 3=Bi-directional Small Volume Prover, 4=Master Meter,5=2 Series Bi-directional Pipe Prover.

Select the Unidirectional Compact [2] if you are using a Brooks Compact Prover.

Select the Master Meter Method to compare meter 1, 2 or 3 against the master meter. Meter#4 is always the master meter.

For Double Chronometry Proving use type 2 or 3.

L2 Pv Volume _______________This entry does not apply when the prover type selected is a Uni-Compact. Enter the waterdraw volume of the prover at base temperature and pressure.

Certain models of compact provers have different water draws, depending on whether themeters are upstream or downstream. This entry represents the “round-trip” volume for bi-directional provers and the downstream volume for compact provers. When using the MasterMeter Method, enter the minimum volume that must flow through the master meter (Meter #4)for each prove run.

# Passes to Avg _______________This entry applies to Unidirectional and Bi-directional compact provers only. Enter the numberof single passes that will be averaged to make each run when using the pulse interpolationmethod. Valid entries are 1 through 25. A pass is round trip when using a bi-directional prover.



Prover Setup via theRandom Access Method -Setup entries require thatyou be in the ProgramMode. In the Display Modepress the [Prog] key. TheProgram LED will glowgreen and the ‘SelectGroup Entry ’ screen willappear. Then press [Prove][Setup] [Enter] and use[] / [] keys to scroll.



Exp. Coeff _______________This entry applies to unidirectional compact provers only (except Brooks SVP see followingsetting). Enter the squared coefficient of thermal expansion for any switch rod components whichmay affect the water draw volume of the compact prover. This Thermal Expansion Coefficient isused to calculate the CTSP factor for the compact prover:

q For US Units: Carbon Steel = 0.0000124; Stainless Steel = 0.0000177.q For Metric Units: Carbon Steel = 0.0000223; Stainless Steel = 0.0000319.

Coef Invar _______________This entry applies to Brooks Compact Provers only. This prover uses an invar rod to separate theoptical detector switches. The rod has a coefficient of 0.0000008 per °F (US units) or 0.0000014per °C (metric units).

Plenum Con _______________This entry applies to Brooks Compact Provers only. Enter the Nitrogen Spring Plenum PressureConstant for used to calculate the plenum pressure needed to operate a the Brooks CompactProver. This pressure is related to the prover line pressure at the time of proving:

Plenum Pressure = (Line Pressure / Plenum Constant) + 60 Psig

The plenum constant depends on the size of the Brooks Compact Prover. Valid values are:

SIZE PLENUM CONSTANT SIZE PLENUM CONSTANT

8-inch 3.50 18-inch 5.0012-inch Mini 3.20 24-inch 5.88

12-inch Standard 3.20 Larger Refer to Brooks

Deadband % _______________This entry applies to Brooks Compact Provers only. Enter the Plenum Pressure Deadband %. TheBrooks Compact Prover requires that the plenum pressure be maintained within certain limits. Theflow computer calculates the correct plenum pressure at the beginning of each prove sequenceand will charge or vent nitrogen until the measured plenum pressure is within the specifieddeadband %.

L1 Up Volume _______________This entry applies to compact provers only. Enter the upstream water draw volume at basetemperature and pressure, if applicable.

Down Vol _______________This entry applies to compact provers only. Enter the downstream water draw volume at basetemperature and pressure, if applicable.

OverTravel _______________This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the estimated amount of flow that thesphere or piston displaces after activating the first detector switch, multiplied by 1.25.

L2 Inactive Sec _______________Enter the time in seconds before the prove is aborted due to prover inactivity. Make sure you allowenough time for the sphere or piston to travel between detector switches at the lowest flow rateexpected. When using the Master Meter Method, allow enough time for the amount of flow to passthrough the master meter at the lowest expected flow rate.

L1 Dia. Inch/mm _______________This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the internal diameter of the prover tubein inches or mm.

L1 Wall Inch/mm _______________This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the wall thickness of the prover tube,which is used to calculate the CPSP factor





L1 Elast _______________This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the Prover Tube Modulus ofElasticity used to calculate the CPSP factor.

For US Units: Mild Steel = 3.0E7; Stainless Steel = 2.8E7 to 2.9E7. For Metric Units: 2.07E8 or 1.93E8 to 2.0E8.

L1 Cubic Exp _______________This entry is not applicable to Compact Provers and Master Meter proving. Enter the ProverTube Cubical Coefficient of Thermal Expansion for full sized pipe provers, used to calculatethe CTSP factor.

For US Units: Mild Steel = 0.0000186; Stainless Steel = 0.0000265. For Metric Units: Mild Steel = 0.0000335; Stainless Steel = 0.00000477.

L1 Base PSIG _______________This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the atmospheric pressure in Psigor kPag at which the prover was water drawn.

L1 Base Deg.F/C _______________This entry is not applicable to Master Meter proving. Enter the Base Temperature in °F or °Cat which the prover was water drawn. This entry is used to calculate CTSP.

L2 Stability Sc _______________Enter the Stability Check Sample Time in seconds, used to calculate the rate of change oftemperature and flow rate at the prover or master meter. The prove sequence will not startuntil the temperature and flow rate are stable.

L2 Sample Dev _______________Enter the temperature change allowed during the stability sample time (see previous entry).The change in temperature per sample period must be less than this value for thetemperature to be considered stable enough to start a prove.

L2 Delt Flow _______________Enter the flow rate change allowed during the stability sample time (see previous two entries).The change in flow rate per sample period must be less than this value before the flow rate isconsidered to be stable enough to start a prove.

L2 Temp Devia _______________Enter the prover-to-meter temperature range allowable after the temperature and flow ratehave stabilized. The temperature at the meter and the prover must be within this limit or theprove sequence attempt will be aborted.

L2 MF Repeatability ? _______________Enter for the run repeatability calculation based on: 0= run counts, 1= run calculated meterfactor. Run counts repeatability is a more stringent test but may be difficult to achieve due tochanging temperature and pressure during the prove sequence. Calculating repeatabilitybased upon the calculated meter factor takes into account variations in temperature andpressure, and may be easier to achieve.

L2 Run Devia % _______________Enter the maximum allowable percentage deviation between run counts or run meter factors(depending on selection of previous entry). The deviation is calculated by comparing thehigh/low meter counts or meter factors based on their low point, as follows:

Deviation = 100 (High - Low) / Low Point

This deviation is always calculated using the meter factor when the Master Meter Method ofproving is selected.

Prover Setup via theRandom Access Method -Setup entries require thatyou be in the ProgramMode. In the Display Modepress the [Prog] key. TheProgram LED will glowgreen and the ‘SelectGroup Entry ’ screen willappear. Then press Prove][Setup] [Enter] and use[] / [] keys to scroll.



L2 MF Devia % _______________The prove meter factor (just calculated) is compared against the current meter factor and must bewithin this percentage range to be accepted as a valid meter factor.

L2 Auto Implement MF? _______________Enter [Y] to automatically implement the new meter factor and store in the appropriate product file.Enter [N] to select not to automatically implement the meter factor determined from the prove.

L2 Retroactive MF ? _______________If you selected to auto-implement the meter factor for the previous entry, enter [Y] to retroactivelyapply the Meter Factor from the beginning of the batch. The old meter factor will be backcalculated out of the current batch and daily totals. The batch and daily totals will be recalculatedusing the new meter factor. Enter [N] to have the Meter Factor applied from this point on.

Flow Change % _______________This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the Auto-Prove Flow Rate ChangePercent Threshold. The Flow Rate Percent Change Flag will be set if the current flow rate differsfrom the last meter proving flow rate by more than this percent (i.e., a request for an auto-provesequence will be flagged if the net/mass flow rate differs from the last proved rate by more thanthis percent, and remains outside this limit for the flow rate change period). A request for anautomatic prove will only be made if both the Percent Change Flag and the Minimum Flow ChangeFlag are set (see following entry).

Flow Change _______________This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the Minimum Flow Rate ChangeThreshold for automatic proving. The Minimum Flow Change Flag will be set if the current flowrate differs from the last meter proving flow rate by more than this amount. A request for anautomatic prove will be made if both the Percent Change Flag and the Minimum Flow Change Flagare set (see previous entry). This entry eliminates unnecessary proves that would occur at low flowrates where the percentage change threshold would be a very small flow rate change.

F Stable Min _______________This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the Flow Rate Stable Period in minutes,for auto-proving. A change in flow rate must be sustained for at least this period of time before anauto-prove sequence will be attempted.

Mtr Down Hr _______________This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the Meter Shut-in Period in hours, forauto-proving. The need for an auto-prove will be flagged if a flowmeter is shut-in for more than thisperiod of time.

Startup Pv _______________This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the startup flow for auto-proving. This isthe amount of flow which must occur after startup before an auto-prove is attempted, after a meterhas been shut-in for more than the Meter Shut-in Period (see previous entry).

Max. Flow _______________This entry does not apply to Master Meter proving. Enter the Maximum Flow between Proves. Thisentry represents the maximum amount of flow that can occur before a meter will be flagged for anauto-prove sequence, if the flow remains stable and the meter is not shut-in





2.14. Configuring Products

2.14.1. Accessing the Product Setup SubmenuApplying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry ’screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to thefollowing will be displayed:

Use the []/[] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Product Setup ’and press [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.14.2. Product Settings

Product #1

L1 Name _______________Enter the name of the product (up to 8 alphanumeric characters), right justified.

L1 Table Select _______________Enter the number that corresponds to the API or GPA table to use for the product:

0 = API 2540 Table 24A (US units) / Table 54A (metric units).1 = API 2540 Table 24B (US units) / Table 54B (metric units).2 = Table 24C (US units) / Table 54C (metric units).3 = GPA TP16 (US units) / TP16M (metric units).4 = Mass Calculation5 = Propylene API 11.3.3.2 9US units) / 11.3.3.2M (metric units).6 = E/P Mix.7 = P/P Mix.8 = Ethylene IUPAC9 = Ethylene NIST 104510 = Ethylene API 2565/11.3.2.11 = Carbon Dioxide CO2PAC12 = Table 24 - 1952 Edition (US units) / Table 54 - 1952 Edition (metric units)13 = ASTM D1550/155114 = ASTM D1555

L2 Override API _______________This entry applies only to US units (Revision 20). It will appear depending on which table isselected above. Enter the API Gravity at reference conditions. It is used to calculate theVolume Correction Factor (VCF) and the Pressure Correction Factor (Cpl). The flow computerwill accept any positive override value and use it as the API in calculations. The overridegravity can also be entered as specific gravity (see next entry).

To use the live measured density or gravity value (obtained from a densitometer/gravitometer)in the equations, enter any minus number. The flow computer will then correct the signal formthe densitometer or gravitometer to 60°F, if required (this may be flowing at flowing orreference conditions - see Meter Run I/O Point Configuration).

Should the gravitometer fail, the flow computer can be made to use the absolute value of theAPI Gravity Override. If the override code in Grav/Density Setup is set to ‘5=On transmitterfailure’, use absolute value of override SG/API for this product.



Product Setup via theRandom Access Method -Setup entries require thatyou be in the ProgramMode. In the Display Modepress the [Prog] key. TheProgram LED will glowgreen and the ‘SelectGroup Entry ’ screen willappear. Then press[Product] [Enter] or[Product] [ n] [Enter] (n =Product # 1 through 16).Use [] / [] keys to scroll.



L2 Override SG _______________This entry applies only to US units (Revision 20). It will appear depending on which table isselected above. You may enter an override gravity as either API or SG units when measuringcrude oil or generalized refined products. The Computer will accept any positive override value anduse it in the calculations.

To use the live measured density or gravity value (obtained from a densitometer/gravitometer) inthe equations, enter any minus number. The flow computer will then correct the signal form thedensitometer or gravitometer to 60°F, if required (this may be flowing at flowing or referenceconditions - see Meter Run I/O Point Configuration).

Should the gravitometer fail, the flow computer can be made to use the absolute value of the APIGravity Override. If the override code in Grav/Density Setup is set to ‘5=On transmitter failure’, useabsolute value of override SG/API for this product.

L2 Override Ref Dens _______________This entry applies only to metric units (Revision 24) depending on which table is selected above.This is the density at reference conditions (kg/m3 at reference temperature). It is used to calculatethe volume correction factor VCF and the pressure correction factor Cpl.

Using a Live Densitometer Signal - Entering a value with a minus sign ahead of it causes theflow computer to use the live density signal to calculate the density at reference temperature.

Using the Product Override if the Densitometer Fails - Selecting 'fail code 5' at thedensitometer setup menu will cause the flow computer to stop using the live density signal shouldit fail, and substitute the absolute value of the density override entry as the reference density. E.g.:Entering -750 causes the computer to ignore the override and use the live densitometer signal aslong as the transducer is OK. A reference density of 750 kg/m3 will be used if the densitometershould fail.

L2 Ref Temperature _______________This entry applies only to metric units (Revision 24 - Table 54C). Enter the base or referencetemperature at which net corrected volumes represent equivalent volumes of liquid.

AlphaAlpha Coefficient. This entry applies depending on which table is selected above. API 2540,Tables 24C/54C equations require you to enter a value for 'alpha'. This alpha value is used tocalculate the volume correction factor 'VCF'. Enter the thermal expansion coefficient at referencetemperature as 0.000xxxx.

F Fact _______________F Factor Override. This entry applies depending on which table is selected above. Enter 0.0 ifyou wish the flow computer to use API 11.2.1 or 11.2.2 to calculate the compressibility factor 'F'used in the Cpl equation. Enter the compressibility factor 'F' if you wish to override the APIcalculated value.

Vapor Pressure _______________Vapour Pressure Psia (abs) @ 100°°F (37.8°°C). This entry applies only when GPA TP16 isentered for table select. The GPA TP16 standard specifies that the equilibrium pressure of theflowing fluid be calculated according to GPA TP15. Two equations are specified. The firstdesigned for mainly pure products such as propanes, butanes and natural gasolines requires noinput data other than the temperature at flowing conditions and the specific gravity at referenceconditions. The second improved correlation is suitable for use with more varied NGL mixes wheredifferent product mixes could have the same specific gravity but different equilibrium pressures. Ifyou wish to use the improved second method enter the vapor pressure at 100°F or 37.8°C. Enter aminus number to use the normal TP15 method for propanes, butanes and natural gasolines.



INFO - The following data,rounded to 4 digits, is fromGPA 2145-92 and TP16:Product S.G. kg/m3

Ethane .3562 355.85Propane .5070 506.90HD5 .5010 500.50

.5050 504.50

.5100 509.50Propylene .5228* 522.28*Iso Butane .5629 562.34

.5650 564.44n-Butane .5840 583.42

.5850 584.42Iso Pentane .6247 624.08n-Pentane .6311 630.48n-Hexane .6638 663.14Natural Gasolines

.6650 664.34n-Heptane .6882 687.52n-Octane .7070 706.30n-Nonane .7219 721.19n-Decane .7342 733.48

* Propylene figures arederived from API 11.3.3.2.

INFO - API 2540; Tables23A or 23B (US), or 53A or53B (metric); are alsoautomatically used whenapplicable.Tables 24A and 53A apply toGeneralized Crude Oils (SGrange: 1.076-.6110; Densrange: 1075-610.4).Tables 24B and 53B apply toGeneralized Products (SGrange: 1.076-.6535; Densrange: 1075-652.8).GPA TP16 and TP16M applyto LPG/NGL Products (SGrange: .637-.495 on Version20, and 636.4-494.5 onVersion 24 of the Omni.These calculation methodsuse API Chapter 11.2.1 or11.2.2, and 11.2.1M or11.2.2M to calculate thepressure correction factorCpl.



M.F. #1 M.F. #2 M.F. #3 M.F. #4

Meter Factors _______ _______ _______ _______Enter the meter factor to be used by this flowmeter whenever this product is flowing. Thisfactor will be automatically updated whenever a meter factor is changed due to a manualentry or an automatic implementation after a successful prove sequence.

Density Factor A/B _______________Density correction factor. Enter [0] to select Density Factor A to correct the densitometer.Enter [1] to select Density Factor B to correct the densitometer.

Product #2

Name _______________

Table Select _______________

Override API (Rev 20) _______________

Override SG (Rev 20) _______________

Override Ref Dens (Rev 24) _______________

Ref Temperature (Rev 24) _______________

Alpha

F Factor

Vapor PSIA (ABS) _______________

M.F. #1 M.F. #2 M.F. #3 M.F. #4

Meter Factors _______ _______ _______ _______

Density factor A/B _______________

Product #3

Name _______________

Table Select _______________

Override API (Rev 20) _______________

Override SG (Rev 20) _______________



Alpha

F Factor

Vapor PSIA (ABS) _______________

M.F. #1 M.F. #2 M.F. #3 M.F. #4

Meter Factors _______ _______ _______ _______


Product Setup via theRandom Access Method -Setup entries require thatyou be in the ProgramMode. In the Display Modepress the [Prog] key. TheProgram LED will glowgreen and the ‘SelectGroup Entry ’ screen willappear. Then press[Product] [Enter] or[Product] [ n] [Enter] (n =Product # 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7or 8). Use [] / [] keys toscroll.



Product #4

Name _______________

Table Select _______________

Override API (Rev 20) _______________

Override SG (Rev 20) _______________



Alpha

F Factor

Vapor PSIA (ABS) _______________

M.F. #1 M.F. #2 M.F. #3 M.F. #4

Meter Factors _______ _______ _______ _______


Product #5

Name _______________

Table Select _______________

Override API (Rev 20) _______________

Override SG (Rev 20) _______________



Alpha

F Factor

Vapor PSIA (ABS) _______________

M.F. #1 M.F. #2 M.F. #3 M.F. #4

Meter Factors _______ _______ _______ _______





Product #6

Name _______________

Table Select _______________

Override API (Rev 20) _______________

Override SG (Rev 20) _______________



Alpha

F Factor

Vapor PSIA (ABS) _______________

M.F. #1 M.F. #2 M.F. #3 M.F. #4

Meter Factors _______ _______ _______ _______


Product #7

Name _______________

Table Select _______________

Override API (Rev 20) _______________

Override SG (Rev 20) _______________



Alpha

F Factor

Vapor PSIA (ABS) _______________

M.F. #1 M.F. #2 M.F. #3 M.F. #4

Meter Factors _______ _______ _______ _______


Product Setup via theRandom Access Method -Setup entries require thatyou be in the ProgramMode. In the Display Modepress the [Prog] key. TheProgram LED will glowgreen and the ‘SelectGroup Entry ’ screen willappear. Then press[Product] [Enter] or[Product] [ n] [Enter] (n =Product # 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7or 8). Use [] / [] keys toscroll.



Product #8

Name _______________

Table Select _______________

Override API (Rev 20) _______________

Override SG (Rev 20) _______________



Alpha

F Factor

Vapor PSIA (ABS) _______________

M.F. #1 M.F. #2 M.F. #3 M.F. #4

Meter Factors _______ _______ _______ _______


Product #9

Name _______________

Table Select _______________

Override API (Rev 20) _______________

Override SG (Rev 20) _______________



Alpha

F Factor

Vapor PSIA (ABS) _______________

M.F. #1 M.F. #2 M.F. #3 M.F. #4

Meter Factors _______ _______ _______ _______





Product #10

Name _______________

Table Select _______________

Override API (Rev 20) _______________

Override SG (Rev 20) _______________



Alpha

F Factor

Vapor PSIA (ABS) _______________

M.F. #1 M.F. #2 M.F. #3 M.F. #4

Meter Factors _______ _______ _______ _______


Product #11

Name _______________

Table Select _______________

Override API (Rev 20) _______________

Override SG (Rev 20) _______________



Alpha

F Factor

Vapor PSIA (ABS) _______________

M.F. #1 M.F. #2 M.F. #3 M.F. #4

Meter Factors _______ _______ _______ _______




Product #12

Name _______________

Table Select _______________

Override API (Rev 20) _______________

Override SG (Rev 20) _______________



Alpha

F Factor

Vapor PSIA (ABS) _______________

M.F. #1 M.F. #2 M.F. #3 M.F. #4

Meter Factors _______ _______ _______ _______


Product #13

Name _______________

Table Select _______________

Override API (Rev 20) _______________

Override SG (Rev 20) _______________



Alpha

F Factor

Vapor PSIA (ABS) _______________

M.F. #1 M.F. #2 M.F. #3 M.F. #4

Meter Factors _______ _______ _______ _______




Product #14

Name _______________

Table Select _______________

Override API (Rev 20) _______________

Override SG (Rev 20) _______________



Alpha

F Factor

Vapor PSIA (ABS) _______________

M.F. #1 M.F. #2 M.F. #3 M.F. #4

Meter Factors _______ _______ _______ _______


Product #15

Name _______________

Table Select _______________

Override API (Rev 20) _______________

Override SG (Rev 20) _______________



Alpha

F Factor

Vapor PSIA (ABS) _______________

M.F. #1 M.F. #2 M.F. #3 M.F. #4

Meter Factors _______ _______ _______ _______




Product #16

Name _______________

Table Select _______________

Override API (Rev 20) _______________

Override SG (Rev 20) _______________



Alpha

F Factor

Vapor PSIA (ABS) _______________

M.F. #1 M.F. #2 M.F. #3 M.F. #4

Meter Factors _______ _______ _______ _______


2.15. Configuring BatchesNote: See Chapter 3 “Computer Batching Operations” in Volume 2 for

information on configuring your flow computer for batches.



2.16. Configuring Miscellaneous Factors

2.16.1. Accessing the Factor Setup SubmenuApplying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry ’screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to thefollowing will be displayed:

!

Use the []/[] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Factor Setup ’ andpress [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.16.2. Factor Settings

L1 Weight H2O _______________Weight of Water. Also known as absolute density of water. Weight of a barrel of water @60°F or 15°C, and 14.696 PSIA or 101.325 kPa(a). Used to convert from specific gravity unitsto mass. (From GPA 2145-92 = 8.3372 lbm/Gal. = 350.162 lbs/BBL). Note: This is the trueweight of water, NOT the conversion factor used to convert gr/cc to lb/bbl sometimes given as350.507. For metric versions (Revision 24), the default value is 999.012 kg/m3.

L1 Flow Avg Factor _______________The flow averaging factor is the number of calculation cycles used to smooth the displayedflow rate. A number 1-99 will be accepted. (A calculation cycle is 500msec).

Alarm Deadband % _______________Nuisance alarms can occur when input variables spend any amount of time near the high orlow alarm set points. These nuisance alarms can swamp the alarm log with useless alarmsleaving no room for real alarms. This entry sets a percentage limit based on the 'high alarm'entry. A variable must return within the high/low alarm limits by more than this amount beforethe alarm is cleared. E.g.: High limit is 100°F, Low limit is 20°F, Alarm deadband is set to 2percent. A transducer input which exceeded 100°F will set the 'high alarm'. The transducersignal must drop 2 percent below the high alarm setpoint (98°F) before the alarm will clear.

L1 Atmos PSIA (ABS) _______________Atmospheric Pressure in PSIA (ABS). This is used to convert flowing pressure readings inPsig to absolute pressure units Psia for US Units, and for the metric version in absolute unitsin conformance to pressure (metric) units selected.

Select Pressure UnitsThis entry is a global selection for all pressure variables within the flow computer:

1 Bar = 100 kPA, 1 kg/cm2 = 98.0665 kPA

Display resolution is as follows:

XX.X kPA, X.XXX Bar, X.XXX kg/cm2

L1 # Digits, 0=9, 1=8 _______________Roll All Totalizers. Totalizers within the computer can be rolled at 8 or 9 significant digits.Default value is 9 (0). This is a read-only entry. This entry can only be changed at the keypadof the flow computer.



Factor Setup via theRandom Access Method -Setup entries require thatyou be in the ProgramMode. In the Display Modepress the [Prog] key. TheProgram LED will glowgreen and the ‘SelectGroup Entry ’ screen willappear. Then press[[Factor] [Enter] , or[Factor] [Meter] [ n][Enter] , or [Meter] [ n][Factor] (n = Meter Run # 1,2, 3, or 4). Use [] / []keys to scroll.



Totalizer Decimal Place Resolution

The following are read-only entries that cannot be changed via OmniCom. Tochange totalizer resolution you must first 'Clear All Totals' in the 'PasswordMaintenance' menu from the front panel keypad of the flow computer. You willthen be given the opportunity to set the totalizing resolution. Valid decimalplace settings are: XX; X.X; X.XX; and X.XXX.

Dec Places Gross & Net _______________Decimal Places for Gross and Net Totalizer Resolution.

Decimal Places Mass _______________Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer Resolution.

Decimal Places for Correction Factors Appearing on Batch andProve Reports

The following two entries determine the number of decimal places for thefollowing factors: Ctlm, Ctlp, Cplm, Cplp, Ctsp, Cpsp, CCF. Meter Factor andDensity Pycnometer factor remain fixed at 4. For STRICT adherence to APIMPMS 12.2 (default) select 4 decimal places. This is the recommend selection.Selecting 5 decimal places causes the flow computer to perform the normal APIinternal rounding and truncating rules with the exception of the last round whichis to 5 places. Selecting 6 decimal places causes the flow computer to performno internal rounding and truncating and round the final result to 6 decimalplaces.

Dec Factor Batch Report _______________Enter the number of decimal places required for factors to be displayed on the batch report.

MF Decimal Batch Report _______________Enter the number of decimal placesrequired for the meter factor appearing on the batch report.

Dec Factor Prove Report _______________Enter the number of decimal places required for factors to be displayed on the prove report.

MF Decimal Prove Report _______________Enter the number of decimal places required for the meter factor appearing on the prove report.



2.17. Configuring Printers

2.17.1. Accessing the Printer Setup SubmenuApplying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry ’screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to thefollowing will be displayed:

Use the []/[] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Printer Setup ’ andpress [Enter] to access the submenu.

2.17.2. Printer Settings

L1 Computer ID _______________Appears on all reports. Enter up to 8 alphanumeric characters to identify the flow computer.

L1 Interval Min _______________Print Interval in Minutes. Enter the number of minutes between each interval report.Entering [0] will disable interval reports. The maximum allowed is 1440 minutes which willprovide one interval report per 24-hour period.

L1 Interval Start _______________Print Interval Start Time. Enter the start time from which the interval report timer is based(e.g.: Entering ‘01:00’ with a Print Interval of 120 minutes will provide an interval report everyodd hour only).

L1 Daily RPT Time _______________Daily Report Time. Enter the hour at which the daily report will print at the beginning of thecontract day (e.g.: 07:00).

L1 Disable Daily RPT? _______________Enter [Y] to disable the Daily Report (default is 'N'). This simply blocks the report fromprinting. Data will still be sent to the historical buffers (last 8) and archive if archive is setup.

L1 Daylight Start _______________Daylight Savings Time Start. Enter the Day/Month/Year that daylight savings time begins.

L1 Daylight End _______________Daylight Savings Time End. Enter the Day/Month/Year that daylight savings time ends.

L1 Clr Daily at Batch _______________Clear Daily at Batch. Enter [N] to provide 24 hour totals of all flow through the flowmeterregardless of what product is run. Select [Y] to clear the totalizers at the end of each batch.This would mean that the daily totalizers would not necessarily represent 24 hours of flow butthe amount of flow since the last batch end or the daily report



Printer Setup via theRandom Access Method -Setup entries require thatyou be in the ProgramMode. In the Display Modepress the [Prog] key. TheProgram LED will glowgreen and the ‘SelectGroup Entry ’ screen willappear. Then press [Print][Setup] [Enter] and use[] / [] keys to scroll.



L1 Auto Hourly Batch ? _______________Automatic Hourly Batch Select. Enter [Y] to automatically cause a batch end every hour on thehour. If customized reports are selected a batch end report will be printed. If default reports areselected no batch end report will be printed.

L1 Weekly Batch ? _______________Automatic Weekly Batch Select. Enter a number 1 through 7 to automatically print a batch endreport in addition to a daily report on a specific day of the week (0=No batch end, 1=Monday,2=Tuesday, etc.).

L1 Month Batch ? _______________Automatic Monthly Batch Select. Enter a number 1 through 31 to automatically print a batchend report in place of a daily report on a specific day of the month (0=No batch end).

L1 Print Priority _______________Enter [0] when the computer is connected to a dedicated printer. If several computers are sharinga common printer, one computer must be designated as the master and must be assigned thenumber 1. The remaining computers must each be assigned a different Print Priority numberbetween 2 and 12.

L1 Number Nulls _______________For slow printers without an input buffer, a number of null characterss can be sent after eachcarriage return or line feed. A number between 0-255 will be accepted. Set this to ‘0’ if your printersupports hardware handshaking and you have connected pin 20 of the printer connector toterminal 6 of the flow computer (see Chapter 3).

L1 Default Template ? _______________Use Default Report Templates? Y/N. Entering [Y] instructs the flow computer to use the defaultreport formats for Daily Batch End, Snapshot and Prover Reports. Enter [N] if you havedownloaded your own custom report templates using the OmniCom program.

L1 Condensed _______________Condensed Print Mode Control String. Certain default report templates exceed 80 columnswhen the computer is configured for 4 meter runs and a station. Enter the hexadecimal characterstring which will put the printer into the condensed print mode. Data must be in sets of 2characters (i.e., 05 not 5). Maximum 5 control characters.

L1 Uncondens _______________Cancel Condensed (Normal) Print Mode Control String. Enter the hexadecimal characterstring which when sent to the printer will cancel the condensed print mode. Data must be in setsof 2 characters (i.e., 05 not 5) Maximum 5 control characters

L1 Company Name _______________Two lines of the display allow entry of the Company Name. On each line enter a maximum of 19characters and press [Enter]. Both lines are concatenated and appear on all reports.

L1 Location _______________Two lines of the display allow entry of the station location Name. On each line enter a maximum of19 characters and press [Enter]. Both lines are concatenated and appear on all reports.


Common Printer ControlCodes -Epson, IBM & Compatible:Condensed Mode= OFCancel Condensed= 12OKI Data Models:Condensed Mode= IDCancel Condensed= IEHP Laser Jet II &Compatible:Condensed= 1B266B3253Cancel Cond= 1B266B3053



3. User-Programmable Functions

3.1. IntroductionThe computer performs many functions, displays and prints large amounts ofdata, but there are always some application-specific control functions,calculations or displays that cannot be anticipated.

The Omni Flow Computer incorporates several programmable features thatenable the user to easily customize the computer to fit a specific application.

o User Programmable Boolean Flags and Statementso User Programmable Variables and Statementso User Configurable Display Screenso User Customized Report Templates

The first three Items are explained here. The last item requires the use of theOmniCom PC configuration software that comes with the flow computer.

3.2. User Programmable Boolean Flags andStatements

3.2.1. What is a Boolean?A Boolean point is simply a single bit register within the computer (sometimescalled a flag) which has only two states, On or Off (True or False, 1 or 0). TheseBoolean flags or points are controlled and/or monitored by the flow computerand represent alarms, commands and status points. Each Boolean point isgiven an identifying number within the data base of the computer allowing thestate (On or Off) to be monitored or modified by assigning that Boolean point toa physical digital I/O point or accessing it via a communication port. Amaximum of 24 physical digital I/O points are available for monitoring limitswitches, status signals or controlling relays or lamps.

Chapter 3 User-Programmable Functions


Boolean points are numbered as follows:

1001 through 1024 Physical Digital I/O Points 1 through 241025 through 1088 Programmable Boolean Points (64 total)1089 through 1099 Programmable Pulse outputs (11 total)1100 through 1199 Meter Run #1 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)1200 through 1299 Meter Run #2 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)1300 through 1399 Meter Run #3 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)1400 through 1499 Meter Run #4 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)1500 through 1699 Scratchpad Storage for Results of Boolean Statements1700 through 1799 Command or Status Inputs1800 through 1899 Station Boolean Flags (Alarms, Status etc.)1900 through 1999* Prover Boolean Flags (Alarms, Status etc.)2100 through 2199 Meter Run #1 Totalizer Roll-over Flags2200 through 2299 Meter Run #2 Totalizer Roll-over Flags2300 through 2399 Meter Run #3 Totalizer Roll-over Flags2400 through 2499 Meter Run #4 Totalizer Roll-over Flags2100 through 2199 Meter Run #1 Totalizer Roll-over Flags2600 through 2623 Miscellaneous Station Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)2700 through 2759 Miscellaneous Boolean Command Points2800 through 2899 Station Totalizer Flags

Physical Digital I/O Points (1001 →→ 1024)

Each of the physical digital I/O points is assigned to a valid Boolean pointnumber as detailed above. Points 1700 through 1799 are command inputswhich are described later, all other point assignments indicate that the I/O pointis to be set up as an output point. Output points which are dedicated as flowaccumulator outputs can be set up for pulse widths ranging from 10 msec to100 sec in 10 msec increments. All other output point assignments haveassociated 'time ON delay' and 'time OFF delay' timers which are adjustablefrom 0.0 to 1000 sec in 100 msec increments.

Programmable Boolean Points (1025 →→ 1088)

There are 64 user flags or Boolean points are available and are controlled by 64Boolean statements or equations. These are provided to perform sequencingand control functions. Each statement or equation is evaluated every 100 msec.starting at point 1025 and ending at point 1088. The results of these Booleanstatements can then assigned to physical digital I/O points. There are norestrictions as to what Boolean points can be used in a Boolean statementincluding the results of other Boolean statements or the status of physical I/Opoints.

Programmable Accumulator Points (1089 →→ 1099)

There are 11 Programmable points that are used with Variable Points 7089through 7099 for programming pulse outputs for Digital I/O or Front PanelCounters.

INFO - The 4-digit ‘point’numbers referred to in thischapter are Modbus indexnumbers used to identifyeach variable (Boolean orother) within the Modbusdatabase.



One-Shot Boolean Points (1501 →→ 1650)

The 149 Boolean flags located between 1501 and 1650 are used to storetemporary data that has been received via the Modbus link or put there by aBoolean statement. These Boolean variables can be sent to a digital output orused in the Boolean statements described above.

Scratch Pad Boolean Points (1650 →→ 1699)

The 49 Boolean flags located between 1650 and 1699 can be use asmomentary commands. When set true they remain on for two seconds.

3.2.2. Sign (+, -) of Analog or Calculated Variables(6001 →→ 8999)

The sign of analog or calculated variables can also be used in a Booleanstatements by simply specifying the point number. The Boolean value of thevariable is 'true ' if it is positive and 'false' if it has a negative value.

3.2.3. Boolean Statements and FunctionsEach Boolean statement consists of up to 7 variables optionally preceded bythe Boolean 'NOT' function and separated by one of the Boolean functions'AND', 'OR', 'Exclusive OR' or 'EQUAL' . The following symbols are used torepresent the functions:

Function Symbol

NOT /AND &OR +

EX OR *EQUAL =

IF )GOTO 'G'MOVE :

COMPARE %

The '=' function allows a statement to be used to change the state of theBoolean point on the left of the equal sign (usually a command point).Evaluation precedence is left to right.



To program the Boolean points proceed as follows:

From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] and the following menuwill be displayed:

*** Misc. Setup ***Password Maint?(Y)_Check Modules ?(Y)Config Station ?(Y)Config Meter "n"Config Prove ? (Y)Config PID ? (Y)Config D/A Out "n"Front Panel CountersProgram Booleans ?Program Variables ?User Display ? "n"

Scroll down to 'Set Boolean ? (Y)' and enter [Y]. Assuming that no Booleansare as yet programmed, the display shows:

Boolean Point #10xx25: _26:27:

Note that the cursor is on the line labeled 25: At this point enter the Booleanequation that will cause Boolean point 1025 to be ON (TRUE).

For example, to turn Boolean 1025 ON whenever Boolean 1005 is OFF, ORwhenever 1006 is ON, enter [/1005+1006] (note the use of the '/' to indicate the'NOT' function).

Boolean Point #10XX25: /1005+100626: _27

Boolean 1025 could then be used in the statement following which definesBoolean 1026. For example, by including Boolean 1106 which indicates thatmeter #1 is being proved (see following page), Boolean 1026 will be ONwhenever 'Meter 1 is being proved' AND (1005 is NOT ON OR 1006 is ON).

Boolean Point #10xx25: /1005+100626: 1106&102527: _

Use the 'Up/Down' arrow keys to scroll though all 64 programmable Booleanpoints.

INFO - Points 1005 and 1006reflect the current status ofphysical I/O Points 05 and 06which could be inputsconnected to the outsideworld or outputs controllingrelays, etc.

TIP - Leave plenty of emptystatements betweenprogrammed ones. This willallow you to modify theexecution order of yourprogram if you need to later.



Remember that the Boolean statements are evaluated in order starting from1025 proceeding to 1088 . For maximum speed always ensure that statementsused in other statements are evaluated ahead of time by placing them in thecorrect order.

Example 1: Meter Failure Alarm for Two-Meter Run Application

Object: Using signals from 'flow sensing switches' inserted into the pipeline,provide an alarm output which activates whenever the signals from the flowswitches and flow meter signals differ, also provide a snapshot report by settingcommand point 1719.

How the hardware is configured:

Physical I/O points 02 and 03 are setup as inputs by assigning them to 1700(see the Command and Status Booleans on a later page). They are connectedto flow sensing switches on meter runs 1 and 2 respectively. The switchesactivate with flow.

Physical I/O point 03 is connected to a 'meter fail alarm bell'. The output isassigned to Programmable Boolean 1027. A 'delay ON' of 5 seconds is selectedto eliminate spurious alarms which would occur during startup and shutdown. A'delay OFF' of 5 seconds is selected to ensures that the alarm bell remains onfor at least 5 seconds.

The Booleans are programmed as follows:

Boolean Point #10xx25: 1105*100226: 1205*100327: 1719=1025+102628:

INFO - Use the Exclusive ORfunction ‘*’ to compare 2points. The result of anExclusive OR of 2 points istrue only if both points aredifferent states.

INFO - Booleans 1025, 1026and 1027 are only used as anexample here. Any unusedprogrammable Booleans canbe used for this function.

True if Meter #1 fails.

True if Meter #2 fails.

Request snapshot if eithermeter fails.

Notes:q Boolean Point 1025 is true

(Meter 1 failed) whenever'Meter 1 Active' (Point1105) differs from 'FlowDetected' Flow Switch 1(Point 02).

q Boolean Point 1026 is true(Meter 2 failed) whenever'Meter 2 Active' (Point1205) differs from 'FlowDetected' Flow Switch 2(Point 03).

q Boolean Point 1027 is true(Meter 1 OR 2 failed)whenever point 1025 OR0126 are true. TheBoolean Command Bit1719 is set when BooleanPoint 1027 is true.



Example 2: Automatic Run Switching for 4-Meter Run Application'

Object: To improve metering accuracy by automatically selecting the correctflow meter run to be active in a multi run application. Small turbines need to beprotected from over-speeding while for best accuracy larger turbines should bevalved off when the flow drops below their minimum rate. In the exampleshown, except when switching from one flow meter to the other, only one flowmeter run is active at one time. This is one example only. The number of runsopen for a given application at any flow rate obviously depends on the size ofthe flow meters used.

Switching is based on the station flow gross flow rate which is compared topreset switching thresholds entered by the user (See 'Meter Station Settings'in Chapter 2). Threshold Flags 1, 2 and 3 are set and reset according to theactual station flow rate.

The first task is identify the 4 zones and assign programmable Boolean pointsto them. This allows us to include them in further Boolean statements.

Zone 1 = NOT Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3Zone 2 = Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3Zone 3 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND NOT Flag3Zone 4 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND Flag 3

Fig. 3-1. Figure Showing Automatic Four-Meter Flow Zone Thresholds



As each statement can have only 3 terms in it we must pre-process some partof the equations. The term 'NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3' appears in Zone 1and 2 equations.

Now we assign valid point numbers to our statements and rewrite them the waythey will be input.

First one term needs to be pre-processed to simplify:

1025 = NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3 25: /1825&/1826

Next the flow Zones are defined:

Zone 1 = NOT Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3 26: /1824&1025Zone 2 = Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3 27: 1824&1025Zone 3 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3 28: 1824&1825&/1826Zone 4 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND Flag 3 29: 1824&1825&1826

The program thus far looks like:

Boolean Point #10xx25: /1825&/182626: /1824&102527: 1824&102528: 1824&1825&/182629: 1824&1825&1826

In our example each meter run valve (V1, V2, V3 and V4) fails closed,energizes to open. A limit switch mounted on each valve indicates the fullyopen position (SW1, SW2, SW3 and SW4).

/ Flag 2 & / Flag 3

Zone 1

Zone 2

Zone 3

Zone 4

Fig. 3-2. Figure Showing Four-Meter Run Valve Switching



3.2.4. How the Digital I/O Assignments are ConfiguredWe will use Physical I/O Points 11, 12, 13 and 14 to connect to valve limitswitches SW1, SW2, SW3 and SW4 respectively. The switches activate whenthe appropriate valve is fully open. The points are designated as inputs byassigning them to the dummy input Boolean Point 1700 (see the Command andStatus Booleans on a later page). Their data base point numbers are simplytheir I/O point number preceded by 10 (e.g.: I/O Point 11 = 1011).

Physical I/O points 15, 16, 17 and 18 are wired so as to open the meter runvalves V1, V2, V3 and V4. They will be assigned to the Boolean Flags 32 (Point1032) through 35 (Point 1035) which represent the required state of V1 throughV4 as explained below.

The Boolean equations are as follows:

V1 = (NOT SW2 AND NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 1

Valve #1 is opened when the flow is in Zone 1 and will remain open until at least1 of the other 3 valves is fully open.

Valves V2, V3 and V4 are programmed in a similar fashion.

V2 = (NOT SW1 AND NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 2V3 = (NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 3V4 = (NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2 AND NOT SW3) OR Zone 4

To simplify we pre-process the common terms. The term 'NOT SW3 AND NOTSW4' is used to determine V1 and V2. The term 'NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2' isused to determine V3 and V4.

Assigning the next valid point numbers to our statements and re-write them theway they will be input.

1030 = NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4 30: /1013&/10141031 = NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2 31: /1011&/1012

The final Equations to determined the state of V1, V2, V3 and V4 are as follows:

V1= NOT SW2 AND (NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 1 32: /1012&1030+1026V2 =NOT SW1 AND (NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 2 33: /1011&1030+1027V3= (NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2) AND NOT SW4 OR Zone 3 34: 1031&/1014+1028V4 =(NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2) AND NOT SW3 OR Zone 4 35: 1031&/1013+1029

The computer evaluates each expression from left to right, so the order of thevariables in the above statements is critical. The logic requires that the ORvariable comes last.



The final program consists of 11 statements:

Boolean Point #10xx25: /1825&/182626: /1824&102527: 1824&102528: 1824&1825&/182629: 1824&1825&182630: /1013&/101431: /1011&/101232: /1012&1030+102633: /1011&1030+102734: 1031&/1014+102835: 1031&/1013+1029

The only thing left to do now is assign Booleans 1032, 1033, 1034 and 1035 tothe appropriate digital I/O points which control V1, V2, V3 and V4. Here is asummary of all of the digital I/O as assigned:

PHYSICAL I/OPOINT

ASSIGNED TO

BOOLEANWIRED TO SYMBOL

11 1700 Valve 1 Fully Open Switch SW112 1700 Valve 2 Fully Open Switch SW213 1700 Valve 3 Fully Open Switch SW314 1700 Valve 4 Fully Open Switch SW415 1032 Valve 1 Actuator V116 1033 Valve 2 Actuator V217 1034 Valve 3 Actuator V318 1035 Valve 4 Actuator V4

Zone 1

Zone 2

Zone 3

Zone 4

V1

V2

V3

V4

INFO - A summary list ofcommon Boolean flags andalarms is included on thefollowing pages.



3.2.5. Meter Run Boolean Points (1100 through 1499)Each meter run has an identical set of Boolean points. The only numberingdifference is the second digit which indicates the number of the meter run; i.e.,11XX indicates a Meter Run # 1 Boolean, 12XX indicates a Meter Run # 2Boolean.

Meter Run Status and Alarm Points

The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. Forexample: Point 1105 is the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #1. Point 1405would be the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #4.

* 1n01 Pulses - Gross Indicated Volume

* 1n02 Pulses - Net Volume (GSV)

* 1n03 Pulses - Mass

* 1n04 Pulses - Net Standard VolumeS&W corrected GSV.

1n05 Meter Run Active FlagFlow pulses above threshold frequency.

1n06 Meter Being ProvedActivates during proving of this meter.

1n07 Any Meter Run Specific Alarm This MeterClears if acknowledged.

1n08 Batch End AcknowledgeToggle ON/OFF.

1n09 Auto Prove ProblemTen consecutive attempts to auto-prove have failed.

1n10 Batch Preset ReachedBatch total equal or exceeds the batch preset.

1n11 Batch Preset Warning FlagBatch total is within ‘X’ volume or mass units of the batch preset (‘X’ is stored at 5n38).

1n12 Batch End Acknowledge500 msec pulse.

1n13 Calculation AlarmUsually temperature, pressure or density is outside of the range of the algorithm selected.

1n14 Override In Use - Density PressureOverride in use for any reason.

1n15 Auto Prove FlagIndicates that flowmeter “n” will be automatically proved based on changes in flow rate ormeter run time, etc. Cleared if prove sequence is completed or prove is aborted.

1n16 Override In Use - Temperature

1n17 Override In Use - Pressure

1n18 Override In Use - Gravity/Density Transducer

1n19 Override In Use - Density Temperature

1n20 Flowrate - Low Low AlarmFor points 1n20-1n23, flow rate units are gross volume or mass units for all products.

1n21 Flowrate - Low Alarm

1n22 Flowrate - High Alarm

1n23 Flowrate - High High Alarm

Notes:q For meter run Boolean

points, n=meter run #1,#2, #3, #4.

q Meter Active (Point1n05) is set whenever thepulses from the flowmeter equal or exceed the'Active Frequency'threshold.

q Meter Being Proved(Point 1n06) is setwhenever the meter hasbeen selected as themeter to be proved, andremains set for theduration of the prove.

q Batch End Ack (1n08)toggles state at the end ofeach batch.

q Batch Preset WarningFlag (1n09) is setwhenever the batch presetcounter counts down toless than the warningbarrel count.

q Calculation Out ofLimits Flag (1n13) is setwhenever the operatingtemperature, pressure ordensity are outside of thechosen calculationalgorithm limits ofoperation.

Note:* Used to assign an

accumulator to the frontpanel counters or digitalI/O points)

INFO - Boolean data isaccessed using Modbusfunction codes 01 for reads,05 for single point writes and15 for multiple bit writes.Boolean data is packed 8points to a byte whenreading.

INFO - Transducer and flowrate alarms remain set whilethe alarm condition exists.



1n24 Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n25 Meter Temperature - Low Alarm

1n26 Meter Temperature - High Alarm

1n27 Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n28 Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n29 Meter Pressure - Low Alarm

1n30 Meter Pressure - High Alarm

1n31 Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n32 Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n33 Gravity/Density - Low alarm

1n34 Gravity/Density - High Alarm

1n35 Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n36 Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n37 Density Temperature - Low Alarm

1n38 Density Temperature - High Alarm

1n39 Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n40 Spare

to

1n43 Spare

1n44 Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low

1n45 Density Pressure - Low Alarm

1n46 Density Pressure - High Alarm

1n47 Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High1n48 Turbine - Meter Comparitor Alarm

Only when dual pulse fidelity check enabled.

1n49 Turbine - Channel A FailedTotal absence of pulses on Channel A.

1n50 Turbine - Channel B FailedTotal absence of pulses on Channel B.

1n51 Turbine - Difference Detected Between A & B ChannelMissing or added pulses.

1n52 Spare

1n53 Spare

1n54 Any Meter Run Specific Alarm This MeterClears only if acknowledged and alarm condition is cleared.

1n55 Meter Off-line FlagPulses for 500 msec when Meter Active (1n05) goes false.

1n56 Batch in Progress FlagSet when flow occurs at start of batch. Reset at batch end command.

1n57 Batch Start AcknowledgePulses for 500 msec when 1727-1730 command is received.

1n58 Meter Not Active / Batch SuspendedTrue when batch is in progress but Meter Active (1n05) is false.

1n59 Spare



Micro Motion Alarm Status Points

The following Micro Motion Alarm points can be accessed from the RFT viaModbus and placed in the ‘Micro Motion Alarm Word’ as the destination address3n18 in the flow computer, to log the alarm points. The alarms will be loggedinto the computer alarm log and will be displayed on the LCD when they occur.

1n60 Micro Motion - EPROM Checksum Failure

1n61 Micro Motion - Transmitter Configuration Change Made

1n62 Micro Motion - Sensor Failure

1n63 Micro Motion - Temperature Sensor Failure

1n64 Micro Motion - Input Over-ranged

1n65 Micro Motion - Frequency Output Over-ranged

1n66 Micro Motion - Transmitter Not Configured

1n67 Micro Motion - Real Time Interrupt Failure

1n68 Micro Motion - mA Output Saturated

1n69 Micro Motion - mA Output Fixed

1n70 Micro Motion - Density Out of Limits

1n71 Micro Motion - Zeroing Operation Failure

1n72 Micro Motion - Transmitter Electronics Failure

1n73 Micro Motion - Slug Flow Detected

1n74 Micro Motion - Self-calibration In Progress

1n75 Micro Motion - Power Reset Occurred

More Meter Run Status and Alarm Points

1n76 Batch Re-calculation Acknowledge FlagPulses for 500 msec when 1756 command received.

1n77 Correctable Totalizer Error OccurredPrimary totalizer checksum error secondary totalizer checksum OK.

1n78 Non-correctable Totalizer ErrorPrimary and secondary totalizers reset to zero because both checksums incorrect.

1n79 Spare

to

1n99 Spare

Micro Motion - Dataobtained via RS-485 link withMicro Motion device.

INFO - The second digit ofthe index number defines thenumber of the meter run.

Note: See 2n00 area foreven more meter run alarmsand status points.



3.2.6. Command and Status Boolean Points (1700through 1799)

Boolean points numbered 17XX are used as command or status points withinthe computer. These Boolean points can be altered by manipulating them viathe Modbus ports or by assigning them to a physical digital I/O point. Thevarious Boolean command and status flags are monitored for change of stateby the appropriate software tasks running within the computer. For example,Point 1701 (Prover Ready) would be checked by the computer during a proverun to ensure that the 4-way valve did not move. Each physical I/O pointconfigured as an input is scanned by the computer every 50 msec and theBoolean assigned to each point would be set On or Off depending on the stateof the physical I/O point. Edge changes are also stored to ensure that amomentary signal would not be missed. Physical digital I/O points that will beused only in Boolean statements should be assigned to Point 1700 (dummyBoolean).

Unless indicated as being ‘Level Sensitive’, most commands are 'edgetriggered'. To activate a command simply write a '1' (1 = True) to that point. It isnot necessary to write a '0' (0 = False) after the command. The status of acommand may also be read or used as input in a Boolean or variablestatement.

1700 DummyUsed only to reserve a digital I/O point to be used as an input. Point 1700 can beassigned to as many I/O points as needed.

1701 Prover Seal is OKMust be true when sphere is between detectors.

1702 End Batch - StationEnd batch on all meter runs defined in station.

1703 End Batch - Meter #1Points 1703-1706 individual end batch commands always work.

1704 End Batch - Meter #2



1707 Station - ‘Change Product’ StrobeRising edge triggers batch end and change to product selected by 1743-1745. Used withStation Product ID Bit 0-3 (1820-1823).

1708 Prove - Meter #1 RequestEdge triggered.

1709 Prove - Meter #2 Request



1712 Station Alarm AcknowledgeAcknowledges all alarms.

1713 Reset Power Failed FlagSee power fail Flag 1829.

1714 Trial Prove - Meter #1 RequestEdge triggered.

1715 Trial Prove - Meter #2 Request



INFO - Unless indicated asbeing ‘Level Sensitive’, mostcommands are 'edgetriggered'. To activate acommand simply write a '1'or 'True' to that point. It is notnecessary to write a '0' or'False' after the command isgiven. The status of acommand may also be reador used as input in a Booleanor variable statement.

Hardware Interaction -Unreliable operation willresult if a command whichhas been assigned to adigital I/O point directly alsoneeds to be activated via aModbus write. This isbecause the On/Off state ofthe digital I/O point overwritesthe command point every 100msec and most commandpoint actions are onlytriggered every 500 msec.



1718 Abort the Prove in Progress

1719 Request Local Snapshot ReportPrinted on local printer connected to flow computer.

1720 Snapshot Report to Modbus BufferMove Snapshot Report to buffer located at 9402.

1721 Alarm Report to Modbus BufferMove Alarm Report to buffer located at 9402.

# 1722 1st PID Permissive - Loop #1Points 1722-1725 enable PID startup and shutdown ramping for the respective meter(see 1752-1755). Level sensitive.

# 1723 1st PID Permissive - Loop #2



# 1726 Prover Start PermissiveChecked after temperature and flow are stable. Indicates that the meter divert valves arelined up. Enables prover sequencing when set.

1727 Start Ramp-up PID - Loop #1Initiates PID start up sequence by activating 1st and 2nd PID Permissive (see 1n57 foracknowledge pulse). These commands are edge triggered, simply turn on.

1728 Start Ramp-up PID - Loop #2



1731 Compact Prover Piston DownstreamApplies only to Brooks SVP, must be false before the piston can be re-launched.

1732 Alarm Acknowledge - Meter Run #1Points 1732-1735 are meter run specific alarms only.

1733 Alarm Acknowledge - Meter Run #2



* 1736 Disable Flow Totalizing - Meter Run #1




1740 Spare

1741 Remote Up Arrow KeyDuplicates the keypad function. Level sensitive.

1742 Remote Down Arrow KeyDuplicates the keypad function. Level sensitive.

1743 Product Select - Bit 0Points 1743-1746 represent the product number to change to as offset binary; i.e., 0000 =product #1. 1111=product #16 (see 1707, 1747-1750).

1744 Product Select - Bit 1



Notes:q Inputs are scanned every

50 msec so signals mustbe present for at least 50msec in order to berecognized. Pointsmarked with ‘*’ arepositive edge triggeredcommands.

q Prover Start Permissiveif configured (Point 1726)must be true before aprove sequence will start.

q Prover Seal OK ifconfigured (Point 1701)must be true while theprover sphere is betweenthe detector switches orthe prove in progress willbe shorted.

q Compact Prover PistonDownstream ifconfigured (Point 1731)must be false before theCompact Prover Runsignal (Point 1927) will beset active low.

q Product Select Inputs(Points 1743-1746) mustbe set up with nextproduct to run before anyof the Product ChangeStrobes (Points 1707 and1747-1750) are activated.

q PID Start Permissive ifconfigured (Points 1722-1725) must be true beforethe control outputs will beallowed to ramp open.They will ramp closedwhen it is negated.

Notes:

# These points aredefaulted to ‘active’ andneed not be manipulatedunless the applicationrequires it.

* These points also affectstation totalizing (see alsopoint 1761). Levelsensitive.



1747 ‘Change Product’ Strobe - Meter #1For points 1747-1750, rising edge triggers a batch end and a change to the productspecified by points 1743-1746.

1748 ‘Change Product’ Strobe - Meter #2



1751 Freeze Analog InputsUsed when calibrating analog inputs. Freezes ALL analogs. Level sensitive.

1752 2nd PID Permissive - Meter #1Points 1752-1755 limit the PID ramp-down to the minimum output % setting (see 1722-1725). Level sensitive.

1753 2nd PID Permissive - Meter #2



1756 Spare

to

1759 Spare

1760 Leak Detection Freeze CommandStores totalizers, temperatures, pressures and density variables to temporary storage (see5n66 and 7634). This command is usually broadcast to all RTUs simultaneously.

1761 Disable Flow Totalizing StationThis command has no effect in individual meter run totalizing (see also points 1736-1739). Level sensitive.

1762 Remote Print - Previous Batch Report #1At local printer.

to

1769 Remote Print - Previous Batch Report #8

1770 Remote Print - Previous Daily Report #1At local printer.

to

1777 Remote Print - Previous Daily Report #8

1778 Remote Print - Previous Prove Report #1At local printer.

to

1785 Remote Print - Previous Prove Report #8

1786 Remote Print - Alarm ReportAt local printer.

1787 Implement Last Prove Meter FactorCauses the meter factor determined at the last complete prove to be implemented andsaved. Edge triggered.

INFO- Notice that all writecommands have indexes /point addresses with a ‘7’ inthe 3rd digit from the right.



1788 Shutdown PID - Loop #1Points 1788-1791 start ramp-down to ‘top off’ valve setting by deactivating the 1st PIDpermissive. These commands are edge triggered; simply turn on.

1789 Shutdown PID - Loop #2



1792 Stop Flow PID - Loop #1Points 1792-1795 deactivate the 1st and 2nd PID permissive, causing the valve to ramp tothe ‘top off’ setting, and then immediately closes the valve. If the valve is already at the‘top off’ setting, the valve immediately closes.

1793 Stop Flow PID - Loop #2



1796 Raw Data Archive ‘Run’Level sensitive.

1797 Reconfigure ArchiveLevel sensitive.

1798 Recalculate and Print Selected Batch - StationThe previous batch selected by registered 3879 is recalculated. Edge triggered.

Note: More ‘CommandBoolean Points’ are locatedat address 2701.


CAUTION

Stored archive data may belost! See chapter on ‘RawData Archive’ beforemanipulating these datapoints. These functions areduplicated using integers at13920 and 13921.



3.2.7. Station Boolean Flags (1800 through 1899)The station also has a set of Boolean points. Data points not specificallyconnected to a particular meter run are grouped here. These include flowcomputer general system alarms and metering group alarms and status points.

* 1801 Positive - Gross Volume Pulses (IV)

* 1802 Positive - Net Volume Pulses (GSV)

* 1803 Positive - Mass Pulses

* 1804 Positive - S&W Corrected Net Volume Pulses (NSV)

* 1805 Negative - Gross Volume Pulses (IV)Points 1805-1808 refer to flow which occurs in the reverse direction.

* 1806 Negative - Net Volume Pulses (GSV)

* 1807 Negative - Mass Pulses

* 1808 Negative - S&W Corrected Net Volume Pulses (NSV)

1809 Flowrate - Low Low AlarmFor points 1809-1812, flow rate units are gross volume or mass units for all products.

1810 Flowrate - Low Alarm

1811 Flowrate - High Alarm

1812 Flowrate - High High Alarm

1813 Gravity Rate of Change FlagSet when rate of change of flowing SG exceeds the setting in 7889.

1814 Delayed Gravity Rate of ChangePoint 1813 delayed by volume specified in 7890.

1815 Any System AlarmIncludes acknowledged alarms also.

1816 Any New System AlarmDoes not include acknowledged alarms.

1817 Batch End AcknowledgeToggle state at batch end (see 1835).

1818 Batch Preset Warning FlagStation batch total is within ‘X’ volume or mass units of the batch preset. ‘X’ is defined in5815.

1819 Batch Preset Reached FlagStation batch total equal or exceeds the batch preset size.

1820 Station - Current Product ID Bit 0Points 1820-1823 are the offset binary representation of the current running product forthe station (0000=Product #1; 1111=Product #16).

1821 Station - Current Product ID Bit 1



1824 Run Switching - Threshold Flag 1Flags 1824-1826 activate/deactivate depending on the run switching threshold settingsand are based on current station flow rates.

1825 Run Switching - Threshold Flag 2


1827 Leak Detection Freeze Command was receivedSee point 1760.

Notes:q The station is defined as a

set of meter runs whoseflows are added orsubtracted.

q Batch EndAcknowledge (Point1817) is toggled at theend of each batch; i.e.,True for every otherbatch.

q Run Switching Flags(Points 1824-1826) arecontrolled by the stationgross flow rate and the'Meter Station ThresholdLimits'.

q Power Failed Flag (Point1829) is set automaticallywhen power or reset isapplied. It is cleared bymomentarily activating the1713 command point.

Note:

* Used to assignaccumulators to the frontpanel electromechanicalcounters and digital I/Opoints.



# 1828 Day Start FlagTrue at specified day start hour (e.g.: 07:00:00).

1829 Power Fail FlagTrue after power up (see 1713 for reset).

1830 Print Buffer Full FlagReports may be lost if 32K spooling buffer overflows due to the printer being ‘off-line’ orjammed with paper.

# 1831 Hour Start Flag

# 1832 Week Start FlagTrue at specified ‘day start’ hour Monday.

# 1833 Month Start FlagTrue at specified ‘day start’ hour on 1st day of month.

# 1834 Year Start FlagTrue at specified ‘day start’ hour on 1st January.

# 1835 Batch End AcknowledgePulses at batch end (see 1817).

# 1836 Snapshot PrintedIndicates snapshot report printed.

1837 EPROM error FlagInvalid checksum detected in EPROM memory.

1838 Peer-to-Peer Master FlagMomentarily true when this computer is peer-to-peer master.

1839 Zero ValueAlways false.

~ 1840 Boolean Statement AlarmTried to execute more than 100 Boolean statements.

~ 1841 Variable Statement AlarmTried to execute more than 100 variable statements.

1842 Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #1 - Communication ErrorPoints 1842-1857 refer to an error occurred while communicating with the slave in theappropriate transaction. If a slave is involved in multiple transactions which fail, only thefirst will be flagged.

to

1857 Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #16 - Communication Error

# 1858 Calendar Day Start FlagFormat: 00:00:00.

# 1859 Calendar Week Start FlagFormat: 00:00:00 Monday.

# 1860 Calendar Month Start FlagFormat: 00:00:00 1st day of month.

# 1861 Calendar Year Start FlagFormat: 00:00:00 Jan 1st.

1862 Station Density - Transducer Failed Low

1863 Station Density - Low Alarm

1864 Station Density - High Alarm

1865 Station Density - Transducer Failed High

Note:

# These points pulse highfor one 500 msec cycletime.


Notes:

~ The system limits themaximum number ofstatement evaluations to100 to protected againstpossible lock-ups due torecursive loops. Anyadditional statementevaluations are ignored.

# These points pulse highfor one 500 msec. cycletime.

* These flags are usuallyused to conditionally printappropriate informationmessages on the batchand daily reports.



1866 Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low

to

1869 Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High

1870 Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low

to

1873 Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High

* 1874 Viscosity Appearing on Report Flag

* 1875 Net Standard Volumes (NSV) Appearing on Report Flag

1876 Batch Recalculation Acknowledge FlagPulses for 500 msec when the 1798 command is received.

1877 Spare

* 1878 Previous Batch - Station Alarm FlagSet if any station alarm during the previous batch.

* 1879 Previous Batch - Station Totalizer Roll-over FlagSet if any station totalizer rolled during the previous batch.

* 1880 Previous Daily - Station Totalizer Roll-over FlagSet if any station totalizer rolled during the previous day.

*> 1881 Liter Units Selected FlagSet when Liter is the selected volume unit.

*> 1882 Cubic Meter Units Selected FlagSet when m3 is the selected volume unit.

1883 Auxiliary Input #1 - Transducer Failed Low

1884 Auxiliary Input #1 - Low Alarm

1885 Auxiliary Input #1 - High Alarm

1886 Auxiliary Input #1 - Transducer Failed High


to



to



to


1899 Net Volume @ 2nd Reference Temperature Appears on Reports FlagSet when 7699 is assigned a non-zero value. Prints on reports.

Note:

> Applies only to Revision24 for metric units.

Note: See 2600 area and2800 area for more stationalarms and status points.



Any pulse signal can be latched by using a small program similar to thefollowing:

Boolean #10xx25: /1834&/102626: /1835&/1025

3.2.8. Prover Boolean Points (1900 through 1999)Boolean points numbered 19XX are dedicated to the prover alarms and status.point numbers. The second digit ‘9’ defines a prover. See the 1700 area forcommand points associated with the prover.

1901 Inlet (Left) Pressure - Transducer Low Alarm

1902 Inlet (Left) Pressure - Transducer High Alarm

1903 Outlet (Right) Pressure - Transducer Low Alarm

1904 Outlet (Right) Pressure - Transducer High Alarm

1905 Inlet (Left) Temperature - Transducer Low Alarm

1906 Inlet (Left) Temperature - Transducer High Alarm

1907 Outlet (Right) Temperature - Transducer Low Alarm

1908 Outlet (Right) Temperature - Transducer High Alarm

# 1909 Prove Aborted - Temperature Unstable

# 1910 Prove Aborted - Meter-to-Prover Temperature Deviation Exceeded

# 1911 Prove Sequence - Successfully Completed

# 1912 Prove Sequence Aborted - Did Not Complete

1913 1st Detector Sensed - Sphere in Flight Forward Direction

1914 3rd Detector Sensed - Sphere in Flight Reverse Direction

1915 2nd Detector Sensed - In Over-travel Forward Direction

1916 4th Detector Sensed - In Over-travel Reverse Direction

1917 Launch Sphere - Forward DirectionTwo second pulse.

1918 Launch Sphere - Reverse DirectionTwo second pulse.

# 1919 Prove Aborted - Run Repeatability Deviation Limit Exceeded

# 1920 Prove Aborted - Prover Seal Not OK - Sphere Between DetectorsSee 1701.

# 1921 Prove Aborted - Flowrate was Unstable

# 1922 Prove Aborted - No Prover Permissive ReceivedSee 1726.

# 1923 Meter Factor Obtained was Not Implemented

# 1924 Prove Aborted - Meter Selected was not FlowingSee 1n05.

1925 Plenum - Charge RequiredPoints 1925 and 1926 refer to Brooks small volume provers only. Plenum pressure can beautomatically adjusted by adding or venting nitrogen.

1926 Plenum - Vent Required

1927 Brooks Small Volume Prover - Run Command OutputActive low output to launch piston.

1026 is set by 1834 andcleared by 1835

Notes:q Point numbers marked

with '*' are updated at theend of a prove and are notreset until the beginningof the next prove.

q Point numbers marked 'm'are momentary lasting 2seconds.

q Run Compact Prove(Point 1927) is normallyhigh and goes low toactivate a run.

Note:

# These alarms are activeuntil the next provesequence is started.



1928 Prove Sequence - Successfully Completed Flag500 msec pulse at end of prove.

1929 Using Fixed Override - Prover Inlet (Left) Temperature

1930 Using Fixed Override - Prover Outlet (Right) temperature

1931 Using Fixed Override - Prover Inlet (Left) Pressure

1932 Using Fixed Override - Prover Outlet (Right) Pressure

* 1933 Mass Prove Flag

* 1934 Net Prove Flag

* 1935 Mass Prove Report Flag

* 1936 Net Prove Report Flag

* 1937 Mass Calculation in Use Flag

* 1938 Meter Factor Repeatability in Use FlagSet when run deviation is based on meter factor.

* 1939 Count Repeatability in Use FlagSet when run deviation is based on meter counts.

1940 Prover Density - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1941 Prover Density - Low Alarm

1942 Prover Density - High Alarm

1943 Prover Density - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1944 Prover Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

to

1947 Prover Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1948 Prover Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

to

1951 Prover Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1952 Spare

to

1954 Spare

* 1955 Viscosity Linearization - Proving Mode Selected

* 1956 Viscosity Linearization - Mode NOT Selected

1957 Spare

1958 Spare

* 1959 Prove Report - Print 4 Decimal Places for Correction Factors



* 1962 Prove Report - Print 4 Decimal Places for Meter Factors



* 1965 Prove Report - Print 5 Decimal Places for Intermediate Meter Factors



1968 Spare

to

1999 Spare

Note:

* These flags are used tocause data to beconditionally printed onthe prover report.



3.2.9. Meter Totalizer Roll-over FlagsThe following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over(i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used toconditionally print characters (usually ‘**’) in front of the totalizer which hasrolled on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni ‘Custom ReportTemplate’ will show how this is accomplished. The second digit of the indexnumber defines the number of the meter run. See also points at 2801 for stationversions of these flags.

2n01 Batch In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n02 Batch In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n03 Batch In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n04 Batch In Progress - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n05 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n06 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n07 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n08 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n09 Daily In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n10 Daily In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n11 Daily In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n12 Daily In Progress - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n13 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n14 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n15 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n16 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n17 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n18 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n19 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n20 Previous Batch ‘n’ - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n21 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n22 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n23 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n24 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n25 Previous Daily - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n26 Previous Daily - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n27 Previous Daily - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n28 Previous Daily - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n29 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n30 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n31 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n32 Previous Daily - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n33 Batch In Progress - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n34 Daily In Progress - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n35 Previous Batch ‘n’ - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n36 Previous Daily - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

Note: The ‘In Progress’ flagsare those which the flowcomputer uses when printingthe reports on the connectedprinter.Use the ‘Previous’ flags if thereport is being printed byanother device such as aSCADA or MMI. This isnecessary because the flowcomputer clears the ‘InProgress’ data immediatelyafter it prints the local report.

Application Revision20/24.71+ - This databasecorresponds to ApplicationRevision 20/24.71+ forTurbine/PositiveDisplacement/Coriolis LiquidFlow Metering Systems, withK Factor Linearization. BothUS and metric unit versionsare considered.




2n37 Meter ‘n’ - Product in Use - Binary Code Decimal Bit 0




3.2.10. Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and StatusPoints

2601 Auxiliary Input #1 - Override in Use

to


2605 Inlet Temperature - Override in Use

2606 Outlet Temperature - Override in Use

2607 Inlet Pressure - Override in Use

2608 Outlet Pressure - Override in Use

2620 Calibration Data Checksum ErrorCorrectable as secondary copy was OK.

2621 System Initialized FlagTrue after power up or system reset, clears when reset power fail command is set (1713).

2622 Day Light Savings Time‘On’ means that spring adjustment was made. ‘Off’ means autumn adjustment was made.

2623 Archive Memory Alarm0 = Ok; 1 = Fail.

3.2.11. Commands Which Cause Custom Data Packetsto be Transmitted Without a Poll

Activating any of the ‘edge triggered’ command points below causes theappropriate ‘Custom Data Packet’ to be transmitted out of the selected serialport without the serial port being polled for data. This function can be usefulwhen communicating via VSAT satellite systems where operating cost isdirectly proportional to RF bandwidth used.

2701 Data Packet #1 to Serial Port #1












INFO - To differentiatebetween normal messageresponses and unsolicitedtransmissions, Modbusfunction code 67 appears inthe transmitted messagerather than function code 03.


Note: Notice that all writecommands have indexes /point addresses with a ‘7’ inthe 3rd digit from the right.



3.2.12. Commands Needed To Accomplish a RedundantFlow Computer System

Accomplishing a redundant flow computer system requires two identicallyconfigured flow computers to share input and output signals. In addition fourdigital I/O points are cross connected to enable each flow computer to monitorthe other.

2713 Others - Watchdog StatusAssigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers watchdog (see 2863).

2714 Others - Master StatusAssigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers master status (see 2864).

2715 Assume Master Status CommandSet to take mastership. Edge triggered.

2716 Assume Slave Status CommandSet to relinquish mastership. Edge triggered.

3.2.13. Commands to Recalculate and Print SelectedBatch

2756 Recalculate and Print Selected Batch - Meter #1When one of the commands 2756-2759 is given, the previous batch selected by 3n51 isrecalculated. Edge triggered.

2757 Recalculate and Print Selected Batch - Meter #2



3.2.14. Station Totalizer Roll-over FlagsThe following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over(i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used toconditionally print characters (usually ‘**’ ) in front of the totalizer which hasrolled on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni ‘Custom ReportTemplate’ will show how this is accomplished. See also points at 2n01 for meterrun versions of flags.

2801 Batch In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2802 Batch In Progress - Net (GSV)) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2803 Batch In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2804 Batch In Progress - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2805 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2806 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2807 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2808 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2809 Daily In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2810 Daily In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2811 Daily In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2812 Daily In Progress - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag


INFO - Remember that thestation is defined as a groupof individual meter runs.

In Progress Flags - The ‘InProgress’ flags are the flagswhich the flow computeruses when printing thereports on the connectedprinter.Use the ‘Previous’ flags if thereport is being printed byanother device such as anSCADA or MMI. This isnecessary because the flowcomputer clears the ‘InProgress’ data immediatelyafter it prints the local report.



2813 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2814 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - (GSV) Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2815 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2816 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2817 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2818 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2819 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2820 Previous Batch ‘n’ - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2821 Previous - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2822 Previous - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2823 Previous - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2824 Previous - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2825 Previous Daily - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2826 Previous Daily - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2827 Previous Daily - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2828 Previous Daily - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2829 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2830 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2831 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag2832 Previous Daily - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2833 Batch In Progress - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag

2834 Daily In Progress - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag

2835 Previous Batch ‘n’ - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag

2836 Previous Daily - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag

2837 Spare

to

2851 Spare

3.2.15. Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution FlagsAll totalizers within the flow computer are ‘long integer types’. This data typeuses an ‘implied’ decimal position. The computer uses these flags internally todetermine how to format all totalizers of the same type for printing purposes.

2852 Batch Report - Print 4 Decimal Places for Correction Factors



2855 Batch Report - Print 4 Decimal Places for Meter Factors



2858 Print 0 Decimal Place for Gross & Net Totalizer


2860 Print 2 Decimal Places for Gross & Net Totalizer


2862 Spare



Note: It is unlikely that theuser would have any use forthese variables.



3.2.16. Status Booleans Relating to Redundant FlowComputer Systems

2863 Watchdog Status OutNormally High Watchdog. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system (see2713).

2864 Master StatusIndicates mastership. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system (see2714).

3.2.17. More Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags

2865 Print 0 Decimal Place for Mass Totalizer


2867 Print 2 Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer


2869 Spare

to

2999 Spare




3.3. User Programmable Variables andStatements

There are 64 user-programmable floating point variables within the flowcomputer numbered 7025 through 7088. The value stored in each of thesevariables depends on an associated equation or statement. These statementsare evaluated every 500 msec and the resultant variable values can bedisplayed on the LCD display, printed on a report, output to a D-A output, oraccessed via one of the communication ports. Typical uses for the variablesand statements include providing measurement units conversions, specialaveraging functions, limit checking and comparisons.

3.3.1. Variable Statements and Mathematical OperatorsAllowed

Each statement can contain up to 3 variables or constants. The followingsymbols are used to represent the functions:

Operator Symbol Description

ADD + Add the two variables or constantsSUBTRACT - Subtract the RH variable or constant from LHMULTIPLY * Multiply the two variables or constantsDIVIDE / Divide the two variables or constantsCONSTANT # The number following is interpreted as aconstantPOWER & Raise the LH variable to the power of the RHABSOLUTE $ Use the abs. unsigned value of variable followingEQUAL = Make the variable on left equal to the expressionIF STATEMENT ) Compares the variable to another (What if?)GOTO STATEMENT G Go to a different variableMOVE : Move statement or result to another variable.COMPARE % Compare a value with or equal toINDIRECT “ Variable contains point address of targetvariable

To program the user variables proceed as follows: From the Display Modepress [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following menu will be displayed:

*** Misc. Setup ***Password Maint?(Y)_Check Modules ?(Y)Config Station ?(Y)Config Meter "n"Config Prove ? (Y)Config PID ? "n"Config D/A Out "n"Front Panel CountersProgram Booleans ?Program Variables ?

TIP - The order ofprecedence is: ABSOLUTE,POWER, MULTIPLY &DIVIDE, ADD &SUBTRACT. Whereoperators have the sameprecedence the order is leftto right.



Scroll down to 'Program Variables ? (Y)' and enter [Y]. Assuming that novariables are as yet programmed, the display shows:

PROG. VARIABLE #70xx25: _26:27:

Note that the cursor is on the line labeled 25:. At this point enter the variableequation that will calculate the value of variable 7025.

Example 1:

To provide a variable (7025) which represents Meter Run #1 gross flow rate inbarrels per day' in place of the usual barrels per hour, multiply the 'barrels/hour'variable (7101) by the constant 24.

PROG. VARIABLE #70xx25: 7101*#2426: _27:

Example 2:

To provide a variable that represents 'gallons per minute' (7026) we can convertthe 'barrels per hour'variable (7101) to gallons by multiplying by 0.7 (0.7 =42/60 which is the number of gallons in a barrel / divided by the number ofminutes in an hour).

PROG. VARIABLE #70xx25: 7101*#2426: 7101*#.7_27:

Example 3:

To provide a variable (7028) that represents meter run #1 temperature in'degrees Celsius' we subtract 32 from the 'degrees Fahrenheit' variable (7105)and divide the result (7027) by 1.8.

PROG. VARIABLE #70xx25: 7101*#2426: 7101*#.7_27: 7105-#3228: 7027/#1.8

bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day


bbls/hr x0.7 = gal/min


bbls/hr x 0.7 = gal/min

°F - 32.0

(°F - 32.0) / 1.8 = °C



Example 4:

Gross barrels within the flow computer are simply flow meter counts divided bythe flow meter 'K-Factor' (pulses per barrel); i.e., gross barrels are not meterfactored. To provide a variable (7029) which represents Meter Run #1 grossmeter factored barrels, multiply the batch gross barrel totalizer (5101) by thebatch flow weighted average meter factor (5114).

PROG. VARIABLE #70xx25: 7101*#2426: 7101*#.7_27: 7105-#3228: 7027/#1.829: 5101*5114

3.3.2. Using Boolean Variables in Variable StatementsBoolean points used in a programmable variable statement are assigned thevalue 1.0 when the Boolean value is TRUE and 0.0 when the Boolean value isFALSE. By multiplying by a Boolean the user can set a variable to 0.0 when theBoolean point has a value FALSE.

Example:

Provide a variable (7025) which functions as a 'Report Number'. The reportnumber which will appear on each 'batch end report' must incrementautomatically after each batch and reset to zero at the contract day start houron January 1 of each year.

PROG. VARIABLE #70xx25: 7025+183526: 1834)7025=#0

Boolean 1835 is true one calculation cycle at the end of a batch. Boolean point1834 is equal to 1.0 for one calculation cycle on the contract day start hour onJanuary 1. If statement 1834 is true we reset counter 7025.


bbls/hr x 0.7 = gal/min

°F - 32.0

(°F - 32.0) / 1.8 = °C

Gross bbls x Meter Factor

Add 1.0 at Batch End

Clear batch report number onJan 1 Contract Hour



3.3.3. Entering Values Directly into the User VariablesIn some cases it may be necessary to enter data directly into a user variable(not the expression, just the variable). For example, to preset the 'ReportNumber' Variable 7025 in the example above we proceed as follows. While inthe Display Mode press [Prog] [Input] [Enter], the following will display:

USER VARIABLE #7025Value 1234 7025 + 1835

3.3.4. Using the Variable Expression as a PromptEntering plain text into the expression associated with the variable causes thecomputer no problems. It ignores the text and leaves the variable unchanged.

For example:

USER VARIABLE 7025Value ? .00018 Enter Lbs to SCF ?

3.3.5. Password Level Needed to Change the Value of aUser Variable

The first four variables, 7025, 7026, 7027 and 7028 require ‘Level 2’ password.the remaining variables require ‘Level 1’.

Current value - you canchange this.

Expression for this variable -you cannot change from thisentry.



3.3.6. Using Variables in Boolean ExpressionsIn some cases it is also necessary to trigger some type of an event based onthe value of a calculated variable. Boolean variables used in the Booleanexpressions and described in the previous text can have only one of two values,ON or OFF (TRUE or FALSE). How can the floating point numbers described inthis chapter be used in a Boolean expression? Simply using the fact that avariable can be either positive (TRUE) or negative (FALSE). Any variable orfloating point can be used in a Boolean expression.

Example:

Provide an alarm and snapshot report which will occur when the absolutedifference in net flow rate between Meter Runs #1 and #2 exceeds 10 bbls/hr,but only when Meter Run #1 flow rate is greater than 1000 bbls/hr.

PROG. VARIABLE #70xx30: 7102- 720231: $7030-#1032: 7102-#1000

Variable 7031 will be positive (TRUE) if Meter Runs #1 and #2 flow rates differby more than 10 bbls/hr. Variable 7032 will be positive (TRUE) when Meter Run#1 flow rate exceeds 1000 bbls/hr.

User variables 7031 and 7032 shown above must both be positive for the alarmto be set. In addition, we will require that the condition must exist for 5 minutesto minimize spurious alarms. The alarm will be activated by Physical I/O Point#02 and we will use Boolean statements 1025 and 1026.

Enter the following Boolean statements (1025 and 1026 used as example only):

BOOLEAN POINT #70xx25: 7031&703226: 1719 = 1002

To complete the example we assign Digital I/O Point #02 (Point # 1002) to 1025and select a 'delay on' of 3000 to provide a 5 minute delay on activate (3000ticks = 3000 x 100 msec = 300 seconds). Set the ‘delay off’ to 0.

Result can be positive ornegative.

Absolute flow differenceminus 10.

Positive if flow rate is >1000

True when both are positive.

Snapshot report when alarmactive.

Note: See the beginning ofthis chapter on how toprogram a Booleanexpression if necessary:



3.4. User Configurable Display ScreensThe user can specify up to eight display screen setups. Each display screen canbe programmed to show four variables, each with a descriptive tag. Anyvariable within the data base can be selected for display.

Steps needed to configure a display screen are:

1) Specify a sequence of up to four key presses that will be used to recallthe display. Key presses are identified by the A through Z character oneach key. For each variable (four maximum):

2) Specify the eight character string to be used to identify the variable. Anyvalid characters on the keypad can be used.

3) Specify the database index or point number.

4) Specify the display resolution of the variable (i.e., how many digits to theright of the decimal point).

Should the number exceed the display capacity, the decimal will beautomatically shifted right to counter the overflow. The computer will shift toscientific display mode if the integer part of the number exceeds +/- 9,999,999.

To configure the user display screens proceed as follows:

From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the followingmenu will be displayed:

*** Misc. Setup ***Password Maint?(Y)_Check Modules ?(Y)Config Station ?(Y)Config Meter "n"Config Prove ? (Y)Config PID ? "n"Config D/A Out "n"Front Panel CountersProgram Booleans ?Program Variables ?User Display ? "n"Config Digital "n"Serial I/O "n"Custom Packet ? (Y)

Scroll down to 'User Display ? "n"’ and enter 1 through 8 to specify whichscreen you wish to configure.

INFO - The computer checksfor the user display keypresses first so you mayoverride an existing displayscreen by selecting the samekey press sequence.



The screen for Display #1 shows:

USER DISPLAY #1Key Press _Var #1 TagVar #1 IndexVar #1 Dec.Var #2 TagVar #2 IndexVar #2 Dec.Var #3 TagVar #3 IndexVar #3 Dec.Var #4 TagVar #4 IndexVar #4 Dec.

Use the 'UP/DOWN' arrows to scroll through the screen. For 'Key Press' enterthe key press sequence (up to 4 keys) that will be used to recall this display.The keys are identified by the letters A through Z.

Fig. 3-3. Keypad Layout - A through Z Keys



Example:

You wish to recall 'User Display #1' by pressing [Gross] [Meter] [1], select thekey sequence [A] [L] [O] as shown below.

USER DISPLAY #1Key Press A L OVar #1 TagVar #1 IndexVar #1 Dec.

Continue configuring User Display #1 by entering the description tag, indexnumber and decimal position required for each variable.

USER DISPLAY #1Key Press A L OVar #1 Tag M1 MSCFVar #1 Index 7101Var #1 Dec. 2Var #2 Tag M1 MMSCFVar #2 Index 5101Var #2 Dec. 0Var #3 Tag M1 PRSETVar #3 Index 5116Var #3 Dec. 0Var #4 Tag M1 MFACTVar #4 Index 5114Var #4 Dec. 4Var #4 Tag _

Press [Gross] [Meter] [1]

Description Tag

Index # for Meter #1 FlowRate

Display XXXX.XX

Description Tag

Index # for Meter #1 BatchBarrels

Display XXXXXXXXX

Description Tag

Index # for Meter #1 PresetCount

Display XXXXXXXXX

Description Tag

Index # for Meter #1 BatchF.W.A.M/F

Display X.XXXX

Description Tag



In the preceding example, User Display #1 is used to display Meter Run #1:

Variable #1 Flow rate in MSCF per Hour

Variable #2 Accumulated Batch MSCF

Variable #3 Batch Preset MSCF To Deliver

Variable #4 Meter Factor for the Batch

The screen is recalled by pressing [Gross] [Meter] [1] [Enter] and displays:

USER DISPLAY # 1M1 MSCF 1234.56M1 MMSCF 123456789M1 PRSET 1234567M1 MFACT 1.0000



4. Modbus Protocol Implementation

4.1. IntroductionOmni Flow Computers implement a superset of the Gould Modbus Protocolon Serial Ports #1 (selectable), #2, #3 and #4 (selectable), thus allowingsimultaneous communications with two totally independent Modbus systems.Maximum transmission baud rate is 38.4 kbps with an average answerresponse time of 70 msec plus any modem warm-up time.

The Modbus Protocol specifies one master and up to 247 slaves on acommon communication line. Each slave is assigned a fixed unique deviceaddress in the range of 1 to 247. The Master always initiates the transaction.Transactions are either a query/response type (only one slave is accessed at atime) or a broadcast / no response type (all slaves are accessed at the sametime). A transaction comprises a single query and single response frame or asingle broadcast frame.

4.2. Modes of TransmissionTwo basic modes of transmission are available: ASCII or Remote Terminal Unit(RTU). The mode selected depends on the equipment being used.

AVAILABLE TRANSMISSION MODES

TRANSMISSION MODE

ASCII RTU

Coding System Hexadecimal 8-bit binary

NUMBER OF BITS:

Start Bits 1 1

Data Bits 7 8

Parity (Optional) Odd, Even, None (1 or0)

Odd, Even, None (1 or0)

Stop Bits 1 or 2 1 or 2

Error Checking LRC CRC

Baud Rate 1.1 - 38.4 kbps 1.1 - 38.4 kbps

Chapter 4 Modbus Protocol Implementation


4.2.1. ASCII Framing and Message FormatFraming in ASCII Transmission Mode is accomplished by the use of the colon(:) character indicating the beginning of a frame and a carriage return (CR) linefeed (LF) to delineate end of frame. The line feed character also serves as asynchronizing character which indicates that the transmitting station is ready toreceive an immediate reply.

ASCII MESSAGE FORMAT

BEGINNING

OF

FRAME

ADDRESSFUNCTION

CODEDATA

ERROR

CHECK

END

OF

FRAME

READY TO

RECEIVE

RESPONSE

: 2 Char 2 Char N x 2Char

2 Char CR LF

7 Bits 14 Bits 14Bits N x 14Bits

14 Bits 7 Bits 7 Bits

4.2.2. Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) Framing andMessage Format

Frame synchronization can be maintained in RTU Transmission Mode only bysimulating a synchronous message. The 'OMNI' monitors the elapsed timebetween receipt of characters. If 3.5 character times elapse without a newcharacter or completion of the frame, then the frame is reset and the next byteswill be processed looking for a valid address.

RTU MESSAGE FORMAT

ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA ERROR CHECK

8 Bits 8 Bits N x 8 Bits 16 Bits

4.3. Message Fields

4.3.1. Address FieldThe address field immediately follows the beginning of the frame and consistsof 2 characters (ASCII) or 8 bits (RTU). These bits indicate the user assignedaddress of the slave device that is to receive the message sent by the master.Each slave must be assigned a unique address and only the addressed slavewill respond to a query that contains its address. When the slave sends aresponse, the slave address informs the master which slave is communicating.In broadcast mode, an address of zero (0) is used. All slaves interpret this as aninstruction to read and take action, but do not issue a response message.

Assuming 7 bits pertransmitted character.



4.3.2. Function Code FieldThe function code field tells the addressed slave what function to perform. Thehigh order bit of the function code field is set by the slave device to indicate thatother than a normal response is being transmitted to the Master device. This bitremains 0 if the message is a query or a normal response message.

FUNCTION CODE ACTION

01 READ MULTIPLE BOOLEAN POINTS03 READ STRINGS OR MULTIPLE 16 OR 32 BIT

VARIABLES05 WRITE SINGLE BOOLEAN POINT06 WRITE SINGLE 16 BIT INTEGER15 WRITE MULTIPLE BOOLEAN POINTS16 WRITE STRINGS OR MULTIPLE 16 OR 32 BIT

VARIABLES65 READ ASCII TEXT BUFFER66 WRITE ASCII TEXT BUFFER

4.3.3. Data FieldThe data field contains the information needed by the slave to perform thespecific function or it contains data collected by the slave in response to aquery. This information may be text strings, values, exception code or textbuffers.

4.3.4. Error Check FieldThis field allows the master and slave devices to check a message for errors intransmission. A transmitted message may be altered slightly due to electricalnoise or other interference while it is on its way from one unit to another. Theerror checking assures that the master and the slave do not react to messagesthat have been changed during transmission. The error check field uses alongitudinal redundancy check (LRC) in the ASCII Mode and a CRC-16 check inthe RTU Mode. The bytes checked include the slave address and all bytes up tothe error checking bytes. Checking is done with the data in the binary mode orRTU mode.

The LRC Mode

The error check is an 8-bit binary number represented and transmitted as twoASCII hexadecimal (hex) characters. The error check is produced by firststripping the Colon, CR and LF and then converting the hex ASCII characters tobinary. Add the binary bytes (including slave address) discarding any carries,and then two's complement the result. At the received end the LRC isrecalculated and compared to the LRC as sent. The colon, CR, LF, and anyimbedded non ASCII hex characters are ignored in calculating the LRC (seepage 1-7 of the Gould Modbus Reference Guide for more details).

Note: See 4.5 fordescriptions and examples ofthese function codes. See4.4 for a description ofexception responses.



The CRC Mode

The message is considered as one continuous binary number whose mostsignificant bit (MSB) is transmitted first. The message is pre-multiplied by x 16(shifted left 16-bits), then divided by (x16+x15+x2+1) expressed as the binarynumber (11000000000000101).The integer quotient digits are ignored and the16-bit remainder (initialized to all ones at the start to avoid the case of all zerosbeing an accepted message) is appended to the message (MSB first) as the twoCRC check bytes. The resulting message including CRC, when divided by thesame polynomial (x16 + x15 + x2 + 1) at the receiver will give a zero remainderif no errors have occurred (see pages1-4 through 1-6 of the Gould ModbusReference Guide for more details).

4.4. Exception ResponseProgramming or operation errors are those involving illegal data in a message,no response or difficulty in communicating with a slave. These errors result inan exception response from the slave, depending on the type of error. Whensuch a message is received from the master the slave sends a response to themaster echoing the slave address, function code (with high bit set), exceptioncode and error check fields. To indicate that the response is a notification of anerror, the high order bit of the function code is set to 1.

EXCEPTION CODE DESCRIPTION

01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE04 DATA CANNOT BE WRITTEN05 PASSWORD NEEDED



4.5. Function Codes

4.5.1. Function Code 01 (Read Boolean Status)This function allows the user to obtain the ON/OFF status of Booleans used tocontrol discrete outputs from the addressed slaves only. Broadcast mode is notsupported with this function code. In addition to the slave address and functionfield, the message requires that the information field contain the initial pointnumber to be read (Starting point) and the number of points that will be read toobtain the Boolean data.

Boolean points are numbered as from 1001; (Boolean number 1= 1001). Thedata is packed one bit for each Boolean flag variable. The response includesthe slave address, function code, quantity of data characters, the datacharacters and error checking. Data will be packed with one bit for eachBoolean flag (1 = ON, 0 = OFF). The low order bit of the first character containsthe addressed flag, and the remainder follow. For Boolean quantities that arenot even multiples of eight, the last characters will be filled in with zeros at highorder end.

Example: Read Booleans 1120 to 1131 from Slave Device #01.

POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : ASCII TRANSMISSION MODE

FUNCTION DATA STARTING POINT # NUMBER OF POINTS LCR CHECK

ADDRESS CODE HI LO HI LO 8-BIT

: 3031 3031 3034 3630 3030 3043 3845 CR LF

POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE

FUNCTION DATA STARTING POINT # NUMBER OF POINTS CRC CHECK


01 01 04 60 00 0C ‘nn’ ‘nn’

SLAVE RESPONSE : ASCII Transmission Mode

FUNCTION BYTE DATA LCR CHECK

ADDRESS CODE COUNT HI LO 8-BIT

: 3031 3031 3032 3038 3030 4634 CR LF

SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode

FUNCTION BYTE DATA LCR CHECK

ADDRESS CODE COUNT HI LO 8-BIT

01 01 02 08 00 ‘nn’ ‘nn’

The status of Booleans 1120 through 1127 is shown as 08 (hex) = 0000 1000(binary). Reading right to left, this shows that status 1123 is on. The other dataflags are decoded similarly. Due to the quantity of Boolean status requested, thelast data field, which is shown as 00 (hex) = 0000 0000 (binary), contains the



status of only 4 flags. The 4 left most bits are provided as zeros to fill the 8-bitformat.



4.5.2. Function Code 03 (Read 16-Bit Register Sets)Function Code 03 allows the master to obtain the binary contents of holdingregisters in the addressed slave. The protocol allows for a maximum of 125sixteen-bit registers to be obtained at each request. Broadcast mode is notallowed for function 03.

These 16-bit registers are also grouped in sets of registers and accessed as onevariable. The numeric range of the point number defines the variable type andindicates how many 16-bit registers make up that variable.

REGISTER GROUPS FOR TYPES OF VARIABLES

POINT #RANGE

VARIABLE

TYPE

16-BIT REGS. /POINT

NO OF BYTES /POINT

MAX POINTS /MESSAGE

3XXX or 13XXX Short Integer 1 Register 2 Bytes 125

4XXX 8-Char. ASCII String 4 Registers 8 Bytes 31

5XXX or 15XXX Long Integer 2 Registers 4 Bytes 62

7XXX or 18XXX IEEE Floating Point 2 Registers 4 Bytes 62


The addressed slave responds with its address and the function code, followedby the information field. The information field contains a single byte indicatingthe number of data bytes returned followed by the actual data bytes. The data isreturned in multiples of two bytes, with the binary content right justified. Thedata is sent MS Byte first.

Example: Read Short Integer Message 3012 through 3013 from Slave #2.


FUNCTION DATA STARTING POINT # QUANTITY OF POINTS CRC CHECK


02 03 0B C4 00 02 ‘nn’ ‘nn’


FUNCTION BYTE DATA DATA CRC CHECK

ADDRESS CODE COUNT HI LO HI LO 16-BIT

02 03 04 1F 40 1F 3E ‘nn’ ‘nn’

The slave responds with its address and the function code, byte count of thedata field followed by the actual data field. In the above example the data fieldcontains 4 bytes representing the value of the requested data.



4.5.3. Function Code 05 (Write Single Boolean)This message forces a single Boolean variable either ON or OFF. Booleanvariables are points numbered 1XXX or 2XXX. Writing the 16-bit value 65,280(FF00 HEX) will set the Boolean ON, writing the value zero will turn it OFF; allother values are illegal and will not effect the Boolean. Using a slave address00 (Broadcast Mode) will force all slaves to modify the desired Boolean.

Example: Turn Single Boolean Point 1711 ON Slave #2.


FUNCTION BOOLEAN POINT # DATA CRCADDRESS CODE HI LO HI LO CHECK

02 05 06 AF FF 00 ‘nn’ ‘nn’


FUNCTION BOOLEAN POINT # DATA CRCADDRESS CODE HI LO HI LO CHECK

02 05 06 AF FF 00 ‘nn’ ‘nn’

The normal response to the command request is to retransmit the message asreceived after the Boolean state has been altered.



4.5.4. Function Code 06 (Write Single 16-Bit Integer)Any numeric variable that has been defined on the 16-bit integer index tablecan have its contents changed by this message. The 16-bit integer points arenumbered from 3XXX or 13XXX.

When used with slave address zero (Broadcast Mode) all slaves will load thespecified points with the contents specified. The following example sets one 16-bit integer at address 3106 (0C22 HEX) of Slave #2 (i.e., Load address 3106with data 0003).

Example: Set Single 16-Bit Integer Slave #2.


FUNCTION POINT # DATA CRCADDRESS CODE HI LO HI LO CHECK

02 06 0C 22 00 03 ‘nn’ ‘nn’


FUNCTION POINT # DATA CRCADDRESS CODE HI LO HI LO CHECK

02 06 0C 22 00 03 ‘nn’ ‘nn’

The normal response to a Function 06 query is to retransmit the message asreceived after the 16-bit integer has been altered.



4.5.5. Function Code 15 (Write Multiple Boolean )Function code 0FHEX writes to each Boolean variable in a consecutive block ofBoolean variables to a desired ON or OFF state. Each Boolean is packed in thedata field, one bit for each Boolean flag (1 = ON 0 = OFF). The data fieldconsists of increments of 2 bytes and can be up to 250 bytes (2000 points).Boolean points are packed right-to-left, 8 to a byte with unused bits set to '0'.The use of slave address 00 (Broadcast Mode)will force all slaves to modifythe desired Boolean bits. The following example writes to 14 Boolean variablesstarting at address 1703. The data field value 05 1703 through 1710, and datafield value 20 represents the status of points 1711 through 1716. These datavalues are transmitted as 0000 0101 and 0010 0000, indicating that Booleanspoints 1703, 1705, 1716 are to be forced ON and 1704 and 1706 through 1715are to be forced OFF (the 2 most significant positions of the second byte areunused and set to 0).

Example: Turn on Boolean points 1703, 1705, 1716 ON Slave #3.


FUNCTION STARTING QUANTITY BYTE DATA CRCADDRESS CODE ADDRESS OF POINTS COUNT HI LO CHECK

03 0F 06 A7 00 0E 02 05 20 ‘nn’ ‘nn’


FUNCTION STARTING QUANTITY CRCADDRESS CODE ADDRESS OF POINTS CHECK

03 0F 06 A7 00 0E 'nn' 'nn'

The normal response to a Function 15 query is to echo the slave address,function code, starting address and quantity of points written.



4.5.6. Function Code 16 (Write 16-Bit Register Sets)Function code 10HEX allows the master to change the binary contents of holdingregisters in the addressed slave. The protocol allows for a maximum of 125 16-bit registers to be changed at each download. Using a slave address of zero(00) allows the master to change registers in all slaves simultaneously(Broadcast mode).

These 16-bit registers are also grouped as sets of registers and accessed asone variable. The numeric range of the point number defines the variable typeand indicates how many 16-bit registers make up that variable.

REGISTER GROUPS FOR TYPES OF VARIABLES

POINT #RANGE

VARIABLE

TYPE

16-BIT REGS. /POINT

NO OF BYTES /POINT

MAX POINTS /MESSAGE

3XXX or 13XXX Short Integer 1 Register 2 Bytes 125


5XXX or 15XXX Long Integer 2 Registers 4 Bytes 62

7XXX or 17XXX IEEE Floating Point 2 Registers 4 Bytes 62


The addressed slave responds with its address and the function code, followedby the information field. The information field contains a single byte indicatingthe number of data bytes returned and the actual data bytes. The data is sentas multiples of two bytes, with the binary content right justified. The data is sentMS Byte first.

Example: Write Short Integers 3012 through 3013 to Slave #2.


FUNC STARTING QUANTITY BYTE DATA DATA CRCADDR CODE POINT # OF POINTS COUNT HI LO HI LO CHECK

02 10 0B C4 00 02 04 1F 40 1F 3E ‘nn’ ‘nn’



02 10 0B C4 00 02 'nn' 'nn'

The slave responds with its address and the function code, starting pointnumber and quantity of points.

Byte Count: The Byte Countwill be increments of 2, 4, 8or 16 bytes depending on theaddress range of the pointsdownloaded.



Example: Write a Long Integer 5101 to Slave #4


FUNC STARTING QUANTITY BYTE DATA DATA CRCADDR CODE POINT # OF POINTS COUNT HI LO HI LO CHECK

04 10 13 ED 00 01 04 00 4F 20 4E ‘nn’ ‘nn’



04 10 13 ED 00 01 ‘nn’ ‘nn’

The slave responds with its address and the function code, starting pointnumber and quantity of points.

4.5.7. Function Code 65 (Read ASCII Text Buffer)Function Code 41HEX allows the master to read the contents of an ASCII textbuffer within an addressed slave. Data is always sent and received in packetscontaining 128 characters. Packets are numbered from 0 to 255. The size of thetext buffer is always an exact multiple of 128 bytes. The last buffer will containan ASCII ^2 (end of file character).

Example: Read 2nd packet of an ASCII Text Buffer Point 9001 from Slave # 5.


FUNCTION POINT # PACKET # CRCADDRESS CODE HI LO HI LO CHECK

05 41 23 29 00 01 ‘nn’ ‘nn’


FUNC POINT # PACKET # DATA ………… Data CRCADDR CODE HI LO HI Lo Byte 0 ………… BYTE 128 CHECK

05 41 23 29 00 01 30 ………… 41 ‘nn’ ‘nn’



4.5.8. Function Code 66 (Write ASCII Text Buffer)Function code 42HEX is used by the master to download an ASCII text buffer toan addressed slave. Data is always sent and received in packets containing 128characters. Packets are numbered from 0 to 255. The size of the text buffer isalways an exact multiple of 128 bytes. The last buffer will contain an ASCII ^2(end of file character).

Example: Write 1st packet of an ASCII Text Buffer Point 9002 to Slave # 2.


FUNC POINT # PACKET # DATA ………… DATA CRCADDR CODE HI LO HI Lo BYTE 0 ………… BYTE 128 CHECK

02 42 23 2A 00 00 39 ………… 2F ‘nn’ ‘nn’


FUNCTION POINT # PACKET # CRCADDRESS CODE HI LO HI LO CHECK

02 42 23 2A 00 00 ‘nn’ ‘nn’



4.6. Custom Data PacketsMany point numbers were left unused when numbering the variables within thedatabase. This allows for future growth and different application data. Withoutcustom data packets many polls would be required to retrieve data distributedthroughout the database. The custom data packets allows you to concatenate orjoin different groups or sets of data in any order and of any data type into 1message response. These custom packets are a type 03 read and are locatedat points 1, 201 and 401 in the database.

Example: Read Custom Data Packet #1 at Point 0001 from Slave #2.


FUNCTION STARTING POINT # QUANTITY OF POINTS CRC CHECK


02 03 00 01 00 00 ‘nn’ ‘nn’


FUNCTION BYTE DATA ………… DATA CRC CHECK

ADDRESS CODE COUNT HI LO ………… HI LO 16-BIT

02 03 ?? ?? ?? ………… ?? ?? ‘nn’ ‘nn’

Dummy numberof points

Depends on the numberand type of data points included

Depends on the sizeof packet configured



4.7. Peer-to-Peer on the Modbus LinkSerial Port #2 (Modbus Port #1) can be configured to allow peer-to-peercommunications. In this mode any Omni flow computer can act as a Modbusmaster and communicate with any other Modbus device on the communicationlink (see technical Bulletin TB-980401 “Peer-to-Peer Basics”).

4.8. Half Duplex Wiring ConfigurationRequired

The physical wiring of a Modbus link is usually full duplex, although the Modbuscommunication protocol is a half duplex protocol (i.e., both devices nevertransmit at the same time). For peer-to-peer communications the physical linkmust be wired for half duplex operation with all transmit and receive terminalswired in parallel (see Chapter 3). This allows all devices to hear alltransmissions; even their own.

4.9. Active MasterControl of the communication link is passed from the current master to the nextmaster in the sequence by broadcasting the ID number of the next master insequence. When that flow computer has completed its transaction list (seeChapter 5 'Peer-To-Peer') it will in turn hand over control to the next master inthe sequence.

4.10. Error RecoveryShould the next master in the sequence fail to take control of the link thecurrent master will search for an active master. To ensure best performance andfastest recovery in the event of an error, always number Modbus mastersconsecutively starting from 01.



5. Flow Equations and Algorithms

5.1. Flow Equations and Algorithms forRevision 20 (U.S. Units)

The calculations performed for liquid flows are as follows:

5.1.1. Flow Rate At Flowing Conditions: Bbls/Hr

Gross Flow Rate (IV) = Total Pulses per Second

Nominal K Factor (Pulses / Bbls) x 3600

When Linearization Correction Factor is Selected:

Gross Flow Rate = Gross (IV) = PulsesK Fator

x LCF x 3600

5.1.2. Net Flowrate At Base Conditions: Bbls/hr (ExceptPropylene)

Net Flowrate (GSV) = Gross Flowrate (IV) x VCF x CPL x MF

(NSV) = GSV x CSW

5.1.3. Mass Flowrate: KLbs/hr (Except Propylene)

Mass Flowrate = Gross Flowrate (IV) x Flowing Density x MF / 1000

If no Live Density is applied:

Mass Flowrate = Net Flowrate (GSV) x Density @ 60OF / 1000

Chapter 5 Flow Equations and Algorithms


5.1.4. EquivalenciesWhere:

MF = Meter Factor is entered from keypad, downloaded from SCADA or otherremote device, or automatically changed by a sequence of proves

Flowing Density = [Flowing gr/cc / .999012] x Wt. of water at 60OF & 14.696Psia.

Density at 60OF = SG 60 x Wt. of water at 60OF & 14.696 Psia.

CSW = [1- (% S&W/100)]

VCF = Volume Correction Factor (ASTM D1250)= Exp (-Alpha T x Delta T x (1+.8 x Alpha T x Delta T))

Delta T = T Actual - T Reference

Rhot = Product density at reference temperature= 141.5 x Density of Water / (API + 131.5)

Where API = API gravity at reference temperature

Alpha T = Correction of expansion at reference temperature

= [K0 + (K1 x Rhot)] / Rhot2

When the product is between the jet group and the gasoline group:

Alpha T = A + B / Rhot2

Where:

K0 and K1 are physical constants derived from mathematical data published bythe American Petroleum Institute in the API Manual of Petroleum MeasurementStandards and are as follows:

Table 6A, 23A Product Type: Crude Oil

Gravity API: 0-100, Relative Density: .6110 to 1.0760

K0 = 341.0957 K1 = 0.0

Table 6B, 23B Product Type: Fuel Oil

Gravity API: 0 -37, Relative Density: .8400 to 1.0760

K0 = 103.8720 K1 = 0.2701

Table 6B, 23B Product Type: Jet Group

Gravity API: 37.1-47.9, Relative Density: .7890 to .8395

K0 = 330.3010 K1 = 0.0

Table 6B, 23B Product Type: Gasolines

Gravity API: 52.1-85, Relative Density: .6535 to .7705

K0 = 192.4571 K1 = .2438



Table 6B, 23B Product Type: Between Jet and Gasoline

Gravity API: 48-52, Relative Density: .7710 to .7885

A = -0.00186840 B = 1489.0670

F = Compressibility factor for hydrocarbon using API Chapter 11.2.1 for liquids0 - 90 API using API Chapter 11.2.2 for Hydrocarbons 0.350 to 0.637relative density and -50OF to 140OF

CPL = Correction for pressure on liquid

= 1 / 1 - (P - Pe) x F

P = Flowing pressure in PSIG

Pe = Equilibrium vapor pressure which is calculated from the correlationsdeveloped by Dr. R. W. Hankinson et al of Phillips Petroleum Companyfor member companies of the GPA and published as GPA TechnicalPublication No. 15.

Temperature Range : -50OF to 140OF. Relative Density Range : .49 to .676

For Propylene

Net Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x CCF x MF

Mass Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x MF x Flowing SG x Wt of H2O @60OF &14.696 Psia

where:

CCF = Ratio of Calculated Flowing Density to Density at 60OF and SaturationPressure.

Calculated Flowing Density = Density at Flowing Temperature and PressureCalculated using API Chapter 11.3.3.2

Flowing SG = (Calculated Flowing Density in Lbs/Ft3 x 0.0161846) / 0.999012

Density of Ethane/Propane C3+ Mixes

Density at Flowing Temperature and Pressure is calculated based on acomputer algorithm developed by Phillips Petroleum Aug. 1992. The algorithmwas based on data points published in GPA TP1, TP2 and TP15 publications.

Density and other physical properties of Ethylene (IUPAC)

The physical properties of Ethylene calculated are: density, viscosity andisentropic exponent at flowing temperature and pressure. These are calculatedusing equations based on the International Union of Pure and AppliedChemistry Ethylene Tables (IUPAC).

Density of Ethylene (NIST)

Ethylene density is calculated using NIST 1045 standard (formerly NBS 1045)



Density of Ethylene (API)

Ethylene density is calculated using the API 11.3.2.1 (formerly API 2565). Thisis the unmodified original standard.

5.1.5. Prove Gross Flowrate (Uni- and Bi-Directional)= Total (Pulses/Second ) / (Pulses/Bbl) * 3600

5.1.6. Prove Gross Flowrate (Compact)= (Prover Volume / Tdvol) * 3600

5.1.7. Prove Meter Factor

= (PV x CTSP x CPSP x CTLP x CPLP) / (Prove Pulses x CTLM x CPLM)


PV = Base prover volume at 60OF and 0 PSIG

CTSP = Correction for temperature on steel

For Uni- or Bi-Directional Prover= 1 + ( T - Tbase) tc

tc = Coefficient of cubical expansion per OF of the prover tube

T = The average prover temperature in OF

For Compact Prover

= [1 + ( T - Tbase) tcp] x [1 + (Ti - Tbase) tci]

tcp = Square Coefficient of expansion per OF of the prover tube

tci = Linear Coefficient of expansion per OF of the prover switch rod

CPSP = Correction for pressure on steel= 1 + ((P- pbase x D) / (E x t))

P = Internal pressure in PSIG

D = Internal diameter in inches

E = Modulus of elasticity for prover tube

t = Wall thickness of prover tube in inches

Pbase = Base pressure of Prover

CTLP = Correction for the effect of prove temperature

= CTL, where T actual is replaced by average temperature at prover duringa prove



CPLP = Correction for the effect of prover pressure

= CPL, where P is replaced by average pressure at prover during a prove

CTLM = Volume correction factor of meter temperature

= CTL, where T actual is replaced by average temperature at meter duringa prove

CPLM = Correction for the effect of meter pressure

= CPL, where P is replaced by average pressure at meter during a prove

When Using Pulse Interpolation Method

Interpolated Counts = Integer Counts (Tdvol / Tdfmp)

When Proving Propylene Product

CPLM and CPLP are set to 1.0000

CTLM and CTLP are set equal to CCFM and CCFP

CCF = Ratio of Density at Flowing Conditions to Density at ReferenceConditions as per API Chapter 11.3.3.2

When Proving Ethylene Product

All liquid correction factors are set to 1.0000. Meter Factors are calculatedbased on mass flow at the meter verses ethylene mass in the prover.

5.1.9. PID Control

Primary Variable error % ep

ep = Primary Setpoint % Span - Primary Variable % Span Forward Action

ep = Primary Variable % Span - Primary Setpoint % Span Reverse Action

Secondary Variable error % es

es = Sec Gain * (Sec Setpoint % Span - Sec Variable % Span) Forward Action

es = Sec Gain * (Sec Variable % Span - Sec Setpoint % Span) Reverse Action

Control Output % C0 (Before Startup Limit Function)

C0 = Primary Gain * (ep + ∑e) Controlling on Primary Variable

C0 = Primary Gain * (es + ∑e) Controlling on Secondary Variable

Integral Error ∑e

∑e = (Rpts/minp * Sample period * ep) + ∑e n-1 Controlling on Primary Variable

∑e = (Rpts/mins * Sample period * es) + ∑e n-1 Controlling on Secondary Variable



5.1.10. Solartron Density gm/cc

Solartron density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by aSolartron frequency densitometer, and applying temperature and pressurecorrections as detailed below.

Uncompensated Density

D = K0 + (K1 x t) + (K2 * t2)

Where:

t = Densitometer oscillation time period in microseconds.

K0, K1, K2 = Calibration constants supplied by Solartron.

Temperature Compensated Density

Dt = D x (1 + K18 x (Tf - 68)) + K19 x (Tf - 68)

Where:

Tf = Temperature in degrees F

K18, K19 = Calibration constants supplied by Solartron.

Temperature & Pressure Compensated Density

Dpt = Dt x (1 + K20 x P) + (K21 x P)

Where:

Pf = Flowing pressure in PSIG

K20 = K20A + K20B x P

K21 = K21A + K21B x P

K20A, K20B, K21A & K21B are calibration constants supplied by Solartron.

Additional Equation for Velocity of Sound Effects (Solartron Only)

For LPG Products in the range of 0.350 - 0.550 gr/cc the following term can beapplied to the temperature and pressure compensated density Dtp.

Dvos = Dpt + Kr (Dpt - Kj)3

Users wishing to implement the above term are advised to contact Solartronto obtain a reworked calibration sheet containing the coefficients 'Kr' and 'Kj'.(Typically, Kr = 1.1 and Kj = 0.5)

User not wishing to implement the above term should enter 0.0 for Kr.



5.1.11. Sarasota Density gm/ccSarasota density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by aSarasota densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections asshown below.

Corrected Density = DCF x d0'(t -t0') / t0' [2 + K (t-t0') / t0']

Where:

t0 = A calibration constant in microseconds

t0' = Tcoef x (Tf - Tcal) + Pcoef x (Pf - Pcal) + t0

DCF = Density correction factor

do’ = A calibration constant, mass/volume*

t = The densitometer oscillation period in microseconds

K = Spool calibration constant

Tf = Flowing temperature OF

Tcoef = Temperature coefficient , microseconds / OF

Pf = Flowing pressure in psig

Pcoef = Pressure coefficient in microseconds / psig

Pcal = Calibration pressure in psig

* Note: d0' must be expressed in the units of gm/cc



5.1.12. UGC Density gm/ccUGC density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a UGCdensitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shownbelow.

Uncorrected density = K0 + (K1 x t) + (K2 x t2)

Corrected Density = DCF x (Kp3D2 + Kp2D + Kp1) (Pf - Pc) + (Kt3D2 + Kt2D + Kt1)x (Tf - T) + Density)

Where: K0, K1, K2 = Calibration constants of density probe which are enteredvia the keypad


D = Uncorrected density gm/cc

t = Densitometer oscillation time period in microseconds

Pf = Flowing Pressure in psig

Kt1,2,3 = Temperature constants

Kp1,2,3 = Pressure constants

Tf = Flowing temperature in Deg.F

T =Calibration temperature in Deg.F

Pc = Calibration pressure Psig

5.1.13. Densitometer Calibration ConstantsIn many cases the densitometer constants supplied by the manufacturers arebased on SI or Metric units. You must ensure that the constants entered arebased on gr/cc, degrees Fahrenheit and PSIG. Contact the densitometermanufacture or Omni if you require assistance.

5.1.14. Linearzing Coefficientsfor Helical Turbine Meters:

LCF = a + b/x + c/x^2 + d/x^3 + e/x^4 + f/x^5 + g/x^6

for PD Meters:

LCF = a + (x^c)/b

Where x = Flowrate Q/ Viscosity u

= (Bbl/hr) / Centistokes



5.2. Flow Equations and Algorithms forRevision 24 (Metric Units)

The calculations performed for liquid flows are as follows:

5.2.1. Flowrate At Flowing Conditions: m3/hr

Gross Flowrate = Total Pulses/Second / Nominal K-Factor (Pulses / m3) * 3600

5.2.2. Net Flowrate At Base Conditions: Nm3/hr (ExceptPropylene)

Net Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x VCF x CPL x MF

5.2.3. Mass Flowrate: ton/hr (Except Propylene)Mass Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x Flowing Density x MF / 1000

If no Live Density is applied:

Mass Flowrate = Net Flowrate x Density @15OC and equilibrium pressure /1000


MF = Meter Factor is entered from keypad, downloaded from SCADA or otherremote device, or automatically changed by a sequence of proves

VCF = Volume Correction Factor (ASTM D1250)= Exp (-Alpha T x Delta T x (1+.8 x Alpha T x Delta T))

Delta T = T Actual - T Reference

Alpha T = Correction of expansion at reference temperature

= [K0 + (K1 x Rhot)] / Rhot2

When the product is between the jet group and the gasoline group:

Alpha T = A + B / Rhot2

Where:

K0 and K1 are physical constants derived from mathematical data published bythe American Petroleum Institute in the API Manual of Petroleum MeasurementStandards and are as follows:



5.2.5. Calculations For Liquid Flows When Mass Pulsesis Selected

Gross Flowrate (m / hr) = Mass Pulses

Density x Meter Factor x 36003

Mass Flowrate (m hr) = Mass Pulses

K Factor x 36003 /

Net Flowrate (m hr) = Mass Pulses

Density x VCF x CPL x 36003 /

where:

K Factor = Pulses/kg

Table 54A Product Type: Crude Oil

Density: 610.5 to 1075 kg/m3

K0 = 613.9723 K1 = 0.0

Table 54B, Product Type: Fuel Oil

Density: 839 to 1075 kg/m3

K0 = 186.9696 K1 = 0.4862

Table 54B Product Type: Jet Group

Density: 788 to 838.5 kg/m3

K0 = 594.5418 K1 = 0.0

Table 54B Product Type: Gasolines

Density: 653 to 771 kg/m3

K0 = 346.4228 K1 = .4388

Table 54B Product Type: Between Jet and Gasoline

Density: 770.5 to 787.5 kg/m3

A = -0.00336312 B = 2680.3206

F = Compressibility factor for hydrocarbon using API Chapter 11.2.1M forCrude Oil (638 to 1075 kg/m3 density, -30OC to 90OC), using API Chapter11.2.2M for Hydrocarbon Products (350-637 kg/m3 density, -46OC to60OC).



CPL = Correction for pressure on liquid

= 1 / 1 - (P - Pe) x F

P = Flowing pressure in kpa g

Pe = Equilibrium vapor pressure which is calculated from the correlationsdeveloped by Dr. R. W. Hankinson et al of Phillips Petroleum Companyfor member companies of the GPA and published as GPA TechnicalPublication No. 15.

Temperature Range: -46OC to 60OC. Density Range: 490 to 676 kg/m3

For Propylene:

Net Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x CCF x MF

Mass Flowrate = Gross Flowrate x MF x Flowing Density (kg/m3)

where:

CCF = Ratio of Calculated Flowing Density to Density at 15 deg.C andSaturation Pressure.

Calculated Flowing Density = Density at Flowing Temperature and PressureCalculated using API Chapter 11.3.3.2*

* Calculated using US unit algorithm with input and output variables converted usingappropriate conversion factors.

5.2.6. Density of Ethane/Propane C3+ MixesDensity at Flowing Temperature and Pressure is calculated based on acomputer algorithm developed by Phillips Petroleum Aug. 1992. The algorithmwas based on data points published in GPA TP1, TP2 and TP15 publications.

5.2.7. Density and other physical properties of Ethylene(IUPAC)

The physical properties of Ethylene calculated are: density, viscosity andisentropic exponent at flowing temperature and pressure. These are calculatedusing equations based on the International Union of Pure and AppliedChemistry Ethylene Tables (IUPAC).

Density of Ethylene (NIST)

Ethylene density is calculated using NIST 1045 standard (formerly NBS 1045)

Density of Ethylene (API)

Ethylene density is calculated using the API 11.3.2.1* (formerly API 2565). Thisis the unmodified original standard.

* Calculated using US unit algorithm with input and output variables converted usingappropriate conversion factors.



5.2.8. Prove Gross Flowrate (Uni- and Bi-Directional)

= Total (Pulses/Second) / (Pulses/m3) * 3600

5.2.9. Prove Gross Flowrate (Compact)= (Prover Volume/ Tdvol) * 3600

5.2.10. Prove Meter Factor

= (PV x CTSP x CPSP x CTLP x CPLP) / [(Prove Pulses/K) x CTLM x CPLM]


PV = Base prover volume at 15OC and 0 kpa

CTSP = Correction for temperature on steel

For Uni- or Bi-Directional Prover

= 1 + ( T - Tbase) tc

tc = Coefficient of cubical expansion per OC of the prover tube

T = The average prover temperature in OC

Tbase = User entry

For Compact Prover

= [1 + ( T - Tbase) tcp] x [1 + (Ti - Tbase) tci]

tcp = Square Coefficient of expansion per OC of the prover tube

tci = Linear Coefficient of expansion per OC of the prover switch rod

CPSP = Correction for pressure on steel

= 1 + ((P - Pbase x D) / (E x t))

P = Internal pressure in kpa

D = Internal diameter in centimeters

E = Modulus of elasticity for prover tube

t = Wall thickness of prover tube in centimeters

CTLP = Correction for the effect of prove temperature

= CTL, where T actual is replaced by average temperature at prover duringa prove

CPLP = Correction for the effect of prover pressure

= CPL, where P is replaced by average pressure at prover during a prove



CTLM = Volume correction factor of meter temperature

= CTL, where T actual is replaced by average temperature at meter duringa prove

CPLM = Correction for the effect of meter pressure

= CPL, where P is replaced by average pressure at meter during a prove

When Using Pulse Interpolation Method

Interpolated Counts = Integer Counts (Tdvol / Tdfmp)

When Proving Propylene Product

CPLM and CPLP are set to 1.0000

CTLM and CTLP are set equal to CCFM and CCFP

CCF = Ratio of Density at Flowing Conditions to Density at ReferenceConditions as per API Chapter 11.3.3.2*

* Note: API Chapter 11.3.3.2 requires input variables to be US units of measure andprovides flowing density in US units. The Omni converts metric units to and from US unitsand uses the algorithm as is.

When Proving Ethylene Product

All liquid correction factors are set to 1.0000. Meter Factors are calculatedbased on mass flow at the meter verses ethylene mass in the prover.

5.2.12. Proving with Mass Pulses

MFm = BPV x C x C x Avg Density x DF

Pulses / K FactorTSP PSP

where:

BPV = Base Prover Volume

Avg Density = Average Density during each run

DF = Density Factor for the Densitometer

5.2.13. If no Prover Densitometer is used:

Prover Density = Meter Density x C x CC x C

TLP PLP

TLM PLM

5.2.14. PID Control

Primary Variable error % ep

ep = Primary Setpoint % Span - Primary Variable % Span ForwardAction

ep = Primary Variable % Span - Primary Setpoint % Span ReverseAction



Secondary Variable error % es

es = Sec Gain * (Sec Setpoint % Span - Sec Variable % Span) Forward Action

es = Sec Gain * (Sec Variable % Span - Sec Setpoint % Span) Reverse Action

Control Output % C0 (Before Startup Limit Function)

C0 = Primary Gain * (ep + ∑e) Controlling on Primary Variable

C0 = Primary Gain * (es + ∑e) Controlling on Secondary Variable

Integral Error ∑e

∑e = (Rpts/minp * Sample period * ep) + ∑e n-1 Controlling on Primary Variable

∑e = (Rpts/mins * Sample period * es) + ∑e n-1 Controlling on Secondary Variable



5.2.15. Solartron Density kg/m3

Solartron density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by aSolartron frequency densitometer, and applying temperature and pressurecorrections as detailed below.

Uncompensated Density

D = K0 + (K1 x t) + (K2 * t2)

Where:

t = Densitometer oscillation time period in microseconds.

K0, K1, K2 = Calibration constants supplied by Solartron.

Temperature Compensated Density

Dt = D x (1 + K18 x (Tf - 20)) + K19 x (Tf - 20)

Where:

Tf = Temperature in degrees C

K18, K19 = Calibration constants supplied by Solartron.

Temperature & Pressure Compensated Density

Dpt = Dt x (1 + K20 x P) + (K21 x P)

Where:

Pf = Flowing pressure in kpa.g

K20 = K20A + K20B x P

K21 = K21A + K21B x P

K20A, K20B, K21A & K21B are calibration constants supplied by Solartron. Theseare usually based on Bar pressure units. They must be converted to kpabased pressure units.

Additional Equation for Velocity of Sound Effects (Solartron Only)

For LPG Products in the range of 350 - 550 kg/m3 the following term can beapplied to the temperature and pressure compensated density Dtp.

Dvos = Dpt + Kr (Dpt - Kj)3

Users wishing to implement the above term are advised to contact Solartronto obtain a reworked calibration sheet containing the coefficients ' Kr' and ' Kj'.(Typically, Kr = 1.1 and Kj = 500.)

Users not wishing to implement the above term should enter 0.0 for Kr.



5.2.16. Sarasota Density kg/m3

Sarasota density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by aSarasota densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections asshown below.

Corrected Density = DCF x d0'(t -t0') / t0' [2 + K (t-t0') / t0']

Where:

t0 = A calibration constant in microseconds

t0' = Tcoef x (Tf - Tcal) + Pcoef x (Pf - Pcal) + t0


do’ = A calibration constant, mass/volume*

t = The densitometer oscillation period in microseconds

K = Spool calibration constant

Tf = Flowing temperature OC

Tcoef = Temperature coefficient , microseconds / OC

Pf = Flowing pressure in kpa.g

Pcoef = Pressure coefficient in microseconds / kpa.g

Pcal = Calibration pressure in kpa.g

* Note: do' must be expressed in the units of kg/m3



5.2.17. UGC Density kg/m3

UGC Density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a UGCdensitometer and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shownbelow.

Uncorrected density = K0 + (K1 x t) + (K2 x t2)

Corrected Density = DCF x (Kp3D2 + Kp2D + Kp1) (Pf - Pc) + (Kt3D2 + Kt2D + Kt1)x (Tf - T) + Density)

Where: K0, K1, K2 = Calibration constants of density probe which are enteredvia the keypad


D = Uncorrected density kg/m3

t = Densitometer oscillation time period in microseconds

Pf = Flowing Pressure in kpa.g

Kt1,2,3 = Temperature constants

Kp1,2,3 = Pressure constants

Tf = Flowing temperature in Deg.C

T =Calibration temperature in Deg.C

Pc = Calibration pressure kpa.g

5.2.18. Densitometer Calibration ConstantsIn many cases the densitometer constants supplied by the manufacturers arebased on SI or Metric units. You must ensure that the constants entered arebased on kg/m3, degrees Celsius and kpa⋅gauge. Contact the densitometermanufacture or Omni if you require assistance.

Volume 4 Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers

20/24.71+ w 04/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. i

MODBUS DATABASE ADDRESSESAND INDEX NUMBERS


1. User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001 - 2999)........................................ 1-1

1.1. Custom Data Packets or Modicon™ G51 Compatible Register Arrays...............1-1

1.2. Archive Control Flags.............................................................................................1-1

1.3. Status / Command Data..........................................................................................1-21.3.1. Reading and Writing the Physical Digital I/O....................................................... 1-2

1.3.2. Programmable Booleans....................................................................................... 1-2

1.3.3. Programmable Accumulator Points ..................................................................... 1-2

1.3.4. Meter Run Status and Alarm Points ..................................................................... 1-3

1.3.5. Micro Motion Alarm Status Points ..................................................................... 1-5

1.3.6. More Meter Run Status and Alarm Points ............................................................ 1-6

1.3.7. User Scratch Pad Boolean Points ........................................................................ 1-6

1.3.8. User Scratch Pad One-Shot Boolean Points........................................................ 1-6

1.3.9. Command Boolean Points/Variables.................................................................... 1-7

1.3.10. Meter Station Alarm and Status Points ............................................................ 1-10

1.3.11. Prover Alarm and Status Points ....................................................................... 1-14

1.3.12. Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags......................................................................... 1-16

1.3.13. Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status Points ................................... 1-17

1.3.14. Commands Which Cause Custom Data Packets to be Transmitted Without aPoll...................................................................................................................... 1-18

1.3.15. Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant Flow Computer System... 1-18

1.3.16. Commands to Recalculate and Print Selected Batch...................................... 1-19

1.3.17. Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags ...................................................................... 1-19


ii OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.20/24.71+ w 04/98

1.3.18. Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags .....................................................1-20

1.3.19. Status Booleans Relating to Redundant Flow Computer Systems.................1-21

1.3.20. More Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags............................................1-21

2. 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999) ............................................................................. 2-1

2.1. Custom Data Packet Definition Variables............................................................. 2-12.1.1. Custom Data Packet #1..........................................................................................2-1

2.1.2. Custom Data Packet #2..........................................................................................2-1

2.1.3. Custom Data Packet #3..........................................................................................2-1

2.2. Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data......................................................................... 2-2

2.3. Meter Run 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................................................... 2-2

2.4. Scratchpad 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................................................. 2-4

2.5. User Display Definition Variables.......................................................................... 2-42.5.1. User Display Number 1 ..........................................................................................2-4

2.5.2. User Display Number 2 ..........................................................................................2-4







2.6. Data Used to Access the Raw Data Archive Records.......................................... 2-6

2.7. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................................... 2-8

2.8. Meter Station 16-Bit Integer Data .......................................................................... 2-8

2.9. Batch Stack Storage of Product Numbers to Run ............................................. 2-102.9.1. Meter #1 Batch Sequence ....................................................................................2-10

2.9.2. Meter #2 Batch Sequence ....................................................................................2-10



2.10. Flow Computer Time and Date Variables ......................................................... 2-11

2.11. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data ........................................................... 2-12

2.12. Prover 16-Bit Integer Data ................................................................................. 2-12

3. 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001 - 4999) ............................................................ 3-1

3.1. Meter Run ASCII String Data.................................................................................. 3-1

3.2. Scratch Pad ASCII String Data .............................................................................. 3-2

3.3. User Display Definition String Variables............................................................... 3-2

3.4. String Variables Associated with the Station Auxiliary Inputs ............................ 3-3


20/24.71+ w 04/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. iii

3.5. Meter Station 8-Character ASCII String Data ........................................................3-33.5.1. Meter #1 Batch ID................................................................................................... 3-5

3.5.2. Meter #2 Batch ID................................................................................................... 3-5

3.5.3. Meter #3 Batch ID................................................................................................... 3-5

3.5.4. Meter #4 Batch ID................................................................................................... 3-6

3.6. Prover ASCII String Data ........................................................................................3-6

4. 32-Bit Integer Data (5001 - 5999) .............................................................................. 4-1

4.1. Meter Run 32-Bit Integer Data................................................................................4-1

4.2. Scratch Pad 32-Bit Integer Data ............................................................................4-4

4.3. Station 32-Bit Integer Data ....................................................................................4-5

4.4. More Meter Run 32-Bit Integer Data ......................................................................4-64.4.1. Meter #1 Batch Size ............................................................................................... 4-6

4.4.2. Meter #2 Batch Size ............................................................................................... 4-6

4.4.3. Meter #3 Batch Size ............................................................................................... 4-6

4.4.4. Meter #4 Batch Size ............................................................................................... 4-6

4.5. Prover 32-Bit Integer Data......................................................................................4-94.5.1. Compact Prover TDVOL and TDFMP Pulses ..................................................... 4-10

5. 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001 - 8999)......................................................... 5-1

5.1. Digital-to-Analog Outputs 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data..................................5-1

5.2. User Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data....................................................5-2

5.3. Programmable Accumulator 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Variables .....................5-2

5.4. Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ...........................................................5-3

5.5. Scratch Pad 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data........................................................5-6

5.6. PID Control 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data .........................................................5-7

5.7. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ..................................5-8

5.8. Miscellaneous Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data..................................5-10

5.9. Meter Station 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ....................................................5-11

5.10. Prover Data - IEEE Floating Point......................................................................5-155.10.1. Configuration Data for Prover........................................................................... 5-15

5.10.2. Last Prove Data.................................................................................................. 5-17

5.10.3. Data Rejected During Prove.............................................................................. 5-17

5.10.4. Prove Run Data.................................................................................................. 5-18

5.10.5. Prove Average Data ........................................................................................... 5-19

5.10.6. Prove Run - Master Meter Data ......................................................................... 5-20

5.10.7. Proving Series Data........................................................................................... 5-21

5.10.8. Data of Meter Being Proved .............................................................................. 5-22


iv OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.20/24.71+ w 04/98

5.10.9. Mass Prove Data.................................................................................................5-22

5.11. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data.............................. 5-245.11.1. Previous Batch Average ....................................................................................5-24

5.11.2. Previous Hour’s Average...................................................................................5-25

5.11.3. Previous Day’s Average.....................................................................................5-25

5.11.4. Statistical Moving Window Averages of Transducer Inputs............................5-26

5.11.5. Miscellaneous In Progress Averages................................................................5-26

5.11.6. Previous Batch and Daily Average Data ...........................................................5-26

5.11.7. More Miscellaneous In Progress Averages ......................................................5-27

5.11.8. Previous Batch Quantities.................................................................................5-27

5.11.9. Miscellaneous Live or Calculated Data.............................................................5-28

5.11.10. Station - Previous Batch Average Data...........................................................5-28

6. ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001 - 9499) ..................................................................... 6-1

6.1. Custom Report Templates..................................................................................... 6-1

6.2. Previous Batch Reports......................................................................................... 6-1

6.3. Previous Prove Reports......................................................................................... 6-2

6.4. Previous Daily Reports .......................................................................................... 6-2

6.5. Last Snapshot Report ............................................................................................ 6-2

6.6. Miscellaneous Report Buffer ................................................................................. 6-3

7. Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001 - 18999) .............................................. 7-1

7.1. Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................... 7-17.1.1. Meter Run Configuration Data...............................................................................7-1

7.1.2. Prover Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data .............................................................7-3

7.1.3. General Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data.................................7-4

7.1.4. Serial Port Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data.......................................................7-4

7.1.5. Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data ...........7-6

7.1.6. Programmable Logic Controller Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data....................7-7

7.1.7. Peer-to-Peer Setup Entries 16-Bit Integer Data ....................................................7-9

7.1.8. Raw Data Archive Files 16-Bit Integer Data ........................................................7-14

7.2. Flow Computer Configuration 16-Character ASCII String Data ........................ 7-17

7.3. Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit Long Integer Data ................................... 7-19

7.4. Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ........................ 7-27


20/24.71+ w 04/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. 1-1

1. User-Defined, Status and Command Data(0001 - 2999)

1.1. Custom Data Packets or Modicon™ G51Compatible Register Arrays

These three addresses specify reserved areas used to access user definedgroups of data variables. Data can be accessed as read only blocks of data orthe data is arranged as an array of adjacent 16-bit registers which can be reador written independently, if the Modicon Compatible mode is selected whensetting up the serial port.

0001 Custom Data Packet / Array #1Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode (for Packet/Array definition see Index3001-3040).

0201 Custom Data Packet / Array #2Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode(for Packet/Array definition see Index3041-3056).

0401 Custom Data Packet / Array #3 Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode(for Packet/Array definition see Indices3057-3096).

1.2. Archive Control FlagsData to be added into the Text Archive RAM is flagged by embedding BooleanPoint 1000 or 2000 within the appropriate custom report immediately precedingthe data to be archived. You may enable or disable the archiving of data byresetting or setting this variable.

1000 Archive Control FlagReport data following flag will be archived not printed.

2000 Archive Control FlagReport data following flag is printed and archived.

INFO - This data is accessedusing Modbus function code03 for reads and 16 forwrites. Boolean data bits arepacked 8 to a byte.

Chapter 1 User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001- 2999)


1.3. Status / Command Data

1.3.1. Reading and Writing the Physical Digital I/OThe current status of physical Digital I/O Points 01 through 12 (Omni 3000) or01 though 24 (Omni 6000) can be accessed by reading Modbus Indexes 1001through 1024.

All points which are to be written to exclusively via the Modbus must first havethe point assigned to Modbus control by entering zero (0) for 'Digital PointAssign' (see Chapter 9). Assigning to '0' prevents the Omni application softwarefrom overwriting the Modbus write.

1001 Digital I/O Point #1

to

1024 Digital I/O Point #24

1.3.2. Programmable BooleansPoints 1025 through 1088 are updated every 100 msec with the current value ofthe programmable Boolean statements (see Chapter 10). You may read fromor write to these variables, but anything that you write may be overwritten by theflow computer depending upon the logic functions programmed into the logicstatement.

1025 Boolean Point #25

to

1088 Boolean Point #88

1.3.3. Programmable Accumulator PointsPoints 1089 through 1099 are paired with Floating Point Variables 7089 through7099. For example, numeric data placed in 7089 can be output as pulses byassigning a Digital I/O Point to 1089.

1089 Programmable Accumulator #1Used to pulse out data placed into 7089.

to

1099 Programmable Accumulator #11Used to pulse out data placed into 7099.

IMPORTANT

Never set a physical I/O pointwhich has been assigned asan input as this could causea DC voltage to appear onthe input terminals of thatpoint which may conflict withany voltage already presenton those terminals.




1.3.4. Meter Run Status and Alarm PointsThe second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. Forexample: Point 1105 is the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #1. Point 1405would be the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #4.

* 1n01 Pulses - Gross Indicated Volume

* 1n02 Pulses - Net Volume (GSV)

* 1n03 Pulses - Mass

* 1n04 Pulses - Net Standard VolumeS&W corrected GSV.

1n05 Meter Run Active FlagFlow pulses above threshold frequency.

1n06 Meter Being ProvedActivates during proving of this meter.

1n07 Any Meter Run Specific Alarm This MeterClears if acknowledged.

1n08 Batch End AcknowledgeToggle ON/OFF.

1n09 Auto Prove ProblemTen consecutive attempts to auto-prove have failed.

1n10 Batch Preset ReachedBatch total equal or exceeds the batch preset.

1n11 Batch Preset Warning FlagBatch total is within ‘X’ volume or mass units of the batch preset (‘X’ is stored at 5n38).

1n12 Batch End Acknowledge500 msec pulse.

1n13 Calculation AlarmUsually temperature, pressure or density is outside of the range of the algorithm selected.

1n14 Override In Use - Density PressureOverride in use for any reason.

1n15 Auto Prove FlagIndicates that flowmeter ‘n’ will be automatically proved based on changes in flow rate ormeter run time, etc. It is cleared if prove sequence is completed or prove is aborted.

1n16 Override In Use - Temperature

1n17 Override In Use - Pressure

1n18 Override In Use - Gravity/Density Transducer

1n19 Override In Use - Density Temperature


Note:* Used to assign

accumulator to the frontpanel counters or digitalI/O points)



1n20 Flowrate - Low Low AlarmFor points 1n20-1n23, flow rate units are either gross volume or mass units (dependingon which unit is selected) for all products.

1n21 Flowrate - Low Alarm

1n22 Flowrate - High Alarm

1n23 Flowrate - High High Alarm

1n24 Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n25 Meter Temperature - Low Alarm

1n26 Meter Temperature - High Alarm

1n27 Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n28 Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n29 Meter Pressure - Low Alarm

1n30 Meter Pressure - High Alarm

1n31 Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n32 Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n33 Gravity/Density - Low alarm

1n34 Gravity/Density - High Alarm

1n35 Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n36 Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n37 Density Temperature - Low Alarm

1n38 Density Temperature - High Alarm

1n39 Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1n40 Spare

to

1n43 Spare

1n44 Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low

1n45 Density Pressure - Low Alarm

1n46 Density Pressure - High Alarm

1n47 Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High

1n48 Turbine - Meter Comparitor AlarmOnly when dual pulse fidelity check enabled.

1n49 Turbine - Channel A FailedTotal absence of pulses on Channel A.

1n50 Turbine - Channel B FailedTotal absence of pulses on Channel B.

1n51 Turbine - Difference Detected Between A & B ChannelMissing or added pulses.


INFO - Transducer and flowrate alarms remain set whilethe alarm condition exists.



1n52 Spare

1n53 Spare

1n54 Any Meter Run Specific Alarm This MeterClears only if acknowledged and alarm condition is cleared.

1n55 Meter Off-line FlagPulses for 500 msec when Meter Active (1n05) goes false.

1n56 Batch in Progress FlagSet when flow occurs at start of batch. Reset at batch end command.

1n57 Batch Start AcknowledgePulses for 500 msec when 1727-1730 command is received.

1n58 Meter Not Active / Batch SuspendedTrue when batch is in progress but Meter Active (1n05) is false.

1n59 Spare

1.3.5. Micro Motion Alarm Status PointsThe following Micro Motion Alarm points can be accessed from the RFT viaModbus and placed in the ‘Micro Motion Alarm Word’ as the destination address3n18 in the flow computer, to log the alarm points. The alarms will be loggedinto the computer alarm log and will be displayed on the LCD when they occur.

1n60 Micro Motion - EPROM Checksum Failure

1n61 Micro Motion - Transmitter Configuration Change Made

1n62 Micro Motion - Sensor Failure

1n63 Micro Motion - Temperature Sensor Failure

1n64 Micro Motion - Input Over-ranged

1n65 Micro Motion - Frequency Output Over-ranged

1n66 Micro Motion - Transmitter Not Configured

1n67 Micro Motion - Real Time Interrupt Failure

1n68 Micro Motion - mA Output Saturated

1n69 Micro Motion - mA Output Fixed

1n70 Micro Motion - Density Out of Limits

1n71 Micro Motion - Zeroing Operation Failure

1n72 Micro Motion - Transmitter Electronics Failure

1n73 Micro Motion - Slug Flow Detected

1n74 Micro Motion - Self-calibration In Progress

1n75 Micro Motion - Power Reset Occurred


INFO - The second digit ofthe index number defines thenumber of the meter run.

Micro Motion - Dataobtained via RS-485 link withMicro Motion device.



1.3.6. More Meter Run Status and Alarm Points

1n76 Batch Re-calculation Acknowledge FlagPulses for 500 msec when 1756 command received.

1n77 Correctable Totalizer Error OccurredPrimary totalizer checksum error secondary totalizer checksum OK.

1n78 Non-correctable Totalizer ErrorPrimary and secondary totalizers reset to zero because both checksums incorrect.

1n79 Spare

to

1n99 Spare

1.3.7. User Scratch Pad Boolean PointsThere are two groups of user scratchpad flags which can be used to store theresults of Boolean statements or to group data to be transmitted or receivedover a Modbus data link.

1501 Scratchpad - Point 01

to


1600 ReservedDO NOT USE!


to


1.3.8. User Scratch Pad One-Shot Boolean PointsMany times it is necessary to send a command which momentarily turns on aBoolean point. The following one-shot Boolean points simplify this action. Theyremain activated for exactly 2 seconds after they have been written to.

1650 Scratchpad One-Shot - Point 01

to

1699 Scratchpad One-Shot - Point 50

Note: See 2n00 area foreven more meter run alarmsand status points.



1.3.9. Command Boolean Points/VariablesUnless indicated as being ‘Level Sensitive’, most commands are 'edgetriggered'. To activate a command simply write a '1' (1 = True) to that point. It isnot necessary to write a '0' (0 = False) after the command. The status of acommand may also be read or used as input in a Boolean or variablestatement.

1700 DummyUsed only to reserve a digital I/O point to be used as an input. Point 1700 can beassigned to as many I/O points as needed.

1701 Prover Seal is OKMust be true when sphere is between detectors.

1702 End Batch - StationEnd batch on all meter runs defined in station.

1703 End Batch - Meter #1Points 1703-1706 individual end batch commands always work.




1707 Station - ‘Change Product’ StrobeRising edge triggers batch end and change to product selected by 1743-1746. Used withStation Product ID Bit 0-3 (1820-1823).

1708 Prove - Meter #1 RequestEdge triggered.




1712 Station Alarm AcknowledgeAcknowledges all alarms.

1713 Reset Power Failed FlagSee power fail Flag 1829.

1714 Trial Prove - Meter #1 RequestEdge triggered.




1718 Abort the Prove in Progress

1719 Request Local Snapshot ReportPrinted on local printer connected to flow computer.

1720 Snapshot Report to Modbus BufferMove Snapshot Report to buffer located at 9402.

1721 Alarm Report to Modbus BufferMove Alarm Report to buffer located at 9402.


INFO - Unless indicated asbeing ‘Level Sensitive’, mostcommands are 'edgetriggered'.

Hardware Interaction -Unreliable operation willresult if a command whichhas been assigned to adigital I/O point directly alsoneeds to be activated via aModbus write. This isbecause the On/Off state ofthe digital I/O point overwritesthe command point every 100msec and most commandpoint actions are onlytriggered every 500 msec.




# 1722 1st PID Permissive - Loop #1Points 1722-1725 enable PID startup and shutdown ramping for the respective meter(see 1752-1755). Level sensitive.




# 1726 Prover Start PermissiveChecked after temperature and flow are stable. Indicates that the meter divert valves arelined up. Enables prover sequencing when set.

1727 Start Ramp-up PID - Loop #1Initiates PID start up sequence by activating 1st and 2nd PID Permissive (see 1n57 foracknowledge pulse). These commands are edge triggered, simply turn on.




1731 Compact Prover Piston DownstreamApplies only to Brooks SVP, must be false before the piston can be re-launched.

1732 Alarm Acknowledge - Meter Run #1Points 1732-1735 are meter run specific alarms only.








1740 Spare

1741 Remote Up Arrow KeyDuplicates the keypad function. Level sensitive.

1742 Remote Down Arrow KeyDuplicates the keypad function. Level sensitive.

1743 Product Select - Bit 0Points 1743-1746 represent the product number to change to as offset binary; i.e., 0000 =product #1. 1111=product #16 (see 1707, 1747-1750).





Note:

# These points aredefaulted to ‘active’ andneed not be manipulatedunless the applicationrequires it.

Note:

* These points also affectstation totalizing (see alsopoint 1761). Levelsensitive.



1747 ‘Change Product’ Strobe - Meter #1For points 1747-1750, rising edge triggers a batch end and a change to the productspecified by points 1743-1746.




1751 Freeze Analog InputsUsed when calibrating analog inputs. Freezes ALL analogs. Level sensitive.

1752 2nd PID Permissive - Meter #1Points 1752-1755 limit the PID ramp-down to the minimum output % setting (see 1722-1725). Level sensitive.




1756 Spare

to

1759 Spare

1760 Leak Detection Freeze CommandStores totalizers, temperatures, pressures and density variables to temporary storage (see5n66 and 7634). This command is usually broadcast to all RTUs simultaneously.

1761 Disable Flow Totalizing StationThis command has no effect in individual meter run totalizing (see also points 1736-1739). Level sensitive.

1762 Remote Print - Previous Batch Report #1At local printer.

to

1769 Remote Print - Previous Batch Report #8

1770 Remote Print - Previous Daily Report #1At local printer.

to

1777 Remote Print - Previous Daily Report #8

1778 Remote Print - Previous Prove Report #1At local printer.

to

1785 Remote Print - Previous Prove Report #8

1786 Remote Print - Alarm ReportAt local printer.





1787 Implement Last Prove Meter FactorCauses the meter factor determined at the last complete prove to be implemented andsaved. Edge triggered.

1788 Shutdown PID - Loop #1Points 1788-1791 start ramp-down to ‘top off’ valve setting by deactivating the 1st PIDpermissive. These commands are edge triggered; simply turn on.




1792 Stop Flow PID - Loop #1Points 1792-1795 deactivate the 1st and 2nd PID permissive, causing the valve to ramp tothe ‘top off’ setting, and then immediately closes the valve. If the valve is already at the‘top off’ setting, the valve immediately closes.




1796 Raw Data Archive ‘Run’Level sensitive.

1797 Reconfigure ArchiveLevel sensitive.

1798 Recalculate and Print Selected Batch - StationThe previous batch selected by registered 3879 is recalculated. Edge triggered.

1.3.10. Meter Station Alarm and Status PointsData points not specifically connected to a particular meter run are groupedhere. These include flow computer general system alarms and metering groupalarms and status points.

* 1801 Positive - Gross Volume Pulses (IV)

* 1802 Positive - Net Volume Pulses (GSV)

* 1803 Positive - Mass Pulses

* 1804 Positive - S&W Corrected Net Volume Pulses (NSV)

* 1805 Negative - Gross Volume Pulses (IV)Points 1805-1808 refer to flow which occurs in the reverse direction.

* 1806 Negative - Net Volume Pulses (GSV)

* 1807 Negative - Mass Pulses

* 1808 Negative - S&W Corrected Net Volume Pulses (NSV)

1809 Flowrate - Low Low AlarmFor points 1809-1812, flow rate units are gross volume or mass units (depending onwhich unit is selected) for all products.

1810 Flowrate - Low Alarm

1811 Flowrate - High Alarm

1812 Flowrate - High High Alarm

Note: More ‘CommandBoolean Points’ are locatedat address 2701.


CAUTION

Stored archive data may belost! See chapter on ‘RawData Archive’ beforemanipulating these datapoints. These functions areduplicated using integers at13920 and 13921.


Note:

* Used to assignaccumulators to the frontpanel electromechanicalcounters and digital I/Opoints.



1813 Gravity Rate of Change FlagSet when rate of change of flowing SG exceeds the setting in 7889.

1814 Delayed Gravity Rate of ChangePoint 1813 delayed by volume specified in 7890.




1818 Batch Preset Warning FlagStation batch total is within ‘X’ volume or mass units of the batch preset (‘X’ is stored at5815).

1819 Batch Preset Reached FlagStation batch total equal or exceeds the batch preset

1820 Station - Current Product ID Bit 0Points 1820-1823 are the offset binary representation of the current running product forthe station (0000=Product #1; 1111=Product #16).




1824 Run Switching - Threshold Flag 1Flags 1824-1826 activate/deactivate depending on the run switching threshold settingsand are based on current station flow rates.






1830 Print Buffer Full FlagReports may be lost if 32K spooling buffer overflows due to the printer being ‘off-line’ orjammed with paper.








Note:




1837 EPROM error FlagInvalid checksum detected in EPROM memory.


1839 Zero ValueAlways false.



1842 Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #1 - Communication ErrorPoints 1842-1857 refer to an error occurred while communicating with the slave in theappropriate transaction. If a slave is involved in multiple transactions which fail, only thefirst will be flagged.

to






1862 Station Density - Transducer Failed Low

1863 Station Density - Low Alarm

1864 Station Density - High Alarm

1865 Station Density - Transducer Failed High

1866 Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low

to

1869 Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High

1870 Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low

to

1873 Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High

* 1874 Viscosity Appearing on Report Flag

* 1875 Net Standard Volumes (NSV) Appearing on Report Flag

1876 Batch Recalculation Acknowledge FlagPulses for 500 msec when the 1798 command is received.

1877 Spare


Notes:



* These flags are usuallyused to conditionally printappropriate informationmessages on the batchand daily reports.






*> 1881 Liter Units Selected FlagSet when Liter is the selected volume unit.

*> 1882 Cubic Meter Units Selected FlagSet when m3 is the selected volume unit.






to



to



to


1899 Net Volume @ 2nd Reference Temperature Appears on Reports FlagSet when 7699 is assigned a non-zero value. Prints on reports.


Note:





1.3.11. Prover Alarm and Status PointsAlarm and Status points connected with the meter proving system are groupedhere. The second digit ‘9’ defines a prover. See the 1700 area for commandpoints associated with the prover.

1901 Inlet (Left) Pressure - Transducer Low Alarm

1902 Inlet (Left) Pressure - Transducer High Alarm

1903 Outlet (Right) Pressure - Transducer Low Alarm

1904 Outlet (Right) Pressure - Transducer High Alarm

1905 Inlet (Left) Temperature - Transducer Low Alarm

1906 Inlet (Left) Temperature - Transducer High Alarm

1907 Outlet (Right) Temperature - Transducer Low Alarm

1908 Outlet (Right) Temperature - Transducer High Alarm

# 1909 Prove Aborted - Temperature Unstable

# 1910 Prove Aborted - Meter-to-Prover Temperature Deviation Exceeded

# 1911 Prove Sequence - Successfully Completed

# 1912 Prove Sequence Aborted - Did Not Complete

1913 1st Detector Sensed - Sphere in Flight Forward Direction

1914 3rd Detector Sensed - Sphere in Flight Reverse Direction

1915 2nd Detector Sensed - In Over-travel Forward Direction

1916 4th Detector Sensed - In Over-travel Reverse Direction

1917 Launch Sphere - Forward DirectionTwo second pulse.

1918 Launch Sphere - Reverse DirectionTwo second pulse.

# 1919 Prove Aborted - Run Repeatability Deviation Limit Exceeded

# 1920 Prove Aborted - Prover Seal Not OK - Sphere Between DetectorsSee 1701.

# 1921 Prove Aborted - Flowrate was Unstable

# 1922 Prove Aborted - No Prover Permissive ReceivedSee 1726.

# 1923 Meter Factor Obtained was Not Implemented

# 1924 Prove Aborted - Meter Selected was not FlowingSee 1n05.

1925 Plenum - Charge RequiredPoints 1925 and 1926 refer to Brooks small volume provers only. Plenum pressure can beautomatically adjusted by adding or venting nitrogen.

1926 Plenum - Vent Required

1927 Brooks Small Volume Prover - Run Command OutputActive low output to launch piston.

1928 Prove Sequence - Successfully Completed Flag500 msec pulse at end of prove.


Note:

# These alarms are activeuntil the next provesequence is started.



1929 Using Fixed Override - Prover Inlet (Left) Temperature

1930 Using Fixed Override - Prover Outlet (Right) temperature

1931 Using Fixed Override - Prover Inlet (Left) Pressure

1932 Using Fixed Override - Prover Outlet (Right) Pressure

* 1933 Mass Prove Flag

* 1934 Net Prove Flag

* 1935 Mass Prove Report Flag

* 1936 Net Prove Report Flag

* 1937 Mass Calculation in Use Flag

* 1938 Meter Factor Repeatability in Use FlagSet when run deviation is based on meter factor.

* 1939 Count Repeatability in Use FlagSet when run deviation is based on meter counts.

1940 Prover Density - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1941 Prover Density - Low Alarm

1942 Prover Density - High Alarm

1943 Prover Density - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1944 Prover Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

to

1947 Prover Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1948 Prover Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

to

1951 Prover Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm

1952 Spare

to

1954 Spare

* 1955 Viscosity Linearization - Proving Mode Selected

* 1956 Viscosity Linearization - Mode NOT Selected

1957 Spare

1958 Spare


Note:













1.3.12. Meter Totalizer Roll-over FlagsThe following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over(i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used toconditionally print characters (usually ‘**’) in front of the totalizer which hasrolled on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni ‘Custom ReportTemplate’ will show how this is accomplished. The second digit of the indexnumber defines the number of the meter run. See also points at 2801 for stationversions of these flags.


2n02 Batch In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n04 Batch In Progress - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n06 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n08 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n10 Daily In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n12 Daily In Progress - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n14 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n16 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n17 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n18 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n19 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n20 Previous Batch ‘n’ - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag


Note:


Note: The ‘In Progress’ flagsare those which the flowcomputer uses when printingthe reports on the connectedprinter.Use the ‘Previous’ flags if thereport is being printed byanother device such as aSCADA or MMI. This isnecessary because the flowcomputer clears the ‘InProgress’ data immediatelyafter it prints the local report.



2n21 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n22 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n23 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n24 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n26 Previous Daily - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n28 Previous Daily - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n30 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n32 Previous Daily - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n33 Batch In Progress - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n34 Daily In Progress - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n35 Previous Batch ‘n’ - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n36 Previous Daily - 2nd Net Totalizer Rollover Flag







to


2605 Inlet Temperature - Override in Use

2606 Outlet Temperature - Override in Use

2607 Inlet Pressure - Override in Use

2608 Outlet Pressure - Override in Use


2621 System Initialized FlagTrue after power up or system reset, clears when reset power fail command is set (1713).

2622 Day Light Savings Time‘On’ means that spring adjustment was made. ‘Off’ means autumn adjustment was made.

2623 Archive Memory Alarm0 = Ok; 1 = Fail.



INFO - To differentiatebetween normal messageresponses and unsolicitedtransmissions, Modbusfunction code 67 appears inthe transmitted messagerather than function code 03.




Activating any of the ‘edge triggered’ command points below causes theappropriate ‘Custom Data Packet’ to be transmitted out of the selected serialport without the serial port being polled for data. This function can be usefulwhen communicating via VSAT satellite systems where operating cost isdirectly proportional to RF bandwidth used.
















2714 Others - Master StatusAssigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers master status (see 2864).







1.3.16. Commands to Recalculate and Print SelectedBatch

2756 Recalculate and Print Selected Batch - Meter #1When one of the commands 2756-2759 is given, the previous batch selected by 3n51 isrecalculated. Edge triggered.




1.3.17. Station Totalizer Roll-over FlagsThe following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over(i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used toconditionally print characters (usually ‘**’ ) in front of the totalizer which hasrolled on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni ‘Custom ReportTemplate’ will show how this is accomplished. See also points at 2n01 for meterrun versions of flags.


2802 Batch In Progress - Net (GSV)) Totalizer Rollover Flag


2804 Batch In Progress - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag


2806 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag


2808 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag


2810 Daily In Progress - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag


2812 Daily In Progress - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag


2814 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - (GSV) Net Totalizer Rollover Flag


2816 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2817 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2818 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2819 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2820 Previous Batch ‘n’ - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag



In Progress Flags - The ‘InProgress’ flags are the flagswhich the flow computeruses when printing thereports on the connectedprinter.Use the ‘Previous’ flags if thereport is being printed byanother device such as anSCADA or MMI. This isnecessary because the flowcomputer clears the ‘InProgress’ data immediatelyafter it prints the local report.




2822 Previous - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag


2824 Previous - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag


2826 Previous Daily - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag


2828 Previous Daily - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag


2830 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net (GSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag

2831 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag2832 Previous Daily - Cumulative - NSV Totalizer Rollover Flag

2833 Batch In Progress - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag

2834 Daily In Progress - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag

2835 Previous Batch ‘n’ - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag

2836 Previous Daily - 2nd Ref. Temperature - Net Total Rollover Flag

2837 Spare

to

2851 Spare












2862 Spare



Note: It is unlikely that theuser would have any use forthese variables.




2863 Watchdog Status OutNormally High Watchdog. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system (see2713).







2869 Spare

to

2999 Spare




2. 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999)

2.1. Custom Data Packet Definition Variables

2.1.1. Custom Data Packet #1The 16-bit integers needed to define the 20 groups of data that make upCustom Data Packet #1 which is accessed at database Index 0001 are listedbelow.

3001 Group 1 - Starting Index Point Number

3002 Group 1 - Number of Index Points

to



2.1.2. Custom Data Packet #2The 16-bit integers needed to define the 8 groups of data that make up CustomData Packet #2 which is accessed at database Index 0201 are listed below.



to






to



INFO - These short integersare accessed using Modbusfunction code 03 for reads,06 for single writes and 16for multiple register writes.

Chapter 2 16-Bit Integer Data (3001- 3999)


2.2. Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data

> 3097 Select Units0=m3; 1=Liter.

3098 Number of Totalizer DigitsTotalizers roll at: 0=9 digits; 1=8 digits.

3099 Select Batch Preset Unit0=Net; 1= Gross; 2=Mass.

2.3. Meter Run 16-Bit Integer DataThe second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. Forexample: 3106 is the 'Meter Active Frequency' for Meter Run # 1. The samepoint for Meter Run # 4 would be 3406.

3n01 Override Code - TemperatureFor points 3n01-3n05: 0=Never use; 1=Always use; 2=Use if transmitter fails; 3=Iftransmitter fails use last hours average.

3n02 Override Code - Pressure

3n03 Override Code - Gravity/Density

3n04 Override Code - Density Temperature

3n05 Override Code - Density Pressure

3n06 Active Threshold HzPoint 1n05 is set when flow pulses exceed this frequency.

3n07 Prover Volume SelectBrooks SVP: 0=Use downstream; 1=Use upstream.

3n08 Auto Prove Enable0=No auto-prove; 1=Enable auto-prove.

3n09 Spare

3n10 Viscosity Linearized Gross (IV) Volume0=No; 1=Apply Liquid Correction Factor (LCF).

3n11 Spare

3n12 Spare

3n13 Meter Factor Used in Net and Mass0=No; 1=Yes.

3n14 Is Meter Already Temperature Compensated?0=No; 1=Yes.

3n15 Viscosity Correction Polynomial0=Positive Displacement Meter; 1=Helical Turbine Meter.

3n16 BS&W Source0=None; 1=Auxiliary #1; 2=Auxiliary #2; 3=Auxiliary #3; 4=Auxiliary #4; 5=Modbus.


Note:




3n17 Viscosity Source0=None; 1=Auxiliary #1; 2=Auxiliary #2; 3=Auxiliary #3; 4=Auxiliary #4; 5=Modbus.

3n18 Micro Motion - Alarm WordVia RS-485 from device (see also 1n60 -1n75).

3n19 PID Control ModeDo not write if 3n20 is ‘1’. 1=Manual; 0=Auto.

3n20 Setpoint ModeRead only. DO NOT WRITE! 1=Local; 0=Remote.

3n21 PID Loop StatusRead only. 1=Secondary; 0=Primary.

3n22 Frequency Point - K Factor #1For points 3n22-3n33, see the 17500 area for matching K-Factors.

3n23 Frequency Point - K Factor #2











3n34 Comparitor Error ThresholdWhen ‘dual pulse’ error checking enabled only.

3n35 Spare

to

3n39 Spare

# 3n40 Current Net (GSV) Flowrate

* 3n41 Net (GSV) Totalizer

# 3n42 Current Gross Flowrate

* 3n43 Gross Total

# 3n44 Current Mass Flowrate

* 3n45 Mass Total

~ 3n46 Current Meter Run Pressure

~ 3n47 Current Meter Run Temperature

~ 3n48 Current Transducer Density/Gravity

# 3n49 Current S&W Corrected Net (NSV) Flowrate

* 3n50 S&W Corrected Net (NSV) Total

3n51 Move Previous Batch Number to Print Area

3n52 Number of Calculation Times of Batch Report


Notes:

# 2s complement numbersbased on span entries17176 through 17189.Values expressed aspercentages of span intenth percent increments;.i.e., 1000 represents100.0%

* Unsigned integertotalizers cumulativebased. They roll at 65536.

~ 2s complement numbersbased on the 4-20 mAspans. Values areexpressed as percentagesof span in tenth percentincrements; i.e., 1000equals 100.0 %.



2.4. Scratchpad 16-Bit Integer DataNinety-nine integer registers are provided for user scratch pad. These registersare typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peer-to-peeroperations or similar operations.

3501 Scratchpad - Short Integer #1

to


2.5. User Display Definition VariablesThe 16-bit integers needed to define the variables that appear in the eight UserDisplays are listed below. Look in the 4601 area for string associated withsetting up User Displays.

2.5.1. User Display Number 1

3601 Database Index Number of 1st Variable

3602 Decimal Places for 1st Variable

3603 Database Index Number of 2nd Variable

3604 Decimal Places for 2nd Variable

3605 Database Index Number of 3rd Variable

3606 Decimal Places for 3rd Variable

3607 Database Index Number of 4th Variable

3608 Decimal Places for 4th Variable



to




to







to




to




to




to




to





2.6. Data Used to Access the Raw DataArchive Records

See the chapter describing how to use the raw data archiving features of theflow computer including how to manipulate the ‘pointers’ below.

3701 Archive 701 - Maximum RecordsNumber of data records in archive file.

3702 Archive 701 - Current Record NumberNumber of the last record updated.

3703 Archive 701 - Request Record NumberWrite the number of the record you wish to read.



















2.7. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data

3737 Archive File System - Memory Allocation Status0=OK; 1=Allocation Error.

3738 Time TagMM/DD or DD/MM format.

3739 Time TagYY/HH format

3740 Time TagMM/SS format.

3741 New ArchiveBit 0-Bit 9 for files 701-710

3742 Spare

to

3768 Spare

3769 Number of Historical Alarms to Send to Modbus BufferThe number of historical alarms indicated are written to the Modbus buffer (9402)

3770 Spare

to

3799 Spare

2.8. Meter Station 16-Bit Integer Data

~ 3800 Special Diagnostic FunctionUsed to enable rigorous ‘Audit Trail’ reporting of all serial port transactions (see sidebar note).

3801 Running Product NumberCommon Batch Stack - Station.

# 3802 Current Net (GSV) Flowrate

* 3803 Net (GSV) Totalizer

# 3804 Current Gross (IV)Flowrate

* 3805 Gross (IV) Totalizer

# 3806 Current Mass Flowrate

* 3807 Mass Totalizer

# 3808 Current Pressure

# 3809 Current Temperature

# 3810 Current Gravity/Density

3811 Allen Bradley - CRC Error Counter

3812 Allen Bradley - Message ‘Type’ Error Counter

Application Revision20/24.71+ - This databasecorresponds to ApplicationRevision 20/24.71+ forTurbine/PositiveDisplacement/CoriolisLiquid Flow MeteringSystems, with K FactorLinearization. Both US andmetric unit versions areconsidered.

Notes:

* Unsigned integertotalizers cumulativebased. They roll at65536.

~ To avoid flushing theaudit trail, audit eventsother than complete‘downloads’ to the flowcomputer are usually notdocumented in the ‘audittrail’ unless serial portpasswords have beenenabled. If pass-wordsare enabled, the targetaddress is recorded forsingle point writes.Rigorous auditing of aserial port or group ofserial ports can beactivated by placing theappropriate hexadecimalcode in 3800 (S = SerialPort):

00 00 00 AA = Audit S100 00 AA 00 = Audit S200 AA 00 00 = Audit S3AA 00 00 00 = Audit S4To monitor multipleports; e.g:

AA 00 AA 00 = Audit S4& S2

# 2s complement numbersbased on span entries17176 through 17189.Values expressed aspercentages of span intenth percentincrements. i.e. 1000represents 100.0% . Noover range or underrange checking is done.



3813 Algorithm Select - Product #1Points 3813-3828 select the API, GPA, ASTM, NIST calculations that will be used whenselecting these products.

3814 Algorithm Select - Product #2















3829 Flow Average FactorNumber of 500 msec calculation cycles to average.

3830 Print Priority0=Not sharing a printer; 1=Master; n=slaves 2-12.

3831 Number of Nulls After CRUsed to slow data to a printer if no hardware handshake.

3832 Print Interval in MinutesTime interval between automatic snapshot reports.

3833 Automatic - Weekly Batch Select0=None; 1=Monday; 7=Sunday.

3834 Automatic - Monthly Batch Select0=None; 1=1st day of the month.

3835 Automatic - Hourly Batch Select0=No; 1=Yes.

3836 Default Report Templates0=Custom templates; 1=Default reports.

3837 Batch Stack Mode Select0=Independent stacks; 1=Common stack.

3838 Clear Daily @ Batch End Select0=24hr Totals; 1=Cleared at batch end.

3839 Spare

to

3841 Spare

3842 Select Date TypeSelects date format: 0=dd/mm/yy; 1=mm/dd/yy.




2.9. Batch Stack Storage of ProductNumbers to Run

The following 24 registers are treated as either one 24-position shift stack or, 4separate 6-position shift stacks depending upon register 3837. Data in thestack(s) is shifted automatically at the beginning of a new batch. A newbatch starts after a either a ‘station batch end’ (1702) or ‘meter batch end’ (1703to 1706) command is received and meter pulses occur. Data on the top of astack is the ‘current running product’ for the batch in progress. This entry isdiscarded (popped off) and replaced with the entry below on receipt of a ‘batchend’. A ‘batch stack may be stopped from shifting by leaving the second entry‘0’. Note that these entries are only part of the ‘batch stack’. Matching entries forother data types such as long integers and strings can be found at 5819 and4852. All three ‘data type’ stacks act as a single unit, they all synchronize andshift together.

2.9.1. Meter #1 Batch Sequence

3843 Sequence #1 - Individual Batch Stack or Common Batch Stack -Sequence #1













Application Revision20/24.71 - This databasecorresponds to ApplicationRevision 20/24.71 forTurbine/PositiveDisplacement/Coriolis LiquidFlow Metering Systems, withK Factor Linearization. BothUS and metric unit versionsare considered.












3862 Sequence #2 - Individual Batch Stack or Common Batch Stack -Product #20





2.10. Flow Computer Time and Date VariablesTime and date can be read and written here. See also 4847 and 4848.

3867 Current - Hour0-23.

3868 Current - Minute0-59.

3869 Current - Second0-59.

3870 Current - Month1-12.

3871 Current - Day of Month1-31.

3872 Current - Year0-99; Year 2000=00.

3873 Current - Day of WeekRead only. 1=Monday; 7=Sunday.

3874 Disable Daily Report0=print daily report; 1=no daily report.





3875 Spare

3876 Override Code - Density

3877 Override Code - Density Temperature

3878 Override Code - Density Pressure

3879 Move Previous ‘n’ Batch to Print Area

3880 Density Factor - Select A/B - Product #1

to

3895 Density Factor - Select A/B - Product #16

3896 Spare

to

3899 Spare

2.12. Prover 16-Bit Integer Data

3901 Prove Run

3902 Proving Meter Number

3903 Outlet (Right) - Pressure %0-999.

3904 Outlet (Right) - Temperature %0-999.

3905 Inlet (Left) - Pressure %0-999.

3906 Inlet (Left) - Temperature %0-999.

3907 Prove Counts

3908 Override Code - Prover Density/Gravity

3909 Override Code - Prover Density Temperature

3910 Override Code - Prover Density Pressure

3911 Enable Trial Prove Report0=No; 1=Yes.




3912 Number of Passes/Run

3913 Number of Prover Runs to AverageMaximum is 10.

3914 Number of Total Prove Runs

3915 Inactivity TimerSeconds.

3916 Temperature Stability Sample Time

3917 Override Code - Inlet (Left) Temperature

3918 Override Code - Outlet (Right) Temperature

3919 Override Code - Inlet (Left) Pressure

3920 Override Code - Outlet (Right) Pressure

3921 Uni- or Bi-directional Prover0=Uni, 1=Bi; 2=Uni-Compact; 3=Bi-SVP; 4=Master Meter Prove; 5=2 Series Bi.

3922 Automatic Implement Prove Meter Factor

3923 Apply Meter Factor Retroactively0=No; 1=Yes.

3924 Prover Density Stability Timer

3925 Flow Stable PeriodMinutes.

3926 Meter Down PeriodHours.

3927 Print Run Passes (Compact Prove)0=No; 1=Yes.

3928 Run Repeatability on Meter Factor0=No; 1=Yes.

3929 Spare

3930 Proved Meter Temperature Compensated

3931 Run # - 4th Last

3932 Run # - 3rd Last

3933 Run # - 2nd Last

3934 Run # - Last

3935 Run # - 1st Run

3936 Run # - 2nd Run

3937 Run # - 3rd Run

3938 Run # - 4th Run

3939 Run # -5th Run





3944 Run # - 10th Run




3945 Current Prove Passes

3946 Spare

to

3999 Spare



3. 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001 - 4999)

3.1. Meter Run ASCII String DataThe second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. Forexample: 4114 is the 'Meter ID' for Meter Run #1. The same point for MeterRun #4 would be 4414. Each ASCII string is 8 characters occupying theequivalent of 4 short integer registers (see the side bar comments).

4n01 Running Batch - Start Date

4n02 Running Batch - Start Time

# 4n03 Batch End - Date

# 4n04 Batch End - Time

4n05 Running Product Name

4n06 Current - Calculation ModeAlgorithm set used, in string format.

4n07 Current - Batch IDCharacters 1-8.

4n08 Current - Batch IDCharacters 9-16.

4n09 Meter Factor Used in Net / MassUsed on reports. It contains ‘Yes’ or ‘No’. Characters 1-8.

4n10 Linear Correction Factor (LCF) Used in GrossCharacters 1-8

4n11 Meter - Serial Number

4n12 Meter - Size

4n13 Meter - Model

4n14 Meter - ID

4n15 Flow Meter Tag

4n16 Spare

4n17 Transmitter Tag - Temperature

4n18 Transmitter Tag - Pressure

4n19 Transmitter Tag - Densitometer

4n20 Transmitter Tag - Density Temperature

4n21 Transmitter Tag - Density Pressure

4n22 Output Tag - PID Control

INFO - These ASCII stringvariables are accessed usingModbus function codes 03for all reads and 16 for allwrites.

Note: The index number ofeach string refers to thecomplete string whichoccupies the space of 4registers. It must beaccessed as a complete unit.You cannot read or write apartial string. Each pointcounts as one point in thenormal Omni Modbus mode.

Modicon CompatibleMode - For the purpose ofpoint count only, each stringcounts as 4 registers. Thestarting address of the stringstill applies.

Note:

# Last batch end for thismeter run.

Chapter 3 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001- 4999)


4n23 Spare

to

4n30 Spare

4n31 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch Start Date

4n32 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch Start Time

4n33 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch End date

4n34 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch End Time

4n35 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Product Name

4n36 Previous Batch ‘n’ - API Table

4n37 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch IDCharacters 1-8.

4n38 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch IDCharacters 9-16.

4n39 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Meter Factor Used in Net

3.2. Scratch Pad ASCII String DataStorage for ninety-nine ASCII strings is provided for user scratch pad. Theseregisters are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer operations or similar operations.

4501 Scratchpad - ASCII String #1

to


3.3. User Display Definition String VariablesThe string variables which define the descriptor tags that appear in the eightUser Displays and the key press combinations which recall the displays arelisted below.

4601 User Display #1 - Descriptor Tag - Line #1





to


4633 User Display #1 - Key Press Sequence

to



INFO - See 3601 area formore data points needed tosetup the user displays.



3.4. String Variables Associated with theStation Auxiliary Inputs

4707 Auxiliary Tag - Input #1

to


3.5. Meter Station 8-Character ASCII StringData

4801 Station - Batch Start Date

4802 Station - Batch Start Time

4803 Station - Batch End Date

4804 Station - Batch End Time

4805 Station - Running Product Name

4806 Station - Current Calculation Mode

4807 Date of Last Database ChangeUpdated each time the Audit Trail is updated.

4808 Time of Last Database Change

4809 Reserved

4810 Esc Sequence to Print CondensedRaw ASCII characters sent to printer (see 14149 for Hex ASCII setup).

4811 Esc Sequence to Print NormalRaw ASCII characters sent to printer (see 14150 for Hex ASCII setup).

4812 Daylight Savings StartsDate format field (**/**/**).

4813 Daylight Savings EndsDate format field (**/**/**).

4814 Density/Gravity Tag

4815 Station - ID

4816 Station - Density Temperature Tag

4817 Station - Density Pressure Tag

4818 Print Interval Timer Start TimeTime format field (**:**:**).

4819 Time to Print Daily ReportTime format field (**:**:**).

4820 Product #1 - Name

to







4836 Flow Computer ID

4837 Company NameCharacters 1-8.




4841 Company NameCharacters 33-38. (Note: Last two characters are spares.)

4842 Station LocationCharacters 1-8.




4846 Station LocationCharacters 33-38. (Note: Last two characters are spares.)

* 4847 Current DatePoint 3842 selects date format (see also 3870-3872).

* 4848 Current TimeSee also 3867-3869.

4849 Software Version NumberExample: 20.71

4850 Online Password / EPROM ChecksumDual function point. Write password. Read provides EPROM Checksum.

4851 Spare

Application Revision20/24.71 - This databasecorresponds to ApplicationRevision 20/24.71 forTurbine/PositiveDisplacement/Coriolis LiquidFlow Metering Systems, withK Factor Linearization. BothUS and metric unit versionsare considered.

Note:

* The flow computer timeand date can be set bywriting to these ASCIIvariables. Be sure toinclude the colons ( : ) inthe time string and theslashes ( / ) in the datestring.



3.5.1. Meter #1 Batch ID


4853 Batch ID


4855 Batch ID


4857 Batch ID


4859 Batch ID


4861 Batch ID


4863 Batch ID



4865 Batch ID

to


4875 Batch ID



4877 Batch ID

to


4887 Batch ID








4889 Batch ID

to


4899 Batch ID

3.6. Prover ASCII String Data

4901 Prove Meter - Product Name

4902 Prove Meter - Calculation Mode Text

4903 Prove Meter - Batch IDCharacters 1-8.

4904 Prove Meter - Batch IDCharacters 9-16.

4905 Prove Meter - Serial NumberManufacturer’s Number.

4906 Prove Meter - Size

4907 Prove Meter - ModelManufacturer Model Number.

4908 Prove Meter - ID

4909 Prove Meter - Tag

4910 Spare

4911 Prover - Inlet (Left) Temperature Tag

4912 Prover - Outlet (Right) Temperature Tag

4913 Prover - Inlet (Left) Pressure Tag

4914 Prover - Outlet (Right) Pressure Tag

4915 Plenum Pressure Tag

4916 Prover - Density/Gravity Tag

4917 Prover - Density Temperature Tag

4918 Prover - Density Pressure Tag

4919 Spare

4920 Reserved




4921 Prove - Date

4922 Prove - Time

4923 Selected Table Text

4924 Prove - Meter Product Name

4925 Prove - Meter ID

4926 Prove - Meter Serial #

4927 Prove - Meter Size

4928 Prove - Meter Model

4929 Previous Prove - Meter Factor Date

4930 Previous Prove - Meter Factor Time

4931 Prove - Result StringCharacters 1-8. Printed on Prove Report.

4932 Prove - Result StringCharacters 9-16.



4935 Prove - Reason StringCharacters 1-8. Printed on Prove Report.

4936 Prove - Reason StringCharacters 9-16.



4939 Master Meter - ID

4940 Master Meter - Serial Number

4941 Master Meter - Size

4942 Master Meter - Model



4. 32-Bit Integer Data (5001 - 5999)

4.1. Meter Run 32-Bit Integer DataThe second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. Forexample: 5105 is the 'Cumulative Gross Totalizer' for Meter Run # 1. The samepoint for Meter Run # 4 would be 5405.

5n01 Batch in Progress - Gross TotalizerPoints 5n01-5n04 represent the total batch quantities measured so far for the batch inprogress. Results are moved to 5n50 area at the end of the batch.

* 5n02 Batch in Progress - Net Totalizer

* 5n03 Batch in Progress - Mass Totalizer

* 5n04 Batch in Progress - NSV Totalizer

* 5n05 Cumulative In Progress - Gross TotalizerPoints 5n05-5n08 are non-resetable totalizers which are snapshot for opening readings.

* 5n06 Cumulative In Progress - Net Totalizer

* 5n07 Cumulative In Progress - Mass Totalizer

* 5n08 Cumulative In Progress - NSV Totalizer

* 5n09 Today’s In Progress - Gross TotalizerPoints 5n09-5n12 are total daily quantities measured since the ‘day start hour’ today.These are moved to the 5n54 area at the start of a new day.

* 5n10 Today’s In Progress - Net Totalizer

* 5n11 Today’s In Progress - Mass Totalizer

* 5n12 Today’s In Progress - NSV Totalizer

# 5n13 Meter Factor in Use Now

# 5n14 Average Meter Factor - Batch in Progress

# 5n15 Average Meter Factor - Today’s In Progress

5n16 Batch Preset Remaining

5n17 Running Product Number

5n18 ‘Dual Pulse’ (Comparitor) Error Counts for BatchWhen pulse fidelity check enabled only.

5n19 In Progress Batch Report NumberIncrements each batch start.

5n20 Raw Input Counts (500 msec)Turbine counts this 500 msec cycle.

INFO - These 32-bit longinteger variables areaccessed using Modbusfunction code 03 for reads,06 for single writes and 16for multiple writes. Note thatthe index number for eachvariable refers to onecomplete long integer whichoccupies the space of two16-bit registers. It must beaccessed as a complete unit.You cannot read or write apartial 32-bit integer. Each32-bit long integer counts asone point in the normal OmniModbus mode.

Modicon CompatibleMode - For the purpose ofpoint count only, each 32-bitinteger counts as tworegisters. The startingaddress of the 32-bit integerstill applies.

Notes:

* The increment for alltotalizers depends uponthe ‘totalizer resolution’settings shown in the‘Factor Setup’ menu ofOmniCom. They can onlybe changed via thekeypad entries made inthe ‘Pass-wordMaintenance’ menu after‘Resetting all Totalizers’.

# These Variables arestored with 4 places afterthe implied decimal point.i.e. 10000 is interpretedas 1.0000



# 5n21 Meter Factor - Product #1








# 5n29 Meter Factor - Product # 9








# 5n37 Meter Factor - Change Retroactive Barrels/m3

# 5n38 Batch Preset WarningBbl/m3.

5n39 Spare

5n40 Spare

# 5n41 Micro Motion - Frequency

5n42 Micro Motion - Mass Total

5n43 In Progress - Raw Input Counts for HourRaw turbine counts for the hour so far.

5n44 In Progress - Gross Total for HourPoints 5n44-5n47 represent the total quantities for the current hour in progress. Thesewill be moved to 5n74 area at the start of the new hour.

5n45 In Progress - Net Total for Hour

5n46 In Progress - Mass Total for Hour

5n47 In Progress - NSV Total for Hour

5n48 In Progress - Raw Input Counts for BatchRaw turbine counts; this batch.

5n49 In Progress - Raw Input Counts for DayRaw turbine counts; today so far.

5n50 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Gross TotalizerPoints 5n50-5n53 represent the total batch quantities for the previous batch.

5n51 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net Totalizer

5n52 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Mass Totalizer

5n53 Previous Batch ‘n’ - NSV Totalizer




5n54 Previous Day’s - Gross TotalizerPoints 5n54-5n57 are the total quantities for the previous day; ‘day start hour’ to ‘daystart hour’.

5n55 Previous Day’s - Net Totalizer

5n56 Previous Day’s - Mass Totalizer

5n57 Previous Day’s - NSV Totalizer

5n58 Current Batch - Opening Gross TotalizerPoints 5n58-5n61 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at the start of the batch in progress.These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous batch.

5n59 Current Batch - Opening Net Totalizer

5n60 Current Batch - Opening Mass Totalizer

5n61 Current Batch - Opening NSV Totalizer

5n62 Today’s - Opening Gross TotalizerPoints 5n62-5n65 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at day start hour for today. Thesevariables are also the closing totalizers for the previous day.

5n63 Today’s - Opening Net Totalizer

5n64 Today’s - Opening Mass Totalizer

5n65 Today’s - Opening NSV Totalizer

5n66 Cumulative - Gross Total @ Leak Detection Freeze CommandPoints 5n66-5n69 are cumulative totalizers snapshot when the Leak Detection FreezeCommand (1760) is received (see also points 7634, 7644, 7654 & 7664).

5n67 Cumulative - Net Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command

5n68 Cumulative - Mass Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command

5n69 Cumulative - NSV Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command

5n70 Increment - Gross TotalizerPoints 5n70-5n73 contains the incremental integer counts that were added to thetotalizers for this current cycle (500msec).

5n71 Increment - Net Totalizer

5n72 Increment - Mass Totalizer

5n73 Increment - NSV Totalizer

5n74 Previous Hourly - Gross TotalPoints 5n74-5n77 represent the total quantities measured for the last hour. These aremoved here from 5n44 area at the end of hour.

5n75 Previous Hourly - Net Total

5n76 Previous Hourly - Mass Total

5n77 Previous Hourly - NSV Total

5n78 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Opening GrossData from 5n58 area gets moved to 5n78-5n81 at the end of each batch.

5n79 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Opening Net

5n80 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Opening Mass

5n81 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Opening NSV





5n82 Previous Day’s - Opening GrossData from 5n62 area gets moved to 5n82-5n85 at the end/beginning of each day.

5n83 Previous Day’s - Opening Net

5n84 Previous Day’s - Opening Mass

5n85 Previous Day’s - Opening NSV

5n86 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Closing Gross Total

5n87 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Closing Net Total

5n88 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Closing Mass Total

5n89 Previous Batch ‘n’ - NSV Total

5n90 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch Report NumberUse this value on Batch Report.

5n91 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch Product Number

5n92 Spare

to

5n95 Spare

5n96 Batch Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature

5n97 Daily Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature

5n98 Previous Batch ‘n’ Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature

5n99 Previous Daily Net @ 2nd Reference temperature

4.2. Scratch Pad 32-Bit Integer DataNinety-nine 32-bit integer registers are provided for user scratch pad. Theseregisters are typically used to store the results of variable statementcalculations, to group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer operations orsimilar types of operations.

5501 Scratchpad - 32-Bit Integer #1

to

5599 Scratchpad - 32-Bit Integer #99




4.3. Station 32-Bit Integer Data

* 5801 Batch in Progress - Gross TotalizerPoints 5801-5804 are total batch quantities measured so far for the batch in progress.These are moved to 5850 area at the end of the batch.

* 5802 Batch in Progress - Net Totalizer

* 5803 Batch in Progress - Mass Totalizer

* 5804 Batch in Progress - NSV Totalizer

* 5805 Cumulative in Progress - Gross TotalizerPoints 5805-5808 are non-resetable totalizers which are snapshot for opening readings.

* 5806 Cumulative in Progress - Net Totalizer

* 5807 Cumulative in Progress - Mass Totalizer

* 5808 Cumulative in Progress - NSV Totalizer

* 5809 Today’s in Progress - Gross TotalizerPoints 5809-5812 are total daily quantities measured since the ‘day start hour’ today.These are moved to the 5854 area at the start of a new day.

* 5810 Today’s in Progress - Net Totalizer

* 5811 Today’s in Progress - Mass Totalizer

* 5812 Today’s in Progress - NSV Totalizer

5813 Spare

5814 Line Pack Remaining

5815 Batch Preset Warning

5816 Batch Preset Remaining

5817 Running Product ID

5818 Batch Number



Note:




4.4. More Meter Run 32-Bit Integer Data

4.4.1. Meter #1 Batch Size

5819 Current Batch Size or Common Batch Stack Sequence #1 - BatchSize

5820 Batch Sequence #2 - Batch Size or Common Batch Stack Sequence#2 - Batch Size







to




to




to


5843 Spare




5844 Station - In Progress - Gross Total for HourPoints 5844-5847 represent the total station quantities for the current hour in progress.These will be moved to 5n74 area at the start of the new hour.

5845 Station - In Progress - Net Total for Hour

5846 Station - In Progress - Mass Total for Hour

5847 Station - In Progress - NSV Total for Hour

5848 Time in hhmmss formatRead (e.g.: the number 103125 represents 10:31:25).

5849 Date in yymmdd formatRead (e.g.: the number 970527 represents May 27, 1997). The date format used heredoes not follow the US/European format selection.

5850 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Gross TotalizerPoints 5850-5853 are total batch quantities for the previous batch. These are moved herefrom 5801 area at the end of a batch.

5851 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net Totalizer

5852 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Mass Totalizer

5853 Previous Batch ‘n’ - NSV Totalizer

5854 Previous Day’s - Gross TotalizerPoints 5854-5857 are total quantities for the previous day; ‘day start hour’ to ‘day starthour’. These are moved here from 5809 area at the end of the day.

5855 Previous Day’s - Net Totalizer

5856 Previous Day’s - Mass Totalizer

5857 Previous Day’s - NSV Totalizer

5858 Current Batch - Opening Gross TotalizerPoints 5858-5861 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at the start of the batch in progress.These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous batch.

5859 Current Batch - Opening Net Totalizer

5860 Current Batch - Opening Mass Totalizer

5861 Current Batch - Opening NSV Totalizer

5862 Today’s - Opening Gross TotalizerPoints 5862-5865 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at day start hour for today. Thesevariables are also the closing totalizers for the previous day.

5863 Today’s - Opening Net Totalizer

5864 Today’s - Opening Mass Totalizer

5865 Today’s - Opening NSV Totalizer

5866 Cumulative - Gross Total @ FreezePoints 5866-5869 are cumulative totalizers snapshot when the Leak Detection FreezeCommand (1760) is received (see also points 7634, 7644, 7654 & 7664).

5867 Cumulative - Net Total @ Freeze

5868 Cumulative - Mass Total @ Freeze

5869 Cumulative - NSV Total @ Freeze





* 5870 Increment - Gross TotalizerPoints 5870-5873 contain the incremental integer counts that were added to the totalizersfor this current cycle.

* 5871 Increment - Net Totalizer

* 5872 Increment - Mass Totalizer

* 5873 Increment - NSV Totalizer

5874 Previous Hourly - GrossPoints 5874-5877 represent the total quantities measured for the last hour. These aremoved here from 5844 area at the end of hour.

5875 Previous Hourly - Net

5876 Previous Hourly - Mass

5877 Previous Hourly - NSV

5878 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Opening GrossData from 5858 area gets moved to points 5878-5881 at the end of each batch.

5879 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Opening Net

5880 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Opening Mass

5881 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Opening NSV

5882 Previous Day’s - Opening GrossData from 5862 area gets moved to points 5882-5885 at the end/beginning of each day.

5883 Previous Day’s - Opening Net

5884 Previous Day’s - Opening Mass

5885 Previous Day’s - Opening NSV

5886 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Closing Gross Total

5887 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Closing Net Total

5888 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Closing Mass Total

5889 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Closing NSV Total

5890 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Batch Number

5891 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Product Number

5892 Spare

to

5895 Spare

5896 Batch Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature

5897 Daily Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature

5898 Previous Batch ‘n’ Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature

5899 Previous Daily Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature


Note:




4.5. Prover 32-Bit Integer Data

5901 Prove Counts

5902 TDVOL Timer PulsesTimer Pulses accumulated between detectors switches (each pulse is 200nsec).

5903 TDFMP Timer PulsesTimer Pulses accumulated between first flow pulse after each detector switches (eachpulse is 200nsec).

5904 Spare

to

5919 Spare

5920 Pulses - Total Linear Correction Factor - 1st Run

to

5929 Pulses - Total Linear Correction Factor - 10th Run

5930 Net Total since Last Prove

5931 Prove Report Number

5932 Previous Prove Totalizer

5933 Totalizer Reading This Prove

5934 Pulses - Forward - 4th Last

5935 Pulses - Total - 4th Last

5936 Pulses - Forward - 3rd Last

5937 Pulses - Total - 3rd Last

5938 Pulses - Forward - 2nd Last

5939 Pulses - Total - 2nd Last

5940 Pulses - Forward - Last

5941 Pulses - Total - Last

5942 Pulses - Forward - 1st Run

5943 Pulses - Total - 1st Run

to

5960 Pulses - Forward - 10th Run

5961 Pulses - Total - 10th Run

5962 Previous Meter Factor - from Last Prove

5963 Actual Meter Factor - Current Run

5964 Flowmeter Frequency - 1st Run

to

5973 Flowmeter Frequency - 10th Run





4.5.1. Compact Prover TDVOL and TDFMP Pulses

5974 Compact Prover - TDVOL Timer Pulses - 1st Run

5975 Compact Prover - TDFMP Timer Pulses 1st Run

to

5992 Compact Prover - TDVOL Timer Pulses - 10th Run

5993 Compact Prover - TDFMP Timer Pulses - 10th Run

5994 Meter Factor - Trial Prove

5995 Meter Factor - Linear

5996 Meter Factor - GSVp/GSVm

5997 Spare

to

5999 Spare




5. 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001 - 8999)

6001 Reserved

to

6999 Reserved

5.1. Digital-to-Analog Outputs 32-Bit IEEEFloating Point Data

Any analog output point which physically exists can be read via these pointnumbers. Data returned is expressed as a percentage of the output value.

Only those points which physically exist and have been assigned to Modbuscontrol by assigning zero (0) at 'D/A Out Assign' (see Volume 3) should bewritten to Outputs which are not assigned to Modbus control will be overwrittenevery 500 msec by the flow computer. Data written should be within the rangeof -5.00 to 11000.

7001 Analog Output #1

to

7012 Analog Output #12

7013 Spare

to

7024 Spare


INFO - These 32 Bit IEEEFloating Point variables areaccessed using Modbusfunction code 03 for allreads, 06 for single writes or16 for single or multiplewrites. Note that the indexnumber for each variablerefers to the completefloating point variable whichoccupies the space of two16- bit registers. It must beaccessed as a complete unit.You cannot read or write apartial variable. Each floatingpoint variable counts as onepoint in the normal OmniModbus mode.

Modicon Compatible Mode- For the purpose of pointcount only, each IEEE floatpoint counts as 2 registers.The starting address of thevariable still applies.

Chapter 5 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (6001- 8999)


5.2. User Variables 32-Bit IEEE FloatingPoint Data

Database points 7025 through 7088 have been assigned as user variables (seeVolume 3). The value contained in the variable depends on the associatedprogram statement which is evaluated every 500 msec. You may read thesevariables at any time. You may also write to these variables but anything youwrite may be overwritten by the flow computer depending on the evaluation ofthe statement. Leave the statement blank or simply put a comment or promptinto it to avoid having the flow computer overwrite it.

7025 User-Programmable Variable #1

to

7088 User-Programmable Variable #64

5.3. Programmable Accumulator 32-Bit IEEEFloating Point Variables

Points 7089 through 7099 are paired with Boolean Point Variables 1089 through1099. Numeric data placed in 7089, for example, can be output as pulses byassigning a digital I/O point to 1089.

7089 Programmable Accumulator #1Data placed into 7089 is pulse out using 1089.

to

7099 Programmable Accumulator #11Data placed into 7099 is pulse out using 1099.





5.4. Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating PointData

The second digit of the index number defines the meter run number. Forexample: 7105 is the 'Temperature' variable for Meter Run #1. The same pointfor Meter Run #4 would be 7405.

< 7n01 Flowrate - GrossBbl or m3/hr.

< 7n02 Flowrate - NetBbl or m3/hr.

< 7n03 Flowrate - MassKlb or ton/hr.

< 7n04 Flowrate - NSVBbl or m3/hr.

* 7n05 Temperature

* 7n06 Pressure

* 7n07 DensityLb/ft3 or kg/m3. Indicates calculated propylene/ethylene density.

* 7n08 Flowing Transducer Density Before FactoringTemperature and pressure corrected.

* 7n09 Flowing Transducer Density After Factoring7n09=7n08 x 7n43.

* 7n10 Density Transducer TemperatureCorrects for transducer expansion effects.

* 7n11 Density Transducer PressureInformation only! Transducer unaffected by pressure.

* 7n12 API Flowing

* 7n13 API @ 60 °°F / API @ Reference Temperature

* 7n14 Specific Gravity Flowing

* 7n15 Specific Gravity @ 60 °°F / Density @ 15 °°C

* 7n16 VCFVolume Correction Factor.

* 7n17 CPLCorrection Factor for Pressure on Liquids.


INFO - The second digit ofthe index number defines thenumber of the meter runnumber.

INFO - Calculated averagescan be either ‘flow weighted’or ‘time weighted dependingupon point number.

Notes:

< Current live values whichare updated every500msec.

* Current values in usenow.



7n18 Batch In Progress - Average Meter Run Temperature

7n19 Batch In Progress - Average Meter Run Pressure

7n20 Batch In Progress - Average of Density Flowing

7n21 Batch In Progress - Average Density Transducer Temperature

7n22 Batch In Progress - Average Density Transducer Pressure

7n23 Batch In Progress - Average API Flowing

7n24 Batch In Progress - Average API @ 60 °°F / API @ ReferenceTemperature

7n25 Batch In Progress - Average Flowing Specific Gravity

7n26 Batch In Progress - Average Specific Gravity @ 60 °°F / Density @Reference Temperature

7n27 Batch In Progress - Average VCF

7n28 Batch In Progress - Average CPL

7n29 Day In Progress - Average Temperature

7n30 Day In Progress - Average Pressure

7n31 Day In Progress - Average Density Flowing

7n32 Day In Progress - Average Density Transducer Temperature

7n33 Day In Progress - Average Density Transducer Pressure

7n34 Day In Progress - Average API Flowing

7n35 Day In Progress - Average API @ 60 °°F / API @ ReferenceTemperature

7n36 Day In Progress - Average Specific Gravity Flowing

7n37 Day In Progress - Average Specific Gravity @ 60 °°F / Density @Reference Temperature

* ~ 7n38 Day In Progress - Average, VCF

* ~ 7n39 Day In Progress - Average, CPL

* ~ 7n40 Current K Factor

7n41 Weighted Average K Factor - Batch Flow

7n42 Weighted Average K Factor - Daily Flow

7n43 Density - Factor in Use

7n44 Density - Factor B

7n45 Z Factor of Carbon Dioxide

7n46 Current Viscosity CST



Notes:

* Current values in usenow.

~ The data in thesevariables may becalculated real time or thesame data as enteredelsewhere depending onthe fluid type selected orthe equation of stateselected.



7n47 Coefficient bViscosity coefficients used with helical or turbine meters.

7n48 Coefficient a

7n49 LCFLinear Correction Factor.

7n50 Coefficient c

7n51 Coefficient d

7n52 Coefficient e

7n53 Coefficient f

7n54 Coefficient g

7n55 Spare

to

7n60 Spare

# 7n61 Meter Run Gross/Mass Flowrate - Low Limit

# 7n62 Meter Run Gross/Mass Flowrate - High Limit

7n63 Meter Temperature - Low Limit

7n64 Meter Temperature - High Limit

7n65 Meter Temperature - Override

7n66 Meter Temperature - @ 4mA

7n67 Meter Temperature - @ 20mA

7n68 Meter Pressure - Low Limit

to

7n72 Meter Pressure - @ 20mA

7n73 Gravity / Density Transducer - Low LimitIndicated at either flowing or reference conditions, depending on which is selected.

to

7n77 Gravity / Density Transducer - @ 20mA

7n78 Density Transducer Temperature - Low Limit

to

7n82 Density Transducer Temperature - @ 20mA

7n83 Density Transducer Pressure - Low Limit

to

7n87 Density Transducer Pressure - @ 20mA

7n88 Density Transducer - Correction FactorUsed to correct densitometer.


INFO - The second digit ofthe index number defines thenumber of the meter runnumber.

Note:

# Indicates meter run grossor mass flow ratedepending on which unitis selected



* 7n89 Densitometer - Constant #1K0/D0.

* 7n90 Densitometer - Constant #2K1/T0.

* 7n91 Densitometer - Constant #3K2/Tcoef.

* 7n92 Densitometer - Constant #4K18/Tcal/Tc.

* 7n93 Densitometer - Constant #5K19/Pcoef/Kt1.

* 7n94 Densitometer - Constant #6K20A/Pcal/Kt2.

* 7n95 Densitometer - Constant #7K20B/Kt3.

* 7n96 Densitometer - Constant #8K21A/Pc.

* 7n97 Densitometer - Constant #9K21B/Kp1.

* 7n98 Densitometer - Constant #10Kr. (For UGC densitometers: Kr/KP2.)

* 7n99 Densitometer - Constant #11Kj. (For UGC densitometers: Kj/KP3.)

5.5. Scratch Pad 32-Bit IEEE Floating PointData

Ninety-nine IEEE 32-bit floating point registers are provided for user scratchpad. These registers are typically used to store and group data that will bemoved via peer-to-peer operations or similar uses.

7501 Scratchpad - IEEE Float #1

to

7599 Scratchpad - IEEE Float #99



Note:

* Various factors used byvarious vendors of digitaldensitometers.



5.6. PID Control 32-Bit IEEE Floating PointData

# 7601 PID Control #1 - Local Primary Variable Setpoint Value

* 7602 PID Control #1 - Primary Setpoint Value in Use

~ 7603 PID Control #1 - Remote Primary Setpoint Value

^ 7604 PID Control #1 - Control Output Percent

< 7605 PID Control #1 - Secondary Variable Setpoint
















7621 Spare

to

7623 Spare


Notes:

# Do not write to thesevariables. They areprovided for read onlyinformation.

* Writing to these variableswill have no effect as theflow computer overwritesthese values with eitherthe remote or localprimary Setpoint valuedepending on theoperating mode of thecontrol loop.

~ Only writes made while inthe 'Remote' mode will bemeaningful. Thesevariables are overwrittenwith the current value ofthe primary controlledvariable when in all othermodes.

^ Only writes made while inthe 'Manual' mode will bemeaningful. Thesevariables are overwrittenby the flow computer in allother operating modes.

< Writes to these variablesare always accepted.



5.7. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEEFloating Point Data

7624 Equilibrium Pressure - Meter Run #1Psig/kPa (current live values).

7625 Equilibrium Pressure - Meter Run #2Psig or kPa.



7628 Equilibrium Pressure - ProverPsig or kPa.

7629 Vapor Pressure @ 100 °°F - Meter Run #1Current live values.

7630 Vapor Pressure @ 100 °°F - Meter Run #2



7633 Vapor Pressure @ 100 °°F - Prover

# 7634 Meter Run #1 - Temperature @ Leak Detect Freeze CommandSee 1760 command.

# 7635 Meter Run #1 - Pressure @ Leak Detection Freeze Command

# 7636 Meter Run #1 - Density / Gravity @ Leak Detect Freeze Command

7637 Spare

to

7639 Spare

* 7640 Meter Run #1 - Gross Volume Increment

* 7641 Meter Run #1 - Net Increment Volume

* 7642 Meter Run #1 - Mass Increment

* 7643 Meter Run #1 - NSV Increment

# 7644 Meter Run #2 - Temperature @ Freeze Command

# 7645 Meter Run #2 - Pressure @ Freeze Command

# 7646 Meter Run #2 - Density / Gravity @ Freeze Command

7647 Spare

to

7649 Spare




INFO - See 7n01 through7n99 for more meter runrelated data.




* 7651 Meter Run #2 - Net Volume Increment






7657 Spare

to

7659 Spare








7667 Spare

to

7669 Spare





# 7674 Station - Temperature @ Freeze Command

# 7675 Station - Pressure @ Freeze Command

# 7676 Station - Density / Gravity @ Freeze Command

7677 Spare

to

7679 Spare



INFO - See 7n01 through7n99 for more meter runrelated data.

Notes:

* These variables representthe incremental flowwhich is accumulatedeach 500 msec.calculation cycle in floatformat (also see points5n70 for integer format).

# Flowing variables aresnapshot and stored herewhen the Leak DetectionFreeze command (1760)is received (also seepoints 5n66).



* 7680 Station - Gross Volume Increment

* 7681 Station - Net Volume Increment

* 7682 Station - Mass Volume Increment

* 7683 Station - NSV Volume Increment

7684 Spare

to

7698 Spare

7699 2nd Reference TemperatureOther than 60°F or 15°C.

5.8. Miscellaneous Variables 32-Bit IEEEFloating Point Data

The percentage of span for each of the 24 process input channels is availableas a floating point variable point.

7701 Process Input - Channel # 1

to

7724 Process Input - Channel # 24

7725 Spare

to

7782 Spare

7783 Sequence #2 Batch Size - Meter #1








7791 Batch Preset Warning - Meter #1




7795 Batch Preset Warning - Station


Notes:

* These variables representthe incremental flowwhich is accumulatedeach 500 msec.calculation cycle in floatformat (also see points5n70 for integer format).

INFO - The data is onlymeaningful when the inputchannel is used as an analoginput or a Honeywell digitaltransducer input. For pulsetype input channels see datapoints located at 15131through 15154.



7796 Meter Factor - Meter #1




5.9. Meter Station 32-Bit IEEE Floating PointData

7801 Station - Gross FlowrateBbl or m3/hr.

7802 Station - Net FlowrateBbl or m3/hr.

7803 Station - Mass FlowrateKlbs/hr.

7804 Station - NSV FlowrateBbl or m3/hr.

7805 Gravity/Density

7806 Density Temperature

7807 Density Pressure

7808 Spare

7809 Auxiliary Input #1Points 7809-7812 represent miscellaneous live input signals provided for user-definedfunctions.

7810 Auxiliary Input #2



7813 Time - hhmmssRead only (e.g.: the number 103125 represents 10:31:25).

7814 Date - yymmddRead only (e.g.: the number 970527 represents May 27/ 97; the date format used heredoes not follow the US/European format selection).

7815 Spare

to

7820 Spare





7821 Product #1 - API Override / Thermal Expansion Coefficient

7822 Product #1 - Specific Gravity Override / Reference Density


































7853 Gross/Mass Flowrate - Low LimitIndicates flow rate low limit in gross or mass units, depending on which unit is selected.

7854 Gross/Mass Flowrate - High LimitIndicates flow rate high limit in gross or mass units, depending on which unit is selected.

7855 Flow Threshold - Run Switch Flag #1 - Decreasing FlowSee 1824.

7856 Flow Threshold - Run Switch Flag #1 - Increasing Flow





7861 Station - Pressure - Low LimitPoints 7861-7865 are configuration settings used when the pressure is a live 4-20 mA.

7862 Station - Pressure - High Limit

7863 Station - Pressure - Override

7864 Station - Pressure - @ 4mA

7865 Station - Pressure - @ 20mA

7866 Station - Gravity/Density - Low LimitPoints 7866-7870 are configuration settings used when the gravity/density is a live 4-20mA.

7867 Station - Gravity/Density - High Limit

7868 Station - Gravity/Density - Override

7869 Station - Gravity/Density - @ 4mA

7870 Station - Gravity/Density - @ 20mA

7871 Station - Density Temperature - Low LimitPoints 7871-7875 are configuration settings used when the gravity/density is a live 4-20mA.

7872 Station - Density Temperature - High Limit

7873 Station - Density Temperature - Override

7874 Station - Density Temperature - @ 4mA

7875 Station - Density Temperature - @ 20mA





7876 Station - Density Correction Factor

* 7877 Station - Densitometer - Constant #1K0/D0.

* 7878 Station - Densitometer - Constant #2K1/T0.

* 7879 Station - Densitometer - Constant #3K2/Tcoef.

* 7880 Station - Densitometer - Constant #4K18/Tcal/Tc.

* 7881 Station - Densitometer - Constant #5K19/Pcoef/Kt1.

* 7882 Station - Densitometer - Constant #6K20A/Pcal/Kt2.

* 7883 Station - Densitometer - Constant #7K20B/Kt3.

* 7884 Station - Densitometer - Constant #8K21A/Pc.

* 7885 Station - Densitometer - Constant #9K21B/KP1.

* 7886 Station - Densitometer - Constant #10Kr. (For UGC densitometers: Kr/KP2.)

* 7887 Station - Densitometer - Constant #11Kj. (For UGC densitometers: Kj/KP3.)

# 7888 Weight of WaterLbm/Bbl or Kg/m3.

# 7889 Gravity Rate of Change

# 7890 Line Pack DelayNet Bbl or m3.

# 7891 Local Atmospheric Pressure

# 7892 Contract Base Temperature

# 7893 Kg/m3 to lb/ft3

# 7894 Contract Base Pressure

7895 Spare

7896 Auto Prove Mode - Startup Flow

7897 Auto Prove Mode - Maximum Flow between Proves

7898 Auto Prove Mode - Minimum Flow Rate Change

7899 Auto Prove Mode - Delta Flow RateFlow rate unstable check.


Notes:


# Miscellaneous conversionfactors and constants.



5.10. Prover Data - IEEE Floating Point

7901 Prover - Inlet (Left) Temperature

7902 Prover - Outlet (Right) Temperature

7903 Prover - Temperature in Use

7904 Prover - Inlet (Left) Pressure

7905 Prover - Outlet (Right) Pressure

7906 Prover - Pressure in Use

7907 Prover - Plenum PressureCompact Prover.

7908 Prover - Run Time

7909 Volume - Master Prove

7910 Volume - Test Meter

7911 Calculated Plenum Pressure

7912 Prover - Density/Gravity

7913 Prover - Density Temperature

7914 Prover - Density Pressure

7915 Prover - Uncorrected Density

7916 Prover - Density

7917 Invar Rod TemperatureSmall Volume Prover.

7918 OvertravelBbls/m3.

5.10.1. Configuration Data for Prover

7919 Prover - VolumeBbls/m3.

7920 Prover - DiameterInches/mm.

7921 Prover - Wall ThicknessInches/mm.

7922 Prover - Modulus of Elasticity

7923 Prover - Coefficient of Cubic Expansion

7924 Prover - Base Pressure

7925 Prover - Temperature Stability Limits

7926 Prove & Meter - Temperature Deviation

7927 Prover - Count Deviation %[(Maximum Deviation - Minimum Deviation) / Minimum Deviation] x 100%.

7928 Prover - Acceptable Meter Factor Deviation %[(New Meter Factor - Previous Meter Factor) / Previous Meter Factor] x 100%.





7929 Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - Low Limit

7930 Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - High Limit

7931 Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - Override

7932 Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - @ 4mA

7933 Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - @ 20mA

7934 Prover - Temperature Outlet (Right) - Low Limit

to

7938 Prover - Temperature Outlet (Right) - @ 20mA

7939 Prover - Pressure Inlet (Left) - Low Limit

to

7943 Prover - Pressure Inlet (Left) - @ 20mA

7944 Prover - Pressure Outlet (Right) - Low Limit

to

7948 Prover - Pressure Outlet (Right) - @ 20mA

7949 Flow Rate % Change Threshold

7950 Linear Thermal Coefficient

7951 Plenum Pressure - Constant

7952 Plenum - Deadband %

7953 Plenum Pressure - @ 4mA

7954 Plenum Pressure - @ 20mA

7955 Prover - Volume Upstream

7956 Prover - Specific Gravity @ 60 °°F / Density @ Meter Factor

7957 Prover - Temperature @ Meter Factor

7958 Prover - Pressure @ Meter Factor




5.10.2. Last Prove Data

7959 Prover - Volume

7960 Prover - DiameterInches/mm.

7961 Prover - Wall ThicknessInches/mm.

7962 Prover - Modulus of Elasticity

7963 Prover - Coefficient of Cubic Expansion

7964 Prover - K Factor

7965 Prover - Master Meter K Factor

7966 Prover - Previous Meter Factor @ Flowrate

5.10.3. Data Rejected During ProveThe following refers to the data rejected during Prove Run #3. The same data isavailable for the Last, 1st and 2nd Prove Runs at the following addresses:

7967 3rd Run - Meter Temperature

7968 3rd Run - Meter Pressure

7969 3rd Run - Prover Temperature

7970 3rd Run - Prover Pressure

7971 3rd Run - Reference Gravity

7972 3rd Run - Flowrate

7973 2nd Run - Meter Temperature

to

7978 2nd Run - Flowrate

7979 1st Run - Meter Temperature

to

7984 1st Run - Flowrate

7985 Last Run - Meter Temperature

to

7990 Last Run - Flowrate





5.10.4. Prove Run DataThe following data refers to Prove Run #1. The same data is available for all 10prove runs at the following addresses:


7992 1st Run - Meter Pressure

7993 1st Run - Prover Temperature

7994 1st Run - Prover Pressure

7995 1st Run - Specific Gravity @ 60 °°F / Density @ Reference Temperature

7996 1st Run - Flowrate

7997 2nd Run - Meter Temperature

to

8002 2nd Run - Flowrate

8003 3rd Run - Meter Temperature

to

8008 3rd Run - Flowrate

8009 4th Run - Meter Temperature

to

8014 4th Run - Flowrate


to



to



to



to






to



to


5.10.5. Prove Average Data

8051 Prove - Average Counts

8052 Prove - Average Meter Temperature

8053 Prove - Average Meter Pressure

8054 Prove - Average Prover Temperature

8055 Prove - Average Prover Pressure

8056 Prove - Average SG @ 60°°F / Density @ Reference Temperature

8057 Prove - Average Flowrate

8058 Prove - % Deviation Between Runs

8059 Prove - CTSPProver Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on Steel.

8060 Prove - CPSPProver Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on Steel.

8061 Prove - CTLPProver Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on a Liquid.

8062 Prove - CPLPProver Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on a Liquid.

8063 Prove - CCFPProver Combined Correction Factor.

8064 Prove - Corrected Prover VolumeBase Volume of Prover x [8063].

8065 Prove - Metered Volume

8066 Prove - CTLMMeter Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on a Liquid.

8067 Prove - CPLMMeter Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on a Liquid.

8068 Prove - CCFMMeter Combined Correction Factor.

8069 Prove - Corrected Meter VolumeMeter Volume [8065] x [8068].

8070 Prove - Average Counts multiplied by Linear Correction Factor

8071 Prove - Meter Factor Deviation % from Previous Meter Factor

8072 Prove - Actual K Factor

8073 Prove - Average Flowmeter Hertz

8074 Prove - Prover Compressibility F Factor





8075 Prove - Meter Compressibility F Factor

8076 Prove - Average Observed Density

8077 Prove - Average SG @ 60°°F / Density @ Reference Temperature

8078 Prove - Average Linear Correction Factor

8079 Prove - Average Viscosity

5.10.6. Prove Run - Master Meter DataThe following data refers to Master Meter Prove Run #1. The same data isavailable for all 10 prove runs at the following addresses:

8080 1st Run - Master Meter - Volume -

8081 1st Run - Master Meter - Meter Factor

8082 1st Run - Master Meter - CTL

8083 1st Run - Master Meter - CPL

8084 1st Run - Master meter - CCF

8085 1st Run - Master Meter - Corrected Volume

8086 1st Run - Proved Meter - Volume

8087 1st Run - Proved Meter - CTL

8088 1st Run - Proved Meter - CPL

8089 1st Run - Proved Meter - CCF

8090 1st Run - Corrected Meter Volume

8091 1st Run - Meter Factor

8092 2nd Run - Master Meter - Volume

to

8103 2nd Run - Meter Factor

8104 3rd Run - Master Meter - Volume

to

8115 3rd Run - Meter Factor

8116 4th Run - Master Meter - Volume

to

8127 4th Run - Meter Factor


to






to



to



to



to



to


5.10.7. Proving Series Data

> 8200 Series #1 - Average Counts

> 8201 Series #1 - Average Meter Temperature

> 8202 Series #1 - Average Meter Pressure

> 8203 Series #1 - Average Prover Temperature

> 8204 Series #1 - Average Prover pressure

> 8205 Series #1 - Average Gravity @ 60 °°F or Reference Temperature

> 8206 Series #1 - Average Flowrate

> 8207 Series #1 - CTSP

> 8208 Series #1 - CPSP

> 8209 Series #1 - CTLP

> 8210 Series #1 - CPLP

> 8211 Series #1 - Average Net Prover Volume

> 8212 Series #1 - CTLM

> 8213 Series #1 - CPLM

> 8214 Series #1 - Average Gross Meter Volume

> 8215 Series #1 - Net Meter Volume



Note:

> Applies only to Revision20 for US customary units



> 8216 Series #1 - Prover Volume @ Prover Pressure

> 8217 Series #2 - Prover Volume @ Prover Pressure

> 8218 Series #1 - Meter Factor

> 8219 Series #2 - Meter Factor

>* 8220 Proving Meter - Gravity

>* 8221 Proving Meter - Density Temperature

>* 8222 Proving Meter - API @ 60 °°F / API

>* 8223 Proving meter - Specific Gravity @ 60 °°F

5.10.8. Data of Meter Being Proved

8224 Temperature

8225 Pressure

8226 Flowrate

8227 Transducer Density

8228 Specific Gravity @ 60 °°F / Density @ Reference Temperature

8229 API @ 60 °°F / API @ Reference Temperature

8230 Gross Flowrate

5.10.9. Mass Prove DataThe following data refers to Mass Prove Run #1. The same data is available forall 10 prove runs at the following addresses:

8231 1st Run - Prover Temperature

8232 1st Run - Prover Pressure

8233 1st Run - Prover Density or Linear Viscosity


8235 1st Run - Meter Pressure

8236 1st Run - Meter Density

8237 1st Run - Meter Density @ Reference Temperature

8238 1st Run - CTLPProver Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on a Liquid.

8239 1st Run - CPLPProver Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on a Liquid.

8240 1st Run - CTLMMeter Correction Factor for the Effect of Temperature on a Liquid.

8241 1st Run - CPLMMeter Correction Factor for the Effect of Pressure on a Liquid.

8242 1st Run - CTSP or LCFCorrection Factor for the Effect of Temperature on Steel.

8243 1st Run - CPSPCorrection factor for the Effect of Pressure on Steel.


Notes:

> Applies only to Revision20 for US customaryunits.

* Points 8220-8223 are onlyfor Exxon’s Prover Report.



8244 1st Run - Prove Volume

8245 1st Run - Prove Mass

8246 1st Run - Meter Mass

8247 1st Run - Meter Factor

8248 2nd Run - Prover Temperature

to

8264 2nd Run - Meter Factor

8265 3rd Run - Prover Temperature

to

8281 3rd Run - Meter Factor

8282 4th Run - Prover Temperature

to



to



to



to



to



to



to


8401 Linear Meter Volume

8402 Linear Corrected Meter Volume





8403 Spare

to

8500 Spare

5.11. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEEFloating Point Data

The following data refers to Meter Run #1. The same data is available for allmeter runs at the following addresses:

o Meter Run #1 @ 8501 through 8599




5.11.1. Previous Batch Average

8501 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Temperature

8502 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Pressure

8503 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Density

8504 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average VCF

8505 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average CPL

8506 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Meter factor

8507 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Specific Gravity

8508 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average SG @ 60 °°F / Density @ ReferenceTemperature

8509 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Density Temperature

8510 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Density Pressure

8511 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Density Correction Factor

8512 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Unfactored Density

8513 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average K Factor

8514 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Viscosity

8515 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Linear Correction Factor

8516 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Gross Flowrate

8517 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average %S&W

8518 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Equilibrium Pressure

8519 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average API @ 60 °°F


Note: See 5n50 and 5850for matching totalizer data.

Previous Batch Average -Refers to data stored at thetime of the last Batch Endcommand. It will remain validuntil the next batch end. Thisis the data that should beused by SCADA or MMIs tobuild Monthly or BatchReports.



5.11.2. Previous Hour’s Average

8520 Previous Hours - Average Temperature

8521 Previous Hours - Average Pressure

8522 Previous Hours - Average Density

8523 Previous Hours - Average Specific Gravity @ 60°°F / Density @Reference Temperature

8524 Previous Hours - Average K Factor

8525 Previous Hours - Average Meter Factor

8526 Previous Hours - Average %S&W

8527 Spare

to

8530 Spare

5.11.3. Previous Day’s Average

8531 Previous Day’s - Average Temperature

8532 Previous Day’s - Average Pressure

8533 Previous Day’s - Average Density

8534 Previous Day’s - Average VCF

8535 Previous Day’s - Average CPL

8536 Previous Day’s - Average Meter Factor

8537 Previous Day’s - Average Specific Gravity

8538 Previous Day’s - Average SG 60 °°F / Density @ ReferenceTemperature

8539 Previous Day’s - Average Density Temperature

8540 Previous Day’s - Average Density Pressures

8541 Previous Day’s - Average Density Correction Factor

8542 Previous Day’s - Average Unfactored density

8543 Previous Day’s - Average K Factor

8544 Previous Day’s - Average Viscosity

8545 Previous Day’s - Average Linear Correction Factor

8546 Previous Day’s - Average Gross Flowrate

8547 Previous Day’s - Average %S&W

8548 Previous Day’s - Average Equilibrium Pressure



Previous Hour’s Average -Refers to data stored at theend of the last hour. It is validfor one hour and is thenoverwritten. This is the datathat should be used bySCADA or MMIs which needhourly averages.

Previous Day’s Average -Refers to data stored at theend of the contract day. It isvalid for 24 hours andoverwritten at the ‘day starthour’. This is the data thatshould be used by SCADA orMMIs to build daily reports.



8549 Previous Day’s - Gross in Float FormatBbl/m3.

8550 Previous Day’s - Net in Float FormatBbl/m3.

8551 Previous Day’s - Mass in Float FormatKlb/ton.

8552 Previous Day’s - NSV in Float FormatBbl/m3.

8553 Previous Day’s - Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature in Float Format

8554 Spare

to

8555 Spare

5.11.4. Statistical Moving Window Averages ofTransducer Inputs

8556 Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Temperature

8557 Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Pressure

8558 Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density

8559 Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density Temperature

8560 Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density Pressure

5.11.5. Miscellaneous In Progress Averages

8561 In Progress - Density Correction Factor - Batch Average

8562 In Progress - Density Correction Factor - Daily Average

8563 In Progress - Unfactored Density - Hourly Average

8564 In Progress - Unfactored Density - Daily Average

8565 Spare

8566 Spare

5.11.6. Previous Batch and Daily Average Data

> 8567 VCF @ 15 °°C

> 8568 VCF @ Reference Temperature

> 8569 Density @ Reference Temperature


INFO - The indicated data(8501-8599) refers to MeterRun #1. The same data isavailable for all meter runs atthe following addresses:Meter Run #1:

8501 through 8599Meter Run #2:



8801 through 8899

Note: See 5n50 and 5850for matching totalizer data.

Notes:




5.11.7. More Miscellaneous In Progress Averages

8570 In Progress - Hourly Average - Temperature

8571 In Progress - Hourly Average - Pressure

8572 In Progress - Hourly Average - Density

8573 In Progress - Hourly Average - Specific Gravity @ 60°°F / Density @Reference Temperature

8574 In Progress - Hourly Average - K Factor

8575 In Progress - Hourly Average - Meter Factor

8576 In Progress - Hourly Average - %S&W

8577 In Progress - Batch Average - Viscosity

8578 In Progress - Batch Average - Linear Correction Factor

8579 In Progress - Batch Average - Gross Flowrate

8580 In Progress - Daily Average - Viscosity

8581 In Progress - Daily Average - Linear Correction Factor

8582 In Progress - Daily Average - Gross Flowrate

8583 In Progress - Daily Average - %S&W

8584 In Progress - Daily Average - %S&W

8585 Spare

5.11.8. Previous Batch Quantities

8586 Previous Batch - Gross in Float Format

8587 Previous Batch - Net in Float Format

8588 Previous Batch - Mass in Float Format

8589 Previous Batch - NSV in Float Format

8590 Previous Batch - Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature



Previous BatchQuantities - Refers to datastored at the time of the last‘Batch End’ command. It willremain valid until the nextbatch end. These variablesare floating point duplicatesof integer data at 5n50 area.These points are for MMI orSCADA retrieval, not forBatch Recalculation.

Note: See 8501 area forother Previous Batch data.



5.11.9. Miscellaneous Live or Calculated Data

> 8591 Specific Gravity @ 60°°FCalculated Specific Gravity @ 60°F using Table 23B when Table 24C is selected.

8592 Spare

8593 Spare

8594 Meter Density

8595 Spare

8596 Spare

8597 Meter Current - %S&W

8598 Meter Current - CSW

8599 Meter Current - VCF @ 2nd Reference Temperature

5.11.10. Station - Previous Batch Average Data

8901 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Temperature

8902 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Pressure

8903 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Density

8904 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average VCF

8905 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average CPL

8906 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Meter Factor

8907 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Specific Gravity

8908 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Specific Gravity @ 60 °°F /Density @ Reference Temperature

8909 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Density Temperature

8910 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Density Pressure

8911 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Density Correction Factor

8912 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Unfactored Density

8913 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average K Factor

8914 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Viscosity

8915 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Linear Correction Factor

8916 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Gross Flowrate

8917 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average %S&W

8918 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average Equilibrium Pressure

8919 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average API @ 60 °°F

8920 Station - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Average API

8921 Spare

to

8930 Spare


INFO - The indicated data(8501-8599) refers to MeterRun #1. The same data isavailable for all meter runs atthe following addresses:Meter Run #1:




8801 through 8899

Notes:




8931 Station - Previous Daily - Average Temperature

8932 Station - Previous Daily - Average Pressure

8933 Station - Previous Daily - Average Density

8934 Station - Previous Daily - Average VCF

8935 Station - Previous Daily - Average CPL

8936 Station - Previous Daily - Average Meter Factor

8937 Station - Previous Daily - Average Specific Gravity

8938 Station - Previous Daily - Average Specific Gravity @ 60 °°F / Density@ Reference Temperature

8939 Station - Previous Daily - Average Density Temperature

8940 Station - Previous Daily - Average Density Pressure

8941 Station - Previous Daily - Average Density Correction factor

8942 Station - Previous Daily - Average Unfactored Density

8943 Station - Previous Daily - Average K Factor

8944 Station - Previous Daily - Average Viscosity

8945 Station - Previous Daily - Average Linear Correction Factor

8946 Station - Previous Daily - Average Gross Flowrate

8947 Station - Previous Daily - Average %S&W

8948 Station - Previous Daily - Average Equilibrium Pressure

8949 Station - Previous Daily - Gross in Float Format

8950 Station - Previous Daily - Net in Float Format

8951 Station - Previous Daily - Mass in Float Format

8952 Station - Previous Daily - NSV in Float Format

8953 Station - Previous Daily - 2nd Net @ Reference Temperature in FloatFormat

8954 Station - Previous Daily Average - API

8955 Station - Previous Daily Average - API @ 60 °°F

8956 Spare

to

8960 Spare





8961 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Temperature

8962 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Pressure

8963 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Density

8964 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - VCF

8965 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - CPL

8966 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Meter Factor

8967 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Specific Gravity

8968 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - SG60 / Dens @ Ref

8969 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Density Temp

8970 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Density Pressure

8971 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Dens Corr Factor

8972 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Unfactored Density

8973 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - K Factor

8974 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Viscosity

8975 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - LCF

8976 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - Gross Flowrate

8977 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - %S&W

8978 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - EquilibriumPressure

8979 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - API60

8980 Station - Current Batch - Flow Weighted Average - API

8981 Spare

to

8985 Spare

8986 Station - Previous Batch - Gross in Float Format

8987 Station - Previous Batch - Net in Float Format

8988 Station - Previous Batch - Mass in Float Format

8989 Station - Previous Batch - NSV in Float Format

8990 Station - Previous Batch - Net @ 2nd Reference Temperature

8991 Spare

to

8999 Spare




6. ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001 - 9499)

6.1. Custom Report TemplatesThese are ASCII text files which serve as a format template for certain printedreports.

9001 Report Template - Snapshot / Interval

9002 Report Template - Batch

9003 Report Template - Daily

9004 Report Template - Prove

9005 Spare

to

9100 Spare

6.2. Previous Batch ReportsCopies of the last 8 Batch Reports are stored.

9101 Batch Report - Last

9102 Batch Report - 2nd Last

9103 Batch Report - 3rd Last

9104 Batch Report - 4th Last





9109 Spare

to

9200 Spare


INFO - These ASCII textbuffers are accessed usingModbus function codes 65for reads and 66 for writes.The index number for each9000 type variable refers tothe complete text bufferwhich may be as big as 8192bytes. Data is transmitted orreceived as multipletransmissions of 128 bytepackets (see Chapter 6)

Chapter 6 ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001- 9499)


6.3. Previous Prove ReportsCopies of the last 8 Prove Reports are stores

9201 Prove Report - Last

9202 Prove Report - 2nd Last

9203 Prove Report - 3rd Last

9204 Prove Report - 4th Last





9209 Spare

to

9300 Spare

6.4. Previous Daily ReportsCopies of the last 8 Daily Reports are stores

9301 Previous Day’s Report - Last

9302 Previous Day’s Report - 2nd Last

9303 Previous Day’s Report - 3rd Last

9304 Previous Day’s Report - 4th Last





9309 Spare

to

9400 Spare

6.5. Last Snapshot Report

9401 Last Local Snapshot / Interval Report

INFO - These ASCII textbuffers are accessed usingModbus function codes 65for reads and 66 for writes.The index number for each9000 type variable refers tothe complete text bufferwhich may be as big as 8192bytes. Data is transmitted orreceived as multipletransmissions of 128 bytepackets (see Chapter 6)



6.6. Miscellaneous Report BufferThe following buffer is used to retrieve miscellaneous reports. Report data isloaded into this buffer depending on which bit is written to integer point 15129.Reports which are retrieved using this buffer are:

o Current Snapshot Reporto Alarm Reporto Audit Trail Reporto Status Reporto Product File Report

Text Archive Data defined by integers 15127 and 15128 is also retrieved usingthis buffer.

9402 Miscellaneous Report Buffer

9403 Spare

to

13000 Spare




7. Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001 -18999)

The following data is especially critical to the correct operation of the flowcomputer. Any modifications to this data while operating the flow computercould cause unpredictable results which could cause measurement or controlerrors. Users are encouraged to consult with Omni before manipulatingconfiguration data directly via a serial port or programmable variablestatements.

7.1. Flow Computer Configuration 16-BitInteger Data

7.1.1. Meter Run Configuration Data

13001 Meter Run #1 - Flow I/O Point

13002 Meter Run #1 - Temperature I/O Point

13003 Meter Run #1 - Temperature Type0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.

13004 Meter Run #1 - Pressure I/O Point

13005 Meter Run #1 - Density I/O Point

13006 Meter Run #1 - Density Type1=API; 2=SG; 3=gr/cc; 4=Solartron; 5=Sarasota; 6=UGC.

13007 Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature I/O Point

13008 Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature Type0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.

13009 Meter Run #1 - Density Press I/O Point

13010 Meter Run #1 - Density @ Reference Conditions0=Flowing; 1=Reference.

13011 Spare

13012 Spare

13013 Meter Run #1 - Flowmeter Dual Pulse Fidelity0=No; 1=Yes.

CAUTION!

Flow computer configurationdata is especially critical tothe correct operation of theflow computer. Anymodifications to this datawhile operating the flowcomputer could causeunpredictable results whichcould cause measurement orcontrol errors. Users areencouraged to consult withOmni Flow Computers, Inc.before manipulatingconfiguration data directly viaa serial port or programmablevariable statements.



Chapter 7 Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001- 18999)



to

13023 Meter Run #2 - Density @ Reference Conditions

13024 Spare

13025 Spare

13026 Meter Run #2 - Flowmeter Dual Pulse Fidelity


to


13037 Spare

13038 Spare



to


13050 Spare

13051 Spare


CAUTION!





7.1.2. Prover Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data

13053 Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - I/O Point

13054 Prover - Temperature Inlet (Left) - Type0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.

13055 Prover - Temperature Outlet (Right) - I/O Point

13056 Prover - Temperature Outlet (Right) - Type0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.

13057 Prover - Pressure Inlet (Left) - I/O Point

13058 Prover - Pressure Outlet (Right) - I/O Point

13059 Prover - Plenum Pressure - I/O Point

13060 Prover - Density Temperature - I/O Point

13061 Prover - Density Temperature - Type0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.

13062 Prover - Density Pressure - I/O Point

13063 Gravity Sample TimeSeconds.

13064 Station - Pressure - I/O Point

13065 Station - Density - I/O Point

13066 Station - Density - Type1=API; 2=SG; 3=gr/cc; 4=Solartron; 5=Sarasota; 6=UGC.

13067 Station - Density Temperature - I/O Point

13068 Station - Density Temperature - Type0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.

13069 Prover - Density - I/O Point

13070 Prover - Density - Type1=API; 2=SG; 3=gr/cc; 4=Solartron; 5=Sarasota; 6=UGC.

< 13071 Select Pressure Unit0=kpa; 1=Bar; 2= kg/cm2.

13072 Spare

13073 Spare

Notes:

< Applies only to Revision24 for metric units.



7.1.3. General Flow Computer Configuration 16-BitInteger Data

13074 Flow Computer Type0=3000; 1=6000.

13075 Number of A Combo Modules Installed

13076 Number of B Combo Modules Installed

13077 Number of C Combo Modules Installed

13078 Number of Digital Modules Installed

13079 Number of Serial Modules Installed

13080 Number of E Combo Modules Installed

13081 Number of H Combo Modules Installed

13082 Number of ED Combo Modules Installed

13083 Spare

13084 Spare

7.1.4. Serial Port Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data

13085 Serial Port #1 - Port Type0=Printer; 1=Modbus.

13086 Serial Port #1 - IDRead only point which reports back the number of the port you are connected to.

13087 Serial Port #1 - Baud Rate1200-38400 bps.

13088 Serial Port #1 - Data Bits7 or 8.

13089 Serial Port #1 - Stop Bits0, 1 or 2.

13090 Serial Port #1 - ParityO, E, N.

13091 Serial Port #1 - Transmit Key Delay0=0hms; 1=50 msec; 2=100 msec; 3=150 msec.

13092 Serial Port #1 - Modbus ID0-247.

13093 Serial Port #1 - Protocol Type0=RTU; 1=ASCII; 2=RTU Modem.

13094 Serial Port #1 - Enable CRC Checking0=No CRC, 1=CRC check.

13095 Serial Port #1 - Modicon Compatible0=Omni Mode; 1=Modicon 984 Mode.




13096 Serial Port #2 - Baud Rate

13097 Serial Port #2 - Data Bits

13098 Serial Port #2 - Stop Bits

13099 Serial Port #2 - Parity

13100 Serial Port #2 - Transmit Key Delay

13101 Serial Port #2 - Modbus ID

13102 Serial Port #2 - Modbus Mode RTU / ASCII

13103 Serial Port #2 - Enable CRC Checking

13104 Serial Port #2 - Modicon Compatible0=Omni; 1=Modicon 984 compatible.

13105 Spare

to

13107 Spare





13112 Serial Port #3 - Transmit Delay

13113 Serial Port #3 - Modbus or Node ID

13114 Serial Port #3 - Protocol Type0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing).


13116 Serial Port #3 - Modicon Compatible0=Omni; 1=984 compatible.

13117 Spare

to

13119 Spare





13124 Serial Port #4 - Transmit Delay


13126 Serial Port #4 - Modbus or Node ID

13127 Serial Port #4 - Protocol Type0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing); 3=Allen-Bradley Full Duplex DF1; 4=Allen-Bradley Half Duplex.

13128 Serial Port #4 - Modicon Compatible0=Omni, 1=984 compatible. If Allen-Bradley Protocol selected above: 0=CRC; 1=BCCerror checking.

CAUTION!





7.1.5. Proportional Integral Derivative (PID)Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data

13129 PID Loop #1 - I/O Point Assignment - Remote Setpoint

13130 PID Loop #1 - Primary Variable

13131 PID Loop #1 - Secondary Variable

13132 PID Loop #1 - Primary Action0=Forward; 1=Reverse.

13133 PID Loop #1 - Secondary Action0=Forward; 1=Reverse.

13134 PID Loop #1 - Error Select0=Low; 1=High.

13135 PID Loop #1 - Startup Mode0=Last state; 1=Manual.


to

13142 PID Loop #2 - Startup Mode


to



to


13157 I/O Point Assignment - Auxiliary Input #1







7.1.6. Programmable Logic Controller Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data

13161 PLC Group #1 - Starting AddressAllen-Bradley PLC-2 Translation Tables.

13162 PLC Group #1 - Index 1

13163 PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 1































13194 PLC Group #2 - Starting Address


to



CAUTION!







to





to





to



13286 Spare

to

13288 Spare

13289 Mass Pulses - Meter #1For points 13289-13292: 0=No; 1=Yes.

13290 Mass Pulses - Meter #2



13293 Input Type - Auxiliary Input #1For points 13293-13296: 0=DIN; 1=Amer; 2=4-20mA.

13294 Input Type - Auxiliary Input #2



13297 Spare

to

13299 Spare




7.1.7. Peer-to-Peer Setup Entries 16-Bit Integer Data

13300 Current Master IDReal-time. Shows current peer-to-peer master.

13301 Reserved RegisterDebug only.

13302 Transaction #1 - Slave ID

13303 Transaction #1 - Read / Write

13304 Transaction #1 - Source Index

13305 Transaction #1 - Number of Points

13306 Transaction #1 - Destination Index


to



to



to



to



to



to


CAUTION!






to



to



to



to



to



to



to



to



to





13382 Next Master IDA non zero entry here turns on peer-to-peer mode.

13383 Last Master ID In Sequence

13384 Retry TimerNumber of 50 msec ticks between retries; default=3.

13385 Activate Redundancy Mode0=single unit; 1=dual flow computer system.

13386 Number of Decimal Places for Gross & Net Totalizer

13387 Spare

13388 Number of Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer

13389 Spare

13390 Number of Decimal Places for Factors on Batch Report

13391 Number of Decimal Places for Meter Factor on Batch Report

13392 Number of Decimal Places for Factors on Prove Report

13393 Number of Decimal Places for Meter Factor on Prove Report

13394 Spare

13395 Spare

13396 Override Code - Auxiliary Input #1




13400 Spare

13401 Spare

13402 Meter Run #1 - Temperature Damping Factor

13403 Meter Run #1 - Pressure Damping Factor

13404 Meter Run #1 - Density Temp Damping Factor

13405 Meter Run #1 - Density Press Damping Factor

13406 Spare

13407 Spare


to


CAUTION!





13412 Spare

13413 Spare


to


13418 Spare

13419 Spare


to


13424 Damping Factor - Station - Density Temperature

13425 Damping Factor - Station - Density Pressure

13426 Damping Factor - Prover - Inlet (Left) Temperature

13427 Damping Factor - Prover - Outlet (Right) Temperature

13428 Damping Factor - Prover - Inlet (Left) Pressure

13429 Damping Factor - Prover - Outlet (Right) Pressure

13430 Damping Factor - Plenum Pressure

13431 Damping Factor - Prover - Density Temperature

13432 Damping Factor - Prover - Density Pressure

13433 Damping Factor - Auxiliary Input #1




13437 Spare

to

13449 Spare




13450 Insert Batch Stack - Meter #1




13454 Insert Batch Stack - Station

13455 Delete Batch Stack - Meter #1




13459 Delete Batch Stack - Station

13460 Remote Key Press

13461 Beep Counts

13462 Redundancy - Master PID #1 - Valve ModeSlave keeps copy of primary unit’s settings in points 13462-13469 in case it becomesmaster.

13463 Redundancy - Master PID #1 - Setpoint Mode

13464 Redundancy - Master PID #2 - Valve Mode






13470 Redundancy - Slave PID #1 - Valve Mode

13471 Redundancy - Slave PID #1 - Setpoint Mode







13478 Spare

to

13499 Spare

CAUTION!





7.1.8. Raw Data Archive Files 16-Bit Integer DataThe following entries are used to define the record structure of each Raw DataArchive file:

13500 Archive 701 #1 - Starting Index

13501 Archive 701 #1 - Number of Points

to


13531 Archive 701 #16 - Number of points



to





to





to



13652 Spare

to

13659 Spare



to








to





to





to





to





to



13892 Spare

to

13899 Spare

CAUTION!





13900 Trigger Boolean - Archive 701Points 13900-13909 contain the point numbers of the trigger points which cause the datato be stored when the trigger goes from low to high.

13901 Trigger Boolean - Archive 702









13910 Spare

to

13919 Spare

*13920 Archive Run ?0=Stops archiving; 1=Starts archiving.

*13921 Reconfigure Archive?0=No configuration allowed; 1=Configuration changes allowed.

13930 Archive 711 #1 Starting IndexPoints 13930-13961 are dummy read-only points which show the structure of the AlarmArchive.

13931 Archive 711 #1 Number of Points

to

13960 Archive 711 #16 Starting Index


13962 Archive 712 #1 Starting IndexPoints 13962-13993 are dummy read-only points which show the structure of the AuditTrail.


to

13992 Archive 712 #16 Starting Index


13994 Spare

to

14000 Spare


* CAUTION! *POTENTIAL FOR DATALOSS! Read Archivedocumentation beforemanipulating points 13920and 13921.



7.2. Flow Computer Configuration 16-Character ASCII String Data

14001 Boolean Statement #1025

to


14049 OmniCom - Download Serial Number & File Name

14050 OmniCom - Download PC ID

14051 Variable Statement #7025

to


14099 Spare

14100 Station Total and Flowrate Definition

14101 Comment String (Remarks) - Boolean Statement #1025

to

14148 Comment String (Remarks) - Boolean Statement #1072

14149 Printer Condense Mode StringPoints 14149 & 14150 represent the hexadecimal ASCII version of what is actually sent tothe printer.

14150 Printer Uncondensed Mode String

14151 Comment String - Variable Statement #7025

to


14199 Spare

to

14200 Spare


to


INFO - These ASCII stringvariables are accessed usingModbus function codes 03for reads, and 16 for writes.Note that the index numberfor each string refers to thecomplete string whichoccupies the space of eight16-bit registers. It must beaccessed as a complete unit.You cannot read or write apartial string. Each stringcounts as one point in thenormal Omni Modbus mode.

Modicon CompatibleMode - For the purposes ofpoint count only, each stringcounts as 8 registers. Thestarting address of the stringstill applies.



14217 Spare

to

14220 Spare


to


14237 Spare

to

14240 Spare

14241 Comment String - Boolean Statement #1073

to

14256 Comment String - Boolean Statement #1088

14257 Spare

to

14260 Spare


to


14277 Spare

to

14300 Spare

14301 Comment String - Assign - Digital to Analog Output #1

to

14312 Comment String - Assign - Digital to Analog Output #12

14321 Comment String - Assign - Digital I/O Point #1

to

14344 Comment String - Assign - Digital I/O Point #24

CAUTION!


INFO - These ASCII stringvariables are accessed usingModbus function codes 03for reads, and 16 for writes.Note that the index numberfor each string refers to thecomplete string whichoccupies the space of eight16-bit registers. It must beaccessed as a complete unit.You cannot read or write apartial string. Each stringcounts as one point in thenormal Omni Modbus mode.

Modicon CompatibleMode - For the purposes ofpoint count only, each stringcounts as 8 registers. Thestarting address of the stringstill applies.



14360 Comment String - Assign - PID #1 - Primary Variable

14361 Comment String - Assign - PID #1 - Secondary Variable







14380 Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter A

14381 Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter B

14382 Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter C

14383 Spare

to

15000 Spare

7.3. Flow Computer Configuration 32-BitLong Integer Data

15001 Assign - Analog Output #1

to

15012 Assign - Analog Output #12

15013 Digital Point #1 - Assignment

15014 Digital Point #1 - Timer - Delay On100 msec ticks.

15015 Digital Point #1 - Timer - Delay Off100 msec ticks.

15016 Digital Point #1 - Timer - Pulse Width10 msec ticks.


to

15020 Digital Point #2 - Timer - Pulse Width


to


INFO - These 32-bit longinteger variables areaccessed using Modbusfunction code 03 for reads,06 for single writes and 16for multiple writes.Note that the index numberfor each variable refers toone complete long integerwhich occupies the space oftwo 16-bit registers. It mustbe accessed as a completeunit. You cannot read or writea partial 32-bit integer. Each32-bit long integer counts asone point in the normal OmniModbus mode.






to



to



to



to



to



to



to



to


CAUTION!







to



to



to



to



to



to



to



to



to






to



to

15100 Digital Point #22 - Timer - Pulse Width (10msec Ticks)


to



to


15109 Assign - Front Panel Counter A

15110 Assign - Front Panel Counter B

15111 Assign - Front Panel Counter C

15112 Max Comparitor - Error Counts per Batch - Meter #1Points 15112-15115 represent dual pulse error checks.

15113 Max Comparitor - Error Counts per Batch - Meter #2



15116 Spare

to

15119 Spare

15120 Input / Output Status of Digital PointsReal-time, read-only! Indicates which points are inputs (1) and which are outputs (0).#1=Bit 0; #24=Bit 23.

15121 Spare

15122 On/Off Status of Digital PointsReal-time, read-only! #1=Bit 0; #24=Bit 23: 0 =Off, 1=On.

CAUTION!






15123 Prove Run Number

15124 Proving Meter Number

15125 Prove Counts



15126 32-Bit Packed Status WordExclusively for OmniCom use (see Bit Layout below).

LSB

B0 Not Proving B16 Flow Rate UnstableB1 Overtravel Forward B17 No Prove PermissiveB2 Launch Forward B18 Prover Seal Not OKB3 1st Detector B19 Meter Not ActiveB4 In Flight Forward B20 Piston DownstreamB5 2nd Detector B21 Checking PlenumB6 Overtravel Reverse B22 Master Meter ProvingB7 Launch Reverse B23 Check Stability Master MeterB8 In Flight Reverse B24 SpareB9 Prove Aborted B25 SpareB10 Prove Complete B26 Power Fail FlagB11 Checking Stability B27 End Batch #4B12 Prover/Meter Temp Limits B28 End Batch #3B13 Prover Inactivity B29 End Batch #2B14 Bad Repeatability B30 End Batch #1B15 Prove Temperature Unstable B31 End Batch Station

MSB

15127 Text Archive Data - Number of Days to RetrieveExclusively for OmniCom use.

15128 Text Archive Data - Starting Date of RequestedFix date format (YYDDMM).

15129 32-Bit Command Word #1Exclusively for OmniCom use (see Bit Layout below).

LSB

B0 Prove Seal OK B16 Trial Prove Meter #4B1 End Batch Station B17 Abort Prove in ProgressB2 End Batch Meter #1 B18 Send Snapshot to PrinterB3 End Batch Meter #2 B19 Load Snapshot to 9402B4 End Batch Meter #3 B20 Load Alarms to 9402B5 End Batch Meter #4 B21 Load Prod File to 9402B6 Spare B22 Load Status to 9402B7 Request Prove Meter #1 B23 Load Audit Trail to 9402B8 Request Prove Meter #2 B24 SpareB9 Request Prove Meter #3 B25 SpareB10 Request Prove Meter #4 B26 SpareB11 Alarm Acknowledge B27 SpareB12 Reset Power Fail Flag B28 SpareB13 Trial Prove Meter #1 B29 SpareB14 Trial Prove Meter #2 B30 SpareB15 Trial Prove Meter #3 B31 Spare

MSB




15129 32-Bit Command Word #2Exclusively for OmniCom use (see Bit Layout below).

LSB

B0Decrease PID #1 Setpoint @ 1%Rate B16

Decrease PID #1 Valve @ 1%Rate

B1Increase PID #1 Setpoint @ 1%Rate B17

Increase PID #1 Valve @ 1%Rate

B2Decrease PID #1 Setpoint @0.1% Rate B18

Decrease PID #1 Valve @ 0.1%Rate

B3Increase PID #1 Setpoint @ 0.1%Rate B19

Increase PID #1 Valve @ 0.1%Rate

























MSB

15130 Spare

15131 Raw Process Input - Input #1Real-time, read-only! 1kHz~1mA.

to

15154 Raw Process Input - Input #24

15155 Spare

to

15199 Spare

CAUTION!






Archive Data File Size

Information Only Data!

* 15200 Size of Text - Archive File

* 15201 Size of Archive - File 701










15211 Spare

15212 Spare

15213 Archive File ‘n’ FailedIndicates which archive file failed; e.g.: if archive files 1-4 occupy allocated memory, thispoint will read 5 (n=1-10). (See points 2623, 15200-15210, and 15214.)

15214 Total Number of Archive Files Allocated

15215 Spare

to

17000 Spare


Note:

* Archive Data File Size -These variables containthe number of bytes eacharchive file uses withinmemory. They areupdated when thearchiving process isstarted and memory isallocated. The maximummemory that can beallocated to this group ofvariables is a total of229359 bytes.



7.4. Flow Computer Configuration 32-BitIEEE Floating Point Data

17001 Digital-to-Analog - Output #1 - @ 4mAEngineering units which equal to 0%.

17002 Digital-to-Analog - Output #1 - @ 20mAEngineering units which equal to 100%.

to

17023 Digital-to-Analog - Output #12 - @ 4mA

17024 Digital-to-Analog - Output #12 - @ 20mA

17025 Pulses per Unit - Digital I/O #1

to

17048 Pulses per Unit - Digital I/O #24

17049 Pulses per Unit - Counter A

17050 Pulses per Unit - Counter B

17051 Pulses per Unit - Counter C

# 17052 PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - Low LimitSetpoint download will be limited to this setting.

# 17053 PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - High LimitSetpoint download will be limited to this setting.

# 17054 PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - @ 4mASets the zero of the controller.

# 17055 PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - @ 20mASets the maximum span of the controller.

17056 PID #1 - Primary Gain

17057 PID #1 - Primary Repeats/Minute

# 17058 PID #1 - Secondary Value - @ Zero

# 17059 PID #1 - Secondary Value - @ Full Scale

17060 PID #1 - Secondary Gain

17061 PID #1 - Secondary Repeats/Minute

17062 PID #1 - Maximum Ramp Up Rate % - p/500 msecLimits rate of valve movement at startup only.

# 17063 PID #1 - Secondary Setpoint

17064 PID #1 - Maximum Ramp Down Rate % - p/500msecLimits the rate of valve movement at shutdown only.

17065 PID #1 - Min Output % - To Ramp ToTop-up valve % open.

17066 PID #1 - Deadband %No change in output if the % error is less than this

CAUTION!




Note:

# Input expected isengineering units.



17067 PID #2 - Remote Setpoint - Low Limit

to

17081 PID #2 - Deadband %


to



to


17112 Output in Percent - Digital to Analog #1Read-only, Live Value.

to

17123 Output in Percent - Digital to Analog #12Read-only, Live Value.

17124 Spare

to

17135 Spare

17136 PID #1 - Primary Controlled Variable Value

17137 PID #1 - Secondary Controlled Variable Value

17138 PID #1 - Control Output %

17139 PID #1 - Primary Setpoint Value

17140 PID #1 - Secondary Setpoint Value

17141 Spare

to

17145 Spare


to





17151 Spare

to

17155 Spare


to


17161 Spare

to

17165 Spare


to


17171 Spare

to

17175 Spare

17176 Meter #1 - Full Scale - Gross FlowrateUsed to scale integer volume flow rate variables 3140 & 3142.

17177 Meter #1 - Full Scale - Mass FlowrateUsed to scale integer mass flow rate variable 3144.

17178 Spare

17179 Spare

17180 Meter #2 - Full Scale - Gross Flowrate

17181 Meter #2 - Full Scale - Mass Flowrate

17182 Spare

17183 Spare



17186 Spare

17187 Spare

CAUTION!








17190 Spare

17191 Spare

17192 Station - Full Scale - Gross(Used to scale integer volume flow rate variables 3802 & 3804.

17193 Station - Full Scale - MassUsed to scale integer mass flow rate variable 3806.

17194 Not Use

to

17197 Not Use

17198 Alarm Deadband %0-5%. Global dead-band applied to all analog alarms. Variable must return this % out ofalarm for alarm to cancel.

17199 Spare

to

17202 Spare

17203 F Factor - Product #1

to

17218 F Factor - Product #16

< 17219 Reference Temperature - Product #1

to

< 17234 Reference Temperature - Product #16

17235 Spare

to

17259 Spare


Notes:

< Applies only to Revision24 for metric units.



17260 Prover - Density/Gravity - Low Limit

17261 Prover - Density/Gravity - High Limit

17262 Prover - Density/Gravity - Override

17263 Prover - Density/Gravity - @ 4mA

17264 Prover - Density/Gravity - @ 20mA

17265 Prover - Density Temperature - Low Limit

to

17269 Prover - Density Temperature - @ 20mA

17270 Prover - Density Pressure - Low Limit

to

17274 Prover - Density Pressure - @ 20mA

17275 Prover - Density Correction Factor A

* 17276 Prover - Densitometer - Constant #1K0/D0.

* 17277 Prover - Densitometer - Constant #2K1/T0.

* 17278 Prover - Densitometer - Constant #3K2/Tcoef.

* 17279 Prover - Densitometer - Constant #4K18/Tcal/Tc.

* 17280 Prover - Densitometer - Constant #5K19/Pcoef/Kt1.

* 17281 Prover - Densitometer - Constant #6K20A/Pcal/Kt2.

* 17282 Prover - Densitometer - Constant #7K20B/Kt3.

* 17283 Prover - Densitometer - Constant #8K21A/Pc.

* 17284 Prover - Densitometer - Constant #9K21B/Kp1.

* 17285 Prover - Densitometer - Constant #10Kr. (For UGC densitometers: Kr/Kp2.)

* 17286 Prover - Densitometer - Constant #11Kj. (For UGC densitometers: Kj/Kp3.)

* 17287 Prover - Density Correction Factor B

17288 Reserved

to

17379 Reserved

CAUTION!




Note:




17380 Auxiliary Input #1 - Low limit

17381 Auxiliary Input #1 - High Limit

17382 Auxiliary Input #1 - Override Value

17383 Auxiliary Input #1 - @ 4mA



to



to



to


17400 Spare

to

17500 Spare

17501 Meter #1 - K Factor #1See 3122 for matching flow frequency entry.

17502 Meter #1 - K Factor #2











17513 Spare

to

17600 Spare





to


17613 Spare

to

17700 Spare


to


17713 Spare

to

17800 Spare


to


17813 Spare

to

17899 Spare

17900 Reserved

to

18174 Reserved

ð 18175 Reserved

to

ð 20000 Reserved

ð 20001 Reserved

to

ð 49999 Reserved

CAUTION!




Note:

ð These addresses arereserved for productdevelopment.

Volume 4d Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers

23/27.71+ 05/98OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. 1-11




1818 Gas Chromatograph - FailureGas chromatograph fatal error received.

1819 Gas Chromatograph - Mol% - Override in UseMol% overrides in product area being used.

1820 Gas Chromatograph - Communication AlarmCommunication lost with gas chromatograph.

1821 Spare

to

1826 Spare




1830 Print Buffer Full FlagReports may be lost if 32K spooling buffer overflows due to the printer being ‘off-line’or jammed with paper.







1837 EPROM Error FlagInvalid checksum detected in EPROM memory.


1839 Spare

Application Revisions23.71+ & 27.71+ - Thisdatabase corresponds toApplication Revisions23.71/27.71 forOrifice/Turbine Gas FlowMetering Systems. Both USand metric unit versions areconsidered.

Note:






1842 Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #1 - Communication ErrorPoints 1842-1857 refer to an error occurred while communicating with the slave in theappropriate transaction. If a slave is involved in multiple transactions which fail, onlythe first will be flagged.

to






1862 Reference Specific Gravity - Transducer Failed Low

1863 Reference Specific Gravity - Low Alarm

1864 Reference Specific Gravity - High Alarm

1865 Reference Specific Gravity - Transducer Failed High

1866 Mol% Nitrogen - Transducer Failed Low

to

1869 Mol% Nitrogen - Transducer Failed High

1870 Mol% Carbon Dioxide - Transducer Failed Low

to

1873 Mol% Carbon Dioxide - Transducer Failed High

1874 Heating Value - Transducer Failed Low

to

1877 Heating Value - Transducer Failed High




1881 Spare

1882 Spare

INFO - Boolean data isaccessed using Modbusfunction codes 01 for reads,05 for single point writesand 15 for multiple bitwrites. Boolean data ispacked 8 points to a bytewhen reading.

Notes:










to



to



to


1899 Spare

to

2000 Spare


Note:

* These flags are usuallyused to conditionallyprint appropriateinformation messageson the batch and dailyreports.




1.3.9. Meter Totalizer Roll-over FlagsThe following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over(i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used toconditionally print characters (usually ‘**’) in front of the totalizer which has rolledon the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni ‘Custom Report Template’will show how this is accomplished. The second digit of the index numberdefines the number of the meter run. See also points at 2801 for station versionsof these flags.


2n02 Batch In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n04 Batch In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n06 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n08 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n10 Daily In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n12 Daily In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n14 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n16 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n17 Previous Batch - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n18 Previous Batch - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n19 Previous Batch - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n20 Previous Batch - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n21 Previous Batch - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n22 Previous Batch - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n23 Previous Batch - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n24 Previous Batch - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n26 Previous Daily - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n28 Previous Daily - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag


Note: The ‘In Progress’flags are those which theflow computer uses whenprinting the reports on theconnected printer.Use the ‘Previous’ flags ifthe report is being printedby another device such as aSCADA or MMI. This isnecessary because the flowcomputer clears the ‘InProgress’ data immediatelyafter it prints the localreport.




2n30 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag


2n32 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n33 Spare

to

2n40 Spare

2n41 Meter Hourly Archive Trigger Flag

2n42 Spare

to

2n99 Spare

2500 Spare

to

2600 Spare







2601 Override in Use - Auxiliary Input #1




2605 Override in Use - Reference Specific Gravity

2606 Override in Use - % Nitrogen Transducer

2607 Override in Use - % Carbon Dioxide Transducer

2608 Override in Use - Heating Value Transducer


2621 System Initialized FlagTrue after power up or system reset, clears when reset power fail command is set(1713).

2622 Day Light Savings Time‘On’ means that spring adjustment was made. ‘Off’ means autumn adjustment wasmade.

2623 Archive Memory Alarm0=Ok; 1=Fail.

2624 Spare

to

2700 Spare


INFO - To differentiatebetween normal messageresponses and unsolicitedtransmissions, Modbusfunction code 67 appears inthe transmitted messagerather than function code03.




Activating any of the ‘edge triggered’ command points below causes theappropriate ‘Custom Data Packet’ to be transmitted out of the selected serialport without the serial port being polled for data. This function can be usefulwhen communicating via VSAT satellite systems where operating cost is directlyproportional to RF bandwidth used.
















2714 Others - Master StatusAssigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers master status (see2864).







1.3.13. Boolean Status Points Used for Meter TubeSwitching

Status inputs and outputs are required to achieve the automatic meter tubeswitching function. The command input points below are used to interface tomotor-operated valve (MOV) limit switch signals and allow the user to take anMOV ‘out of service’. See 2877 to 2896 for points needed to send MOV openand close commands.

2717 Meter #1- MOV - Open StatusMust be activated when the MOV is fully open.

2718 Meter #1 - MOV - Closed StatusMust be activated when the MOV is fully closed.

2719 Meter #1 - MOV - ‘In Service’ Command / StatusRead/Write point used to remove an MOV from service. The flow computer alsocontrols this point. Level sensitive.

2720 Meter #2 - MOV - Open Status

2721 Meter #2 - MOV - Closed Status

2722 Meter #2 - MOV - ‘In Service’ Status







2729 Spare

to

2732 Spare

1.3.14. Archive Trigger Commands

2733 Archive Trigger Command - Meter #1The archive trigger commands will trigger Point 2n41 ‘Meter Hourly Archive Flag’.

2734 Archive Trigger Command - Meter #2



2737 Spare

to

2800 Spare


INFO - To differentiatebetween normal messageresponses and unsolicitedtransmissions, Modbusfunction code 67 appears inthe transmitted messagerather than function code03.

How the MOV LimitSwitches are Interpreted -

2717=On 2718=Off Open

2717=Off 2718=On Closed

2717=Off 2718=Off Travel

2717=On 2718=On Illegal



1.3.15. Station Totalizer Roll-over FlagsThe following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over(i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used toconditionally print characters (usually ‘**’ ) in front of the totalizer which has rolledon the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni ‘Custom Report Template’will show how this is accomplished. See also points at 2n01 for meter runversions of flags.


2802 Batch In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag


2804 Batch In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag


2806 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag


2808 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag


2810 Daily In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag


2812 Daily In Progress - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag


2814 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag


2816 Daily In Progress - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2817 Previous Batch - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2818 Previous Batch - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2819 Previous Batch - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag

2820 Previous Batch - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag


2822 Previous - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag


2824 Previous - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag


2826 Previous Daily - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag


2828 Previous Daily - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag




In Progress Flags - The ‘InProgress’ flags are the flagswhich the flow computeruses when printing thereports on the connectedprinter.Use the ‘Previous’ flags ifthe report is being printedby another device such asan SCADA or MMI. This isnecessary because the flowcomputer clears the ‘InProgress’ data immediatelyafter it prints the localreport.




2830 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag

2831 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag2832 Previous Daily - Cumulative - Energy Totalizer Rollover Flag

2833 Spare

to

2857 Spare


2858 Print 0 Decimal Place for Gross Totalizer

2859 Print 1 Decimal Place for Gross Totalizer

2860 Print 2 Decimal Places for Gross Totalizer

2861 Print 3 Decimal Places for Gross Totalizer

2862 Spare


2863 Watchdog Status OutNormally High Watchdog. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system(see 2713).







2869 Print 0 Decimal Place for Net Totalizer

2870 Print 1 Decimal Place for Net Totalizer

2871 Print 2 Decimal Places for Net Totalizer

2872 Print 3 Decimal Places for Net Totalizer





2873 Print 0 Decimal Place for Energy Totalizer

2874 Print 1 Decimal Place for Energy Totalizer

2875 Print 2 Decimal Places for Energy Totalizer

2876 Print 3 Decimal Places for Energy Totalizer

1.3.19. Boolean Command Outputs and Status PointsUsed For Meter Tube Switching

Status inputs and outputs are required to achieve the automatic meter tubeswitching function. The command output points below are used to open andclose the motor-operated valve (MOV). Alarm points are also provided whichindicate MOV problems. See 2717 for points needed to interface to the MOVlimit switches.

2877 Meter #1 - Open MOV - Command OutActivates to open MOV.

2878 Meter #1 - Close MOV - Command OutActivates to close MOV.

2879 Meter #1 - MOV - Alarm OutMOV limit switches are indicating an illegal valve position.

2880 Meter #1 - Time-out Alarm - Opening MOVMOV took too long opening.

2881 Meter #1 - Time-out Alarm - Closing MOVMOV took too long closing.

2882 Meter #2 - Open MOV - Command Out

to

2886 Meter #2 - Time-out Alarm - Closing MOV


to



to


2897 Spare

to

3000 Spare


MOV Alarms: Any MOValarm will cause the flowcomputer to take the MOVout of service (see 2719)and send a close MOVcommand.



2. 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999)

2.1. Custom Data Packet Definition Variables




to



2.1.2. Custom Data Packet #2The 16-bit integers needed to define the 8 groups of data that make up CustomData Packet #2 which is accessed at database Index 0201 are listed below.



to






to






2.2. Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data

3097 Spare

3098 Number of Totalizer DigitsTotalizers roll at: 0=9 digits; 1=8 digits.

3099 Spare

3100 Spare

2.3. Meter Run 16-Bit Integer DataThe second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. Forexample: 3106 is the 'Meter Active Frequency' for Meter Run # 1. The samepoint for Meter Run # 4 would be 3406.

3n01 Override Code - TemperatureFor points 3n01-3n05: 0=Never use; 1=Always use; 2=Use if transmitter fails; 3=Iftransmitter fails use last hours average.

3n02 Override Code - Pressure

3n03 Override Code - Gravity/Density

3n04 Override Code - Density Temperature

3n05 Override Code - Density Pressure

3n06 Active Threshold HzPoint 1n05 is set when flow pulses exceed this frequency.

3n07 Use Transducer Density0=Use equation; 1=Use transducer.

3n08 Turbine or Differential Pressure0=Use differential pressure; 1=Use turbine meter.

3n09 Override Code - Differential Pressure

3n10 Static Pressure - Location Select0=Upstream; 1=Downstream.

3n11 AGA 8 - Method Selection1 to 3=1994; 4 to 6=1992; 7 to 12=1985

3n12 Orifice Taps0=Flange; 1=Pipe; 2=Corner taps; 3=D&D/2; 4=Nozzle; 5 & 6= Venturi

# 3n13 Disable Downstream/Upstream Temperature - Isentropic Correction0=No; 1=Yes.

3n14 Product Number Select1 to 4.

3n15 Gas Chromatograph Analyzer - Stream Number Selection

3n16 Spare


Note:

# Downstreamtemperature can becorrected to upstreamconditions assuming anisentropic expansionafter the orifice. Defaultis ‘Disable’ becauseAGA 3 / API 14.3 DONOT mandate thiscorrection.



3n17 Hour in Progress - Flow Time500msec ticks (0-7200).

3n18 Last Hour’s - Flow Time500msec ticks (0-7200).

3n19 PID Control ModeDo not write if 3n20 is ‘1’. 1=Manual; 0=Auto.

3n20 Setpoint ModeRead only. DO NOT WRITE! 1=Local; 0=Remote.

3n21 PID Loop StatusRead only. 1=Secondary; 0=Primary.

3n22 Frequency Point - K Factor #1For points 3n22-3n33, see the 17500 area for matching K-Factors.












3n34 Comparitor Error ThresholdWhen ‘dual pulse’ error checking enabled only.

3n35 Spare

3n36 Meter Run - Flow Time - Hours Since Day Start

3n37 Meter Run - Flow Time - Minutes Since Day Start

3n38 Meter Run - Flow Time - Hours Previous Day

3n39 Meter Run - Flow Time - Minutes Previous Day

# 3n40 Current Net Flowrate

* 3n41 Net Totalizer

# 3n42 Current Gross Flowrate

* 3n43 Gross Total

# 3n44 Current Mass Flowrate

* 3n45 Mass Total

~ 3n46 Current Meter Run Pressure

~ 3n47 Current Meter Run Temperature

~ 3n48 Current Transducer Density/Gravity

# 3n49 Energy Flowrate

* 3n50 Energy Total


Notes:

# 2s complement numbersbased on span entries17176 through 17189.Values expressed aspercentages of span intenth percentincrements;. i.e., 1000represents 100.0%


~ 2s complement numbersbased on the 4-20 mAspans. Values areexpressed aspercentages of span intenth percentincrements; i.e., 1000equals 100.0 %.



3n51 Applied Automation - Gas Chromatograph Status

3n52 Applied Automation - Gas Chromatograph Alarm Code

3n53 Spare

to

3n99 Spare

3500 Spare

2.4. Scratchpad 16-Bit Integer DataNinety-nine integer registers are provided for user scratch pad. These registersare typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peer-to-peeroperations or similar operations.


to


3600 Spare




2.5. User Display Definition VariablesThe 16-bit integers needed to define the variables that appear in the eight UserDisplays are listed below. Look in the 4601 area for string associated with settingup User Displays.











3609 Database Index Number of 1 st Variable







3616 Decimal Places for 4 th Variable













2.6. Data Used to Access the Raw DataArchive Records

See the chapter describing how to use the raw data archiving features of the flowcomputer including how to manipulate the ‘pointers’ below.























3737 Archive File System - Memory Allocation Status0=OK; 1=Allocation Error.

3738 Spare

to

3750 Spare

3751 Run Switching in Auto Mode0=No; 1=Yes.

3752 Run Switching TimerSeconds allowed for flow to settle during MOV operations.

3753 Spare

to

3768 Spare

3769 Number of Historical Alarms to Modbus BufferUsed by OmniCom when reading the Historical Alarm Report. OmniCom first writes tothis variable the number of historical alarm events to be included on the report.




2.8. Gas Chromatograph 16-Bit Integer DataThe data points below are used to map the component order of the GC analysisto the component order needed by AGA8.

3770 Component # ‘ n’ for % Methane

3771 Component # ‘ n’ for % Nitrogen

3772 Component # ‘ n’ for % Carbon Dioxide

3773 Component # ‘ n’ for % Ethane

3774 Component # ‘ n’ for % Propane

3775 Component # ‘ n’ for % Water

3776 Component # ‘ n’ for % Hydrogen Sulfide

3777 Component # ‘ n’ for % Hydrogen

3778 Component # ‘ n’ for % Carbon Monoxide

3779 Component # ‘ n’ for % Oxygen

3780 Component # ‘ n’ for % i-Butane

3781 Component # ‘ n’ for % n-Butane

3782 Component # ‘ n’ for % i-Pentane

3783 Component # ‘ n’ for % n-Pentane

3784 Component # ‘ n’ for % n-Hexane

3785 Component # ‘ n’ for % n-Heptane

3786 Component # ‘ n’ for % n-Octane

3787 Component # ‘ n’ for % n-Nonane

3788 Component # ‘ n’ for % n-Decane

3789 Component # ‘ n’ for % Helium

3790 Component # ‘ n’ for % Argon

3791 Component # ‘ n’ for Heating Value

3792 Component # ‘ n’ for Reference Specific Gravity

3793 Spare

to

3799 Spare




2.9. Meter Station 16-Bit Integer Data

~ 3800 Special Diagnostic FunctionUsed to enable rigorous ‘Audit Trail’ reporting of all serial port transactions (see sidebar note).

3801 Spare

# 3802 Current Net Flowrate

* 3803 Net Totalizer

# 3804 Current Gross Flowrate

* 3805 Gross Totalizer

# 3806 Current Mass Flowrate

* 3807 Mass Totalizer

3808 Spare

to

3810 Spare

# 3811 Current Energy Flowrate

# 3812 Energy Totalizer

3813 Fluid Type Select - Product #1




3817 AGA 8 Method Select - Product #1




3821 Heating Value Method Select - Product #10=AGA 5; 1=GPA 2172-96

3822 Heating Value Method Select - Product #2



3825 Spare

to

3828 Spare


Notes:


~ To avoid flushing theaudit trail, audit eventsother than complete‘downloads’ to the flowcomputer are usually notdocumented in the ‘audittrail’ unless serial portpasswords have beenenabled. If pass-wordsare enabled, the targetaddress is recorded forsingle point writes.Rigorous auditing of aserial port or group ofserial ports can beactivated by placing theappropriate hexadecimalcode in 3800 (S = SerialPort):

000A = Audit S100A0 = Audit S20A00 = Audit S3A000 = Audit S4

To monitor multipleports; e.g:A0 A0 = Audit S4 & S2

# 2s complement numbersbased on span entries17176 through 17189.Values expressed aspercentages of span intenth percentincrements. i.e. 1000represents 100.0% . Noover range or underrange checking is done.



3829 Flow Average FactorNumber of 500 msec calculation cycles to average.

3830 Print Priority0=Not sharing a printer; 1=Master; n=slaves 2-12.

3831 Number of Nulls After CRUsed to slow data to a printer if no hardware handshake.

3832 Print Interval in MinutesTime interval between automatic snapshot reports.

3833 Automatic - Weekly Batch Select0=None; 1=Monday; 7=Sunday.

3834 Automatic - Monthly Batch Select0=None; 1=1st day of the month.

3835 Automatic - Hourly Batch Select0=No; 1=Yes.

3836 Default Report Templates0=Custom templates; 1=Default reports.

3837 Gas Chromatograph Analyzer - Type Select0=Applied Automation; 1=Danalyzer.

3838 Clear Daily @ Batch End Select0=24hr Totals; 1=Cleared at batch end.

3839 Analyzer NumberID Used in communications

3840 Gas Chromatograph - Result IntervalWill ask gas chromatograph for data if no new result sent within this many minutes.

3841 Gas Chromatograph - Listen Only Mode0=Be master; 1=Be slave - listen only.

3842 Select Date TypeSelects date format: 0=dd/mm/yy; 1=mm/dd/yy.




2.10. Danalyzer Gas Chromatograph Data

3843 Danalyzer - Alarm Word - 3046For point 3843-3854, see Danalyzer documentation for complete details aboutmapping of alarm registers. Critical alarms in this register.

3844 Danalyzer - Alarm Word - 3047Critical alarms in this register.

3845 Danalyzer - Alarm Word - 3048










3855 Danalyzer - Cycle Start - MonthPoints 3855-3859 represent the time and date when the last analysis was started.

3856 Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Day

3857 Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Year

3858 Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Hour

3859 Danalyzer - Cycle Start - Minute

3860 Spare

to

3866 Spare


INFO - The addresses onthe right (3047-3057) arethe correspondingaddresses in the Danalyzer.



2.11. Flow Computer Time and Date VariablesTime and date can be read and written here. See also 4847 and 4848.

3867 Current - Hour0-23.

3868 Current - Minute0-59.

3869 Current - Second0-59.

3870 Current - Month1-12.

3871 Current - Day of Month1-31.

3872 Current - Year0-99; Year 2000=00.

3873 Current - Day of WeekRead only. 1=Monday; 7=Sunday.

3874 Disable Daily Report0=print daily report; 1=no daily report.





3875 Spare

to

3879 Spare

3880 Override Code - Reference Specific Gravity

3881 Override Code - Nitrogen

3882 Override Code - Carbon Dioxide

3883 Override Code - Heating Value

3884 Override Code - Gas Chromatograph

3885 Spare

to

4000 Spare




3. 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001 - 4999)

3.1. Meter Run ASCII String DataThe second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. Forexample: 4114 is the 'Meter ID' for Meter Run #1. The same point for Meter Run#4 would be 4414. Each ASCII string is 8 characters occupying the equivalent of4 short integer registers (see the side bar comments).

4n01 Running Batch - Start Date

4n02 Running Batch - Start Time

# 4n03 Batch End - Date

# 4n04 Batch End - Time

4n05 Running Product Name

4n06 Current - Calculation ModeAlgorithm set used, in string format.

4n07 Spare

4n08 Spare

4n09 Meter Factor Used in Net / MassUsed on reports. It contains ‘Yes’ or ‘No’. Characters 1-8.

4n10 Spare

4n11 Meter - Serial Number

4n12 Meter - Size

4n13 Meter - Model

4n14 Meter - ID

4n15 Flow Meter Tag / Low Range Tag - Differential Pressure

4n16 Differential Pressure - High Range Tag

4n17 Transmitter Tag - Temperature

4n18 Transmitter Tag - Pressure

4n19 Transmitter Tag - Densitometer

4n20 Transmitter Tag - Density Temperature

4n21 Transmitter Tag - Density Pressure

4n22 Output Tag - PID Control

INFO - These ASCII stringvariables are accessedusing Modbus functioncodes 03 for all reads and16 for all writes.

Note: The index number ofeach string refers to thecomplete string whichoccupies the space of 4registers. It must beaccessed as a completeunit. You cannot read orwrite a partial string. Eachpoint counts as one point inthe normal Omni Modbusmode.

Modicon CompatibleMode - For the purpose ofpoint count only, each stringcounts as 4 registers. Thestarting address of thestring still applies.

Note:

# Last batch end for thismeter run.



4n23 Spare

to

4n99 Spare

4500 Spare

3.2. Scratch Pad ASCII String DataStorage for ninety-nine ASCII strings is provided for user scratch pad. Theseregisters are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer operations or similar operations.


to


3.3. User Display Definition String VariablesThe string variables which define the descriptor tags that appear in the eightUser Displays and the key press combinations which recall the displays arelisted below.






to



to


4641 Spare

to

4706 Spare


INFO - See 3601 area formore data points needed tosetup the user displays.



3.4. String Variables Associated with theStation Auxiliary Inputs


to


4711 Spare

to

4806 Spare

3.5. Meter Station 8-Character ASCII StringData

4807 Date of Last Database ChangeUpdated each time the Audit Trail is updated.

4808 Time of Last Database Change

4809 Reserved

4810 Esc Sequence to Print CondensedRaw ASCII characters sent to printer (see 14149 for Hex ASCII setup).

4811 Esc Sequence to Print NormalRaw ASCII characters sent to printer (see 14150 for Hex ASCII setup).

4812 Daylight Savings StartsDate format field (**/**/**).

4813 Daylight Savings EndsDate format field (**/**/**).

4814 Spare

4815 Station - ID

4816 Spare

4817 Spare

4818 Print Interval Timer Start TimeTime format field (**:**:**).

4819 Time to Print Daily ReportTime format field (**:**:**).

INFO - These ASCII stringvariables are accessedusing Modbus functioncodes 03 for all reads and16 for all writes.

Note: The index number ofeach string refers to thecomplete string whichoccupies the space of 4registers. It must beaccessed as a completeunit. You cannot read orwrite a partial string. Eachpoint counts as one point inthe normal Omni Modbusmode.

Modicon CompatibleMode - For the purpose ofpoint count only, each stringcounts as 4 registers. Thestarting address of thestring still applies.







4824 Spare

to

4831 Spare

4832 Reference Specific Gravity Tag

4833 Nitrogen Tag

4834 Carbon Dioxide Tag

4835 Heating Value Tag

4836 Flow Computer ID





4841 Company NameCharacters 33-38. (Note: Last two characters are spares.)





4846 Station LocationCharacters 33-38. (Note: Last two characters are spares.)

* 4847 Current DatePoint 3842 selects date format (see also 3870-3872).

* 4848 Current TimeSee also 3867-3869.

4849 Software Version NumberExample: 23.71

4850 Online Password / EPROM ChecksumDual function point. Write password. Read provides EPROM Checksum.

4851 Spare

to

5000 Spare


Note:

* The flow computer timeand date can be set bywriting to these ASCIIvariables. Be sure toinclude the colons ( : ) inthe time string and theslashes ( / ) in the datestring.

,lk TB: 960701 Overview of OmniCom Configuration PC Software

TB: 960702 Communicating with Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers

TB: 960703 Storing Archive Data within the Flow Computer

TB: 960704 Communicating with Honeywell ST3000 Smart Transmitters

TB: 970701 Stability Requirements: Final Calibration of Flow Computer

TB: 970702 Secondary Totalizers Provide Net Volume at Temp. Other than 15 °C or 60°F

TB: 970801 Using Boolean Statements to Provide Custom Alarms in the Flow Computer

TB: 970802 Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database: Overview

TB: 970803 Meter Factor Linearization

TB: 970804 Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy: Using Gas Chromatograph, Product Overrides or Live 4-20mA Analyzer Inputs of ‘SG’ and ‘HV’

TB: 970901 Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity Checking

TB: 980201 Communicating with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems

TB: 980202 Recalculating a Previous Batch within the Flow Computer

TB: 980301 Replacing EPROM Chips

TB: 980401 Peer-to-Peer Basics

TB: 980402 Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a Redundant Flow Computer Application

TB: 980501 Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Sensor Interface Issues

TB: 980503 Serial I/O Modules: Installation Options

Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

TB-960701 ALL REVS 1

Date: 07 23 96 Author(s) : Kenneth D. Elliott TB # 960701

Overview of OmniCom Configuration PCSoftware

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................2

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................2

Configuring the Flow Compute r ........................................................................2

Report Configurato r ............................................................................................3

Operations Utilities and Hel p .............................................................................3

Dial-up Acces s .....................................................................................................3

Passwords Using OmniCo m ..............................................................................3Local Keypad Access .................................................................................................... 4Changing Passwords at the Keypad ............................................................................. 4Setting Up the Initial 'Level B' and 'Level C' Passwords for each Modbus Port............. 5Maintaining the Modbus Port Password Using OmniCom ........................................... 5Disabling Modbus Port Passwords................................................................................ 6

Getting Starte d ....................................................................................................6Installation Requirements.............................................................................................. 6Installation Procedure.................................................................................................... 6Opening a File ............................................................................................................... 7View............................................................................................................................... 7Off-line........................................................................................................................... 7On-line........................................................................................................................... 7Reports .......................................................................................................................... 8Utilities........................................................................................................................... 8

I/O Point Assignment List ........................................................................................................ 8OmniCom Setup ................................................................................................................... 8OmniCom Application ............................................................................................................ 9Archive Start/Stop Command .................................................................................................. 9Prover Commands..................................................................................................................10Diagnostics.............................................................................................................................10Omni Front Panel Emulator ....................................................................................................10

Help ............................................................................................................................. 10Registration of License and Software Support ............................................................ 11

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained inVolume 3 , Chapter 2 “FlowComputer Configuration ”,and is applicable to allfirmware revisions.This bulletin was previouslypublished as an appendix touser manuals of firmwarerevisions Version .70 andearlier.

OmniCom ConfigurationPC Software - Thispowerful software packageallows you to setup, copy ormodify, and save to diskentire configurations forOmni flow computers. Italso allows you to createcustom reports anddisplays. You can workonline, offline and remotely.

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 Flow Computers Technical Bulletin

2 OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.TB-960701 ALL REVS

ScopeOmniCom Software is compatible with all firmware revisions of Omni6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers. It is installed in a personal computer fromwhich you can configure your flow computer.

AbstractOmniCom is a simple-to-use yet sophisticated PC-based configuration programthat can be used to setup, copy or modify, and save to disk entire configurationsfor Omni flow computers. You can also select custom report options and modifyreport templates and Omni display screens that are resident within the program,or create new ones. These can then be uploaded to the flow computer. Defaultreports provide standard data and formats for most requirements.

Major application programming has already been developed by Omni and isresident in EPROM. This is of particular importance in custody transfermeasurement contracts. They require that the relevant API, AGA, GPA or ISOstandards are fully implemented and not exposed to tampering.

The OmniCom program allows you to develop your own system requirements bya simple process of menu selection and table completion. This replicates thedata entry tables which can be accessed through the front panel keypad of yourOmni Flow Computer.

Configuring the Flow ComputerConfiguring the flow computer involves specifying what transducers are going tobe used, their calibrated ranges and the physical I/O points being assigned.Other data needed by the flow computer relates to the flowing product to bemeasured, the type of calculations to be used, and communication and controlfeatures.

You will usually configure the flow computer in the Off-line Mode and then uploadyour data. You do not have to be connected to the flow computer at this time.You will usually go to the Online Menu only when you need to communicatedirectly with the flow computer. Any changes made are immediately reflected inthe flow computer.

For Further Help - If yourequire further help, callOmni’s technical support at:

+1-281-240-6161

TB-960701 Overview of OmniCom Configuration PC Software

TB-960701 ALL REVSOMNI Flow Computers, Inc. 3

Report ConfiguratorOne of OmniCom's indispensable features is the ability to reformat defaultreports by using OmniCom's report templates. This is the ONLY feature notavailable through the front panel keypad. Any variable defined in the Modbusdatabase, or programmed as a variable can be inserted into a report withaccompanying text. Reports can be created in languages other than English tosuit local needs.

Operations Utilities and HelpOperational tools such as remotely proving meters, and reading hardwarediagnostics are provided. Diagrams are also provided for communications cablehook-up. Application Programs and PC Setup for OmniCom can also beselected. As you work through the entries, you will find entry-sensitive Help thatexplains the meaning of the particular entry. Whether at the flow computerkeypad or at a PC there is always assistance.

Dial-up AccessOmni Flow Computers encourages the installation of a telephone dial-up modemas a ready means of providing installation and maintenance support forcustomer and vendor alike. Serial communication passwords provide enhancedsecurity. Three levels of password pre-exist within Omni flow computers toprovide privileged or restricted access to critical configuration and calibrationdata.

The OmniCom program allows you to upload/download data to and from the flowcomputer in an on-line mode at a range of baud rates by direct-wire or bytelephone dial-up modem access. This is particularly useful when the flowcomputer is in use. Occasionally, you will want to modify configuration orcalibration data, or just monitor activity. You can do all this without interferingwith pipeline or process operations or with communication links to host SCADAor DCS systems.

Passwords Using OmniComExcept when changing transducer high/low alarm limits, a password is usuallyasked for when changing the configuration data within the computer.

The flow computer has independent password protection of the following:

1) Local Keypad access

2) Modbus Port #1 (Physical serial Port #1)




Accessing Help inOmniCom - At the 'UsingHelp' feature, press [Enter]and [F1] for editingkeystrokes.


+1-281-240-6161

INFO - For FirmwareRevisions 70+, PhysicalSerial Port #1 is selectableas a Modbus RTU, ModbusRTU (modem), or printerport. This serial port onprevious revisions was onlya printer port.



Local Keypad AccessThree password levels are provided:

a) Privileged Level - Allows complete access to all entries within the flowcomputer including keypad passwords (b) and (c) below. The initialprivileged password for each Modbus port is selected via this passwordlevel.

b) Level 1 - This level allows technician access to most entries within theflow computer with the exception of I/O Points assignments,programmable variables and Boolean statements and passwords otherthan Keypad level 1.

c) Level 1A - Allows access to the following entries:

♦ Meter factors and K Factors

♦ Densitometer correction factors (pycnometer factor)

d) Level 2 - Allows access to the operator type entries. These entriesinclude:

♦ Transducer manual overrides

♦ Product gravity overrides

♦ Prover operations

♦ Batching operations

Changing Passwords at the Keypad1) At the keypad press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter]

2) With the cursor blinking on 'Misc Configuration' press [Enter]

3) With the cursor blinking on 'Password Main?'

press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter]

4) Enter the 'Privileged Level' Password (up to 6 characters) press [Enter]

5) The 'Level 1',Level 1A and 'Level 2' passwords can now be viewed andchanged if required.

6) Scroll down to access each of the Modbus serial port 'Level A' passwords.These are labeled 'Ser1Passwd', Ser2 Passwd', 'Ser3 Passwd' and ‘Ser4Passwd’ corresponding to the physical port numbering for Modbus Ports1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively.

INFO - Level B and Level Cpasswords for each Modbusport cannot be viewed orchanged from the keypad.



Setting Up the Initial 'Level B' and 'Level C' Passwords foreach Modbus Port

7) Enter an initial 'Level A' Password for the appropriate physical serial portat the keypad of the Omni Flow Computer as described above.

8) Connect a PC running OmniCom Software to the selected serial port ofthe Omni Flow Computer. Open a file and 'Receive Omni ConfigurationData'.

9) A red pop-up screen will appear which notes that a password is requiredto proceed. If any other screen appears at this point, check wiring andcommunication settings, Modbus ID, baud rate, etc.

10) Do not enter the 'Level A' password at this point. Keep pressed [Alt] asyou press [E] to edit the passwords. A second red pop-up screen willappear asking for the 'current valid password'. A good practice would beto use uppercase letters (activate [CapsLock] on the keyboard) becausewhen setting passwords from the flow computer’s keypad, they arealways entered in uppercase.

11) Enter the 'Level A' password that was selected for this serial port.

12) You are asked if you would like to change the 'Level A', 'Level B' and'Level C' passwords. Select to change 'Level B' at this point. You will beasked to enter a password. As you enter the password, asterisks willshow in place of the characters you typed. You will be asked to re-enterthe password to ensure that what you typed was correct.

13) To setup a ‘Level C’ password, repeat Steps 2 and 6 substituting ‘LevelC’ for ‘Level B’ at Step 6.

Maintaining the Modbus Port Password Using OmniCom

After the initial passwords have been setup for each of the Modbus serial portsas shown above, they may be changed at any time while logged on withOmniCom.

1) While keeping pressed the [Alt] key, press [E] at any time and the pop-up screen appears asking for a password. This screen can be forced toappear by keeping pressed [Alt] as you press [P] while viewing anyediting screen; i.e., any screen with data fields that can be edited.

2) When asked, enter your current password. Password ‘Level B’ and ‘LevelC’ users are allowed to change only their own password levels. ‘Level A’password users can change levels A, B and C.



Disabling Modbus Port Passwords‘Level B’ and ‘Level C’ passwords should be disabled via OmniCom (seesidebar) before disabling the privileged ‘Level A’ password at the keypad.

1) To disable each password proceed as though you are going to change orset-up the password.

2) Press the [Delete] key six (6) times where the initial password wasentered followed by the [Enter] key (no asterisks will show).

3) When asked to re-enter the password, re-enter six [Delete] key pressesfollowed by the [Enter] key.

4) Repeat this procedure for both ‘Level B’ and ‘Level C’ passwords.

5) From the Omni flow computer keypad, delete the 'Level A' password forthe appropriate Modbus serial port (see Volume 3 ). To do this, move thecursor to the serial Level A password to disable and press the [Clear] keyand then the [Enter] key.

Getting Started

Installation RequirementsTo properly run OmniCom, and have sufficient memory for report templates andcopies of the database, you will require the following:

♦ IBM PC (or compatible)

♦ MS DOS, V3.3 or later (excepting 4.01)

♦ 640Kb RAM

♦ 20Mb Free Hard Disk Space with a minimum of one floppy disk drive, 3½"1.44 Mb

♦ Monochrome or color monitor with EGA or VGA graphics capability

♦ One RS-232 serial port

♦ One LPT port (optional)

♦ One RS-232 modem (optional at various supported baud rates)

Installation ProcedureOmniCom is delivered on 1.44 Mb, 3½" diskettes in an archived format. Toinstall, do the following:

1) Insert the diskette into your PC's corresponding floppy disk drive.

2) Type the respective drive letter followed by a colon (e.g.: A: or B).

3) Type Install and press [Enter] .

The OmniCom installation program will guide you through the rest of theinstallation.

INFO - Level B and Level Cpasswords for each Modbus(serial) port cannot beviewed or changed from thekeypad; i.e., you must useOmniCom to view, changeor delete these passwordlevels.

CAUTION!

Terminate and StayResident (TSR) programssuch as SideKick andKeyboard Macro processorscan affect the operation ofhigh speed communicationprograms such asOmniCom. They do this by'stealing' processor cyclesor turning off the hardwareinterrupt system of thepersonal computer. Theseprograms may have to bedisabled when you are inthe 'On-line' Mode, if youencounter difficultiescommunicating with theOmni flow computer.

Installing OmniComRevisions Previous to 70 -Before you install earlierrevisions of OmniComsoftware, you must saveyour existing phonedirectory entries and setup.For instructions and anyother assistance you mayneed, please contact ourtechnical support staff atthe following phone number:

+1-281-240-6161



Opening a FileFirst open an existing Omni-supplied file. Each application and derived filescome with their own set of templates. You can then 'SAVE AS' to create a newfile to commence your configuration. Each file that you create will occupyapproximately 60 Kbytes of disk space. This includes 36 Kbytes for theconfiguration file and 6 Kbytes for each of the four custom report templates.

All menu selections are supported by entry-sensitive ‘Help’. No matter where youare, by pressing [F1] you can obtain an explanation of the requirements for yourentry selection.

ViewFiles can be viewed separately or in parallel with a file that is currently beingedited. This allows you to compare various numeric entries in similar files. Thiscan be helpful if you are maintaining historical files that track changes you havemade. You may not be able to use the ‘View’ feature with certain variations offlow computer configuration files because newer firmware include additionalentry fields not available in earlier revisions.

Off-lineYou will usually begin in the Off-line Mode to configure your flow computer. Itnaturally leads in to the 'Omni Configuration' Menu selections. Only when youcomplete this section will you be able to activate the various 'Setup' options andproceed to establish your calibration ranges and other related data. Before youbegin the configuration of I/O, be sure you know what number and type ofphysical I/O has been installed in the flow computer. A mismatch between youroff-line configuration and physical hardware will not make a data upload to theflow computer meaningful in key areas of your configuration data.

On-lineWhen you have completed building your configuration database, you are thenready to upload data to your Omni flow computer. The OmniCom program usesthe Modbus RTU binary protocol which mandates the use of 8 data bits. Besure that the serial I/O parameters in both devices have been properly setupbefore attempting to communicate. Baud rate and parity settings are less criticalbut must also be the same.

With a direct-connect to a PC, OmniCom will perform an auto baud rate searchand display an error if baud rates are incompatible (see 2.5.16. SerialInput/Output Settings in Volume 3 ). Baud rates from 1.2 kbps to 38.4 kbps aresupported. When using a modem, the auto baud rate search is not performed. Inthis case, the baud rate is that at which the modem is setup. Some personalcomputers may not have the processing power to support the higher baud rates.Note also that modems are capable of using a higher baud rate at the RS-232connector than they are communicating on the telephone line. If the modemsconnect but the flow computer does not respond, try adjusting the flowcomputer’s baud rate.



+1-281-240-6161



ReportsThe 'Report' Menu allows you to retrieve snapshot and historical reports from theflow computer or from your hard disk. These are pre-formatted default reportsthat are included in the Omni application software. You can also customize yourown reports from standard templates. By using the on-screen report editor, youcan add or delete text and data character strings which identify the variable inthe computer's Modbus database. [F1] for help describes the control functionsto enable you to format the report easily. Bring up a report template and movethe cursor onto the 'XXXX.XX' fields. Press [Enter] and a pop-up menu definesthe variable being used. Type or edit text anywhere, move the cursor andkeeping pressed [Shift] as you press [$] enables you to enter or delete anydatabase address from the report.

UtilitiesThe ‘Utilities’ Menu has several useful tools for setting up and maintainingOmniCom. The utilities available are:

I/O Point Assignment List OmniCom Setup OmniCom Application Archive Maintenance

Prover/Batch End Commands Diagnostics Omni Panel

I/O Point Assignment List

When the configuration of your flow computer is complete, you should reviewyour assignment of physical I/O by accessing the display under 'I/O PointAssignment List'. An I/O mismatch can result in erroneous calibration rangesand consequential errors in measurement and control of your metering system!

This utility shows a summary list that indicates what physical I/O points areassigned to which variables. Point numbers with asterisks '*' next to them areused for more than one variable. Check the list to ensure you have not assigneda physical I/O point to more than one transducer type; e.g.: An I/O point cannotbe assigned to a temperature and pressure transmitter at the same time. Theflow computer will not allow this to happen in the ‘On-line’ mode, but OmniComdoes not check for this in the ‘Off-line’ mode.

OmniCom Setup

This utility allows you to:

Select the type of video monitor. Turn the sound effects on/off. Setup the modem command strings.



OmniCom Application

Use this utility before you start to select the software version of OmniCom thatmatches the firmware version number of your Omni flow computer. The firmwareversions are:

US VERSIONS METRIC VERSIONS

20

Turbine / Positive Displacement /Coriolis Liquid Flow MeteringSystems (with K FactorLinearization)

24

Turbine / Positive Displacement /Coriolis Liquid Flow MeteringSystems (with K FactorLinearization)

21 Orifice / Differential PressureLiquid Flow Metering Systems 25 Orifice / Differential Pressure

Liquid Flow Metering Systems

22Turbine / Positive DisplacementLiquid Flow Metering Systems(with Meter Factor Linearization)

26Turbine / Positive DisplacementLiquid Flow Metering Systems(with Meter Factor Linearization)

23 Orifice / Turbine Gas FlowMetering Systems 27 Orifice / Turbine Gas Flow

Metering Systems

Archive Start/Stop Command

When this menu is entered, OmniCom tries to establish communications with theflow computer using the comm parameter settings currently selected in the 'StartComm' submenu of the 'Online' menu. It does this to establish the status of the'Archive' flag and 'Archive Config Enable' flag. Check comm settings if all itemson the menu are inactive; i.e., OmniCom is unable to communicate with thetarget computer.

Any changes made to the flow computers configuration which involves theformat of the data record, number of records in an archive file, or the totalnumber of archive files within the flow computer, will cause the memory used tostore the archive data to be reinitialized. This would cause all data stored inarchive to be lost. Therefore, no changes to the target flow computers archiveconfiguration will be allowed unless automatic data archiving has been disabledand the 'Archive Config Enable' flag is on.

WARNING!

Warning: The flow computerwill not accept changesmade to the archive setupat the time of a 'TransmitOmni Configuration' uploadunless the archiving featurehas been turned off.



+1-281-240-6161



Prover Commands

Proving features displayed here can only be viewed when communicatingdirectly with an Omni Flow Computer.

You may monitor or control the operation of a meter prover which is controlled bya remote Omni flow computer. You must have already establishedcommunications with the flow computer before making this selection. If you havenot established communications with a flow computer you will receive one of thefollowing error messages:

Byte count does not match expected - OmniCom is confused and thinksyour modem is connected to a flow computer. Try dialing out first.

No response from Omni - You are either not connected to anything or theslave ID number of the flow computer you are trying to talk to does not matchOmniCom's setting.

Use the 'Shift' key with the appropriate 'Function' key to select the flowmeter youwish to remote prove.

The 'Status Window' shows the event history and the 'Omni Display' echoes datashown locally at the Omni flow computer.

Diagnostics

You must be connected and online with a flow computer for this selection towork. The screen displays diagnostic information about the flow computersuch as number and type of I/O modules fitted, status of digital I/O, currentoutput percent of analog outputs and raw input signals coming into the flowcomputer.

Omni Front Panel Emulator

When this feature is selected, an illustration of the Omni front panel is displayedby which all the functions of an Omni Flow computer are emulated. Use themouse to click on simulated buttons to access real time displays and makeentries. OmniCom is actually displaying the same LCD display buffer informationand the mouse click are actually sending data into the same key stroke buffer asthe front panel keypad. Performance is much better at 9600 baud or higher. Youmust have setup the baud rate and other communication settings in the 'StartComm' menu before you can use Omni Panel.

HelpYou can further customize your Help screens by making use of an on-screeneditor. Via this feature you can modify Help text by additions or deletions to suityour own needs and operations. Windows can be resized and repositioned tosuit your own personal preference. This can be particularly useful as anadditional memory aid, if the Operations Manual is not available to you, or ifadditional information is required for other users of this program.




Registration of License and Software SupportRemember to mail in the registration of your distribution diskette to Omni flowcomputers. OmniCom is provided with each Omni flow computer on a single-user license basis. Any additional installations of this program will require re-registration by the user. This will ensure that you will have the opportunity toreceive free telephone support, and notice of program revisions and new add-onprograms for your installation.


+1-281-240-6161




Communicating with Allen-Bradle yProgrammable Logic Controllers

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................1

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................2

Protocol and Error Checkin g .............................................................................2

PLC Supporte d ....................................................................................................2

Flow Computer Databas e ...................................................................................24th and 5th Digit from the Right Identifies Type of Variable .......................................... 23rd Digit from Right Identifies which Area within the Application.................................... 3

How the Allen-Bradley Accesses the Omni Flow Computer Databas e.......3PLC-2 ............................................................................................................................ 3PLC-3 ............................................................................................................................ 3PLC-5 ............................................................................................................................ 3Valid Starting Addresses of PLC-5 Files ....................................................................... 4

16-Bit Integers ......................................................................................................................... 48-Character Strings.................................................................................................................. 432-Bit Integers ......................................................................................................................... 432-Bit IEEE Floating Points ..................................................................................................... 4Bit Integers .............................................................................................................................. 416-Character Strings................................................................................................................ 432-Bit Integers ......................................................................................................................... 432-Bit IEEE Floating Points ..................................................................................................... 4

ScopeAll firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers allowcommunications with Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs).This technical bulletin refers to communication aspects specific to the Omni FlowComputer and serves as information only. Please refer to the manufacturer forany support or information on Allen-Bradley products.

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained in theUser Manuals , and isapplicable to all firmwarerevisions.This bulletin was previouslypublished as an appendix touser manuals of firmwarerevisions Version .70 andearlier.

Allen-BradleyCommunications - Thisfeature allowscommunicating with Allen-Bradley PLCs. However,Omni Flow Computers isnot responsible for theoperation, connectivity orcompatibility of Allen-Bradley products, andfurthermore, we do notwarrant these products.



AbstractThe Omni 6000 flow computer provides serial communications between the flowcomputer and an Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), usuallyvia a KE or KF Communication Module connected to the Data Highway. Data istransmitted serially at a maximum rate of 38.4 kbps using 8 data bits, 1 stop bitand no parity bit. Average speed of response to a message request isapproximately 75 msec.

Protocol and Error CheckingBoth the DFI full duplex protocol and the half duplex protocol are supported.CRC or BCC error checking can be utilized when using either full duplex or halfduplex.

PLC SupportedThe Omni computer supports the following Allen-Bradley PLC types andmessages. Note that bit level operations are not supported.

PLC-2 Unprotected Block Reads and Writes

PLC-3 Word Range Reads and Writes

PLC-5 Typed Reads and Writes

SLC-502/3 Unprotected Typed Reads and Writes

Flow Computer DatabaseSerial Ports #1, #2, #3 and #4 in .71+ firmware revisions supportcommunications using superset of Modbus Protocol. This is the nativecommunications language of the flow computer. Several thousand variables areavailable within the Database. The primary numbering system used to identifythese variables is their 'index number'. The actual digits of the index numberindicate the type of variable and in many cases application area within thecomputer.

4th and 5th Digit from the Right Identifies Type ofVariable

1??? Variable is a digital status or command bit

3??? Variable is a 16 bit signed integer

4??? Variable is a 8 character ASCII string


7??? Variable is a 32 bit IEEE floating point



14??? Variable is a 16 character ASCII string



TB-960702 Communicating with Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers


3rd Digit from Right Identifies which Area within theApplication

?1?? Variable relates to Meter Run #1




?5?? Variable is scratchpad

?6?? Variable is PID related or scratchpad

?7?? Variable is a command write.

?8?? Variable is related to station functions

?9?? Variable is related to prover functions

How the Allen-Bradley Accesses the OmniFlow Computer Database

PLC-2This family is usually limited as to the type of data and address range. Data isalways transferred as block reads and writes.

Five translation tables are provided where the user can specify what data withinthe database will be concatenated into read or write groups. The startingaddress of each data block is selectable.

Translation Tables #1 through #3 are used to set up block reads whichcan contain status points packed 16 to a word, 16-bit or 32-bit integersand IEEE floating points.

Translation Table #4 is used for block writes of status and command bitsonly. Data is packed 16 to a word.

Translation Table #5 provides for block writes to any selected data.

PLC-3This family can use the methods described above as well as 'word range readsand writes' of any variable within the database (see PLC-5 list for startingaddresses).

PLC-5This family utilizes 'typed reads and writes' of the complete Database. Toaccommodate the PLC-5 'file system’ method of addressing, the Modbus indexnumbers serve as the basis of the internal file system of the computers as itappears to a PLC-5 device. Table below shows typical examples:

Note: The PLC2 does notunderstand 32-bit integer or32-bit IEEE floating pointsbut can pass these variabletypes to devices that dounderstand them.



MODBUS INDICES VERSUS PLC-5 ADDRESSES

MODBUS INDEX # PLC-5 ADDRESS ELEMENT SIZE COMMENT

1101 N11:01 1 Word (16 Flags) Meter #1 Status Flags

1217 N12:17 1 Word (16 Flags) Meter #2 Status Flags

1701 N17:01 1 Word (16 Flags) Command Flags

3201 N32:01 1 Word (Integer) Meter #1 Data

3210 N32:10 1 Word (Integer) Offsets track

3901 N39:01 1 Word (integer) Prover Data

4101 B41:01 1 Byte (ASCII) 4 Words per Variable

4102 B41:02 1 Byte (ASCII) 1 Byte per element

5101 N51:01 1 Word (Long Integer) 2 Words per variable

5102 N51:02 1 Word (Long Integer) 2 Words per variable

5103 N51:03 1 Word (Long Integer) Same again

7401 F74:01 2 Words (IEEE Float) 2 Words per variable

7405 F74:05 2 Words (IEEE Float) Offsets track

Valid Starting Addresses of PLC-5 Files

16-Bit IntegersN10:01 N11:01 N12:01 N13:01 N14:01 N15:01 N16:01 N17:01 N18:01 N19:01

N30:01 N31:01 N32:01 N33:01 N34:01 N35:01 N36:01 N37:01 N38:01 N39:01

8-Character StringsB41:01 B42:01 B43:01 B44:01 B45:01 B46:01 B47:01 B48:01 B49:01

32-Bit IntegersN51:01 N52:01 N53:01 N54:01 N55:01 N58:01 N59:01

32-Bit IEEE Floating PointsF70:01 F71:01 F72:01 F73:01 F74:01 F75:01 F76:01 F77:01 F78:01 F79:01

Bit IntegersN130:01 N134:01

16-Character StringsB140:01

32-Bit IntegersN150:01

32-Bit IEEE Floating PointsF170:01




Storing Archive Data within the FlowComputer

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................1

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................2

Raw Data Archivin g.............................................................................................2Retrieving Data.............................................................................................................. 3Raw Data Archive Point Addresses............................................................................... 4Archive Configuration Changes..................................................................................... 5

Setting the 'Reconfig Archive' Flag .......................................................................................... 6Possible Loss of Data when Starting and Stopping the Archive ............................................... 6Defining the Archive Records .................................................................................................. 6

How The Available Memory Is Allocated ....................................................................... 7Checking The Archive File Memory Status Screens ..................................................... 8Summary 0f Raw Data Archiving Features.................................................................... 9

Raw Data Archive Definition: Alarm/Event Log and Audit Event Lo g .........10Alarm/Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 711.................................... 10Audit Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 712. .................................... 10

Using The Custom Reports to Access the Text Archive Featur e.................11

Custom Report Template s ...............................................................................12

ScopeAll firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have thearchiving feature. This feature allows you to archive raw data, ASCII data andhistorical reports

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained inVolume 2 and Volume 3 ,and is applicable to allfirmware revisions 71+.This bulletin was previouslypublished as an appendix touser manuals of firmwarerevisions Version .70 andearlier.

Data Archiving - Thearchiving feature allows youto store raw data, ASCII textdata and historical reports.



AbstractThe flow computer provides three distinct methods of storing data. These are asfollows:

1) Raw Data Archive Data records are defined and stored in raw binaryformat in circular files of 'n' records per file. Ten userconfigurable files are provided as well as an alarmfile and audit trail file. This data can be retrievedusing standard Modbus Function Codes 3 and 6.

2) Text Archive Data ASCII data which is captured and saved whenever aSnapshot, Daily, Batch End or Prove report isprinted. Data is stored chronologically. To retrievethis data you must use OmniCom, OmniView or acustom Modbus driver which understands theproprietary Omni Modbus Function Codes 64 and65.

3) Historical Reports These are exact copies of data that was sent to thelocal printer in ASCII format. The flow computerstores the last eight copies of each of the followingreports: Daily, Batch End and Prove.

Method 3 is limited to storing the last eight reports and is therefore notconsidered archive data. Therefore this chapter will be limited to describing howMethods 1 and 2 are used to store archive data within the flow computer.

Raw Data ArchivingA maximum of ten archive files can be user configured. Two additional archivefiles, the alarm archive and audit trail archive are also included but are fixed informat and cannot be user configured.

Each user configurable archive file consists of 'n' archive records , where 'n' isdefined by the user. A record consists of a time and date stamp followed by anumber of user defined variables of any valid data type as described by itsarchive record definition table. The amount of memory an archive consumes iscalculated by multiplying the record size in bytes times the number of records inthe archive. Associated with each archive file is an archive trigger Boolean .Data is captured and stored in each of the archive files whenever the appropriatetrigger occurs; e.g., at the end of a batch or beginning of the day, etc. Threeadditional registers per archive file serve to indicate (a) maximum number ofrecords, (b) current record pointer and (c) requested record to read pointer.

Definitions & Terminology

Archive Address - Aunique Modbus addressused to read a data recordfrom an archive file. Theseaddresses are in the 700series; i.e., 701, 702, 703,etc.Archive Record - Astructure containing a fixedset of data variables whichcannot exceed 250 bytes inlength. Data within therecord can be of any validdata type in any order.Archive Trigger Boolean -The actual event whichcauses the flow computer tocapture and store a recordwithin the archive file. Thetrigger can be any Booleanvariable within the databaseincluding the result of aBoolean statement.

Block Read - Modbusprotocol block read requiresthat Function Code 03 (readmultiple registers) be usedto retrieve data.Circular Archive File - Afile of ‘n’ records arrangedas a circular buffer whichalways contains the mostrecent ‘n’ records; i.e., theoldest data record isoverwritten by each newrecord as it is added.Current Record Pointer -A 16-bit read-only integerregister containing anumber between 0 and ‘n’,representing the position ofthe most recently addedrecord within the archivefile. The pointer is adjustedafter each complete recordis added. A value of 0indicates that no datarecords have been addedsince the last initialization ofthe archive memory.

(Continues…)

TB3-960703 Storing Archive Data within the Flow Computer


Retrieving DataData records are retrieved one record at a time by writing the number of therecord required, to the requested record pointer register. The data can then beaccessed immediately by a block read of the archive address . Data must beread as one complete block. Also, because the flow computer always respondswith a complete record, the 'number of registers' field of the Modbus poll requestis ignored by the flow computer.

The following record retrieval method is simple and efficient; it works wellassuming that there is only one host device retrieving data. The methodassumes that the number of the last record retrieved is left in the requestedrecord pointer within the flow computer. This will not be the case when morethan one host device will be retrieving data; in this case each host device mustknow the number of the last record it retrieved.

1) Read the maximum records register , current record pointer andrequested record pointer . These registers are adjacent to each other inthe flow computers database.

2) A current record pointer value of 0 indicates that the archive file hasbeen initialized (i.e. cleared to binary zeroes/ASCII Nulls) and no triggerevent has occurred since initialization).

3) Compare the contents (just read) of the current record pointer with therequested record pointer .

4) If the records numbers are equal no additional records have been addedsince the last read and no further action is needed.

5) If the record numbers are not equal, increment the value of requestedrecord pointer.

6) If the resultant value is greater than the value obtained from themaximum record pointer , roll-over has occurred and record number oneshould be retrieved by writing '1' to the requested record pointerregister. Otherwise write the incremented value to the requested recordpointer register.

7) After writing to the requested record pointer register in the flowcomputer, the selected archive record can be read immediately usingModbus function '3' (read multiple registers). Archive file addresses are inthe 700 area of the flow computers database (i.e., archive file 1 = 701,archive file 2 = 702 etc.).

8) Repeat steps 3 through 7 until all records are read.

During the normal course of events, the host attempts to read the next record insequence based on the number of the last record it retrieved. An archive recordcontaining binary 0s indicates that the archive has been initialized since the lastread and that the host should restart by reading record number one (assumingthat the current record pointer is not 0)

Definitions & Terminology

(…Continued)

Maximum RecordsRegister - A 16-bit read-only integer adjacent to the‘Current Record Pointer’which contains the number‘n’, indicating the maximumnumber of records withinthe archive file.Requested RecordPointer - A 16-bit read/writeinteger used to select aspecific record within anarchive file.Time and Date Stamp - Sixbytes of binary datarepresenting the date andtime that the archive recordwas stored. The byte orderis as follows: Byte 1 = Month (1-12) or

Day (1-31) Byte 2 = Day (1-31) or

Month (1-12) Byte 3 = Year (0-99) Byte 4 = Hour of Day (0-

23) Byte 5 = Minute (0-59) Byte 6 = Seconds (0-59) European Format

Selected (dd/mm/yy)Valid Data Types - 32-bit IEEE floating point

data 32-bit long integer data 16-bit integer data 8-byte ASCII string data;

byte packed Booleanstatus data



Raw Data Archive Point Addresses

Archive #1 Record Access Address Read Only 0701Access Record Date/Time Only Read Only 0751Maximum # of Records Read Only 3701Last Record Updated Pointer Read Only 3702Record Req To Read Pointer Read/Write 3703











Archive #10 Record Access Address Read Only 0710Access Record Date/Time Only Read Only 0760Maximum # of Records Read Only 3728Last Record Updated Pointer Read Only 3729Record Req To Read Pointer4 Read/Write 3730

Alarm Archive Record Access Address Read Only 0711Access Record Date/Time Only Read Only 0761Maximum # of Records Read Only 3731Last Record Updated Pointer Read Only 3732Record Req To Read Pointer Read/Write 3733

Audit Archive Record Access Address Read Only 0712Access Record Date/Time Only Read Only 0762Maximum # of Records Read Only 3734Last Record Updated Pointer Read Only 3735Record Req To Read Pointer Read/Write 3736

Archive Configuration ChangesArchive configuration changes can be made via OmniCom or directly from thekey-pad of the flow computer. As the OmniCom program includes extensive helpscreens which document this subject, this appendix will concentrate onconfiguring the archive features via the keypad.

From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] . The LCD screen displays:

Select 'Misc. Configuration ' and press [Enter] . The following displays:

!"

#$ % !"

!"

Select 'Password Maint ' and press [Enter] . Enter the privileged password whenprompted and scroll down the screen until the following is displayed:

&'() &&

) &#* !

&#* ) !"

) &%% %



Setting the 'Reconfig Archive' Flag

Any configuration changes that are made to any of the archive files such aschanges to the size or number of records will force the flow computer toreallocate and clear to zero the RAM memory used to store archive data. Toavoid accidental data loss, the flow computer requires that two entries aremanipulated correctly before changes to the archive configuration can be made.

The 'Reconfig Archive ' flag must be set to 'Y’ and the Archive Run ' flag mustbe set to 'N'.

Possible Loss of Data when Starting and Stopping the Archive

To conserve archive storage, the user may on some occasions wish to set the'Archive Run ' flag to 'N' . This can be done at any time without loss of existingdata as long as the 'Reconfig Archive ' flag is not set to 'Y'. If the 'ReconfigArchive ' flag is accidentally set to 'Y' no data will be lost until the 'Archive Run 'flag is set to 'Y' (this allows the user to retrieve data before it is lost).

Defining the Archive Records

After setting the 'Reconfig Archive ' flag to 'Y' as described above, press the[Prog] key once to return to the 'Misc Setup' menu. It will be possible to define orchange any archive file configuration by scrolling down the display until thefollowing screen is displayed:

&#* +% ,,

Enter a number between 1 and 10 to select a specific archive file to modify (1 forexample). The following screen will display:

&) -. /01 ) ()

21 3 0

21 0

24 3 0

24 0

Begin entering the data that you require to be archived. The example below willcause variables 7101, 7102, 7103, 5101, 5102 and 5103 to be archived.

&) -. /01 ) ()

21 3 /101

21 5

24 3 6101

24 5

INFO - The ‘Alarm’ and‘Audit Trail’ archive files arefixed format and cannot bechanged.



A maximum of 16 groups of variables may be included in an archive record.Data can be of any valid type. The record is limited to a total of 250 data bytesremembering that the time and date stamp included in each record occupies 6bytes. Scrolling down the screen displays the following:

&) -. /01 ) ()

3 ) 0

7% 0

Enter the maximum number of archive records to be contained within thiscircular archive file .

At the 'Trig Boolean ' entry, enter the database address of the Boolean triggerwhich will cause the flow computer to store the archive data record. Forexample, entering 1831 (the 'hour start’ flag) would cause the flow computer tostore data at hourly intervals.

Once you have entered all the necessary data for all of the archive recordsreturn to the following screen which is in the 'Password Maintenance' menu.

) &#* !

&#* ) !"

Set 'Reconfig Archive ' to 'N' and 'Archive Run ' to 'Y'. At this point the flowcomputer will reinitialize archive RAM memory and attempt to allocate memoryas configured.

How The Available Memory Is AllocatedApproximately 250,000 bytes of memory are available for the storage of archiveddata, this includes 'Raw Data' and 'ASCII Text Data'. Archive memory isallocated dynamically, i.e. the memory required to satisfy the 'Raw Data Archive'is allocated first, one archive file at a time. The memory remaining after the RawData Archive files are setup is what is used by the Text Archive described later.

Circular Archive File - Afile of ‘n’ records arrangedas a circular buffer whichalways contains the mostrecent ‘n’ records; i.e., theoldest data record isoverwritten by each newrecord as it is added.

INFO - Redefining thearchive Boolean triggerdoes not cause the archiveRAM to be cleared.



Checking The Archive File Memory Status ScreensThe 'Archive File Memory Status' screens display automatically whenever theuser attempts to re-start data archiving for the first time after reconfiguring thearchive structure. These screens can also be accessed at any time by pressing'Setup' 'Status' 'Display' while in the display mode. A correctly configured archivestructure is indicated by the following screen.

&) -. +8 &

&#* 9 (:

+% &%% 5

An incorrectly configured archive structure is indicated by the following screen.

&) -. +8 &

&#* 9

+% &%% 5

Archive memory errors are caused when RAM memory is insufficient for thenumber and size of archive files configured. In this case the 'Start Archive'command is ignored and the flow computer allocates memory to as manyarchive files as possible. The number on the 'Files Allocated' line of the displayshows how many files were allocated before the memory ran out.

Scroll down the screen to see the actual number of bytes allocated to eacharchive file. All remaining memory not allocated to the 'Raw Data Archive Files' isallocated to the 'Text Archive' buffer. The display below is typical.

&) -. +8 &

/0; &< 10000

/10 &< =1;4

3&< 10046>

INFO - The number of filesallocated changesdepending on how manyarchive files have beenconfigured



Summary 0f Raw Data Archiving Features Ten independent archive files are available for user configuration. Two additional archive files, the 'alarm event log' and 'audit trail log' are

provided. Archive files consist of multiple records in a circular array. Mixed types of variable data can be stored in records of 250 bytes

maximum. Except for the 'alarm log' and 'audit trail log', content and maximum

number of records in an archive file are configurable. Data is read in block form one record at a time. Each archive has a unique address (701, 702, 703, etc.) Each archive has a set of integer registers used to indicate most current

record pointer, maximum number of records, and required record pointer. Data is captured and stored in an archive file whenever the appropriate

trigger event occurs. Multiple archive files can be controlled by the same trigger event. Empty archive records contain binary 0’s / ASCII Null characters. To avoid errors, host devices reading archive data should dynamically

determine the record pointer roll over value based on the number ofrecord integers read each time from the flow computer.

Any configuration changes made to the archive setup such as redefinitionof any record or change in the number of records within any archive willcause all data stored in the entire archive system to be reset. To preventaccidental erasure of all archived data the user must first halt all archivingby setting the ‘Archive Run/Halt Flag' to false (0), and setting the 'ConfigArchive Flag' to true (1).



Raw Data Archive Definition: Alarm/Event Logand Audit Event Log

Alarm/Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address711

Field #1 3-Byte Date (MM, DD, YY or DD, MM, YY)

Field #2 3-Byte Time (HH, MM, SS)

Field #3 16-Bit Integer (Modbus Index # of alarm or event)

Field #4 1 Byte (Alarm Type - see sidebar)

Field #5 1 Byte (Boolean Value, 1 or 0 representing Alarm or OK)

Field #6 IEEE Float (Value of transducer variable at the time of alarmor event)

Field #7 32-Bit Integer (Volume totalizer at time of event or alarm)

Field #8 32-Bit Integer (Mass totalizer at the time of the event or alarm)

Audit Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address712.

Field #1 3-Byte Date (MM, DD, YY or DD, MM, YY)

Field #2 3-Byte Time (HH, MM, SS)

Field #3 16-Bit Integer (Event number, increments for each event, rollsat 65535)

Field #4 16-Bit Integer (Modbus index of variable changed)

Field #5 IEEE Float (Numeric variable value before change - oldvalue)

Field #6 IEEE Float (Numeric variable value after change - new value)

Field #7 16-Char ASCII (String variable value before change - old value)

Field #8 16-Char ASCII (String variable value after change - new value)

Field #9 32-Bit Integer (Volume totalizer at time of change)

Field #10 32-Bit Integer (Mass totalizer at the time of the change)

Note: Alarm types are:0 = Log event, sound

beeper and display inLCD any edge changein bit identified by field#3.

1 = Log event, soundbeeper and display inLCD rising edgechanges in bit identifiedby field #3

2 = Event log any edgechange in bit identifiedby field #3. No beeperor LCD display action.

3 = Event log rising edgechanges in bit identifiedby field #3. No beeperor LCD display action.

Rising edge change means0 to1 transition.

Note: Fields 5 and 6 are setto 0.0 when the variabletype changed is String.Fields 7 and 8 contain nullcharacters when thevariable type changed isNOT a string. When fields 7and 8 contain 8 characterstrings the remaining 8characters are padded withnulls.



Using The Custom Reports to Access the TextArchive FeatureThe actual data which will be archived in the 'Text Archive' buffer is identifiedwithin the body of a 'User Custom Report Template'. This is done by enclosingthe data in question between braces '' and preceding the opening brace ''character with either Boolean 1000 (archive the data identified between thebraces) or Boolean 2000 (print and archive the data identified between thebraces). In the example 'Batch End' report shown below, the first half of thereport will be printed and stored in the 'Text Archive' while the second half of thereport will not print but will be stored in the 'Text Archive'.

X Company Name Batch Report

Date : XX/XX/XX Time : XX:XX:XX Computer ID : XXXXXXX

Meter ID XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Product ID XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX API Table Selected XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Batch Start Date XX/XX/XX XX/XX/XX Batch Start Time XX:XX:XX XX:XX:XX Batch End Date XX/XX/XX XX/XX/XX Batch End Time XX:XX:XX XX:XX:XX Batch Gross (IV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX Batch Net (GSV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX Batch Mass LB XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX X Opening Gross (IV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX Opening Net (GSV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX Opening Mass LB XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX Closing Gross (IV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX Closing Net (GSV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX Closing Mass LB XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX Batch Flow Weighted Averages: Gross Flow (IV) BBL/HR XXXXXX.X XXXXX.X Temperature Deg.F XXXXXX.X XXXXX.X Pressure PSIG XXXXXX.X XXXXX.X Flowing Density GM/CC XXXXXX.X XXXXX.X API @ 60 Deg.F XXXXXX.X XXXXX.X VCF X.XXXX X.XXXX CPL X.XXXX X.XXXX Meter Factor X.XXXX X.XXXX

The template files shown below can be used to archive text data whenever thereport is processed.

1) 'FILENAME.TP1' Snapshot Report

2) 'FILENAME.TP2' Batch Report

3) 'FILENAME.TP3' Daily Report

4) 'FILENAME.TP4' Prover Report

The user has embedded aBoolean point address 2000to indicate that the followingdata enclosed by the ‘…’characters is to be printedand archived.When embedding the point,set the width=1and number of decimalplaces=0.

The User has embedded aBoolean point address 1000to indicate that the followingdata enclosed by the ‘…’characters is to be archivedonly and not printed.When embedding the point,set the width=1and number of decimalplaces=0.

INFO - Data is archivedonly when the report isprocessed for the first time.Reprinting a stored reportdoes not cause any data tobe stored in the archive.



Custom Report TemplatesA default selection of files with the extension 'TP?' are created automaticallywhen OmniCom is installed, They can be found in the 'OMNI2?' subdirectories.

For example the OMNI20 subdirectory contains the following template files:

REV20A.TP1 Interval Report Independent Products

REV20A.TP2 Batch Report Independent Products

REV20A.TP3 Daily Report Independent Products

REV20A.TP4 Prove Report Independent Products Double Chronometry

REV20B.TP1 Interval Report Independent Products

REV20B.TP2 Batch Report Independent Products

REV20B.TP3 Daily Report Independent Products

REV20B.TP4 Prove Report Independent Products Normal Pipe Prover

REV20C.TP1 Interval Report Common Product

REV20C.TP2 Batch Report Common Product

REV20C.TP3 Daily Report Common Product

REV20C.TP4 Prove Report Common Product Double Chronometry

REV20D.TP1 Interval Report Common Product

REV20D.TP2 Batch Report Common Product

REV20D.TP3 Daily Report Common Product

REV20D.TP4 Prove Report Common Product Normal Pipe Prover

REV20E.TP4* Prove Report Master Meter Method

REV20M.TP4* Prove Report Mass Meter Proving Normal Pipe Prover

REV20MC.TP4* Prove Report Mass Meter Proving Double Chronometry

REV20LC.TP4* Prove Report Double Chronometry Viscosity Linearization

REV20LP.TP4* Prove Report Pipe Prover Viscosity Linearization

Templates can only be accessed if they exist; i.e., if you are currently working on'FILENAME .OMI' opening the custom templates will just create an empty file.You must first create a set of templates by copying the appropriate sampletemplates as follows:

1) At the OmniCom File menu select 'Shell to DOS '.

2) Type the following to create a set of custom templates for a commonproduct system using a full sized pipe prover (assumes Rev. 20.??application):

COPY OMNI20\REV20D.TP? OMNI20\filename.TP?

3) Type EXIT to return to OmniCom.

In the above example OMNI20 is the sub directory which contains all files relatedto Application Revision 20. Likewise OMNI24 refers to Revision 24 applications.

Note:

* To avoid duplication andconserve disk spacethese templates do nothave matching TP1,TP2 and TP3 templates.Select TP1 though TP3from the appropriate set(A, B, C or D) abovedepending onindependent or commonproduct.




Communicating with Honeywell ST3000/STT3000 Smart Transmitters

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................1

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................1

Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol Overvie w .....................................................2

Transmitter Databas e..........................................................................................2

Using the Honeywell Handheld Communicato r ............................................3

Combo Module LED Status Indicator s ..............................................................3

Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode . .................................................4Auto Mode ..................................................................................................................... 4Manual Operation .......................................................................................................... 4

Viewing the Status of the Honeywell Transmitter from the Omni FrontPanel .....................................................................................................................4

ScopeAll firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have thefeature of communicating with Honeywell ST3000 Smart Transmitters. Thisfeature uses Honeywell’s Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol and requires that anH Combo I/O Module be installed in your flow computer.

AbstractUsing 'H' Combo I/O Modules, the Omni Flow Computer can communicate withHoneywell Smart Temperature and Pressure Transmitters using Honeywell’sDE Protocol. Up to 4 transmitters can be connected to each 'H' Type ComboModule, with loop power being provided by the combo module.

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained in theUser Manual , and isapplicable to all firmwarerevisions.This bulletin was previouslypublished as an appendix touser manuals of firmwarerevisions Version .70 andearlier.

Communication withHoneywell ST3000/STT3000 SmartTransmitters - This featureallows you to communicatewith Honeywell SmartTemperature and PressureTransmitters, via Omni’s Htype Process I/O ComboModule and usingHoneywell’s DE Protocol.



Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol OverviewDigital data is transmitted serially between the flow computer and HoneywellSmart Transmitters by modulating the current in the two wire loop connecting thedevices. Power for the transmitter is also taken from this current loop. Data istransmitted at 218.47 bits per second with a digital '0' = 20 mA and a digital '1’ =4 mA.

In normal operation, the Honeywell transmitter operates in the '6-byte BroadcastMode'. In this mode, the transmitter transmits the following data to the flowcomputer every 366 msec:

Byte #1 Status Flags

Byte #2-#4 Process Variables % Span Value (3-byte floating point)

Byte #5 Database ID (indicates where in the transmitters database Byte#6 below belongs)

Byte #6 Database Data Value

Transmitter DatabaseBy using the data contained in Bytes #5 and #6, the flow computer builds andmaintains an exact copy of the smart transmitters configuration database. Atransmitter database varies in size from about 90 bytes for a pressure transmitterto 120 bytes for a temperature transmitter. It takes between 30 and 45 secondsto completely build a copy of the transmitter database within the flow computer.The transmitter database is continuously compared against the flow computerconfiguration settings for that transmitter. The flow computer automaticallycorrects any differences between the databases by writing the correctconfiguration data to the transmitter.

TB-960704 Communicating with Honeywell ST3000 Smart Transmitters


Using the Honeywell HandheldCommunicatorThe flow computer is responsible for configuring the following entries within thetransmitter:

1) Lower Range Value (LRV) or Zero

2) Transmitter Span or Upper Range Limit (URL)

3) Damping Factor

4) Tag Name

Any changes made to 1, 2 and 3 using the handheld communicator will beoverwritten by the flow computer. In the digital mode it is not necessary tocalibrate the transmitter output using the handheld communicator. The digitalsignal can be calibrated using the normal Omni analog input method describedin Chapter 8 of Volume 1 .

Combo Module LED Status IndicatorsEach I/O channel of the 'H' Combo module has a set of two LED indicators, onegreen and one red. The green LED shows all communication activity takingplace on the channel (flow computer, transmitter and handheld communicator ifconnected). The Red LED lights only when the flow computer is transmitting datato the transmitter.

Normal digital operation is indicated by a regular pulsation of the green LED(about 3 per second). The red LED will be seen to blink whenever aconfiguration change is made in the flow computer which affects that particulartransmitter.



Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode.

Auto ModeConnecting an analog mode Honeywell smart transmitter to the computer willcause the flow computer to automatically switch the transmitter to the digital DEmode, sending out a communication request to the Honeywell transmitter. Aswitch over to the digital mode by the transmitter will cause the green LED on theH combo module to pulse steadily indicating that communications have beenestablished.

Manual OperationFor manual operation, do the following:

1. Disable communications between the Honeywell transmitter and the flowcomputer by deleting all I/O point assignments within the flow computer tothat I/O point.

2. Using the Honeywell SFC, SCT or any Honeywell handheldcommunicator, press [Shift] [A/D] and wait till the handheld displays'Change to Analog?'

3. Answer (Yes) by pressing [Enter] . ‘SFC Working’ will be displayed. The'H' Combo module’s green LED on that channel will stop pulsing.

4. Re-enter the I/O point to cause the Omni to send the communicationrequest command to the Honeywell and after three command sends thegreen LED on the Honeywell module will pulse at a steady 3Hz rate.

Viewing the Status of the Honeywell Transmitter from the Omni Front PanelTo verify the data being received from the smart transmitter, press [Input][Status] and [Enter] from the front panel. The following displays:

!"! # $

% &!

' ( ))))))))

# *

+ ,

-*



H1-2 Transmitter : Indicates the Honeywell Combo Module (H1) and thechannel number on that module (Channel 2 in this case).

PV% : Process variable value in percentage of the transmitter’sspan. A -25.00 displayed on the Omni could mean thatthe transmitter is not communicating (see Statusdefinition below).

Status : There are five status states.

1) OK : Communications between the flowcomputer and smart Honeywell transmitterare OK. The database within thetransmitter matches the flow computer.

2) Idle : This flow computer I/O point has beenassigned to a Honeywell transmitter but isnot receiving data from the transmitter.Possible cause is a wiring problem such asreversal of wiring. If you observe the statusLEDs you will note that the flow computerattempts to establish communications bysending a wake-up command every 10seconds or so.

3) Bad PV : Communications between the flowcomputer and smart Honeywell transmitterare OK but the transmitter has determinedthat a critical error has occurred within thetransmitter meaning the value of theprocess variable cannot be trusted. Theflow computer will set the transducerfailure alarm and follow the fail codestrategy selected by the user for thistransducer.

4) DB Error : Communications between the flowcomputer and smart Honeywell transmitterare OK but the flow Computer hasdetermined that the database within theflow computer does not agree with thedatabase within the transmitter. If youobserve the status LEDs you will note thatthe flow computer attempts to correct thetransmitters database by writing the correctdata to the transmitter once every 30-45seconds or so.



5) 4 Byte : The transmitter is operating in the 4-ByteBroadcast Mode. Because the flowcomputer will not tolerate this mode ofoperation, this status display should onlybe displayed momentarily as the flowcomputer will automatically switch thetransmitter into the 6-Byte BroadcastMode.

LRV : Lower Range Value of the transmitter in engineeringunits. Engineering units are degrees Celsius fortemperature transmitters, inches of water for differentialpressure transmitters, and pounds per square inch forpressure transmitters.

Span : The Span of the transmitter in engineering units (the Spanis the difference between the lower and upper ranges ofthe transmitter). Engineering units are degrees Celsius fortemperature transmitters, inches of water for differentialpressure transmitters, and pounds per square inch forpressure transmitters. The flow computer will display ‘DBError’ if the user tries to enter a span of 0% or a spanwhich would exceed the transmitter’s upper range limit'(URL).

Damp Seconds : Damping Time of the transmitter output in seconds.

Conformity Bit : Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters.Conformity Bit 0 = linear output; Conformity Bit 1 = squareroot output. This bit should always be 0 for smarttemperature transmitters.

Software Revision : Current Software installed within the smart device.

Serial # : Serial Number of the smart transmitter.

Transmitter Type : Valid transmitter types are:

TT = Temperature Transmitter

DP = Differential Pressure Transmitter

GP = Gauge Pressure Transmitter



URL : Upper Range Limit of the transmitter in engineering units.The transmitter will not accept configuration entries whichexceed this value.

ID/TAG : ASCII string used to identify the transmitter.

SV : Secondary Process Variable Value expressed in °C. Thisrepresents sensor temperature for pressure transmitters,and junction temperature for temperature transmitters.The flow computer may or may not have a value in thisfield, depending upon whether the SV is included in thepart of the transmitter’s database which is sent to theOmni.


TB-970701 ALL.70+ 1


Stability Requirements: Final Calibration ofFlow Computer

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................1

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................1

Instruction s ..........................................................................................................1

ScopeAll Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have calibration stability requirements.

AbstractBecause of the temperature sensitivity and bit resolutions of the A/D and D/Aconverters, and the high accuracy requirements, it is important that the followingprocedures are followed when calibrating flow computer I/O circuits.

Instructions(1) Adjust the power supply to give 5.05-5.10 volts at backplane test points.

(2) All final calibrations must be performed using the matching set of combomodules and power supply module (i.e. changing the power supply oradjusting the voltage during the final calibration requires that a samplecalibration made up to that point be checked. If there is a noticeablechange, all calibrated points should be rechecked).

(3) Before calibrating, eliminate temperature gradient errors by closing thebox and allowing at least 20 minutes for temperature stabilization tooccur. Ensure that unit is not in a high air draft area (i.e. in the path of afan or AC duct) Make adjustments such as jumper repositioning quickly.Wherever possible keep the unit closed to retain internal heat. Boardreplacements will require that sufficient time be allowed to achievetemperature stability.

(4) Observe temperature stability requirements of any equipment used in thecalibration process (i.e., current and voltage generators, digital voltmetersetc.)

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained inVolume 1 , and is applicableto Revision 20.70/24.70+.This bulletin was previouslypublished with a differentpage layout.


TB-970702 ALL.70+ 1


Secondary Totalizers Provide Net Volume atTemperatures Other than 15 °C or 60°F

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................1

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................1

Database Location of Second Set of Net Totalizer Data Point s .....................2

Keypad Entries Needed to Display the Extra Totalizer s..................................2

ScopeAll firmware Versions 20/24 and 21/25, Revisions.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000Flow Computers have secondary net totalizers for when more than onereference temperature is required.

AbstractSome times it is necessary to provide net totalizers at more than one referencetemperature.

Following are the Modbus data points that are used to provide secondary nettotalizers in the Omni. Secondary totalizers are calculated real time just like thenormal totalizers.

The secondary totalizers are activated by setting up floating point data point7699 with the secondary reference temperature required. This data point isinitialized to 0 at a cold start up which effectively disables the extra totalizers andtheir appearance on the Omni default reports (obviously, 0° cannot be used as asecond reference temperature).

You may set up 7699 with a simple variable statement. For example: 7699=#68will provide a second set of net totalizers corrected to 68 degrees. You may alsoinitialize point 7699 via a one time Modbus write. If you choose to use thestatement method you may remove the statement immediately after you enter it,but you should probably leave it to serve as a document trail.

Note that the Omni initializes point 7699 to 0.0 on a cold boot. A cold boot occursafter a ‘Clear All Ram’ command is executed.

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained inVolumes 2 , 3 and 4,applicable to firmwarerevisions 20/24.71+ and21/25.71+.This bulletin was previouslypublished with a differentpage layout.


2 OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.TB-970702 ALL.70+

Database Location of Second Set of NetTotalizer Data Points

CURRENT

BATCH

PREVIOUS

BATCH

CURRENT

DAILY

PREVIOUS

DAY

Meter #1 5196 5198 5197 5199

Meter #2 5296 5298 5297 5299

Meter #3 5396 5398 5397 5399

Meter #4 5496 5498 5497 5499

Station 5896 5898 5897 5899

Keypad Entries Needed to Display the ExtraTotalizersSecondary totalizers are viewed using the same key presses used to view thenormal net totalizers. For example: pressing [Meter] [ n] [Net] or [Net] [Meter][n] will display meter ‘n’ net flow rates and totalizers followed by the secondarynet totalizers. Pressing [Meter] [ n] [Batch] [Net] will display the batch nettotalizer followed by the secondary batch net totalizer. Likewise, the Stationsecondary totals are viewed using the same key presses that are used to viewthe normal station net total. Pressing [Net] will display the station net totalizerfollowed by the secondary net totalizer. Pressing [Batch] [Net] will display thestation batch net totalizer followed by the secondary batch net totalizer.


TB-970801 ALL.70+ 1


Using Boolean Statements to ProvideCustom Alarms in the Flow Computer

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................1

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................1Example:........................................................................................................................ 2

ScopeAll firmware revisions Version .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computershave the feature of customizing alarms with Boolean statements.

AbstractThe flow computer automatically records and logs many important alarm eventsand status changes. These events include transducer ‘Low Alarm and HighAlarm’ states and failure of any transducer connected to the flow computer whichis measurement related.

There are instances however where the flow computer user would like to monitorother internal or external status events that may have nothing to do with themeasurement functions. These alarms may be the result of a digital I/O pointchanging state, or the result of a Boolean logic statement or a variable statementcomparison.

Because of this requirement, the last 16 Boolean statements of the flowcomputer serve the dual function of evaluating normal logic expressions, andalso providing user configurable alarm messages. The alarm message text to belogged and displayed can be entered into the expression fields in any of theselast 16 Boolean statements. These statement numbers are, 1057 through 1072for flow computers with 48 Boolean statements, and 1073 through 1088 forcomputers with 64 statements.

Each Boolean statement has an associated status point which is accessed usingthe same address as the statement number (Modbus Point 1072 for instance).The logic state of this status bit normally reflects the logical result of thestatement (1 or 0, true or false). When the statement is used to provide a customalarm message it functions in a different manner. To cause an alarm message tobe logged, simply turn on the status point associated with the message.

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained in theUser Manual , and isapplicable to all firmwarerevisions Version .70+.This bulletin was previouslypublished with a differentpage layout.



Example:In this example, the user wishes to monitor a tank level switch that is connectedto Digital I/O Point #1. When the tank level is high, the level switch applies 24volts to the digital I/O point.

Digital I/O Point #1 is first assigned to the Dummy Boolean 1700, this reservesthe Point as a digital Input . Modbus Point 1001 will simply follow the digital levelapplied to the terminals of digital point #1. Had it been Digital Point #22, ModbusPoint 1022 would be affected.

1025: 1072=1001Move logic value of Digital I/O #1 into Point 1072.

•••

1072: High Level AlarmActual ‘alarm text’ which appears in alarm log.

Statement 1025 (above) is used to transfer the logic state of Digital I/O Point #1to Point 1072, activating the user alarm whenever 24 volts is applied to the inputterminals by the ‘tank high level’ switch contacts.


TB-970802 ALL.70+ 1


Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database:Overview

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................1

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................2

Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database Extent s .........................................4

I/O Driver Concerns When Interfacing to Omni Equipmen t ..........................12For Example: ..........................................................................................................................12

Write Single Variable - Modbus Function 06 ............................................................... 12Address Ranges - Future Expansion........................................................................... 12

ScopeAll firmware revisions Versions 70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computersare characterized by a Modbus database structured as described in thistechnical bulletin.

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained inVolume 4 “ModbusDatabase Address andIndex Numbers ”,applicable to all firmwarerevisions .70+.This bulletin was previouslypublished with a differentpage layout.

Modbus Database -Modbus function codes areshown in hexadecimalnotation. The 4th digit (fromthe right) of the data pointaddress defines the datatype.



AbstractThe following are the data types within the database:

Digital Flag Bits : Also known as Boolean bits, status bits andcommand bits. All data points of this type canbe read via Modbus function code 01 andwritten to using function codes 05 and 0F .Function codes 01 and 0F transfer bytepacked data that is sent in the byte order theyare prepared (not word order). Points arepacked eight to a byte, packing from leastsignificant to most significant Unused bitpositions within a byte are cleared ontransmission from the Omni and ignored bythe Omni when receiving.

Writing to status points is allowed but normallyis pointless as the status point will berefreshed by the Omni every 500 ms.

Valid addresses for this type of data are:1XXX i.e. 1101, 1705, 1921 etc.

16-bit Integer Registers : All data points of this type can be read viaModbus function code 03 and written to usingfunction codes 06 and 10.

Byte order transmitted is: MS byte then LSbyte.

Valid addresses for this type of data are:X3XXX i.e. 3121, 13133 etc.

8-character ASCII Strings : All data points of this type can be read viaModbus function code 03 and written to usingfunction code 10 (note that function code 06 isnot available on this data type).

Byte order transmitted is as you would type it.

Valid addresses for this type of data are:4XXX i.e. 4101, 4502 etc.

32-bit Integer Registers : Formatted as two’s complement. All datapoints of this type can be read via Modbusfunction 03 and written to using function codes06 and 10.

Byte order transmitted is: MS byte of MS word,LS byte of MS word, MS byte of LS word thenLS byte of LS word.

Valid addresses for this data type are: X5XXXi.e. 5101, 15205 etc.

TB-970802 Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database: Overview

TB-970802 ALL.71+OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. 3

32-bit IEEE Floating Point : All data points of this type can be read viaModbus function 03 and written to usingfunction codes 06 and 10.

Byte order transmitted is: Mantissa Signbit/Exponent byte, LS Exponent bit/MSmantissa byte, middle significant mantissabyte then LS mantissa byte.

Valid addresses for this data type are: X7XXXi.e. 7210, 17006 etc.

16-character ASCII Strings : All data points of this type can be read viaModbus function code 03 and written to usingfunction code 10 (note that function code 06 isnot available for this data type).

Byte order transmitted is as you would type it.

Valid addresses for this type of data are:14XXX i.e. 14001, 14022 etc.



Omni Flow Computer Modbus DatabaseExtentsData within the Omni Flow Computer data base is organized in logical groups.Certain data written to the Omni requires special processing to occur in the Omnibefore it is stored in the data base. Other data is grouped together because it isrelated in function i.e. a collection of real-time data for a specific process.

The list that follows shows the extent of each table or set of data points withinthe data base. Because the sets of data are not connected, data from adjacentsets cannot be read or written in the same poll.

Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database Extents

DATA POINT

ADDRESSDATA TYPE

APPLICABLE

MODBUS

FUNCTION CODES

(HEX)

Used toRead (Write)

COMMENTS

00001 Mixed

03

03 (06) (10)

User-defined read only packet - Omninative mode.User-defined array - Modiconcompatible.

00201 Mixed

03

03 (06) (10)

User-defined read only packet - Omninative mode.User defined array - Modiconcompatible.

00401 Mixed

03

03 (06) (10)

User-defined read only packet - Omninative mode.User defined array - Modiconcompatible.

0701 Mixed 03 #1 User defined data archive record -Firmware Revisions .70+.









0710 Mixed 03 #10 User defined data archive record- Firmware Revisions .70+.



Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database Extents (Continued)

DATA POINT

ADDRESSDATA TYPE

APPLICABLE

MODBUS

FUNCTION CODES

(HEX)

Used toRead (Write)

COMMENTS

0711 Mixed 03 Alarm/Event Log archive record -Firmware Revisions .70+.

0712 Mixed 03 Audit Log archive record - FirmwareRevision Versions .70+.

1001to

1099

Status &Command 01, (05), (OF)

1101to

1199Status 01

1201to

1299Status 01

1301to

1399Status 01

1401to

1499Status 01

1501to

1699


Point 1600 is a dummy point includedto concatenate tables 15XX and16XX.

1701to

1799


1801to

1899Status 01

1901to

1999Status 01

1301to

1399Status 01

2001to

2100Status 01

Reserved for Future Expansion -currently will return error exception 02(illegal data address).

2101to

2199Status 01

2201to

2299Status 01

2301to

2399Status 01




DATA POINT

ADDRESSDATA TYPE

APPLICABLE

MODBUS

FUNCTION CODES

(HEX)

Used toRead (Write)

COMMENTS

2401to

2499Status 01

2501to

2699Status 01


2701to

2799


2801to

2899Status 01

2901to

2999Status 01


3001to

3099

16-bit IntegerRegister 03, (06), (10)

3101to

3199


3201to

3299


3301to

3399


3401to

3499


3501to

3599


3601to

3699


3701to

3799


3801to

3899


3901to

3999





DATA POINT

ADDRESSDATA TYPE

APPLICABLE

MODBUS

FUNCTION CODES

(HEX)

Used toRead (Write)

COMMENTS

4001to

4099

8-characterASCII String 03, (10)


4101to

4199


4201to

4299


4301to

4399


4401to

4499


4501to

4599


4601to

4699


4701to

4799


4801to

4899


4901to

4999


5001to

5099

32-bit Integer2s Complement 03, (06), (10)


5101to

5199


5201to

5299


5301to

5399


5401to

5499





DATA POINT

ADDRESSDATA TYPE

APPLICABLE

MODBUS

FUNCTION CODES

(HEX)

Used toRead (Write)

COMMENTS

5501to

5599


5601to

5699



5701to

5799



5801to

5899


5901to

5999


6001to

6099

32-bit IEEEFloating Point 03, (06), (10) Applicable to Firmware Revisions

22/26.71+ only.

6101to

6199

32-bit IEEEFloating Point 03, (06), (10) 32-bit, 2s Complement (Firmware

Revision 23.70+ only).

6201to

6299



6301to

6399



6401to

6499

32-bit IEEEFloating Point 03, (06), (10)

32-bit, 2s Complement (FirmwareRevisions 23.70+ and 22/26.71+only).

6501to

6799


22/26.71+ only.

6801to

6899



6901to

6999



7001to

7099


7101to

7199





DATA POINT

ADDRESSDATA TYPE

APPLICABLE

MODBUS

FUNCTION CODES

(HEX)

Used toRead (Write)

COMMENTS

7201to

7299


7301to

7399


7401to

7499


7501to

7599


7601to

7699


7701to

7799


7801to

7899


7901to

8499


20/24.71+ and 22/26.71+ only.

8501to

8599


8601to

8699


8701to

8799


8801to

8899


8901to

8999


20.71+ and 22/26.71+ only.

9001to

9499

ASCII TextBuffers 41, (42) Maximum of sixty-four 128-byte

buffers per data point .

9500to

13000

Reserved for Future Expansion - currently will return error exception 02(illegal data address).




DATA POINT

ADDRESSDATA TYPE

APPLICABLE

MODBUS

FUNCTION CODES

(HEX)

Used toRead (Write)

COMMENTS

13001to

13299

16-bit IntegerRegisters 03, (06), (10)

13301to

13399


13401to

13499


13501to

13599


13601to

13699


13701to

13799


13801to

13899


13901to

13999


14001to

14099


14101to

14199


14201to

14299


14301to

14399


14400to

15000


15001to

15299


15300to

17000





DATA POINT

ADDRESSDATA TYPE

APPLICABLE

MODBUS

FUNCTION CODES

(HEX)

Used toRead (Write)

COMMENTS

17001to

17399


17401to

17499

32-bit IEEEFloating Point 03, (06), (10) Not applicable to Firmware Revisions

22 & 26.

17501to

17899

32-bit IEEEFloating Point 03, (06), (10) Not applicable to Firmware Revisions

21/25 & 22/26.

17901to

18099



18101to

18199


23/27.71+ only.

18200to

49999




I/O Driver Concerns When Interfacing to OmniEquipmentMost but not all of the data is grouped in blocks of 100 or so data points. Theseblocks in many cases are not connected.

Limit requests for contiguous data across different blocks by examining the thirddigit from the right of the data point start and end addresses. If the digit isdifferent break up the poll request.

For Example:

An application requires data from points 7188, 7201 and 7210 to be read anddisplayed on screen. An intelligent I/O driver may determine that it is moreefficient to read 23 data points starting with point 7188 and discard the unuseddata. In this particular example the Omni will transmit the data for points 7188through 7199 and blank data will be returned for data points 7200 through 7210because the data requested is in two different blocks within the Omni. To obtainthe data correctly the I/O driver should determine that point 7188 and point 7201are in different data blocks (because the third digit from the right changed from a1 to a 2) and send out two data requests; one request for point 7188 and anotherfor points 7201 through 7210.

Write Single Variable - Modbus Function 06Omni software revisions 20.44 and greater implement this function on all 16-bitand 32-bit data points. Revisions prior to 20.44 implement function 06 on 16-bitintegers only. To maintain compatibility with early Omni software revisions it maybe advisable to use function 10 to write to single data points as well as multipledata points.

Address Ranges - Future ExpansionSome of the address ranges specified in this document encompass more datathan may be available on all applications at this time, Omni advises that forfuture compatibility any software driver developed should be able to supportthese address ranges.


TB-970803 22/26.70+ 1


Meter Factor Linearization

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................1

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................2Meter Factor Linearization Function .............................................................................. 2Meter Factor Validation and Control Chart Functions ................................................... 3

ScopeFirmware Revisions 22.70+ and 26.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 FlowComputers have the feature of Meter Factor Linearization. This feature applies toTurbine/Positive Displacement Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with Meter FactorLinearization).

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained inVolume 2 and Volume 3 ,applicable to FirmwareRevision 22.70+/26.70+.This bulletin was previouslypublished with a differentpage layout.


2 OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.TB-970803 22/26.70+

Abstract

Meter Factor Linearization FunctionFlowmeter performance varies depending upon flow rate and fluid viscosity. Theflow computer can compensate for this variation in performance by applying ameter factor which is determined by interpolation of a ‘base meter factor curve’.The user develops this base meter factor curve by proving the flowmeter atvarious flow rates and determining the meter factors for those flow rates.

A base meter factor curve must be developed for each product or fluid viscosity.The curve can consist of from one to twelve meter factor / flow rate points.

Meter Factor

Flowrate

Prove BaseFlowrate

The flow computer lifts or lowersthe MF curve based on the MFobtained at the latest officialflowmeter proving.

The MF is continuously adjusted forflowrate during a delivery. The MF is‘flow weight’ averaged for the batch.

MF’s are normalized to the‘Prove Base Flowrate’ forvalidation / comparison andhistorical archival purposes.

Fig. 1. Base Meter Factor Curve

TB-970803 Meter Factor Linearization

TB-970803 22/26.71+OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. 3

Meter Factor Validation and Control Chart FunctionsThe second purpose of the base meter factor curve is also to act as a referenceagainst which any meter factors developed during subsequent provings of theflowmeter can be compared. As an aid to this comparison the user specifies thebase proving flow rate. This value is the flow rate which is considered to be thenormal for the flowmeter concerned. For comparison purposes, eachsubsequent meter factor is normalized to the base proving flow rate and mustpass two tests before it can be implemented. The first test checks that thecalculated meter factor is within some maximum percentage deviation from thebase curve.

The second test verifies that the meter factor when normalized to the baseproving flow rate is within some maximum percentage deviation from thehistorical average of the last ‘n’ meter factors. Only normalized and implementedmeter factors are included in the historical average. The number ‘n’ can be onethrough 10.

Test 1 - Maximum DeviationAllowed From Base Curve

Meter Factor Normalized toProve Base Flowrate

(Fails Test 2)

Historical Average ofLast ‘n’ Meter Factors

Base MF Curve

Meter Factor atActual Flowrate (Passes Test 1)

Test 2 - Maximum DeviationAllowed From The Averageof The Last ‘n’ Meter Factors

Fig. 2. The Function of the Meter Factor Base Curve


TB-970804 23/27.71+ 1


Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume andEnergy: Using Gas Chromatograph, ProductOverrides or Live 4-20mA Analyzer Inputs of

Specific Gravity and Heating Value

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................1

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................2

Basic Calculation s ..............................................................................................2

Critical Configuration Entries Which Affect the Calculation of Net Volumeand Energ y ...........................................................................................................2

Density of Air at Base Conditions .................................................................................. 2Gas Relative Density (SG) ............................................................................................ 3Gas Heating Value (HV) ................................................................................................ 3Key Analyzer Setup Menu Entries Needed ................................................................... 3

No Gas Chromatograph Used - Manual Overrides Required ................................................... 3Component Analysis Data Obtained From a Gas Chromatograph........................................... 4Using Manual Overrides for Component Analysis Data............................................................ 4Component Analysis Data via a Serial Data Link ..................................................................... 4Using Live Inputs for Heating Value, Specific Gravity, Nitrogen or Carbon Dioxide.................. 4

ScopeFirmware Revisions 23.71+ and 27.71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 FlowComputers have the feature of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy Calculation.This feature applies to Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems. This bulletincovers natural gas net volume and energy calculations using a gaschromatograph, product overrides, or live 4-20 mA analyzer inputs of specificgravity (SG) and heating value (HV).

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained inVolume 3 , applicable toRevision 23.71/27.71.This bulletin was previouslypublished with a differentpage format.

Natural Gas Net Volumeand Energy Calculation -Natural gas net volume andenergy calculations apply toall gas flow computers,(firmware Revisions23/27.71) shipped after July1997. These calculationsare considered using a gaschromatograph, productoverrides, or live 4-20 mAanalyzer inputs of specificgravity (SG) and heatingvalue (HV).



AbstractGas compositional data needed by the flow computer to calculate flowingdensity, mass flow and energy flow of natural gas can be obtained from varioussources. The following describes how the flow computer should be configuredfor each possible scenario.

Basic CalculationsThe basic calculations are:

Net Volume = Mass Flow / Density @ Base Conditions (1) Energy = Net Volume x Heating Value (2)

Density at Base Conditions can be obtained by one of the following methods:

(GC Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions) (3) (Override Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions) (4) (Live 4-20mA Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions) (5) Calculated using Detailed Method of AGA 8 (6)

Heating Value is obtained using one of the following methods:

GC Analysis HV (7) Manual Override HV (8) Live 4-20mA HV (9) Calculated using AGA 5, GPA 2172 or ISO 6976

(component analysis required) (10)

Component Analysis Data is obtained from one of the following sources:

Online Danalyzer or Applied Automation Gas Chromatograph (11) Manual Overrides in the ‘Fluid Data Analysis’ menu (12) Serial Communication Link (13) Live 4-20mA SG, HV, N2 and CO2

(AGA 8 gross calculation methods only) (14)

Critical Configuration Entries Which Affect theCalculation of Net Volume and Energy

Density of Air at Base ConditionsThis entry is in the ‘Factor Setup’ menu. Setting this entry to ‘0’ ensures that ‘gasdensity at base conditions’ is calculated using AGA 8. (method (6) previouspage). Entering the ‘density of air at base conditions’ assuming a valid ‘gasrelative density (SG)’ is available (see next paragraph) will override the AGA 8calculation of ‘gas density at base conditions’. In this case ‘gas density at baseconditions’ is calculated using either method (3), (4) or (5) (previous page).

Heating Value Calculation- The flow computer alwayscalculates Heating Valueusing one of the mentionedstandards, even if it isinstructed not to use it.These calculated values arestored in the data base andcan be used to compareagainst the values obtainedfrom the GC or calorimeter.

7629=Mtr #1 calculated HV7630=Mtr #2 calculated HV7631=Mtr #3 calculated HV7632=Mtr #4 calculated HV

TB-970804 Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy


Gas Relative Density (SG)This entry is located in the ‘Fluid Analysis Data’ menu. One entry per activeproduct is required. It is mandatory that this field contain a valid value of ‘SG’ forall AGA 8 ‘gross’ calculation methods except for 1985 method #4. The data inthis field can be manually entered or, automatically overwritten by a live 4-20mAinput of ‘SG’ if it exists. This entry also serves as the GC ‘SG’ override if a GC isproviding ‘gas relative density (SG)’ and a GC failure occurs.

Entering a minus value in this field will force the flow computer to calculate ‘gasdensity at base conditions’ using AGA 8. (method (6) previous page). Enteringthe ‘gas relative density (SG)’ assuming a non zero ‘Density of Air @ BaseConditions’ is entered (see above) will override the AGA 8 calculation of ‘gasdensity at base conditions’. In this case ‘gas density at base conditions’ iscalculated using either method (3), (4) or (5) (previous page).

When an AGA 8 detailed method is selected and a GC is used to provide ‘gasrelative density (SG)’, this entry field is ignored unless a GC failure occurs andthe ‘GC Fail Code’ entry is set to ‘Use Override on GC Failure’.

Gas Heating Value (HV)This entry is located in the ‘Fluid Analysis Data’ menu. One entry per activeproduct is required. It is mandatory that this field contain a valid value of ‘HV’ forAGA 8 ‘gross’ calculation method #1 and also AGA 8 1985 methods #2 and #4.The data in this field can be manually entered or, automatically overwritten by alive 4-20mA input of ‘HV’ if it exists. This entry also serves as the GC ‘HV’override if a GC is providing ‘gas heating value (HV)’ and a GC failure occurs.Entering a minus value in this field will force the flow computer to use a‘calculated gas heating value (HV)’ calculated using either AGA 5, GPA 2172 orISO 6976 ( method (10) previous page). Entering a positive value into the ‘gasheating value (HV)’ entry will override the AGA 5, GPA 2172 or ISO 6976calculation of ‘gas heating value (HV)’.

When an AGA 8 detailed method is selected and a GC is used to provide ‘gasheating value (HV)’, this entry field is ignored unless a GC failure occurs and the‘GC Fail Code’ entry is set to ‘Use Override on GC Failure’.

Key Analyzer Setup Menu Entries NeededThe following text discusses only those key entries that must be made to ensurethat the right values for component analysis are used in the calculation of NetVolume and Energy Flow.

No Gas Chromatograph Used - Manual Overrides Required

Select ‘Always Use Fluid Data Overrides’ for ‘GC Fail Code’ in the ‘AnalyzerSetup’ menu. No other entries are needed.



Component Analysis Data Obtained From a Gas Chromatograph

Select either ‘Never Use Fluid Data Overrides’ or ‘On Fail Use Fluid DataOverrides’ for ‘GC Fail Code’ in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu to ensure that the GCdata is used in place of the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis Data’ overrides’.

Using the ‘GC’ Heating Value and Relative Density. To ensure that theheating value and relative density calculated by ‘GC’ are used in thecalculations, make sure that component numbers are assigned for the‘Heating Value’ and ‘Specific Gravity’ entries in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu.The number entered is not critical, simply use the next consecutive numbersafter all the other components are numbered.

Ignoring the ‘GC’ Heating Value and Relative Density. Entering ‘0’ for thecomponent number for ‘Heating Value’ and ‘Specific Gravity’ entries in the‘Analyzer Setup’ menu causes the flow computer to ignore the heating valueand relative density sent by the GC and to use the override values entered inthe ‘Fluid Data & Analysis Data’ menu.

Using Manual Overrides for Component Analysis Data

Activate the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis’ entries by selecting ‘Always Use Fluid DataOverrides’ for ‘GC Fail Code’ in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. No other entries areneeded in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu.

Enter the compositional analysis data values into the appropriate fields in the‘Fluid Data & Analysis’ menu.

Component Analysis Data via a Serial Data Link


Compositional analysis data values should be written into the appropriateModbus points normally containing the manual overrides in the ‘Fluid Data &Analysis’ menu.

Using Live Inputs for Heating Value, Specific Gravity, Nitrogen orCarbon Dioxide


In the ‘Station Configure’ menu, assign valid I/O points where 4-20mA and/orSolartron 3096 gravitometer signals will be connected. Input valid scaling factorsin the ‘Station N2 / SG Setup’ menu.

Note that override data fields in ‘Product #1’ entries of the ‘Fluid Data & AnalysisData’ menu are overwritten by live data values when 4-20mA inputs are used forHV, SG, N2 or CO2.


TB-970901 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+ 1


Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse FidelityChecking

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................1

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................2

Installation Practice s ..........................................................................................2

How the Flow Computer Performs Fidelity Checkin g .....................................3

Correcting Error s ................................................................................................3Common Mode Electrical Noise and Transients ........................................................... 3Noise Pulse Coincident with an Actual Flow Pulse ....................................................... 3Total Failure of a Pulse Channel ................................................................................... 4

Alarms and Display s ...........................................................................................4

ScopeFirmware Revisions 20/24, 22/26 and 23/27 Versions.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni3000 Flow Computers have the feature of Dual Pulse Fidelity Checking. Thisfeature applies to Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid and Gas Flow MeteringSystems.

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained inVolumes 1 , 3 and 4, and isapplicable to firmwarerevisions 20/24, 22/26 and23/27 Versions .71+,relating to helical turbineflowmeters.This bulletin was previouslypublished with a differentpage layout.

Pulse Fidelity Checking -The dual pulse fidelitychecking feature allows youto reduce flowmetermeasurement uncertaintycaused by added or missingpulses due to electricaltransients or equipmentfailure.


2 OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.TB-970901 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+

AbstractThe object of dual pulse fidelity checking is to reduce flowmeter measurementuncertainty caused by added or missing pulses due to electrical transients orequipment failure. Correct totalizing of flow must be maintained wheneverpossible. This is achieved by correct installation practices and by using turbine orpositive displacement flowmeters which provide two pulse train outputs. Inaddition, an E Combo I/O Module must be installed and the correct configurationsettings entered in the Omni Flow Computer.

The two pulse trains are called the ‘A’ pulse and the ‘B’ pulse. In normaloperation, both signals are equal in frequency and count but are alwaysseparated in phase or time. The API Manual of Petroleum MeasurementStandards (Chapter 5, Section 5) describes several levels of pulse fidelitychecking ranging from Level E to Level A. Level A is the most stringent method,requiring automatic totalizer corrections whenever the pulse trains are differentfor any reason.

For all practical purposes, Level A as described in the API document is probablyunachievable. The Omni Flow Computer implements a significantly enhancedLevel B pulse security method by not only continuous monitoring and alarming oferror conditions but also correcting for obvious error situations, such as a totalfailure of a pulse train or by rejecting simultaneous transient pulses. No attemptis made to correct for ambiguous errors, such as missing or added pulses.These errors are detected, alarmed and quantified only.

Installation PracticesWhen using pulse fidelity checking, it is assumed that the user begins with andmaintains a perfect noise free installation. The user must ensure that each pulsetrain input to the flow computer is a clean, low impedance signal which will not besubject to extraneous noise or electromagnetic transients. Any regularoccurrence of these types of events must cause the equipment and/or wiring tobe suspect and investigated. Pulse fidelity check circuitry is not intended tofacilitate continued operation with a poor wiring installation which is prone tonoise or transient pickup.

TB-970901 Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity Checking

TB-970901 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. 3

How the Flow Computer Performs FidelityCheckingHardware on the E Combo I/O Module of the Omni Flow Computer continuouslymonitors the phase and sequence of the two pulse trains. It also monitors thefrequency of the pulse trains. The flow computer determines the correctsequence of flowmeter pulses based on the time interval between pulses ratherthan the absolute phase difference. It does this by comparing the leading edgesof both pulse trains at a set clock interval of 16 microseconds. Maintaining aminimum phase shift between the pulse trains (as indicated below) ensures thatrelated pulse edges of each channel are, in worst case, at least 5 clock samplesapart.

MAXIMUM PULSE

INPUT FREQUENCY

MAXIMUM PHASE

SHIFT REQUIRED

1.5 kHz 45 degrees

3.0 kHz 90 degrees

6.0 kHz 180 degrees

Correcting ErrorsMissing or added pulses to either pulse train are considered ambiguous errorsand cannot be corrected. However, they are detected with a 100% certainty andwill be counted, eventually causing an alarm. Totalizing will continue using the APulse Train.

Common Mode Electrical Noise and TransientsCommon mode electrical noise and transients occur at the same instant in time(during the same clock period) on each pulse channel. They are detected with acertainty of 85%*. The certainty can never be 100% because of the slightdifferences in time (approximately 2 microseconds) that it takes each pulse totravel through its associated input circuitry. These simultaneous pulses are notused to totalize flow but are counted and will cause an alarm.

Noise Pulse Coincident with an Actual Flow PulseIt is possible that a common mode noise pulse can occur during the samesample period as an actual flow pulse. In this case, the pulse would be detected,alarmed and rejected for totalizing, causing a missing pulse. Statistically though,worst case at 3 kHz pulse input frequency, the odds are approximately 20:1 thatthe pulse should be rejected. To not reject the pulse would mean accepting 20times as many extra flow pulses. The 20:1 ratio is based on the ratio of theperiodic time of the flow pulses divided by the periodic time of the sample period(e.g.: 333.3µsec / 16µsec approximately equals 21).

INFO - A certainty of 85% isa conservative specification.Tests on production unitsshow that a 95% detectionis a more typical proportion.This is due to the time skewbetween pulse channelsbeing closer to 1 µsec than2 µsec.


4 OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.TB-970901 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+

Total Failure of a Pulse ChannelA total failure of either pulse train will be detected with a 100% certainty. The flowcomputer will alarm this condition and continue totalizing with the remainingpulse train as recommended in API MPMS (Chapter 5, Section 5).

Alarms and DisplaysTo avoid spurious nuisance alarms such as can occur when flow begins, pulsefidelity checking is disabled until the incoming frequency exceeds a user presetfrequency. Any differences in the two pulse trains will then be accumulated andused to trigger an alarm when a user preset value is exceeded. Erroraccumulations can be displayed or printed at any time. They are reset only at thestart of a new batch. Alarms are time tagged and recorded in the historical alarmlog.


TB-980201 ALL.71+ 1


Communicating with Honeywell TDC3000Systems

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................1

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................2

Communication Method 1: APM / HPM - SIO................................................... .2FTA Array Points ........................................................................................................... 3

32-Bit Long Integer Variables .................................................................................................. 3Configuring The Omni Flow Computer .......................................................................... 4Data Grouping Option (a) Custom Data Packet Setup.................................................. 4Modbus Function Codes Used to Access Custom Packet Data Within The Omni........ 4Data Grouping Option (b) Variable Statement Moves to Scratchpad Variables ............ 6

Communication Method 2: Programmable Logic Gateway (PLCG )...............6

Selection of Communication Metho d................................................................8

ScopeAll firmware revisions Version .71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 flow computershave the capability of communicating with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems. Thisis a new feature that requires specified communication modules.

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained in theUser Manual , and isapplicable to all firmwarerevisions Versions .71+.

Communication Optionswith Honeywell TDC3000Systems - The Omni flowcomputer can communicatewith Honeywell TDC3000Systems via SIO modulesin combination with APM orHPM modules. PLCG orCLM modules communicatedirectly with the Omni.

MVIP Testing - The Omniflow computer has beentested by HoneywellPhoenix as part of theirMVIP certification program.Contact Honeywell at:

(602) 313-5830



AbstractThis technical bulletin addresses the various serial communication options thatcan be used to transfer data between Omni flow computers and HoneywellTDC3000 systems. The hardware equipment used and the limitations of eachmethod are also discussed.

Three types of serial communication modules are available:

1) Serial I/O (SIO) module in combination with either an Advanced ProcessManager (APM) or High Performance Process Manager (HPM) module.

2) Programmable Logic Controller Gateway (PLCG)

3) Communication Link Module (CLM)

MVIP testing was performed using an Omni 6000 and Honeywell module types(1) and (2) above. Due to the unavailability of equipment and time constraints,tests were not performed using the CLM module. After MVIP testing it was theopinion of the Honeywell engineer that communications with the more powerfuland flexible CLM module would pose no problem to the Omni. The nature of thetypes of tasks performed by the CLM module usually mean that a certain amountof custom I/O driver programming is the norm. This being the case, the CLM isthe most flexible but also most expensive connectivity option.

Communication Method 1: APM / HPM - SIOHoneywell engineers state that with regard to serial communication there are nodifferences between the APM-SIO connection and the HPM-SIO connection.This document will target the APM system but all discussion will also apply to theHPM system.

The APM is a I/O rack system used to get I/O signals into the DCS system. It iscomprised of a plug in APM processor module and various other serial I/O,analog I/O and digital I/O plug in modules. The APM rack system can beexpanded by adding one or more additional racks. Assuming open slots areavailable, up to 16 SIO modules can be connected to each APM system. EachSIO module is connected to the target equipment via a Field TerminationAssembly (FTA). Each FTA has 2 serial ports with each port individuallyconfigurable as either an RS232 port or 2 wire RS485 port. Port characteristicsare as follows:

Modicon compatible Modbus RTU protocol Maximum baud rate of 19200 kbps Data bits 8 Stop bits and parity selectable

TB-980201 Communicating with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems


FTA Array PointsEach FTA has a maximum amount of memory space allocated by the APM. Thismemory is organized in 16 blocks called Array Points. In addition, each HPM orAPM is limited to 80 Array points in total that must be shared between all the SIOmodules in its rack system. Each Array Point can therefore hold 512 bits of dataand can hold one type of data variable.

Each Array Point can therefore be configured as one of the following:

512 Coils or Status points.

32 16 bit Short Integer registers

16 IEEE Floating point variables

16 32 bit Long Integer variables (see below)

With a maximum of 16 array points available per FTA it can be seen that dataconsolidation and grouping becomes very important. Typical TDC3000-Omnisystems will require a mixture of data types to be exchanged, this furthercomplicates the configuration process. The user must take care not to wastevaluable memory space by partially filling array points. Try to minimize the typesof variable (e.g.: if you only need to read a few short integers consider convertingthem to long integers within the flow computer using variable statements). Thelimited number of array points also impacts how many Omni flow computers canbe connected (multi dropped) to each FTA for example: Most applicationsrequire long integer totalizers, IEEE floating point values and also alarmstatuses. This means that at least 3 array points will be needed per Omni andthat assumes that 16 IEEE floats, 16 totalizers and 512 alarms will be sufficientto transfer all the data needed by the TDC3000 system (extremely unlikely, asthere could be up to 4 meter runs configured).

32-Bit Long Integer Variables

Long integer types are not supported directly by the TDC3000 system. They canbe read as 2 concatenated 16-bit short integers and combined within theTDC3000 system. The Honeywell cannot write to Omni long integer typesbecause the Honeywell SIO Modbus protocol does not support Modbus functioncode 16 (write multiple registers) for integer registers. The protocol doeshowever support writing to IEEE Floating point variables. Omni’s experience hasshown that there are very few instances where the TDC3000 system needs towrite long integers within the flow computer. Typical long integer data that therehas been a need to write in the past has been duplicated in IEEE floats as shownbelow and on following page.

Long Integer IEEE Float

Meter #1 - Current MF in Use 5113 7796




Station Running Batch Size 5819 7787

Station Next Batch Size 5820 7783



Long Integer IEEE Float

Meter #1 - Next Batch Size 5820 7783

Meter #2 - Running Batch Size 5825 7788






Configuring The Omni Flow ComputerSetup the flow computer serial port settings to match the Honeywell FTA settingsand make sure to select ‘Modicon Compatible’.

In view of the Honeywell array point limitation it is important to group the data asefficiently as possible within the Omni flow computer. Two options are available:

1) Custom data packet arrays

2) Move data to flow computer scratchpad variables using VariableStatements

Method 1 must be used if it will be necessary to both read and write into thevariables. Method 2 can only be used when it is only necessary to read data.

Data Grouping Option (a) Custom Data Packet SetupThe Omni flow computer has 3 custom data packet areas where data can begrouped. These 3 data areas are addressed starting at Modbus addresses0001, 0201 and 0401. Configure these data areas by completing the custompacket setup menus in the flow computer.

When the Omni serial port is set as being ‘Modicon Compatible’ the custompacket data is read / write accessible by the TDC3000 system. Unlike the FTAarrays, the Omni does allow mixed data types within a custom data packet/array.This means that multiple FTA array points can be associated with one custompacket.

Modbus Function Codes Used to Access Custom PacketData Within The OmniThe Omni supports the following Modbus function codes to access custompacket data:

Read Multiple Registers 03

Write Multiple Registers 16

Write Single Register 06



From the above it can be seen that Boolean variables must be handleddifferently when grouped within a custom array. They cannot be accessed usingthe normal Modbus function codes 01, 05 and 15. They can be read and writtenbut as byte packed bits within Registers not as Coils and Status bits. For thisreason it is recommended that writes to Boolean coils be accomplished by usingthe normal Modbus function code 05 and writing directly to the database Booleanpoint address.

Here is an example showing a typical setup using the custom packet located ataddress 0001:

ADDRESS FTA ARRAY # USED

Packet #01 Point # ………… 7101 0001 - 0016 1# of Points ………… 8 Total 16 Floats

Packet #02 Point # ………… 7201 0017 - 0032 1# of Points ………… 8

Packet #03 Point # ………… 7301 0033 - 0048 2# of Points ………… 8 Total 16 Floats



Packet #06 Point # ………… 5201 0073 - 0080 3# of Points ………… 4 Total 16 Long Int.




Packet #10 Point # ………… 3201 0101 - 0104 4# of Points ………… 4 Total 16 Short Int.




Packet #14 Point # ………… 1205 0116 - 0118 5 Total 24 Packed# of Points ………… 48 Bytes



Packet #17 Point # ………… 0# of Points ………… 0

Packet #18 Point # ………… 0# of Points ………… 0 These packets are available but

Packet #19 Point # ………… 0 are not used in this example.# of Points ………… 0

Packet #20 Point # ………… 0# of Points ………… 0

The above shows a total of 32 floating points,16 long integers, 16 short integersand 192 Boolean status bits packed in 24 bytes being mapped in 1 custom datapacket and 5 FTA arrays.

CAUTION!

Because Boolean data isbyte packed the user mustensure that the number ofBooleans included in thecustom packet are groupedin such a way as to ensurethat the packet alwayscontains an even number ofbytes (i.e. the functioncodes we are using expectto be dealing with ‘registers’and you can’t have half aregister).



Data Grouping Option (b) Variable Statement Moves toScratchpad VariablesOption (b) is limited to when data needs to be read but not written to. Noncontiguous data is moved into the flow computer scratchpad variables located at:

Boolean Scratchpad Variables 1501 through 1699

Integer Scratchpad Variables 3501 through 3599

String Scratchpad Variables 4501 through 4599

Long Integer Scratchpad Variables 5501 through 5599

Floating Point Scratchpad Variables 7501 through 7599

User Boolean statements are used to group Boolean bits as follows:

Example:

1025: 1501=1105:1169 Move 64 bits to 1501 through 1564

1026: 1565=1205:1269 Move 64 bits to 1565 through 1628

User variable statements are used to move all of the remaining data types asfollows:

Example:

7025: 7501=7101:7103 Move 3 floats to 7501 through 7503

7026: 7504=7201:7203 Move 3 floats to 7504 through 7506

Communication Method 2: ProgrammableLogic Gateway (PLCG)The PLCG is meant to receive ‘register’ data from PLCs representing unscaledanalog values and 16-bit counters. Functionality is built into the PLCG whichallows the user to easily scale analog inputs of 0-9999 or 0-4095 intoengineering units. Alarm points can also be entered and monitored. Thisphilosophy is at odds with the Omni flow computer as the vast majority of thevariables within the flow computer are in engineering units requiring no scaling oralarm checking in the PLCG. In addition most of the data is contained in IEEEfloating point format or 32-bit long integer values.

The Modbus protocol supported by the PLCG unlike the APM-SIO module doesnot support reads or writes of IEEE floating point data. The protocol also doesnot support multiple register writes which would be required to write data to aflow computer long integer type.

The PLCG can however be configured to scale other nominal ranges such as 0-999 of which there are some variables of this type within the flow computer asshown below:

Mtr#1 Mtr#2 Mtr#3 Mtr#4 Station

Current Gross Flow Rates 3142 3242 3342 3442 3804Current Net Flow Rates 3140 3240 3340 3440 3802Current Mass Flow Rates 3144 3244 3344 3444 3806Current S&W Corrected Flow Rates 3149 3249 3349 3449

Current Temperature 3147 3247 3347 3447 3809Current Pressure 3146 3246 3346 3446 3808Current Analog Density 3148 3248 3348 3448 3810



Counter inputs ranging from 0-65535 are treated more generically requiring noscaling and are usually used for display purposes or are passed to anApplication Module (AM) for processing.

There are two options to monitor totalizing within the Omni flow computer:

1) Read long integer totalizers as two consecutive counter inputs andcombine in the Application Module (AM) as follows:

Totalizer = (high register * 65536) + low register

2) Read specially provided 16 bit integer non-resetable totalizers that roll at65536 within the Omni data base shown below.

Mtr#1 Mtr#2 Mtr#3 Mtr#4 Station

Gross Totalizer 3143 3243 3343 3443 3805Net Totalizer 3141 3241 3341 3441 3803Mass Totalizer 3145 3245 3345 3445 3807S&W Corrected Net Totalizer 3150 3250 3350 3450

The advantage of option (1) above is that any of the internal totalizers of the flowcomputer can be read in this manner and the results displayed by the TDC3000system will match the flow computer displayed values. Option (2) is limited toone set of non-resetable totals which are not normally displayed at the flowcomputer and are of limited use.

Using ‘Variable Statements ’ within the Omni flow computer makes it easy toconvert just about any variable within the flow computers data base into a 16-bitregister that can be ‘read’ by the PLCG as either a counter or an analog(assuming the data will fit), the only problem being the availability of enoughvariable statements (64 are provided).

Example 1: Variable read as counter for display only

7025: 3501=7105*#10 3501 contains M #1 temperature in tenths ofdegrees

Example 2: Variable read as unscaled analog 0-4095 representing 50 to 150 °F7026: 7105-#50 Adjust for 50 degree zero point

7027: 3502=7026*#40.95 100 degree span = 4095, move to scratchinteger 3502

Note that in Example 2 above, no attempt was made to limit the impact of overor under range values passed to the PLCG. It is the authors understanding thatinputs outside of the expected range cause ‘bad process value’ alarms in thePLCG.



Selection of Communication Method Analysis of the various methods available shows that communications via theAPM-SIO or HPM-SIO are most likely to provide the best solution, providingreasonable access to the flow computer’s database and requiring no customdriver programming in the TDC3000 system. Because of the awkwardphilosophical fit between the PLCG and flow computer type devices, many of thebuilt in features of the PLCG (such as scaling and alarming) cannot be used. Forthis reason the use of a PLCG is not recommended except for instances whereone already exists in a system and has an open port and an APM or HPM is notavailable. The CLM module is potentially the most flexible solution but the costimpact of any custom software driver development must be determined. Omnidoes not know whether a compatible protocol driver exists at this time, pleasecontact Honeywell for more information in this regard.


TB-980202 20/24.71+ 1

Date: 02 23 98 Author(s) : Kenneth D. Elliott / T.J. Tajani TB # 980202

Recalculating a Previous Batch within theFlow Computer

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................1

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................2

Calculations Performe d ......................................................................................2

Using the Flow Computer Keypad to Recalculate a Previous BatchTicke t ....................................................................................................................3

Step 1 ............................................................................................................................ 3Step 2 ............................................................................................................................ 3Step 3 ............................................................................................................................ 3Step 4 ............................................................................................................................ 4Step 5 ............................................................................................................................ 4

How the Flow Computer Manages the Modbus Databas e ..............................5Previous Batch Data that Is Writable............................................................................. 6

Conclusio n ...........................................................................................................7

ScopeFirmware Revisions 20.71+ and 24.71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 FlowComputers have the feature of Batch Recalculation. This feature applies toTurbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with KFactor Linearization.

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained inVolume 2 , Chapter 3“Computer BatchingOperations ”, applicable toRevision 20.71/24.71+.

Batch Recalculation - Thebatch recalculation featureallows you to adjustquantities of the previous 4batches at measurementlocations whereSG60/API60 and S&Wvalues only becomeavailable after the batch hasbeen delivered.



AbstractThe purpose of recalculating a previous batch is to make batch quantitycorrections based on SG60/API60 and Sediment and Water data becomingavailable via sample analysis performed after a batch delivery is complete. Atmeasurement locations where SG60/API60 and S&W values are not availableonline, sampler devices continuously extract a representative sample of fluidduring a batch. At the end of the batch the sample container is sent for labanalysis. The data obtained from the analysis report can then be used torecalculate the batch correction factors and therefore batch quantities. Historicaldata from these analysis reports is also used to determine what values ofSG60/API60 should be used for real time calculation of future batches that areknown to have similar characteristic. These batches ultimately can also berecalculated when their actual analysis is determined.

Calculations Performed The liquid correction factors Ctl and Cpl are first recalculated using the

sample analysis SG60/API60 and the batch flow weighted averagetemperature and pressure calculated during the batch.

Gross Standard Volume (GSV) is recalculated using the newly calculatedCtl and Cpl.

The Sediment and Water correction factor Csw is calculated using thesample analysis S&W%.

Net Standard Volume (NSV) is recalculated using the recalculated GSVand Csw factor.

TB-980202 Recalculating a Previous Batch within the Flow Computer


Using the Flow Computer Keypad toRecalculate a Previous Batch Ticket

Step 1Press [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = meter run number). The OmniLCD screen will display:

!

"

Step 2Select which previous batch you wish to recalculate. The Omni stores the last 4completed batches numbered as:

1 = last batch completed

to

4 = oldest batch completed.

Press [↓] to scroll down to “Select Prev # Batch ” and enter a number between 1and 4, depending upon which batch is to be recalculated.

The flow computer moves the selected previous batch data to the ‘previousbatch’ data points within the database (see explanation later in this document)

Step 3

Enter Password when requested.

CAUTION!

To ensure that previousbatch data is correctlyrecalculated do notrecalculate a batch close toending a current batch inprogress.

TIP - Note that only 4 linescan be displayed at onetime. Use the scroll up ordown arrows keys to displayadditional text.



Step 4Scroll to either “Enter API60 ” or “Enter SG60 ”. Type in a valid value and press[Enter] .

Step 5Scroll to “Recalculate & Print ?”. Press [Y] and then [Enter] .

At this time the flow computer will recalculate the batch data and send the reportto the printer and the ‘Historical Batch Report Buffer’ in RAM memory. Batchreport data can also be captured in ‘Raw Data Archive RAM’ using the triggerBoolean 1n76. The default batch report shows the batch number as XXXXXX-XX where the number ahead of the ‘-‘ is the batch number (5n90) and thenumber after the ‘-‘ is the number of times that the batch has been recalculated(3n52). Variable (3n52) is reset to ‘0’ at the end of a batch and increments eachtime the batch is recalculated.



How the Flow Computer Manages the ModbusDatabaseA pointer mechanism has been utilized which avoids having to have duplicatedata points for every batch report variable for each of the four previous batches.Only one set of data points for previous batch data are mapped within theModbus database. A pointer register is used to determine which set of previousbatch data will be available by accessing the previous batch data points withinthe Modbus database.

Using the batch gross totalizer variable as an example, we have:

Modbus address of Current Batch in Progress – Gross Totalizer is 5n01 Modbus address of Previous Batch – Gross Totalizer is 5n50 Modbus address of Pointer register to select which previous batch is

mapped is 3n51

As the batch progresses, the gross totalizer (5n01) accumulates flow. At the endof the batch the flow computer performs the following actions:

1) #3 previous batch data replaces #4 previous batch data



4) Current batch data replaces #1 previous batch data

5) Pointer register 3n51 is set to the value ‘1’ so that the Modbus databaseaddresses for previous batch will access data for the batch just ended.This ensures that the batch report which prints immediately at the end ofa batch and gets it’s data from the Modbus database, includes the correctinformation.

The following table (using the batch gross totalizer as an example) shows typicaldata that would be read by accessing Modbus points 5n01 and 5n50. The dataread depends upon the value of pointer register 3n51.

Note: The second digit ofthe index number (indicatedas “n”) defines which meterrun you are working with(i.e., n = 1, 2, 3 or 4).



STEP DESCRIPTION

CURRENT

BATCH

5n01

1ST PREV.

BATCH

5n50

2ND PREV.

BATCH

5n50

3RD PREV.

BATCH

5n50

4TH PREV.

BATCH

5n50

Value contained inPointer register3n51.

1 2 3 4

1 First batch running. 12340 0 0 0 0

2 First batch ended. 23450 12340 0 0 0

3 Second batchended. 34560 23450 12340 0 0

4 Third batch ended. 45670 34560 23450 12340 0

5 Fourth batchended. 56780 45670 34560 23450 12340

6Fifth batch endedwith sixth batchrunning.

6123 56780 45670 34560 23450

Previous Batch Data that Is WritableExcept for the data listed below, all data points for previous batch transactionsare ‘read only’ for reasons of data integrity.

METER #1 METER #2 METER #3 METER #4 STATION

SG 60 or ReferenceDensity (Rev. 24.71) 8508 8608 8708 8808 8908

API 60 Gravity 8519 8619 8719 8819 8919

Sediment and WaterPercentage (BS&W) 8517 8617 8717 8817 8917

Command Boolean whichtriggers the recalculation 2756 2757 2758 2759 1798



ConclusionThe flow computer retains data for the last four completed batches. Only one setof this data can be accessed at a time. Pointer registers, 3151 Meter Run #1,3251 Meter Run #2, 3351 Meter Run #3, 3451 Meter Run #4n and 3879 forMeter Station are used to determine what set of batch data will be accessed.

API60/SG60 and S&W data can be adjusted and the batch recalculated bywriting a ‘1’ to points, 2756 for Meter Run #1, 2757 for Meter Run #2, 2758 forMeter Run #3, 2759 for Meter Run #4 and 1798 for Meter Station.

Note: Setting theseregisters via VariableStatements is not allowedand will not produce theexpected results


TB-980301 All Revs 1

Date: 03 10 98 Author(s) : Richard Dojs TB # 980301

Replacing EPROM Chips

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................1

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................1

Instruction s ..........................................................................................................2

ScopeThe observations and instructions for replacing Erasable Programmable Read-only Memory (EPROM) chips contained in this technical bulletin are applicable toall firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers. It is stronglyrecommended that EPROMs be replaced only by qualified personnel.

AbstractYou will need to replace EPROMs usually to upgrade your flow computerfirmware. Certain critical steps must be performed when replacing EPROMs. It isstrongly recommended that EPROMs be replaced only by qualified personnel.

Before removing any circuit boards from the flow computer, the following mustbe observed:

Personal Safet y : Although most of the internal circuits are powered byrelatively low voltages, dangerous AC voltages arepresent on the power supply module and ribboncable when the unit is AC powered. For this reason itis important to remove all power beforedisassembling the computer.

Static Electricit y : Static electricity can be generated simply by movingaround on certain surfaces or wearing certain typesof clothing. The flow computer’s printed circuits canbe damaged by this static electricity. Take approvedstatic device handling precautions when working onthe flow computer.

After replacement, the old EPROMs must be returned to the manufacturingdepartment of Omni Flow Computers, Inc. in Stafford, Texas. A Business ReplyLabel is available for this purpose.

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained inVolume 1 , applicable to allfirmware revisions.

DANGER!

Electrical Shock Hazard !

Dangerous AC voltages arepresent on the power supplymodule and ribbon cablewhen the unit is ACpowered. To avoid electricalshock which could be fatal,It is imperative that youremove all power beforeopening and disassemblingthe flow computer and takeany other necessaryprecautions.Only qualified techniciansshould work on any internalcircuitry. Omni FlowComputers, Inc. is notresponsible for personalinjuries or accidents thatmay occur when working onflow computer circuitry.

CAUTION!

Static electricity candamage flow computercircuitry. Take approvedstatic device handlingprecautions when workingon the flow computer.


2 OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.TB-980301 All Revs

InstructionsTo replace EPROM chips, follow these instructions:

(1) Stop flow then end the batch. Record all data by retrieving all reportsand saving and printing the flow computer configuration usingOmniCom Software. Verify that the file in OmniCom is the correctversion.

(2) Enter the Password Maintenance Mode and enter the privilegedpassword for your computer. Scroll down to ‘Reset All Ram ?’ and enter[Y] . For Omni flow computers manufactured after 1995, resetting allRAM will not affect totalizer and calibration data.

(3) Remove all power from the computer and completely disconnect allAC/DC power.

(4) If you have an Omni 3000 Flow Computer, remove the Digital I/OModule from Slot #2. This will allow better access to the CPU Module inSlot #1.

(5) The CPU is connected to the front panel via a short ribbon cable that isfolded in a specific manner. Carefully remove the CPU Module just farenough to unplug this ribbon cable. When removing the CPU Module,allow the connector edge of the module to tilt towards the back of theflow computer. This will enable the Ni-Cad battery on the CPU Module toslide past the program inhibit switch on the front panel assembly. Takespecial care not to bend or fold the membrane keypad ribbon cable toosharply, or the metallic traces could be damaged.

(6) Using an EPROM extractor or small flat-bladed screwdriver, carefully pryup one end of the EPROM and repeat the prying at its other end. Thiswill allow the EPROM to be removed without bending any pins.

(7) Lay the module on a non-metallic surface to prevent shorting out the Ni-Cad Battery. Install the new EPROMs making sure that the orientationnotches are correctly positioned and that no pins are bent under thechip. To install, line up one edge of the EPROM pins making sure thatthe opposite edge is lined up with the socket holes, and firmly press theEPROM into the socket.

(8) Reinstall the CPU Module in the reverse order and apply power.

(9) Initialize the computer using “OMNI” as the password. Repeat Step (2)to reset all RAM, and reintialize the flow computer once again using“OMNI” as the password.

(10) Manually create a new file based on the oil file printout and upload thenewly created configuration file to the OMNI.

Remember to use the Business Reply Label supplied with your new EPROMs.Please return the old EPROMs to Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

CAUTION!

When removing the CPUModule, take extreme carenot to bend or fold themembrane keypad ribboncable too sharply, or themetallic traces could bedamaged.

Location of EPROMChips- The location of theEPROM chips on the CPUModule is shown in Fig. 1 .The EPROMs are the twolarge 32-pin IntegratedCircuits (ICs or “chips”) withlabels marked U3 and U4.Note the position of theorientation notches at oneend of each EPROM.

TB-980301 Replacing EPROM Chips

TB-980301 All RevsOMNI Flow Computers, Inc. 3

IMPORTANT!

TROUBLESHOOTING TIP:Omni Display Does NotCome On After ResettingAll RAM - If the OmniDisplay does not come onafter resetting all RAM,proceed as follows:(1) Disconnect all power to

the Omni.(2) Remove CPU Module

and also remove theSystem WatchdogJumper J3 (See Fig. 1 )on the CPU.

(3) Reinstall CPU Modulewith Jumper J3removed.

(4) Power up the Omni andreset all RAM again.Display should be on.

(5) Power down again theflow computer andremove CPU Board.

(6) Replace Jumper J3 andthen reinstall the CPUModule.

(7) Once again, applypower to the flowcomputer. Displayshould be normal.

If you encounter any otherdifficulties, please contactour technical staff.

Phone: (281) 240-6161Fax: (281) 240-6162

E-mail:[email protected]

EPROM Size1 OR 4 Meg BitSelect 4 Meg

As Shown

System WatchdogJ3 In = Enabled

J3 Out = Disabled(Always Enabled)

BackupBatttery

MathProcessor Central

ProcessorProgramEPROM

ProgramRAM

ArchiveRAM

J1 J2J3

Fig. 1. Layout of Central Processor Module Showing Location of EPROMICs and Jumper J3.


TB-980401 ALL.70+ 1


Peer-to-Peer Basics

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................1

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................2

Determining Which Computer Will Be Maste r ..................................................2

Communication Settings for the Peer-to-Peer Lin k .........................................3

Foreign Modbus Devices and Single Master System s ....................................3

Wiring Option s.....................................................................................................4RS-232-C Wiring Requirements.................................................................................... 4RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring Requirements...................................................... 5RS-485 Wiring Requirements........................................................................................ 6

Setting up Transaction s .....................................................................................8

What Modbus Function Codes Are Use d..........................................................8

Special Considerations when ‘Modicon Compatible’ is Selected forPort # 2 ..................................................................................................................8

Using Peer-to-Peer with Micro Motion Coriolis Mass Meter s ......................9The Micro Motion Meter is a Modicon Compatible Device........................................... 11Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer Transactions................................................................... 11

ScopeAll firmware revisions Version .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computershave the Peer-to-Peer Communication feature.

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained inUser Manual , and isapplicable to all firmwarerevisions Version .70+.This is an updated editionthat replaces previouslypublished bulletins underthe same title.See also the following: TB-980402 - Using the

Peer-to-Peer Function ina Redundant FlowComputer Application

Volume 1 - 1.6.3. SerialCommunication Modules

Peer-to-PeerCommunications - Thepeer-to-peer communicationfeature allows you to multi-drop up to 32 flowcomputers and otherdevices in RS-485 serialcommunications mode, andup to 12 using RS-232-Ccommunications.

Peer-to-Peer RedundancySchemes - Redundancyschemes allows foruninterrupted measurementand control functionality byinterconnecting twoidentically equipped andconfigured flow computers.



AbstractCommunications between Omni flow computers is accomplished using the peer-to-peer function. This function is available only on Serial Port #2 with data beingtransmitted and received using Modbus RTU protocol. A data transaction listwithin each flow computer defines each Read or Write operation to betransacted for that computer. A maximum of 16 transactions per flow computerare available. The transaction list must be contiguous (i.e., an empty transactionwill be treated as the end of list).

Two optional serial communication I/O modules are available with your flowcomputer: the RS-232-C (compatible) Model #68-6005, and the RS-232-C/RS-485 Model #68-6205. The older Model #68-6005 is only capable of RS-232compatible serial communications. The newer Model #68-6205 is capable ofeither RS-232 or RS-485 communications via a selection jumper. Whenjumpered for RS-232, the characteristics and functionality of this module isidentical to that of the older RS-232-C module.

Determining Which Computer Will Be MasterEach flow computer wishing to communicate must temporarily become aModbus Master so that messages may be initiated and its transaction listprocessed. This is accomplished when the current Modbus Master completes itstransaction list and broadcasts the Modbus address of the next computer to bethe master. The computer with the Modbus ID which matches the broadcastthen assumes mastership and proceeds to process its transaction list. A time-outoccurs whenever the next master in sequence does not take mastership and thebroadcast will be retried once. Should the computer still fail to respond, thecurrent master will attempt to pass mastership to the next computer in sequenceby incrementing the Modbus ID by one and re-broadcasting the new Modbus ID.Each flow computer needing to process a transaction list (i.e., be a master)requires the following three entries: (1) Next Master in Sequence; (2) LastMaster in Sequence; and (3) Retry Timer (50mS ticks).

These entries are in the Peer-to-Peer Setup menu and function as follows:

Entry 1 : This entry is the Modbus ID for the next flow computer master. Anon zero entry here is what actually turns on the peer-to-peerfunction . Modbus ID’s for master devices in the link must beassigned starting at 1, and for maximum efficiency not containany missing ID’s (i.e., 1, 2, 3, 4, Not 1, 3, 6, 10, for instance).

Entry 2 : This entry is the Modbus ID for the last flow computer master. Anymaster failing to find the ‘next master’ will keep trying Modbus ID’suntil it reaches this ID, it will then start the search again at ModbusID 1.

Entry 3 : This entry is used to setup the communication retry rate. Whenthe peer-to-peer link is solely comprised of Omni flow computersthis entry should be set to 3 ticks (150 msec).

TB-980401 Peer-to-Peer Basics


Communication Settings for the Peer-to-PeerLinkThe following settings must be used:

Modbus RTU Protocol 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit No Parity

While slower baud rates can be used, 38.4 kbps or 19.2 kbps will providemaximum performance.

Foreign Modbus Devices and Single MasterSystemsThe peer-to-peer function is not limited to multiple Omni flow computers. Someapplications simply require a single flow computer master to communicate with avariety of Modbus slave devices which may be flow computers, PLC’s etc. Inthese cases, the entries 1 and 2 above would be set to 1 in the master flowcomputer only, signifying only one master is in the system. Entry 3 above wouldnormally be set to 3 but may need to be increased depending upon the messageresponse time of any foreign Modbus devices in the system.

INFO - It is important tonote that in a peer-to-peersystem, only the flowcomputers that have a non-zero entry for ‘Next Masterin Sequence’ are limited tousing Serial Port #2, all ofthe other flow computersare simply acting asModbus slaves and can useany valid Modbus serialport.



Wiring Options

RS-232-C Wiring RequirementsThe following diagram shows the wiring requirements using the RS-232-Ctermination option. When multiple flow computers are used as peer-to-peermasters, they are connected in two-wire, multi-drop mode.

INFO - The Omni FlowComputer uses aproprietary ‘tristatable’RS-232-Compatible serialport, which unlike a normalRS-232 port, can be multi-dropped, interconnecting upto 12 flow computers orother serial devices.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Omni #1TB3

(TB2)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Omni #2TB3

(TB2)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Omni #3TB3

(TB2)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Omni #4TB3

(TB2)

Fig. 1. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements using theRS-232-C Termination Option



RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring RequirementsThe following diagram shows a typical installation where two flow computers areconnected to a PLC via an RS-232 to RS-485 converter module.

RS232

TX-ATX-B

RX-ARX-B

RS-232 to 485Converter

(Disable Echo)

A

B

PLCRS485

123

456

789

101112

Omni #2TB3

(TB2)

123

456

789

101112

Omni #1TB3

(TB2)

Fig. 2. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with PLCusing a Standard RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Module



RS-485 Wiring RequirementsThe diagram below shows a typical peer-to-peer installation using RS-485communications, where four flow computers are interconnected in a two-wire,multi-drop mode.

Multivariable TransmittingDevices - In addition to theSerial I/O Module # 68-6205, the flow computermust also have an MVModule to communicatewith multivariabletransmitters. This serialmodule is jumpered to IRQ3 when used in combinationwith an MV Module. Withoutan MV Module, the jumperis placed at IRQ 2. The MVModule can only be usedwith this serial module (68-6205) and is not compatiblewith the Serial I/O Module #68-6005. For moreinformation, see TechnicalBulletin # TB-980303.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Omni #1TB3

(TB2)

(B)

(A)

RS-485 Two-wireTerminated

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Omni #2TB3

(TB2)

(B)

(A)

RS-485 Two-wireNon-terminated

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Omni #3TB3

(TB2)

(B)

(A)


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Omni #4TB3

(TB2)

(B)

(A)


Fig. 3. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements using theRS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop



The peer-to-peer communication link may also be used to transfer data to andfrom any other Modbus slave device such as a PLC. The following diagramshows a typical installation using RS-485 where two flow computers areconnected to a PLC in a two-wire, multi-drop mode.

123

45

6

7

89

10

1112

Omni #1TB3

(TB2)

(B)

(A)


123

45

6

7

89

10

1112

Omni #2TB3

(TB2)

(A)

(B)


B

A

PLCRS485

Fig. 4. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with PLCusing the RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop



Setting up TransactionsTo process a transaction the flow computer requires the following data for eachtransaction:

Slave ID : The Modbus address of the target device.This can be any valid Modbus addressincluding the broadcast address ‘0’.

Read or Write : Select the appropriate operation.

Source Point Number : Specifies the data base address of thevariable in the source device. For a readoperation the slave is the source. For a writeoperation the source is the Omni flowcomputer master.

Number of Points : The number of consecutive data variables totransfer between devices, starting at thesource point number or address.

Destination Point Number : Specifies the data base address of thevariable in the destination device. For a writeoperation the slave is the destination. For aread operation the destination is the Omni flowcomputer master.

What Modbus Function Codes Are UsedThe flow computer decides what Modbus function code will be used dependingupon the Omni flow computer data type specified in the transaction.Transactions involving short or long integers or IEEE floats will use Modbusfunction codes 03H for reads and 10H for writes. Boolean variables are packed 8to a byte starting at LS bit and use function codes 01H for reads and 0FH forwrites.

Special Considerations when ‘ModiconCompatible’ is Selected for Port #2Some adjustments to the previous entries are needed when communicating withdevices that require ‘Modicon Compatible’ to be selected for the peer-to-peerport.

1) All data base point addresses (whether source or destination) referring tothe foreign Modicon compatible device, should be entered as one lessthan the point address listed. This is needed because the Modicon deviceautomatically adds one to the address received over the data link andsubtracts one from the address before transmitting. References to database point addresses within the Omni flow computer master still use thenormal point address as shown in the Omni documentation.

2) The number of points entry becomes the number of 16 bit registers totransfer, rather than the number of data variables.

Modbus BroadcastAddress ‘0’ - This addressonly applies to writetransactions.



Using Peer-to-Peer with Micro Motion Coriolis Mass MetersThe Omni flow computer can be configured to accept mass or volume pulsesfrom a Micro Motion (MM) Coriolis Meter RFT transmitter as well ascommunicate via Modbus to the device and obtain variables such as fluid densityand MM transducer alarm status.

The flow computer is equipped with special firmware code to make the interfaceto the Micro Motion meter more useful and hopefully simpler. Thecommunication link between the Micro Motion meter and the flow computer isvia the peer-to-peer link. It is possible to have multiple Micro Motion metersconnected to multiple flow computers as shown below.

12

34

56

7

8

910

1112

Omni #2TB3

(TB2)

12

34

56

7

8

910

1112

Omni #1TB3

(TB2)

27 (Z22)

26 (D22)

27 (Z22)26 (D22)

MicroMotionRFT #2

MicroMotionRFT #1

RS485

RS485

Note: Termination Points 26 & 27correspond to the explosion-prooffield-mount RFT9739; and (D22)& (Z22) to the rack-mount versionof the model.

RS232

TX-ATX-B

RX-ARX-B

RS-232 to 485Converter

(Disable Echo)

Fig. 5. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with MicroMotion RFT Transmitters using a RS-232 to RS-485 Converter



The following diagram shows a typical peer-to-peer installation using RS-485,where two flow computers are connected to two Micro Motion RFT9739transmitters via a proprietary RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module #68-6205.

Micro Motion Elite Model RFT9739Transmitter Connectivity -Both field-mount (explosion-proof) and rack-mountmodels of the RFT9739transmitter have the A andB channels reversed to theindustry standard applied toOmni flow computers; i.e.,the flow computer’s Achannel connects to MicroMotion’s B channel. Omnihas tested this connectivitywith the Micro MotionRFT9739 Field-MountTransmitter, but connectingto the rack-mount versionhas not yet been tested.Information on thisconnectivity has beenprovided by Micro Motion,Inc. Please contact MicroMotion for furtherinformation.

(A)27 (Z22)

(B)26 (D22)

MicroMotion

RFT9739#1

(A)27 (Z22)

(B)26 (D22)

MicroMotion

RFT9739#2

120Ω

Note: Termination resistorsmay be required with someinstallations.

12

3

45

6

7

8

910

1112

Omni #1TB3

(TB2)

(B)

(A)


12

3

45

6

7

8

910

1112

Omni #2TB3

(TB2)

(B)

(A)


Note: Termination Points 26 & 27correspond to the explosion-prooffield-mount RFT9739; and (D22)& (Z22) to the rack-mount versionof the model.

Fig. 6. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with MicroMotion RFT9739 Transmitters using the RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop.



The Micro Motion Meter is a Modicon Compatible DeviceSome adjustments to the peer-to-peer entries are needed when communicatingwith devices that require ‘Modicon Compatible’ to be selected for the peer-to-peer port (Serial Port #2).

1) All data base point addresses (whether source or destination) referring tothe foreign Modicon compatible device, should be entered as one lessthan the point address listed. This is needed because the Modicon deviceautomatically adds one to the address received over the data link andsubtracts one from the address before transmitting. References to database point addresses within the Omni flow computer master still use thenormal point address as shown in the Omni documentation.

2) The number of points entry becomes the number of 16 bit registers totransfer, rather than the number of data variables.

Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer TransactionsThe following peer-to-peer transaction reads the flowing density of the fluid fromthe Micro Motion device (Modbus ID #2) and stores it in data base point 7108(unfactored density, meter run #1).

Transaction #1 Target Slave ID ...…..... 2Read/Write ? ...…..... R

Source Point # ...…..... 248# of Points ...…..... 2

Destination Pnt # ...…..... 7108

The next transaction reads a 16-bit integer register from the MM meter whichcontains packed alarm status bits. These are stored in a special register withinthe flow computer which causes them to be time and date tagged, printed andlogged just as though they were flow computer alarms.




The examples above refer to Meter #1 transactions that the flow computer isrequesting. More transactions may be needed depending upon what data isrequired and how many meter runs are being used.

Note: Meter Run #1 DensityI/O point must be assignedto ‘99’ and Serial Port #2must be assigned to be‘Modicon Compatible’ forthis to work correctly. Notealso that the MM Modicondocumentation manual liststhe flowing density as pointnumber 20249. This iscommon with Modiconcompatible devices. Wherethere is a 5 digit address,drop the first digit andsubtract 1 from the pointaddress before using it in atransaction.


TB-980402 ALL.70+ 1

Date: 04 07 98 Author(s) : Kenneth E. Elliott TB # 980402

Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in aRedundant Flow Computer Application

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................1

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................2

RS-232-C Wiring Requirement s .........................................................................2

RS-485 Wiring Requirement s .............................................................................3

Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer for Redundant Flow Computer Application s ....3

Sensing Failures and Switching between Redundant Computer s.................5

Changing the Master / Slave Status via a Modbus Serial Por t .......................6

Redirecting the Control Signals........................................................................ .6

Sharing Input Signals Between Primary and Secondary Flow Computer s ...7

Re-Calibration of Analog Input s ........................................................................7

Sharing Digital I/O Signals Between Primary and Secondary FlowComputer s ...........................................................................................................7

ScopeAll firmware revisions Versions .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computershave the Peer-to-Peer Communications feature, which is available only on SerialPort #2. This features includes the capability of setting-up redundant flowcomputer schemes.

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained inUser Manual , and isapplicable to all firmwarerevisions Versions .70+.This is an updated edition ofthe bulletin previouslypublished under the sametitle.

Peer-to-Peer RedundancySchemes - Redundancyschemes allows foruninterrupted measurementand control functionality byinterconnecting twoidentically equipped andconfigured flow computers.



AbstractRedundancy involves using two identically equipped flow computers andconnecting them in such a way to ensure uninterrupted measurement andcontrol functionality in the event of failure of one of the units. This requires thatall input and output signals are connected to both computers. During normaloperation, one computer is designated the primary and the other computer thesecondary or backup. To ensure synchronization between both devices,important variables such as PID controller settings, control valve positions andproving meter factors must be transmitted from the primary flow computer viathe peer-to-peer link to the secondary flow computer. Should a failure of theprimary flow computer occur, the secondary flow computer is automaticallypromoted to primary and assumes all control and measurement functions. In thiscase the data flow on the peer-to-peer link reverses automatically and the newmaster begins to transmit critical data to the slave, assuming that it isfunctioning. Peer-to-peer communication errors can occur during the switch overand are normal. They are cleared by pressing the [Ack] key on the flowcomputer keypad or writing to point 1712 (acknowledge station alarms). If theother flow computer is non-operational, the peer-to-peer communication errorscannot be cleared.

RS-232-C Wiring RequirementsThe following diagram shows the wiring needed when flow computers areapplied in a redundancy scheme via the peer-to-peer feature and using theproprietary RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005. They are connected ina two-wire multi-drop mode.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Omni #1TB3

(TB2)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Omni #2TB3

(TB2)

Fig. 1. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements (RS-232-CSerial Port)

TB-980402 Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a Redundant Flow Computer Application


RS-485 Wiring RequirementsThe diagram below shows the wiring needed when flow computers are applied ina redundancy scheme via the peer-to-peer feature and using the proprietary RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205. They are connected in a multi-dropmode using the RS-485 two-wire termination option.

Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer for RedundantFlow Computer ApplicationsThe ‘Activate Redundancy Mode’ entry is found in the peer-to-peer setup menu.Answering ‘Yes’ causes the ‘Next Master’ and ‘Last Master’ entries to disappearfrom the menu. They no longer need to be entered as the two flow computersnow manage these two entries automatically. Any data needing to besynchronized between the flow computers will need to be setup by the user astransactions in the peer-to-peer menu.

12

3

456

7

89

10

1112

Omni #1TB3

(TB2)

(B)

(A)


12

3

456

7

89

10

1112

Omni #2TB3

(TB2)

(A)

(B)


Fig. 2. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements using theRS-485 Two-wire Termination Mode in a Redundant Flow ComputerScheme



Two transactions are needed to handle redundant PID control:

Transaction #1 Target Slave ID ...…..... 2Read/Write ? ...…..... W






More peer-to-peer transactions are needed if additional data needs to betransferred, meter factors for example.

Flow computers containing firmware Revisions 22 or 26 handle meter factorimplementation differently than Revisions 20 or 24. These applications maintainhistorical meter factor entries which are triggered and stored when the meterfactor is accepted and implemented at the end of a meter proving. As only theprimary flow computer will be doing the actual proving, three special variableswith associated firmware code have been added to the data base of revisions 22and 26. By writing to and reading from these variables via the peer-to-peer link,the secondary flow computer can implement the meter factor result obtainedwhen the primary computer completes and accepts a prove result.

The following two transactions are required:







Transactions #1 & #2 -Both primary and secondaryflow computers must havethese entries if they will beused for PID control. Transaction #1 sends

the primary flowcomputer PID controlmode settings(Auto/Manual,Local/Remote) to thesecondary flowcomputer.

Transaction #2 sendsthe primary flowcomputer PID set pointsand valve position valuesto the secondary flowcomputer.

Transactions #3 & #4(Applicable to FirmwareVersions 22 & 26 Only) -Both primary and secondaryflow computers must havethese entries. Transaction #3 is used to

send the prove meterfactor (5904) and thenumber of the meter lastproved (5905) to thesecondary flowcomputer.

Transaction #4 confirmsthat the meter factor hasbeen implemented in thesecondary flow computerby reading back a copyof the number of themeter run just proved(5906).



Sensing Failures and Switching betweenRedundant ComputersWhen ‘Activate Redundancy’ is selected in the peer-to-peer menu, data basevariables are activated to provide a redundancy switching mechanism which isaccomplished by cross connecting 4 digital I/O points from each flow computer(primary and secondary).

These database variables are:

2863 Watchdog status for this computer. Goes true 5 seconds afterinitialization and remains true as long as the flow computer isfunctioning correctly.

2864 Mastership status for this flow computer. True whenever this flowcomputer is the primary or master computer in the redundancyscheme.

2713 Watchdog status input from the other flow computer. This flowcomputer will assume mastership if it sees this point go false.

2714 Mastership status input from the other flow computer. This flowcomputer will relinquish mastership if it sees this point go true.

Redundancy FailoverWiring - Any 4 digital I/Opoints may be used toprovide a failover switchingmechanism. Fig. III.8-3 isan example that showsdigital I/O 9 through 12being used

O m n i #1TB 1

O m n i #2TB 1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12W atchdog O ut (2863)W atchdog O ut (2863)

O thers W atchdog (2713)O thers W atchdog (2713)

M aster S ta tus (2864) M aster S ta tus (2864)

O thers M aster S ta tus (2714)O ther M aster S ta tus (2714)

+

-

TB 11+

-

TB 11

Fig. 3. Omni 6000 / 3000 Redundancy Failover Wiring



Changing the Master / Slave Status via aModbus Serial PortSometimes it may be necessary to force a swap of primary (master) andsecondary (slave) flow computers. For example, if both primary and secondaryflow computers are functioning correctly (i.e. watchdogs are OK) but the MMIserial communication link to the primary flow computer was lost, it would benecessary to make the secondary flow computer the primary. Two special database points are available to provide this function, they are:

2715 Be Master - writing a one to this point automatically promotes thisflow computer to master. This in turn causes the digital I/O pointwhich is assigned point 2864 ( Mastership Status ) to go true.Assuming the digital I/O are cross connected as shown in thepreceding figure, the other flow computer will automatically relinquishmastership when this happens.

2716 Be Slave - writing a one to this point automatically demotes this flowcomputer to slave. This in turn causes the digital I/O point which isassigned point 2864 ( Mastership Status ) to go false. Assuming thedigital I/O are cross connected as shown in the preceding figure, theother flow computer will automatically assume mastership when thishappens.

Both the above commands are edge triggered needing only to be turned on, theydo not need to be turned off.

Redirecting the Control SignalsIn the event of a primary/secondary flow computer swap, a method is needed toredirect the appropriate 4-20 mA signals to control valves and other functions.One way of doing this is to use a DC relay with type C contacts. Suitable relaysare available with multiple sets of contacts. The relay can be energized by thedigital output assigned to indicate ‘Mastership Status’ from one of the flowcomputers.

Note: The 2716 commandwill not work if the other flowcomputer’s watchdog statusis not active (i.e., the othercomputer must befunctioning correctly beforethis flow computer can giveup mastership).



Sharing Input Signals Between Primary andSecondary Flow ComputersIn a redundant system all input signals must be connected to both primary andsecondary flow computers. Voltage pulse signals such as flowmeters anddensitometer devices must be connected in parallel to the appropriate inputs ofboth flow primary and secondary computers. Current pulse signals must first beconverted to voltage pulses by suitable input shunt resistor or source resistor.

As a general rule, follow the wiring recommendations shown for a normal singleflow computer installation (see Volume 1 of the User Manual ) and then simplywire the second flow computer terminals in parallel with the first computer.

Analog 4-20 mA signals should be converted to 1-5 volt signals by using a lowtemperature coefficient precision 250 ohm resistor. For each signal, configurethe combo modules of both flow computers for 1-5 volt inputs and wire them inparallel across an appropriate 250 ohm resistor mounted externally to the flowcomputers.

Re-Calibration of Analog InputsEach flow computer input channel which is configured for 1 - 5 volt input signalswill need to be verified for accuracy. Re-calibration may be necessary dependingupon the accuracy of the 250 ohm resistor used and how well it matches theinternal 250 ohm resistor that was used when the input channel was originallycalibrated. The system wiring between the flow computer and the 250 ohmresistor can also slightly affect the input calibration.

Sharing Digital I/O Signals Between Primaryand Secondary Flow ComputersDigital I/O channels configured as status inputs should be simply wired in parallel(ORed) with the other flow computer. Digital I/O channels configured as outputsmay possibly require relay isolation similar to that needed for analog outputsdescribed previously. Typical output signals that need to be relay isolated aresampler pulse outputs. Prover control signals do not usually need to be relayisolated as the secondary computer will never be attempting to control the proverwhile it is the slave or secondary computer. The user will need to determinewhich outputs need to be isolated based on whether it is possible or likely thatthe slave computer would activate the output when not in control.


TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 1


Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable SensorInterface Issues

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................2

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................2

Important Omni Flow Computer Compatibility Issues When Using SVCombo Module s ..................................................................................................3

Serial Communication Module Compatibility ................................................................. 3Other Know System Incompatibilities ............................................................................ 3Equipment Ordering Limitations .................................................................................... 3

Connectivity Issues When Connecting to the 3095FB MultivariableTransmitters: Multi-drop versus Point-to-Poin t ...............................................4

Advantages of Multi-drop Configurations ...................................................................... 4Disadvantages of Multi-drop Configurations.................................................................. 4

Jumper Settings for the Omni SV Combo Modul e...........................................5Setting the Address of the SV Combo Module .............................................................. 6Setting the Termination Jumpers for the Each of the SV RS-485 Ports........................ 6

Initial Setup of the Rosemount 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitte r ............8

Connecting the 3095FB to the Omni Flow Compute r ......................................93095FB Transmitter RS-485 Connections................................................................... 103095FB Transmitter Power Connections and Requirements ...................................... 10Isolation and Transient Protection Issues ................................................................... 11Wiring Considerations When Replacing a Multi-dropped 3095FB Transmitter ........... 11

Configuring the Omni Flow Computer to use the 3095FB Multi VariableTransmitte r.........................................................................................................12

Configuring the Meter Run I/O..................................................................................... 12Selecting the Device Type ......................................................................................................12Selecting the SV Combo Module Port.....................................................................................12Select Modbus Address for 3095FB .......................................................................................12What I/O Points are Used and Why........................................................................................12

DP, Pressure and Temperature Setup Entries Needed .............................................. 14

Data Transferred between the 3095FB Transmitter and the Omni FlowCompute r ...........................................................................................................14

Polling Intervals for Process Variables and Critical Alarms......................................... 15Critical 3095FB Alarms Monitored By The Flow Computer ......................................... 15

Synchronizing the 3095FB and the Flow Computer Configuration s ...........16

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained inUser Manual , applicable toFirmware Revision21.72+/25.72+ and23/72.+/27.72+.


2 OMNI Flow Computers, Inc.TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Viewing the 3095FB Data at the Flow Computer Front Pane l .......................16

Installing, Replacing and Calibrating 3095FB Transmitter s .........................17Wiring Issues ...............................................................................................................17Using the Omni Flow Computer to Set the Modbus Address of the 3095FB...............18Using a Laptop PC to Trim the 3095FB Calibration.....................................................19

ScopeFirmware Revisions 21.72+/25.72+ and 23.72+/27.72+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000Flow Computers are affected by the issues contained in this technical bulletin.This Bulletin applies to Orifice/Differential Pressure Liquid Flow MeteringSystems and to Orifice Gas Flow Metering Systems.

AbstractThe Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable sensor assembly is used to measuredifferential pressure (DP), static pressure (SP) and line temperature (T).Application of the 3095FB is limited to flow computer revisions 21, 23, 25 and 27which work with differential head devices such as orifice meters, nozzles andventuri meters. Because the flow computer is limited to a maximum of four meterruns it is also limited to a maximum of four 3095FB multivariable transmitters.

Data is accessed from the 3095FB transmitter via a 2 wire RS-485 data link at9600 baud using Modbus protocol. Technically, it would have been possible touse one of the flow computer’s standard serial ports to communicate with the3095FB but this would have caused several problems:

Reduced the number of serial ports available for use with SCADA, PLCsand OmniCom etc.

Extra 'A’ type combo modules would have to be purchased simply toprovide analog outputs in a minimum system requiring just themultivariables.

Omni chose to design a special ‘SV’ combo module which includes two 2 wireRS-485 ports and six 4-20 mA analog outputs. With this module it becomespossible to provide a powerful Omni 3000 system with the following specs:

Four meter runs with Differential Pressure, Static Pressure andTemperature inputs.

Four communication ports for SCADA, PLC, Printer, OmniCom etc. Twelve Digital I/O for logic control Six digital to analog outputs.

This SV module is capable of connecting to one to four 3095FBs in variousmulti-drop configurations. A second SV combo module can be utilized inapplications where point to point operation of more than two multivariabletransmitters is desirable.

TB-980501 Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Sensor Interface Issues

TB-980501 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+OMNI Flow Computers, Inc. 3

Important Omni Flow Computer CompatibilityIssues When Using SV Combo Modules The ‘SV’ combo modules are effectively serial I/O modules which have beenspecially designed to communicate with various multivariable transmitters.Changes have been made to the IRQ priorities to accommodate these ‘SV’combo modules. These IRQ changes also involve the ‘Serial I/O ComboModules’ that are used to connect to printers, OmniCom, PLCs and SCADAdevices.

Serial Communication Module Compatibility ‘SV’ combo modules cannot be installed in flow computer systems containingRS-232-C Serial I/O Combo modules model type 68-6005. The IRQ settings onthe 68-6005 serial combo module are not jumper selectable and areincompatible with the 'SV’ combo modules. The flow computer will not be able toinitialize or boot up if this module is installed (this will be evident by a blank LCDscreen which flashes its backlighting on and off every 1.5 seconds).

The more recent 68-6205 serial module which is both RS-232-C and RS-485compatible, has jumper selectable IRQ settings, these must be installed in the‘IRQ 3’ position when an ‘SV’ combo module is present (see technical bulletinTB-980503 for more details).

Other Known System Incompatibilities At the time this bulletin was prepared, it was not possible to install both an ‘SV’combo module and an ‘HV’ (Honeywell multivariable) combo module.

Equipment Ordering Limitations Because of the compatibility issues raised in the above paragraphs, it is notpossible for the customer to retrofit existing flow computer installations with ‘SV’combo modules. Any system which requires ‘SV’ combo modules, must bepurchased new from Omni, or the system must be returned to Omni to bemodified (contact a sales person at Omni for upgrade details and pricing).



Connectivity Issues When Connecting to the3095FB Multivariable Transmitters: Multi-dropversus Point-to-Point The 3095 FB multivariable transmitter is a four wire device, two power wires andtwo wires for the RS-485 serial communication link. It can be connected in a‘point-to-point’ or ‘multi-drop’ wiring configuration.

Advantages of Multi-drop Configurations The advantages of multi-drop configurations are:

Possibly less wire may be needed to connect devices under certainconditions. This may or may not be the case depending upon equipmentplacement.

One Omni SV Combo module can handle up to four 3095 FBmultivariable transmitters. An Omni 3000 can be used in place of anOmni 6000 and handle four meter runs.

Disadvantages of Multi-drop Configurations Disadvantages of multi-drop configurations are:

Multiple Modbus IDs required. Each multi-dropped transmitter musthave a unique Modbus ID which matches the Modbus ID selected withinthe flow computer for that meter run multivariable.

Possibility of errors when replacing multivariable transmitters.Because of the multiple Modbus addresses it is not possible to simply takea transmitter off the shelf and install it in a multi-drop configuration. This isbecause transmitters come from Rosemount with the Modbus addressdefaulted to ‘1’ and there may already be a transmitter in the loop usingthat address. Adding a second transmitter with the same address as anexisting transmitter would effectively cause a loss of signal on bothtransmitters (existing and new). Depending upon where the transmitter isin the wiring, ‘termination’ jumpers may or may not be required on thereplacement transmitter (see below).

Transmitter interaction is possible. While not likely, a hardware failurein one transmitter could compromise the integrity of the shared RS-485link causing a loss of flow signals for all meter runs. Calibrating atransmitter via a laptop computer requires the wiring to be disturbed, caremust be taken not to disconnect other transmitters in the same multi-droploop.



RS-485 termination requirements more complex. RS-485 transmissionwires must have only one beginning and one end (they cannot be used ina ‘star’ configuration). Both ends of the wire must be terminated, meaningonly two devices in the loop need terminating. In a point-to-pointconfiguration, this simply means both the flow computer and transmitterare terminated. In a multi-drop configuration, the user must ensure thatonly the end devices have the termination jumpers in. This means thatsome transmitters may have the terminating jumpers in while others mayhave them out. Remember that the Omni may or may not be at the end ofthe wire so it may or may not be one of the terminated devices.

Process variable update time may exceed the flow computers 500msec cycle time. Critical measurement or control systems require thatthe process variables be input to the flow computer as fast as possible forbest performance.

Jumper Settings for the Omni SV ComboModule The Multi Variable ‘SV’ Combo module contains several sets of jumpers whichmust be installed correctly (see figure below).

2 4 IRQBRD SEL

SV Address Jum perJmp Out =1st SV ComboJmp In = 2nd SV Combo

RTS GND

RTS GNDTERM

SV Port 1 ( 3 )

SV Port 2 ( 4 )

SV RS-485 Termination Jum persBoth Jmpers In = Port TerminatedBoth Jmpers Out = Port Un-Terminated

Port Numbers in ( ) are for 2nd SV ModuleAlways IRQ 2

Always RTS

Port 1 (3)Tx/RTS Leds Red

Recv Led Grn

Port 2 (4)Tx/RTS Leds RedRecv Led Grn

TERM

TERM

TERM

Fig. 1. Omni Model 68-6203 Multivariable Interface Module -SV Combo Module



Setting the Address of the SV Combo Module The flow computer can accept up to two ‘SV’ Combo modules, each with aunique address determined by the ‘BRD SEL’ jumper shown in Figure 1 . With nojumper fitted the flow computer will report that a ‘SV1’ module is installed and SVports 1 and 2 will be available. With a jumper installed in the ‘BRD SEL’ positionthe flow computer will report that a ‘SV2’ module is installed and SV ports 3 and4 will be available. Note that a system can have a ‘SV2’ module without a ‘SV1’being installed, in this case only SV ports 3 and 4 would be available.

Setting the Termination Jumpers for the Each of the SVRS-485 Ports Multivariable RS-485 communication circuits must have two ends only, a ‘star’configuration with more than two ends or a ‘loop’ configuration with noends is not allowed . The devices at both ends of the circuit must be jumperedto provide termination.

Both jumpers marked ‘TERM’ must be installed to terminate a flow computer‘SV’ port (see Fig. 1 previous page). Termination settings for the 3095FB areshown later in this document.

OmniFlow

Computer

3095 FBMV

ID #1

This DeviceMust Be

Terminated

3095 FBMV

ID #2

3095 FBMV

ID #3

3095 FBMV

ID #4

This DeviceMust Be

Terminated

Fig. 2. Multi-drop Configuration with Flow ComputerTerminated

OmniFlow

Computer

3095 FBMV

ID #1

3095 FBMV

ID #2

3095 FBMV

ID #3

3095 FBMV

ID #4

This DeviceMust Be

Terminated

This DeviceMust Be

Terminated

Fig. 3. Multi-drop Configuration with Flow Computer Non-terminated



In the point-to-point configuration each 3095FB transmitter is connected to anindependent ‘SV’ port of the flow computer. Because each ‘SV’ port is nowconnected to only one 3095FB, each 3095FB can now use the default Modbusaddress ‘1’, greatly simplifying transmitter replacement issues discussed later inthis document.

OmniFlow

Computer

3095 FBMV

ID #1

3095 FBMV

ID #2

3095 FBMV

ID #3

3095 FBMV

ID #4

Star Configuration Not Allowed!

Fig. 4. Unacceptable Configuration - Five Termination Points

OmniFlow

ComputerUsing

IndependentMV Ports

3095 FBMV

ID #1

3095 FBMV

ID #1

3095 FBMV

ID #1

3095 FBMV

ID #1

All 4 MV Ports ofFlow Computer

Must Be Terminated

All Four 3095FBTransmitters

Must Be Terminated

Modbus IDs of 3095FBsCan Be The Same In This

Point to Point Configuration

Fig. 5. Point-to-Point Wiring Configuration



Initial Setup of the Rosemount 3095FB MultiVariable Transmitter The 3095FB module has two sets of DIP switches and a jumper set which mustbe setup according to the wiring configuration used to connect to the Omni FlowComputer.

Place the security jumper in the ‘OFF’ position, this allows the Omni flowcomputer to write to the 3095FB registers ensuring that the internal configurationmatches the flow computer. Both baud rate switches S1 and S2 must be set to9600; i.e., in the ‘ON’ position. The termination switches should be all ‘ON’ or all‘OFF’ depending upon whether device termination is required.

All ON = TerminatedAll OFF = Un-Terminated

ON

1 2 3A

C T

ER

MIN

AT

ION

PU

LL D

OW

N (

B)

PU

LL U

P (

A)

ON

1 2

S1 S2

o oo oo oo oo o

ON

OFF

SECURITY

All ON For 9600 Baud

Security OFF toallow configuration

Fig. 6. Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Setup Switchesand Jumpers



Connecting the 3095FB to the Omni FlowComputer

TERMINAL SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

1 Port #1(3) RS 485 B wire

2 Port #1(3) RS 485 A wire

3 Port #2(4) RS 485 B wire

4 Port #2(4) RS 485 A wire

5 Signal Return for 4-20mA Outputs

6 Signal Return for 4-20mA Outputs

7 4-20mA Analog Output # 5






Fig. 7. Back Panel Termination Assignments - SV ComboModule

A RS-485B

+PWR-

Fig. 8. Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Wiring Terminals



3095FB Transmitter RS-485 Connections Two terminals are provided marked A and B, these are connected to the A and Bterminals of other multi-dropped 3095FBs and to the Omni SV Combo moduleterminals. These connections should be made using twisted pair unshielded wirewith a minimum gauge dependent upon the distance to be run. Use 22 AWGminimum, 18 AWG maximum for runs less than 1000 ft. Use 20 AWG minimum,18 AWG maximum for runs of 1000 to 4000 ft. Shielded twisted pair cable canbe used but may have an attenuating effect due to a higher capacitance per footthereby limiting the maximum wire run length to less than 4000 ft.

3095FB Transmitter Power Connections andRequirements Terminals marked ‘+’ and ‘-‘ are provided to connect the 3095FB to a 7.5 VDC.to 24 VDC. power supply. This power supply must be able to provide 10 mA perinstalled 3095FB plus an additional 100 mA which is needed when any 3095FBin the system is transmitting data to the flow computer. Ripple on this powersupply must be less than 2%. Wiring gauge should be selected as per theprevious paragraph and can be unshielded un-twisted pair, but for bestperformance should be shielded and twisted.

ARS-485

B

+PWR-

ARS-485

B

+PWR-

ARS-485

B

+PWR-

Omni Flow Com puter

MV Port #1

MV Port #2

ABAB

ABAB

MV Port #3

MV Port #4

4000 Ft. Maximum

No Stubs over 6 ft.

7.5 VDC to 24 VDCPower Su pply

150 mA Minimum + -

Termination ONTermination OFFTermination OFF

RS 485 Bus

Termination ON

Fig. 9. Connecting The Flow Computer to Multi-dropped 3095Transmitters



Isolation and Transient Protection Issues The design of the 3095FB transmitter does not provide any DC isolation betweenthe power connections and the RS-485 connections. Applying voltages betweenthe power wiring and RS-485 wiring greater than the allowable common modevoltage of a RS-485 driver circuit could damage the 3095FB. The Omni flowcomputer SV port is optically isolated and can handle common mode voltages of+/- 250 VDC with respect to chassis ground.

Inductive base transient protectors including the Rosemount Model 470, canadversely affect the output of the 3095FB. Do not use the Model 470 fortransient protection with the 3095FB . If transient protection is desired, installthe optional ‘Transient Protection Terminal Block’ described in Appendix B of theRosemount 3095FB Manual (pub. 00809-0100-4738).

Wiring Considerations When Replacing a Multi-dropped3095FB Transmitter If downtime of other 3095FB transmitters in a multi-dropped system cannot betolerated, make sure to provide a suitable and safe means of disconnectingpower and signal from each individual 3095FB transmitter. Because of thepower requirements of the RS-485 the 3095FB cannot be made‘intrinsically safe’. This means that proper safety procedures must befollowed before any covers are removed from any devices or junctionboxes located in hazardous areas. Refer to Rosemount 3095FB Manual(publication 00809-0100-4738) for correct installation of the 3095FBtransmitter.



Configuring the Omni Flow Computer to usethe 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter

Configuring the Meter Run I/O

Selecting the Device Type

The existing ‘Select Turbine Y/N’ entry in the ‘Config Meter Run ’ menu hasbeen changed to ‘Select Device Type ’. Valid selections at this point are:

0 = DP Sensor

1 = Turbine Meter

2 = 3095FB Multivariable

3 = SMV 3000 Multivariable

When ‘2’ is selected above the following entries appear:

Selecting the SV Combo Module Port

The number of ports available depends upon what SV Combo Modules are fittedin the flow computer. Ports 1 and 2 are available when SV Combo Module #1 isfitted, ports 3 and 4 when SV Combo Module #2 is present. It is possible to haveSV ports 3 and 4 without SV ports 1 and 2 assuming SV Combo Module #2 isthe only SV module fitted.

Select Modbus Address for 3095FB

In point-to-point mode (i.e., each SV port is connected to a single 3095FB) it isrecommended that you select Modbus ID ‘1’ at this point. This is the default IDused by Rosemount when the 3095 is shipped. In multi-drop mode each 3095FBconnected to a SV port must have it’s own address which can be between 1 and247.

What I/O Points are Used and Why

Even though the multivariable data is obtained serially and not via analog inputchannels, the flow computer must have a storage structure in RAM to place thedata. Omni has chosen to treat the data as closely as possible to that obtainedby conventional means and use the same physical I/O RAM structure as is usedfor analog inputs. The main difference being that with analog and pulse inputsyou would manually assign the I/O points to be used for each input. When usingthe 3095FB multi variable, the flow computer automatically assigns three I/Opoint assignments for the DP, temperature and pressure sensors within the3095FB. The I/O point numbers are allocated in the order that the 3095FBs areconfigured using the above three entries (it has nothing to do with SV port or SVmodule numbers). The starting I/O point for the first 3095FB configured is thefirst point immediately after the last I/O point used by any other A, B, E/D, E or Hcombo modules in the system (see examples on facing page).



EXAMPLE 1 CONFIGURATION 6000 - 2A - 1B – 2SV

A1 Combo Module I/O Points 1 - 4


B1 Combo Module I/O Points 9 - 12

1st 3095FB Configured Uses DP=13, T=14, P=15

2nd 3095FB Configured Uses DP=16, T=17, P=18

3rd 3095FB Configured Uses DP=19, T=20, P=21

4th 3095FB Configured Uses DP=22, T=23, P=24

EXAMPLE 2 CONFIGURATION 6000 - 1A - 1E/D – 1SV


E/D1 Combo Module I/O Points 5 - 8

1st 3095FB Configured Uses DP=9, T=10, P=11

2nd 3095FB Configured Uses DP=12, T=13, P=14

3rd 3095FB Configured Uses DP=15, T=16, P=17

4th 3095FB Configured Uses DP=18, T=19, P=20

Bi-directional Flow and 3095FB Transmitters

Sometimes it is necessary to use a process variable obtained from a 3095FB inmore than one meter run. For example, When measuring bi-directional flow it iscustomary to configure one meter run within the Omni flow computer as ‘forward’flow and a second meter run as ‘reverse’ flow. To do this, simply configure bothmeter runs as ‘Device Type = 2 (3095FB Multi Variable)’, select the same SVport and Modbus ID, the Omni flow computer will recognize that both meter runsare using the same 3095FB device and allocate only one set of I/O assignments.

Referencing 3095FB Variables Elsewhere in the Configuration

While the DP, temperature and pressure obtained from the 3095FB multivariable are used to calculate flow, it may also be necessary to use either thetemperature and/or the pressure to correct a densitometer device mounted inclose proximity. To do this simply note the I/O point numbers automaticallyassigned to the 3095FB when it was configured and reuse these point numbersas needed.

Fig. 10. I/O Points Used by SV Combo Modules - Example 1

Fig. 11. I/O Points Used by SV Combo Modules - Example 2



DP, Pressure and Temperature Setup Entries Needed Once I/O points have been assigned to the 3095FB multi variable transmitter bythe flow computer the Differential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure setupmenus become active. Data entries in these menus are:

Low Alarm Setpoint High Alarm Setpoint Override Value Override Code

0 = Never Use Override Value1 = Always Use Override Value2 = Use Override on a 3095FB Communication Failure or Critical Error3 = Use Last Hour’s Average on a 3095FB Communication Failure or Critical

Error

4mA Value (read only) 20mA Value (read only) Damping Code

0 = 0.108 Seconds5 =3.456 Seconds



3 = 0.864 Seconds (Default) 8 = 27.648 Seconds

4 = 1.728 Seconds

All of these data entries are changeable when using analog transmitters butwhen using the 3095FB multi variable transmitter the 4mA and 20mA scalingvalues cannot be changed. The upper and lower range of the 3095FB sensorsare fixed by design. The Omni flow computer simply reads these values anddisplays them in the 4mA and 20mA fields for information only.

While the 3095FB transmitter has internal alarm setpoints and alarm statuspoints, Omni has chosen to ignore the 3095FB integral alarming functions anduse the existing flow computer alarm setpoints and alarm status points. The Lowand High Alarm Setpoints of the flow computer therefore behave exactly as theywould with an analog transmitter. The 3095FB Critical Alarm states aremonitored continuously.

Data Transferred between the 3095FBTransmitter and the Omni Flow Computer In operation the Omni flow computer automatically sets up the 3095FBtransmitter to use the correct floating point format and units of measure neededto match the flow computer’s configuration. The Omni continuously reads thefollowing data:

Process Variables DP, Pressure and Temperature Individual Transmitter Sensor Ranges Critical Transmitter Alarms (Sensor failures etc) Transmitter Information (Body and Fill material etc) Manufacturers Code Transmitter Tags



Polling Intervals for Process Variables and CriticalAlarms The message poll scheme comprises regular reads of the process variablevalues and critical alarms every 200msec per 3095FB connected to a flowcomputer SV port. This means that in a multi-drop system with four transmittersthe process variable update time will be 4 x 200msec or 800msec.

Critical 3095FB Alarms Monitored By The Flow Computer Critical alarm points within the 3095FB are monitored and mapped into the Omniflow computer Modbus database as follows:

Alarms Associated with the 3095FB Providing Data to Meter Run ‘n’

MODBUS

ADDRESS ALARM POINT DESCRIPTION

ACTION TAKEN IF ALARM IS ACTIVE

(SEE ALSO ‘FAILURE CODE SETTING’)

1n83 DP signal 10% above upperrange limit DP transmitter failure flagged

1n84 DP signal 10% below lowerrange limit DP transmitter failure flagged

1n85 Pressure signal 10% aboveupper range limit Pressure transmitter failure flagged

1n86 Pressure signal 10% belowlower range limit Pressure transmitter failure flagged

1n87 Pressure sensor is shorted

Pressure transmitter failure flagged

1n88 Pressure sensor bridge isopen circuit Pressure transmitter failure flagged

1n89 Temperature signal 10%above upper range limit Temperature transmitter failure flagged

1n90 Temperature signal 10%below lower range limit Temperature transmitter failure flagged

1n91 Temperature RTD isdisconnected Temperature transmitter failure flagged

1n92 Sensor internal temperatureabove upper range limit DP, P and T, transmitter failures flagged

1n93 Sensor internal temperaturebelow upper range limit DP, P and T, transmitter failures flagged

1n94 Critical 3095FB sensorelectronics failure DP, P and T, transmitter failures flagged

1n95 Security jumper of 3095FB isset to ‘Write Protect’

DP, P and T transmitter failures flaggedif write to 3095FB is attempted and fails.

1n96 No Communications betweenthe Omni and 3095FB unit DP, P and T, transmitter failures flagged

Note :

^ 1n96 is flowcomputer generated.



Synchronizing the 3095FB and the FlowComputer Configurations To ensure that the flow computer correctly interprets the 3095FB data, the flowcomputer continuously verifies that the configuration of the 3095FB transmittermatches that required by the flow computer. Additional message polls verifyingthis data are interleaved with the normal message polls used to retrieve theprocess variables and alarms.

Critical 3095FB configuration data which is checked every 10 seconds are:

Floating Point Number Format ** (0132)

Measurement Engineering Units of Measure ** (0060 - 0062)

Minimum and Maximum Ranges of each Signal * (7407 - 7416)

Transmitter Identification (Information Only) (0001 - 0011)

Damping Factors ** (7421, 7424, 7427)

Transmitter ASCII Tags (3x8 characters) ** (0032 - 0047)

Transmitter Information (Materials of Construction) (0017 - 0029)

Viewing the 3095FB Data at the FlowComputer Front PanelDifferential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure variables and averages areviewed using the normal key press combinations as described in the Omni FlowComputer User Manual.

A display list of 3095FB transmitter information can be displayed by pressing‘Setup’ ‘n’ ‘Enter’. Data is organized by SV port number ‘n’ and in the order thatthe transmitters were configured. The following information and diagnostic datais displayed (example shows first transmitter on the #1 SV port as an example):

Notes: Numbers in ( ) areModbus addresses withinthe 3095FB database

** The flowcomputer will attempt tocorrect the database ofthe 3095FB transmitter ifmiss matches aredetected for thesevariables.

* The flowcomputer will adjust itsdatabase to agree withthe 3095FB database ifmiss matches aredetected for thesevariables.

1st digit is the SV portnumber, 2nd digit is theModbus Address of the

3095FB



If you continue to scroll down, the following data will be displayed:

!"

#

$ %!!

&'

()* +

, - " "

- *#

( -! ".

/ 0 %

.# . # ##

.- 0 %

.- ()* 1*

,# %

#- (.23(4

()* 5

.# 5

/ 5

5 5

Installing, Replacing and Calibrating 3095FBTransmitters

Wiring IssuesIf downtime of other 3095FB transmitters in a multi-dropped system cannot betolerated, make sure to provide a suitable and safe means of disconnectingpower and signal from each individual 3095FB transmitter. Because of thepower requirements of the RS-485 the 3095FB cannot be made‘intrinsically safe’. This means that proper safety procedures must befollowed before any covers are removed from any devices or junctionboxes located in hazardous areas. Refer to Rosemount 3095FB Manual(publication 00809-0100-4738) for correct installation of the 3095FBtransmitter.



Using the Omni Flow Computer to Set the ModbusAddress of the 3095FBThe 3095FB transmitter will normally be shipped with a default Modbus addressof ‘1’. While this is fine for a point to point installation, it will cause a problem iftwo or more devices have the same Modbus ID in a multi-drop scheme. TheModbus ID of a transmitter can be set using the ‘Configurator User Interface PCSoftware’ available from Rosemount. It is anticipated though that some situationsmay arise where a 3095FB transmitter must be installed or replaced without thissoftware being available. In this case the Omni flow computer can be connectedto a 3095FB in the point to point mode using any available SV port and theModbus ID changed to what is required in the flow computer configuration.

Proceed as follows:

1. Setup the 3095FB as described previously in the section titled ‘InitialSetup of the Rosemount 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter’.

2. Setup the 3095FB to be RS-485 terminated.

3. Connect the transmitter to any open SV port (terminal A to A, B to B). TheSV port should be jumpered for RS-485 termination. If this SV channel isnot an open channel, all 3095FB transmitters except the one needing theaddress change must be disconnected.

4. Apply power to the 3095FB transmitter.

5. At the flow computer front panel press the following keys:[Alpha Shift] [Diag] The computer will enter the Diagnostic mode.

[Setup] [ n] [Enter] Where ‘n’ is the SV port number that the 3095FBis connected to.

6. The following warning screen may display ( SV port 1 is used as anexample) or the screen in (7) below will display.

6

(7# 1 )

1#- . 89

1# 3:54;

This means that the flow computer has detected that this SV port iscurrently configured to communicate with one or more transmitters. Youmay or may not have selected the wrong SV port (see the cautions insidebar).

7. If you wish to continue with the address broadcast operation enter ‘Y’ andthe following screen will display.

6

17- $ <

5= < >

/

CAUTION!

This procedure involves‘broadcast’ transmitting aModbus address out of aSV port. All devicesconnected to this SV portwill have their Modbusaddress set to the IDbroadcast. This wouldcause data collisions and acomplete loss ofcommunication when morethan one 3095FBtransmitter is connected. Besure to temporarilydisconnect any 3095FBtransmitters whichaddresses you do not wantto change.



8. Scroll down to ‘New Address’ and enter the address required. Press‘Enter’ and the following message will display.

#- 5= <

9. The flow computer will wait a short time and then attempt tocommunicate with the 3095FB using the new address. If communicationsare established the following message will be displayed for a fewseconds.

< 17-

The following message will display for a second or two should thetransmission fail.

.# 17-

Should this message appear check your wiring, switch and jumpersettings and repeat the procedure.

10. Disconnect and reinstall 3095FB to the appropriate SV port for normaloperation making sure to observe the termination requirements of onlytwo devices at the end of a loop being terminated.

Using a Laptop PC to Trim the 3095FB CalibrationThe flow computer provides no way of calibrating or trimming the output of the3095FB multi variable transmitter. To calibrate the transmitter use the‘Configurator User Interface PC Software’ available from Rosemount. The usermust disconnect the 3095FB needing calibrating and connect it in point to pointmode with the Laptop or PC running the Rosemount Interface Software.Remember to follow all correct safety procedures when removingtransmitter covers or junction boxes. Read the manufacture’s warningsand recommendations as printed in the 3095FB manual. Be aware thatwhen removing a transmitter from a multi-drop installation, wiring may bedisturbed and disruption of the circuit may cause a loss of all measurementsignals due to loss of power, signal or RS-485 termination.




Serial I/O Modules: Installation Options

ContentsScop e....................................................................................................................1

Abstrac t ................................................................................................................1

Features and Specification s...............................................................................2

Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model #68-600 5 ............................3

RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205- A .................................4

RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205- B .................................6

RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial Port Jumper Options............................................... .8

ScopeAll Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have serial communications capabilities viaproprietary serial I/O modules.

AbstractOmni flow computers can come equipped with serial I/O modules thatcommunicate with RS-232-Compatible or RS-485 devices. Omni manufacturesthree models of serial modules:

Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005 RS-232-C/RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205-A RS-232-C/RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205-B

Each serial module has 2 ports. Omni 6000 flow computers can have up to twoserial modules installed for a maximum of 4 ports. Omni 3000 flow computerstypically use one serial module providing 2 ports. Each serial communication portis individually optically isolated for maximum common-mode and noise rejection.Jumpers are provided for selection of module address and serial portcommunication standards. Communication parameters such as protocol type,baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are software selectable.

User Manual Reference -This technical bulletincomplements theinformation contained inVolume 1 , and is applicableto all firmware revisions.



Features and SpecificationsProprietary serial modules and multi-bus serial I/O interface specifications are:

Omni Serial I/O Modules

MODEL # TYPE BASIC COMMUNICATION FEATURES

68-6005 Dual Channel RS-232-Compatible

Dual channel serial communicationsproviding two RS-232-Compatibleports.

Communications protocol, baud rate,stop bits and parity settings aresoftware selectable.

68-6205-A RS-232-Compatible / RS-485(Non-selectable Ports)

Port #1 is factory-set as RS-232-Compatible mode (jumper blocks aresoldered in place).

Port #2 is factory set to RS-485mode.

RS-485 communications are jumper-selectable as:♦ 2-wire terminated or non-terminated♦ 4-wire terminated or non-terminated


68-6205-B RS-232-Compatible / RS-485(Selectable Ports)

Both Ports #1 and #2 are jumper-selectable as either RS-232-C or RS-485 modes.

RS-485 communications are jumper-selectable as:♦ 2-wire terminated or non-terminated♦ 4-wire terminated or non-terminated


Omni Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface

RS-232-COMPATIBLE RS-485

DATA OUTPUT VOLTAGE ±7.5 volts (typical) 5 volts (differential driver)

LOAD IMPEDANCE 1.5 k ohm 120 ohm

SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT 10 mA (limited) 20 mA

INPUT LOW THRESHOLD -3.0 volts 0.8 volts (differential input)

INPUT HIGH THRESHOLD +3.0 volts 5.0 volts (differential input)

BAUD RATES 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, & 38.4 k bps (software selectable)

COMMON MODE VOLTAGE ±250 Volts to chassis ground

LEDS channel inputs/outputs & handshaking signals

INFO - Up to 12 flowcomputers and/or othercompatible serial devicescan be multi-dropped usingOmni’s proprietary RS-232-Compatible serial port.Thirty-two devices may beconnected when using theRS-485 mode.Typically, one serial I/Omodule is used on the Omni3000, providing two ports. Amaximum of two serialmodules can be installed inthe Omni 6000, providingfour ports.

TB-980503 Serial I/O Module: Installation Options


Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O ModuleModel #68-6005Dual channel serial communication modules can be installed providing two RS-232-Compatible ports. Although providing RS-232-C signal levels, the tristateoutput design allows multiple flow computers to share one RS-232 device. Thisserial module is the oldest model manufactured by Omni.

INFO - Up to 12 flowcomputers and/or othercompatible serial devicescan be multi-dropped usingOmni’s proprietary RS-232-C serial port.Typically, one serial I/Omodule is used on the Omni3000, providing two ports. Amaximum of two serialmodules can be installed inthe Omni 6000, providingfour ports.

Jumper Settings - Forinformation on setting thejumpers of serial I/Omodules refer to 1.6.3.“Serial CommunicationModules ” in Volume 1 ,Chapter 1 of the UserManual.

Address S1 (1)Selected for SerialPorts 1 & 2

Address S2 (0)Selected for SerialPorts 3 & 4

1

0


LED Indicators

RTS Out

TX OutChan. B

RTS Out

TX OutChan. A

RX In

RDY InChan. A

RX In

RDY InChan. B

Fig. 1. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model Showing Selection Jumperand Indicator LEDs



RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model#68-6205-ASerial I/O Module # 68-6205-A (manufactured 1997) has two communicationports. The first serial port (Ports #1 and #3 if two 68-6205 modules are installed)is factory set in the RS-232-C mode (jumpers are soldered into place and cannotbe moved). The second serial port (Ports #2 and #4) is configurable for RS-485communications only. Although the first serial port provides RS-232-C signallevels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share oneserial link.

INFO - Up to 12 flowcomputers and/or othercompatible serial devicescan be multi-dropped usingOmni’s proprietary RS-232-C serial port. Up to 32devices may be connectedwhen using the RS-485mode. Refer to technicalbulletin TB980401 “Peer-to-Peer Basics ” for moreinformation.Typically, one serial I/Omodule is used on the Omni3000, providing two ports. Amaximum of two serialmodules can be installed inthe Omni 6000, providingfour ports.

Jumper Settings - Forinformation on setting thejumpers of serial I/Omodules refer to 1.6.3.“Serial CommunicationModules ” in Volume 1 ,Chapter 1 of the UserManual. For serial portjumper settings see alsoFig. 6 in this bulletin.


Port #2 (#4) Jumpers(RS-485 Options Only)

Port #1 (#3) Jumpers(Hard-wired to RS-232-C Only)

Address S1 Selectedfor Serial Ports 1 & 2


IRQ 2 Selected(If using an SVModule, selectIRQ 3)

IRQ Select Jumper

LED Indicators

68-6205 REV: A

Fig. 2. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205-A Showing Selection Jumpers andIndicator LEDs



The first serial port jumpers are factory hard-wired for RS-232-C mode. This portis non-selectable and cannot be changed by the user. The second serial portjumpers are factory preset in the RS-485 two-wire, terminated positions. Thisport is user-selectable for RS-485 two-wire/four-wire terminated/non-terminatedjumper positions (see Fig. 6 ). Back panel wiring is shown below.

Micro Motion RFT 9739Devices - Users of MicroMotion RFT 9739 devicesconnected to the peer-to-peer port (Port #2) of theOmni, please note that theresistor networks should bepositioned for 2-wire RS-485 and that Terminal Afrom the RFT 9739 shouldbe wired to Omni TerminalB (7), and B from the RFTmust be wired to OmniTerminal A (11). Refer totechnical bulletin TB980401“Peer-to-Peer Basics ” formore information.



2-WireRS-4854-Wire

1 TX

2 TERM

3 RX

4 GND

5 RTS

6 RDY

7 B TX-B

8

9 RX-A

10 GND GND

11 A TX-A

12 RX-B

Fig. 3. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-A

FirstSerialPort

SecondSerialPort

RS-232-C

Hard-wired

N/A



RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model#68-6205-BSerial I/O Module # 68-6205-B is the latest serial module manufactured by Omni(1998). It is capable of handling two communication ports. Each serial port isjumper-selectable for either RS-232-Compatible or RS-485 communications.Although providing RS-232-C signal levels when in this mode, the tristate outputdesign allows multiple flow computers to share one serial link. In addition to theRS-232 mode, jumper selections have been provided on each port to allowselection of RS-485 format. With this option, a total of two RS-485 ports areavailable on this model.

INFO - Up to 12 flowcomputers and/or othercompatible serial devicescan be multi-dropped usingOmni’s proprietary RS-232-C serial port. Up to 32devices may be connectedwhen using the RS-485mode. Refer to technicalbulletin TB980401 “Peer-to-Peer Basics ” for moreinformation.Typically, one serial I/Omodule is used on the Omni3000, providing two ports. Amaximum of two serialmodules can be installed inthe Omni 6000, providingfour ports.

Jumper Settings - Forinformation on setting thejumpers of serial I/Omodules refer to 1.6.3.“Serial CommunicationModules ” in Volume 1 ,Chapter 1 of the UserManual. For serial portjumper settings see alsoFig. 6 in this bulletin.


Port #2 (#4)Jumpers Port #1 (#3) Jumpers



IRQ 2 Selected(If using an SVModule, selectIRQ 3)

IRQ Select Jumper

LED Indicators

68-6205 REV: B

Fig. 4. RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-B Showing Selection Jumpersand Indicator LEDs



Jumpers for both serial ports are user-selectable to RS-232-C or RS-485formats (see Fig. 6 ). The RS-485 options are either 2-wire or 4-wire mode; eachmode can be set as terminated or non-terminated connections. Back panelwiring is shown below.

Micro Motion RFT 9739Devices - Users of MicroMotion RFT 9739 devicesconnected to the peer-to-peer port (Port #2) of theOmni, please note that theresistor networks should bepositioned for 2-wire RS-485 and that Terminal Afrom the RFT 9739 shouldbe wired to Omni TerminalB (7), and B from the RFTmust be wired to OmniTerminal A (11). Refer totechnical bulletin TB980401“Peer-to-Peer Basics ” formore information.



2-WireRS-4854-Wire

1 TX B TX-B

2 TERM

3 RX RX-A

4 GND GND GND

5 RTS A TX-A

6 RDY RX-B

7 TX B TX-B

8 TERM

9 RX RX-A

10 GND GND GND

11 RTS A TX-A

12 RDY RX-B

Fig. 5. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-B

FirstSerialPort

SecondSerialPort



RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial Port Jumper OptionsThe RS-232-C/RS-485 serial port has been designed so that RS-232 or RS-485communications standards can be selected by placement of 16-pin resistornetworks into the correct blocks. The following diagrams show the locations ofblocks JB1, JB2, JB3 for the first serial port (Model #68-6205-B only), and JB4,JB5, JB6 for the second serial port (Models #68-6205-A and #68-6205-B) foreach format. Serial I/O Module #68-6205-A only has the RS-485 optionsavailable for the second serial port, and the first port is hard-wired to the RS-232-C position and cannot be changed by the user.

Serial Port I/O SoftwareSettings - Each serial portis configurable viaOmniCom software or theOmni front panel. Detailedinformation on how toconfigure these and otherflow computer settings isavailable in Volume 3 ,Chapter 2 of the UserManual and in OmniComHelp .

Terminated/Non-terminated RS-485 - TheRS-485 devices located ateach extreme end of an RS-485 run should beterminated. Note that thedevice located at anextreme end may or maynot be an Omni FlowComputer.

RS-232 JB1 or JB4 JB3 or JB6 JB2 or JB5

RS-485 RS-485 2-WIRE

RS-485TERMINATED


RS-232

RS-485 2-WIRE

RS-485TERMINATED

JB1 or JB4


RS-232

RS-485 2-WIRERS-232/485

NON-TERMINATED

JB1 or JB4



RS-232 RS-232/485 4-WIRE RS-485TERMINATED

JB1 or JB4


RS-232 RS-232/485 4-WIRE

RS-232/485NON-TERMINATED

JB1 or JB4


Fig. 6. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats

LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. (“Omni Flow”) warrants all equipment manufactured byit to be free from defects in workmanship and materials, provided that such equipment was properlyselected for the service intended, properly installed, and not misused. Equipment which is returned,transportation prepaid, to Omni’s assembly plant within three (3) years after date of shipment, and is foundafter inspection by Omni Flow Computers, Inc. to be defective in workmanship or materials, will be repairedor replaced, at the sole option of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., free-of-charge, and return-shipped at lowestcost transportation, prepay and add. Warranties on third-party manufactured devices supplied by Omni Flowor incorporated by Omni Flow in the manufacture of equipment bearing an Omni label shall be extended bythe original device manufacturer.

This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the equipment has resulted from accident, abuse ormisapplication.

NO OTHER WARRANTIES. Omni Flow disclaims any and all warranties, either expressed or implied,including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantibility, fitness for a particular purpose, and anyother warranties which extend beyond the terms herein. No agreement varying or extending the foregoingwarranties or limitations will be binding upon Omni Flow unless in writing, signed by a duly authorizedofficer.

LOSS OR DAMAGE. Omni Flow shall by liable only for loss or damage caused directly by its solenegligence. Liability of Omni Flow for any claim of any kind for any loss or damage arising out of, orconnected with this warranty; or from the performance or breach hereof shall in no case exceed the priceallocated to the equipment or unit thereof which gives rise to the claim. The liability of Omni Flow shallterminate three (3) years after the shipment of the equipment from Omni Flow.

NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow shall not be liable in any circumstance forany incidental or consequential damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business profitsor revenue, business interruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or claims ofcustomers of the purchaser for any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability to use Omni Flowequipment or devices manufactured by third party manufacturers.

1991-1998


All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be used or reproduced in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, withoutprior written consent of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Stafford, Texas, USA. Making copies of any part of this manual for any purposeother than your own personal use is a violation of United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions.

Omni Flow Computers, Inc., pursuant to a policy of product development and improvement, may make any necessary changes to thisdocument without notice.

Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 are trademarks of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

OmniCom is a registered trademark of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

(SINGLE-USER PRODUCTS)

This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and Omni Flow Computers, Inc. By the installationand use of accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow Computers, Inc., you are agreeing to bebound by the terms of this Agreement.

OMNI FLOW COMPUTERS SOFTWARE LICENSE

1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. (“Omni Flow”) grants to you the right to use onecopy of Omni Flow software programs (the ‘SOFTWARE’) provided with the accompanying equipmentmanufactured by Omni Flow.

2. COPYRIGHT. The SOFTWARE is owned by Omni Flow and is protected by United States copyrightlaws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must treat the SOFTWARE like any othercopyrighted material (e.g.: a book or recording on magnetic media).

3. OTHER RESTRICTIONS. You may not reverse engineer, duplicate, decompile, or disassemble theSOFTWARE provided on magnetic media in the form of disks or erasable programmable memory circuits(“EPROMs”). If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade and transferred by Omni Flow over a modem connection tomagnetic media, or a single hard disk, then you may use the SOFTWARE for the sole purpose ofpermanent transfer to EPROM’s. You may not retain a copy for backup or archival purposes.

LIMITED WARRANTY

LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow warrants that the SOFTWARE will perform substantially in accordancewith the accompanying written materials provided with the purchase of an Omni manufactured product for aperiod of three (3) years from the date of shipment from Omni’s production facility.

Omni Flow’s entire liability shall be, at Omni Flow’s sole option, (a) remedy any defect and provide you, atno charge, with replacement magnetic media or (b) download an upgrade via a dial-up modem connectionbetween Omni Flow and the end user, provided that equipment specified by Omni Flow for that purpose isused.

This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted from accident, abuse ormisapplication.

NO OTHER WARRANTIES. Omni Flow disclaims any and all warranties, either expressed or implied,including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantibility, fitness for a particular purpose, and anyother warranties which extend beyond the terms herein, with respect to the SOFTWARE and accompanyinghardware. No agreement varying or extending the foregoing warranties or limitations will be binding uponOmni Flow unless in writing, signed by a duly authorized officer.

NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow shall not be liable in any circumstance forany damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business profits or revenue, businessinterruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or claims of customers of the purchaserfor any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability to use the SOFTWARE.

(SINGLE-USER PRODUCTS)

This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and Omni Flow Computers, Inc. By the installationand use of this product you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement.

OMNICOM SOFTWARE LICENSE

1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. (“Omni Flow”) grants to you the right to use onecopy of the OmniCom software program and accompanying written materials (the ‘SOFTWARE’) providedwith the accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow.

2. COPYRIGHT. The SOFTWARE and accompanying written materials is owned by Omni Flow or itssuppliers and is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore,you must treat the SOFTWARE like any other copyrighted material (e.g.: a book or recording on magneticmedia) except that in the sole instance of SOFTWARE provided on 5¼” or 3½” magnetic media disks, youmay (a) make one copy of the SOFTWARE solely for backup or archival purposes, or (b) transfer theSOFTWARE to a single hard disk provided you keep the original solely for backup or archival purposes.

3. OTHER RESTRICTIONS. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWAREprovided on magnetic media. You may transfer the SOFTWARE and accompanying written materials on apermanent basis provided you maintain no copies, and the recipient agrees to the terms of this Agreement.

4. DUAL MEDIA SOFTWARE. If the SOFTWARE is provided on 5¼” or 3½” magnetic media disks, thenyou may use the disks appropriate for your single-user computer. You may not use the other disks onanother computer or loan or transfer them to another user except as part of the permanent transfer (asprovided above) of all SOFTWARE and written materials

LIMITED WARRANTY

LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow warrants that the SOFTWARE will perform substantially in accordancewith the accompanying written materials provided with the purchase of an Omni manufactured product for aperiod of three (3) years from the date of shipment from Omni’s production facility.

Omni Flow’s entire liability shall be, at Omni Flow’s sole option, (a) remedy any defect and provide you, atno charge, with replacement magnetic media or (b) download an upgrade via a dial-up modem connectionbetween Omni Flow and the end user, provided that equipment specified by Omni Flow for that purpose isused.

This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted from accident, abuse ormisapplication.

NO OTHER WARRANTIES. Omni Flow disclaims any and all warranties, either expressed or implied,including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantibility, fitness for a particular purpose, and anyother warranties which extend beyond the terms herein, with respect to the SOFTWARE, the accompanyingwritten materials and hardware.

NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow or its suppliers shall not be liable in anycircumstance for any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business profits or revenue,business interruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or claims of customers of thepurchaser for any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability to use the SOFTWARE.

Omni 6600

Documents

Transcript of Omni 6600